EIA - PHWR Atomic Power Project

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
REPORT
4 X 700 MW PHWR HARAYANA ATOMIC
POWER PROJECT (HAPP)
AT
GORAKHPUR HARAYANA
VOLUME I : MAIN REPORT
MECON LIMITED
RANCHI 834 002
(JHARKHAND)
11.S2.Q6SY
NUCLEAR POWER
CORPORATION OF
INDIA LIMITED (NPCIL)
Nabhikiya Urja Bhavan,
Anushaktinagar, Mumbai 400094
May 2012
UNDERTAKING
I hereby undertake that prescribed TOR with respect to EIA/EMP Studies for
Haryana Atomic Power Project (Nuclear power projects and processing of
nuclear fuel) located near Gorakhpur Village, Bhuna Block, Tehsil, Subdivision and District Fatehabad, Haryana has been complied while
conducting the EIA studies. The contents (information and data) as given by
our consultant in the EIA report are factually correct, with full knowledge of
the undersigned.
Date:
Signature of the applicant* with

full name & address
Place:
[* Owner or his authorized signatory]
Given under the seal of organization on

behalf of whom the applicant is signing
Declaration by Experts Contributing to the EIA for Haryana Atomic Power

Project
We hereby certify that we were a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed
the above EIA.
EIA Co-ordinator:
Name:
Dr. Shailendra K. Singh
Signature & Date:

Period of Involvement:
November 2010 till date.
Contact Information:
Ph: 9431767527; e-mail: envenggranchi@meconlimited.co.in
Functional Area Experts

SN.
Functional
Areas
Name of Expert
AP
C.D. Goswami
March 2011 Sept 2011

Air Pollution control strategy.
WP
Dr. S.C. Jain

Water Pollution control strategy.
SHW
Sanjay Sen
RH

Solid waste disposal strategy,
Risk Assessment
SE
EB
Dr. S.K. Singh

Overall coordination and
Ecological studies.
HG
Dr. S Veezhinathan

Hydro-geological studies.
GS
A.K. Mishra

Geological studies.
AQ
Dr. V.V.S.N.
Pinakapani

Meteorological and Air Pollution
Dispersion studies.
10
NV
Dr. Vikas Kumar
Dr. S. Bhattacharya
Involvement
(Period & Task)

Socio-economic studies.

Noise control strategy.
Signature &
Date
SN.
11
Functional
Areas
Name of Expert
Involvement
(Period & Task)
LU
Dr. M.K.
Mukhopadhyay

Land use studies.
Palash Banerjee

Land use studies.
Vishal Skaria

Land use studies.
Signature &
Date
Declaration by the Accredited Consultant Organization

I, Dr. Vikas Kumar, hereby confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA for
Proposed Haryana Atomic Power Project. I also confirm that I shall be fully accountable for any
misleading information mentioned in this statement.
Signature:
Name: Dr. Vikas Kumar

Designation: Dy. General Manager, Environmental Engineering Section
Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: MECON Limited
NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date:
NABET/EIA/1013/031 dated, Oct., 01, 2010
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

AT GORAKHPUR, HARYANA
CONTENTS OF VOLUME I
Item No.
Particulars
List of Tables
List of Figures
List of Drawing
Contents to Volume II
Index to MoEF TOR Coverage in EIA Report
Abbreviations
Summary EIA
1.
Introduction
1.1
General
1.2
Purpose of the EIA Report
1.3
Identification of the Project and Project Proponent
1.3.1
The Project
1.3.2
Project Proponent
1.4
Statutory Requirements
1.4.1
Role of AERB on Establishment of Nuclear Power Project
1.4.2
Consent for Siting for the Proposed Project
1.5
Project Brief
1.5.1
Importance of the Project
1.5.2
Background
1.5.3
Location of the Project
1.5.4
Nature and Size of the Project
1.6
Scope of the EIA Study
1.7
Basic Data Generation, Field Studies and Data Collection
1.8
Structure of the EIA Report
2.
Project Description
Section-I: Project Description
2.1
Introduction
2.2
Type of Project
2.3
Need of the Project
2.4
Site Selection Considerations
2.5
Project Location
2.6
Land Requirement
2.6.1
Land Area
Resettlement and Rehabilitation of PAPs for the Land under
2.6.2
Acquisition Process
2.6.3
Land Acquisition
2.7
Size or Magnitude of Operation
2.8
Proposed Schedule for Approval and Implementation
2.9
Manpower Planning
2.10
Technology / Process Description
2.10.1
Salient Features
2.10.2
Engineering
2.11
Project Details
2.11.1
Safety Objectives and Principles
2.11.2
Barriers to Radioactivity Release
2.11.3
Special Safety Requirements
2.11.4
Safety Classification
2.11.5
General Design Criterion
2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved
Page No.
viii
xii
xiv
xiv
xv
xx
Es 1 Es 13
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
7
7
8
8
8
8
13
13
15
15
15
15
15
15
18
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
25
26
27
29
Page (i)

Item No.
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
Particulars
Reactor Process Systems
2.12.1
Reactor Physics
2.12.2
Reactor Fuel
2.12.3
Reactor Core Systems
2.12.4
Reactivity Devices
2.12.5
Moderator Liquid Poison Addition System
2.12.6
Primary Heat Transport System
2.12.7
Moderator System
2.12.8
End Shield and Calandria Vault Cooling Systems
2.12.9
CO2 Annulus Gas System
2,12,10 Secondary Systems
2.12.11 Fuel Handling and Control System
2.12.12 Instrumentation and Control (I&C)
2.12.13 Electrical System
2.12.14 Plant Auxiliaries
2.12.15 Design Life
Reactor Safety Systems
2.13.1
Shutdown Systems
2.13.2
Containment
2.13.3
Containment Spray System
2.13.4
Secondary Containment Recirculation and Purge
2.13.5
Primary Containment Controlled Discharge System (PCCD)
2.13.6
Fire Protection System
2.13.7
Emergency Core Cooling System (ECCS)
2.13.8
Ultimate Heat Sink
2.13.9
Overall Risk to the Public
Radiological Protection
2.14.1
Radiation Levels and Access Control
2.14.2
Contamination Control
2.14.3
Radiation Monitoring
2.14.4
Environmental Monitoring
2.14.5
Effluent Release Criteria
Radio Active Waste Management
2.15.1
Radioactive Waste Management Plant
2.15.2
Treatment and Discharge of Gaseous Effluent Stream
2.15.3
Permissible Gaseous Discharges
2.15.4
Radioactive Liquid Waste Management System
2.15.5
Discharge Limits
2.15.6
Solid Waste Management
Safety Analysis
Plant Layout and Main Plant Buildings
2.17.1
Plant Layout
Power Requirements
Water Requirements
2.19.1
Provision of Water
2.19.2
Water Balance
2.19.3
Cycle of Concentration
Construction Facilities
Power Evacuation
Page No.
34
34
36
37
42
45
45
47
49
49
50
50
51
55
57
64
64
64
65
66
66
67
67
68
69
69
69
69
70
71
71
72
72
72
72
73
73
78
81
85
87
87
87
89
89
89
90
90
90
Page (ii)

Item No.
3.
4.
Particulars
Assessment of New & Untested Technology for the Risk of
2.22
Technological Failure
2.23
Project Cost
2.24
Resodential Complex of HAPP
2.24.1
Basic Features and site plan
2.24.2
Power Requirement
2.24.3
Water Requirement
2.25
Baseline Environmental Scenario
2.26
Impacts and Mitigation Measures due to Project Siting (Location)
2.26.1
Application of R & R Policy
2.26.2
Maintenance of Area Drainage Pattern
2.27
Impact and Mitigation Measures During Construction Stage
2.27.1
Soil Erosion, Topography and Rainfall
2.27.2
Impact on Flora and Fauna
2.27.3
Use of Local Building Material
2.28
Impact and Mitigation Measures During Operation Phase
2.28.1
Sewage Treatment Facilities and Guard Pond
2.28.2
Domestic Solid Waste Management at Township
2.28.3
Traffic Management
2.28.4
Education and Health Facilities, Police and Other Services
2.28.5
Rain Water Harvesting
2.28.6
Energy Conservation Measures
2.28.7
Use of Renewable and Alternate Source of Energy
2.28.8
Aesthetics
2.28.9
Landscape Plan, Green Belts and Open Spaces
Landscape Development and Roadside Plantation in
2.28.10
Residential Complex
Disaster Management Plan for Residential Complex of
2.28.11
HAPP
2.28.12 Security
2.29
Environment Monitoring Programme
Analysis of Alternatives : Technology and Site
Description of Environment
4.1
Introduction
4.1.1
General
4.1.2
Industries within 25km Radius
4.1.3
Project Site and Study Area
Baseline data Generation for Environmental Components
4.1.4
and Methodology
4.1.5
Study Period
Baseline Data Generation / Establishment of Baseline For
4.2
Environmental Components Conventional Pollutants
4.2.1
Meteorology
4.2.2
Ambient Air
4.2.3
Noise
4.2.4
Water Environment
4.2.5
Soil
4.2.6
Ecological Features
4.2.7
Location of National Park / Sanctuary within 10 km Radius
Page No.
90
90
92
92
97
97
98
98
98
100
100
100
100
101
101
101
103
104
104
106
107
107
108
108
108
108
109
109
110
112
112
112
112
112
113
113
114
114
117
123
126
129
132
140
Page (iii)

Item No.
5.0
Particulars
Baseline Data Generation/Establishment of Baseline for Environmental
4.3
Components Radiological Environment
4.3.1
Parameters of Radiological Status
4.3.2
Regulatory Limits for Radiation Exposure
4.3.3
Radiological Survey Around the Proposed Site
4.3.3.1
Ambient Radiation Levels
Estimation of Pre-operational Base Line Levels of
4.4.4.2
Natural and Fallout Radionuclides in
Environmental Samples
4.4
Traffic Density
4.5
Geology and Hydrogeology
4.5.1
Introduction
4.5.2
Physiography
4.5.3
Drainage
4.5.4
Geological Features
4.5.5
Hydrogeology
4.5.6
Seismo-tectonics
4.6
Landuse Pattern
4.7
Socio-Economics Featuires
Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures
5.1
Introduction
5.2
Impacts and Mitigation Measures Due to Project Siting (Location)
5.3
Impacts and Mitigation Measures Due to Project Design
5.4
Impact and Mitigation Measures During Construction Phase
5.4.1
Land Use
5.4.2
Topography, Site Elevation and Filling Material
5.4.3
Air Quality
5.4.4
Water Quality
5.4.4.1
Surface Water
5.4.4.2
Ground water
5.4.5
Noise
5.4.6
Site Security
5.4.7
Industrial Safety
5.5
Impacts and Mitigation Measures During Operation Phase
5.5.1
General
5.5.2
Radio-active Releases During Operation Phase
5.5.2.1
Radio-active Releases: Air Emissions
Radio-active Releases: Liquid Effluent
5.5.2.2
Discharges
5.5.2.3
Radio-active Releases: Solid Waste Disposal
5.5.2.4
Land Environment
5.5.3
Conventional Pollutants During Plant Operation
5.5.3.1
Air Environment
5.5.3.2
Water Environment
5.5.3.3
Area Drainage and Surroundings
5.5.3.4
Solid Waste Generation and Disposal
5.5.3.5
Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal
5.5.3.6
Noise Levels
5.5.3.7
Ecological Features
5.5.3.8
Transportation : Impacts and Mitigation Measures
Page No.
140
140
141
142
148
149
153
157
157
158
158
158
159
163
164
165
166
166
166
170
171
173
173
174
174
175
175
176
176
177
177
180
182
185
189
189
189
189
189
198
200
201
201
201
205
207
Page (iv)

Item No.
6.0
Particulars
Impacts and Mitigation Measures for Oversized
5.5.3.9
Dimensional (ODC)
5.5.4
Water and Energy Conservation Measures
5.5.5
Other Measures
5.5.6
Facilities for Casual Workers / Truck Drivers
5.6
Occupational Health and Safety
5.7
Impacts and Mitigation Measures because of Accidents
5.8
Impacts During Decommissioning Phase
5.8.1
General
5.8.2
Methods
5.8.3
Procedure
5.8.4
Surveillance
5.8.5
Documentation
5.8.6
Decommissioning Cost
5.9
Measures for Minimizing and / or Offsetting Adverse Impact
Irreversible and Irretrievable Commitments of Environmental
5.9.1
Components
5.10
Assessment of Significance of Environmental Impacts
5.10.1
General
5.10.2
Criteria for Determining Significance
5.10.3
Environmental Significance Against Predictability Criterion
5.10.4
Manageability Criterion
5.10.5
Issues Under Manageability Criterion
5.10.6
Environmental Significance Against Manageability Criterion
5.10.7
Environmental Significance
Technological Details of Environmental Protection Measures
6.1
Introduction
6.2
Construction Phase
6.3
Operational Phase
Mitigation by Facility Design Containment and
6.3.1
6.3.2
Mitigation by Facility Design Ventilation System
6.3.2.1
Primary Containment Ventilation System
6.3.2.2
Secondary Containment Ventilation System
Reactor Building Heavy Water Vapour Recovery
6.3.2.3
System
6.3.2.4
RAB Air Conditioning and Ventilation System
6.3.2.5
Emergency Fresh Air Ventilation for MCR
Treatment and Discharge of Gaseous Effluent
6.3.2.6
Stream
6.3.2.7
Ventilation system availability
Mitigation by Facility Design : Radioactive Waste Storage /
6.3.3
Disposal
6.3.3.1
General
6.3.3.2
6.3.3.3
Radioactive Solid Waste Management System
6.3.3.4
Spent Fuel Storage and Management
6.3.4
Conventional Waste Management
6.3.4.1
Sewage Treatment Plant at HAPP
6.3.4.2
Sewage Treatment Plant at Township
Page No.
213
213
213
213
214
215
216
216
217
217
217
217
218
218
219
219
219
221
224
225
225
227
229
232
232
232
233
233
234
235
236
236
237
238
238
239
240
240
241
245
251
252
252
252
Page (v)

Item No.
7.0
8.0
Particulars
6.3.4.3
Solid Waste Disposal at HAPP
6.3.4.4
Solid Waste Disposal at Township
6.4
Green Belt Development: Mitigation Measures
6.4.1
General
6.4.2
Selection of Species
6.4.3
Plantation Scheme
6.4.4
Post Plantation Care
6.4.5
Phase Wise Green Belt / Cover Development Plan
6.5
Conclusion
Environmental Monitoring Programme (EMP)
Introduction
7.1
7.2
Implementation Arrangement
7.2.1
During Construction Stage
7.2.2
During Operation Stage
7.3
Environmental Aspects to be Monitored
7.4
Environmental Monitoring Programme: Construction Phase
7.5
Environmental Monitoring Programme: Operation Phase
7.5.1
Radiological Monitoring
7.5.1.1
General
7.5.1.2
Monitoring Program at the Work Place
7.5.1.3
Radiological Monitoring on Site
7.5.1.4
Radiological Monitoring in the Public Domain
Other Monitoring Requirements : Occupational Health and
7.5.2
Safety
7.5.3
Monitoring for Conventional Pollutants
7.5.3.1
Work Zone Noise Levels
7.5.3.2
Stack Monitoring for Diesel Generator
7.5.3.3
Flue Gas Monitoring
7.5.3.4
Effluent Monitoring for STP
7.5.4
Meteorology
7.5.5
Ambient Air Quality
7.5.6
Maintenance of Drainage System
7.5.7
Waste Water Discharge from Project Site
7.5.8
Ambient Noise
7.5.9
Ground Water Monitoring
7.5.10
Soil Quality Monitoring
7.5.11
Solid / Hazardous Waste Disposal
7.5.12
Municipal Solid Waste Disposal at Township
7.5.13
Green Belt Development
7.5.14
House Keeping
7.5.15
Socio-Economic Development
7.6
Monitoring Plan
7.6.1
Environmental Monitoring Programme
7.6.2
Progress Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements
7.6.3
Budgetary Provisions for Environmental Monitoring Plan
Budgetary Provisions for Environmental Protection
7.6.4
Measures
7.6.5
Procurement Schedule
7.7
Updating of EMP
Additional Studies: Public Consultation & Social Impact Assessment
Page No.
252
252
252
252
253
253
258
258
259
260
260
260
260
260
262
263
265
265
265
265
267
267
268
269
269
269
269
270
270
270
271
271
272
272
272
272
272
272
273
273
273
273
280
281
283
284
284
285
Page (vi)

Item No.
8.1
8.2
9.0
Particulars
Public Consultation
Social Impact Assessment
8.2.1
Introduction
8.2.2
Objectives
8.2.3
Methodology Adopted for the Study
8.2.4
Existing Socio-Economic Scenario
8.2.5
Prediction of Socio-Economic Impact
8.2.6
Peoples Perception
8.2.7
Conclusions
8.2.8
Corporate Social Responsibility
Additional Studies: Risk Assessment On/Off Site Emergency Plan and
occupational health & safety
9.1
Introduction
9.2
Natural Events
9.2.1
Earthquake Hazard
9.2.2
Flood Hazard
9.2.3
Cyclone Hazard
9.2.4
Landslide Hazard
9.2.5
Evaluation of HAPP Design Post Fukushima Event
9.3
Man Made Events
Aircraft Crash Including Consequences of Impact, Fire and
9.3.1
Explosion
9.3.2
Effect of Accidents Taking Place Outside the Project Site
9.3.3
Enemy Attack / Security Breach / Terrorist Activity
9.4
Events Within Plant
9.4.1
Hazardous Chemicals
Radiological Risk Assessment and Emergency Response
9.4.2
System
9.4.2.1
Introduction & Design Philosophy
9.4.2.2
Safety Objectives
9.4.2.3
Radiological Objectives
9.4.2.4
Monitoring of Environment Around HAPP Site
9.5
On / Off Site Emergency Plan / Emergency Response System
9.5.1
Emergency Standby
9.5.2
Personnel Emergency
9.5.3
Plant Emergency
9.5.4
Site Emergency
9.5.5
Off Site Emergency
9.5.6
Exercises
9.5.7
Emergency Preparedness System for HAPP
9.5.8
Volume I : Plant / Site Emergency Procedure
9.5.9
Volume II : Procedure for Off-Site Emergency
9.5.10
Frequency /Periodicity of Emergency Exercises
9.5.11
Habitability of Control Rooms under Accident Conditions
9.6
Occupational Health and Safety Plan
9.6.1
Corporate Environment OHS Policy
9.6.2
Occupational Health
9.6.3
Occupational Health Surveillance (OHS)
9.6.4
Safety Plan
9.6.5
Safety Organization
Page No.
285
285
285
286
286
288
295
301
303
303
306
306
306
306
306
307
307
309
310
310
310
311
312
312
317
317
317
319
322
323
325
325
325
325
325
326
327
327
328
329
329
332
333
333
333
334
335
Page (vii)

Item No.
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
Particulars
9.6.6
Safety and Quality Circle
9.6.7
Safety Training
9.6.8
Occupation Health and Safety - Mitigation Measures
Project Benefits
10.1
Economical Benefits of Nuclear Power
10.2
Levelised Lifetime Cost of Generation
10.3
Effect of Distance from Pit-head on Cost of Generation
10.4
Energy Security: Advantage
10.5
Reduction in Green House Gases (GHGs) Emissions : Advantage
10.6
Socio-Economic Development of the Region
10.7
Socio Economic Benefits
10.8
Employment Potential
10.8.1
Skilled and Semi-skilled
10.8.2
Un-skilled
10.8.3
Direct Employment Opportunities with NPCIL
10.9
Other Indirect Business Opportunities
10.10
Improvements in Physical Infrastructure
10.11
Other Tangible Benefits
10.11.1 Education
10.11.2 Other Benefits
10.11.3 Industrialisation Around the Proposed Project
10.11.4 Pattern of Demand
10.11.5 Consumption Behaviour
Environmental Management Plan
11.1
General
11.2
Organization Policy
11.3
Organisational Set Up
11.3.1
Administrative Set Up
11.3.2
Environmental Laboratory Set Up and Space
11.3.3
Functioning
11.4
Implementation Arrangement
11.4.1
Institutional Implementation Arrangements
11.4.2
Co-ordination with Other Departments
11.4.3
Interaction with State Pollution Control Board
11.4.4
Training
Summary & Conclusion
Disclosure of Consultant
Page No.
336
336
336
337
337
337
337
339
339
340
341
342
342
342
342
343
343
344
344
344
344
344
345
346
346
347
347
347
348
351
351
351
353
353
353
354
355
LIST OF TABLES
Chapter
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Table No.
Table 1.1a
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
1.1b
1.1c
1.1d
1.2
1.3
2.1a
Content
Safety Codes/Guides for Regulation of Nuclear and Radiation
Facilities
Safety Codes/Guides for Nuclear Power Plant Siting
Safety Codes/Guides for Operation of Nuclear Power Plants
Safety Codes/Guides for Quality Assurance
List of Consents / Authorizations
Index to MoE&F TOR Coverage in the EIA Report
Break-up of land in different villages to be acquired
Page
No.
4
4
5
5
6
9
20
Page (viii)

Chapter
No.
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
Table No.
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
2.1b
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
4.1
4.2a
Table 4.2b
Table 4.2c1
Table 4.2c2
Table 4.2c3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
4.2d
4.3a
4.3b
4.3c
4.3d
4.3e
4.4a
4.4b
4.4c
4.5a
4.5b
4.5c
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
4.5d
4.6a
4.6b
4.6c
4.6d
4.6e
4.7a
4.7b
4.7c
4.7d
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
4.7e
4.7f
4.7g
4.7h
4.8a
4.8b
4.8c
Content
Actual Land Requirement, Classification of Land and R&R Issues
Time Schedule for the First Two Units of the Project
Classification of Liquid Wastes
Estimated volumes of liquid waste generation at HAPP 1 & 2
Details of Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra Canal near Project site
Breakup of Total Water Requirement for Township
List of Major Industries within 25 km Radius of the Proposed Plant
Environmental Components and the Methodologies Adopted For
the Study
Summarised Monitored Meteorological Data at Gorakhpur March
to May 2011
Wind Frequency Distribution (%) during Day & Night (Overall)
March to May 2011
Wind Frequency Distribution (%) during Day Time March to May
2011
Wind Frequency Distribution (%) during Night Time March to May
2011
Pattern of Annual and Summer Winds in Study Area
Location of AAQ Monitoring Stations
Methodology of Sampling and Analysis for AAQ Monitoring
National Ambient Air Quality Standards
Dates of AAQ Sampling During Summer
AAQ during Summer
Noise Monitoring Locations
Results of Noise Monitoring
Ambient noise level norms
Location of Water Monitoring Station
Surface Water Quality
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) Surface Water Quality
Criteria
Ground Water Quality
Selection of Soil Sampling Locations and Justification
Physico-Chemical Properties of Soils
Available Major Nutrients in Soil
Exchangeable Cations
Available Micronutrients
Status of Agriculture at the Project Site
List of plants growing in study area
Average productivity of crops in the region
List of common trees/shrubs growing in and around human
settlement
List of faunal species and their conservation status in the study area
List of common birds and their conservation status in the study area
Plankton Abundance in Bhakra Canal
Fishes found in the study area
AERB Dose Limits
Sector wise major villages in different zones
Terrestrial Sampling Locations
Page
No.
20
22
74
76
89
97
112
113
Page (ix)
114
115
116
117
118
119
119
120
120
124
124
125
127
127
127
128
128
129
130
130
131
131
133
133
136
136
137
137
139
140
141
142
143

Chapter
No.
4
4
4
Table No.
Content
Table 4.8d
Table 4.8e
Table 4.8f
Table 4.8g
4
4
4
4
4
4
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Aquatic Sampling Locations

Environmental samples collected in and around Hisar site
Gama radiation levels (Gy/h) in different villages during January to
March 2011
Radiation Dose Rate Measurements using TLD January to March
2011
Levels of gross alpha and gross beta in air samples
Levels of gross alpha and gross beta in water samples
Natural Radioactivity Content in Soil Samples
Concentrations of 137Cs and 90Sr in Soil samples
Levels of 137Cs, 90Sr and 40K in Biological Samples
Traffic Density on NH 10 Hisar Fatehabad on Weekend
Traffic Density on NH 10 Hisar Fatehabad on Weekdays
Traffic Density on Road leading to project site from NH 10 on
Weekend
Traffic Density on Road leading to project site from NH 10 on
Weekdays
Rainfall (IMD data) During 2006-2011 in Districts Falling in the
Study Area
Ground Water Table of Well Investigated in the Study Area
Land Use Pattern of the Study Area
Land Use Pattern of the Project Site
Total land requirement and land-use at the project site
Impacts and Mitigation Measures of Locating HAPP at the
Proposed Site
Quantity and Source of Construction Material for the Project
Apportioned Dose Limits from Gaseous Effluents for 4X700 MWe
Apportioned Dose Limits from Liquid Effluents for 4X700 MWe
Dose Apportionment for HAPP 4X700 MWe
Gaseous Radioactive Releases and Corresponding Dose to
Members of Public at 1.0 km Exclusion Boundary
Waste Water Discharges
Type of Solid Waste Generated and Disposal Mode
Type, Quantity and Surface Dose Rate of of Radio-active Waste
Generated from 2 x 700 MWe PHWR Station
Stack details and emissions from DG sets
Meteorological data used as input for Air quality modeling
Expected Ambient Air Quality after proposed plant
Expected Ambient Air Quality for One Hour when DG Sets Running
for One Hour / Week
Expected for Hazardous Waste Generation and its Disposal
Main Sources of Noise from Different Equipments in Proposed APP
& Their Noise Levels
Noise level with in existing plant premises beyond work zone
Average vehicular movement during construction stage
Increase in traffic load on NH10 during construction phase of the
project
NPCIL Manpower at Site (Based on Township strength)
4.8h
4.8i
4.8j
4.8k
4.8l
4.9a1
4.9a2
4.9b1
Table 4.9b2
4
Table 4.10a
4
4
4
5
5
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
4.10b
4.11a
4.11b
5.1a
5.1b
5
5
5
5
5
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
5.1c
5.2a
5.2b
5.2c
5.2d
5
5
5
Table 5.2a
Table 5.3a
Table 5.3b
5
5
5
5
Table
Table
Table
Table
5
5
Table 5.5
Table 5.6a
5
5
5
Table 5.6b
Table 5.7a
Table 5.7b
Table 5.7c
5.4a
5.4b
5.4c
5.4d
Page
No.
143
144
148
Page (x)
149
150
151
152
152
153
154
154
155
156
157
159
164
165
167
168
172
180
181
181
182
183
186
186
190
192
193
193
201
202
203
207
208
209

Chapter
No.
5
Table 5.7d
5
5
Table 5.7e
Table 5.7f
5
5
5
5
Table
Table
Table
Table
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
6
6
7
Table 6.1a
Table 6.1b
Table 7.1
7
7
7
7
7
7
Table 7.2a
Table 7.2b
Table 7.2c
Table 7.3:
Part A
Table 7.3:
Part B
Table 7.4
Table 7.5a
Table 7.5b
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table 8.2f
8
8
8
Table 8.3a
Table 8.3b
Table 8.3c
Table No.
7.6
7.7
8.2a
8.2b
8.2c
8.2d
8.2e
Content
Number of Busses with Timing for Transporting Project Personnel
from Township to the Project Site
Total Staff Busses Plying Between Township and Project Site
Increase in Traffic Density on Road Leading to Project Site from
Township
Potential Impacts Verses Mitigation Measures Adopted
Events and their Environmental Consequences
Issues Considered under Predictability Criterion
Level of Certainty in the Prediction of Activity Events and their
Associated Consequences
Predictability Criterion Significance Score
Predictability Criterion Table
Issues Considered under Manageability Criterion
Questions for Addressing Issues under Manageability Criterion
Manageability Criterion Significance score
Manageability Criterion Table
Matrix for Determining Level of Environmental Significance
Activity Environmental Significance (Environmental Damage
Potential)
Classification of Liquid Wastes
Estimated volumes of liquid waste generation at HAPP 1 & 2
Environmental Monitoring Programme Construction Stage (5
Years)
Noise Level to be Monitored
Monitoring of Effluent Inlet & Outlet of ETP
Ambient Air to be Monitored
Environmental Monitoring Plan
Page
No.
210
Yearly Environmental Monitoring Plan for Performance Indicators at

Final Stage
Reporting System for Environmental Monitoring Plan
List of Equipments as Required for Monitoring of Conventional
Pollutants
List of Equipments as Required for Monitoring of Radiation /
Radioactivity
Summary Cost of Environmental Monitoring Programme
Cost of Environmental Protection Measures
Demographic Profile of Population in the Area
Occupational Structure in the Area
Educational Facilities in Blocks in the Study Area
Health Facilities in Fatehabad District
Number of Patients Treated in Health Institution in Fatehabad and
Hisar District (2011 data)
Principal Communicable Disease Occurrence Pattern in Fatehabad
and Hisar District (Data 2011)
Distribution of Landholding in the Study Area
Cropping pattern of the study area
Cropping intensity, net return & investment
Page (xi)
211
212
218
220
221
222
224
224
226
226
227
228
230
231
241
242
263
269
270
271
274
279
280
282
282
283
283
288
290
292
292
293
293
295
296
297

Chapter
No.
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
13
Table No.
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
8.3d
8.3e
8.3f
8.4
9.1a
9.1b
9.2
10.1
10.2
10.3
11.1
11.2
Table 13.1
Content
Demand Functions for Food and Non-food Items
Source-wise distribution of family consumption
Fitted Consumption Function
Peoples Perception on the Project
Threshold Quantity and the Chemicals to be Stored and Handled
List of Toxic Chemicals Stored in Very Small Quantity in Laboratory
Radiological Emergency and Risk to Public
Nuclear and Coal-Fired Power: Per Unit Cost in Paisa Year of
Comparative CO2 (GHG) Emissions from Various Energy Sources
Qualitative Impacts on Socio-economic Environnent
Monitoring / Analytical Equipments Required
List of Coordinating Agencies, which may be involved for specific
Environmental Activities
List of Sectors for which NABET has given Accreditation
Page
No.
298
299
300
302
313
316
332
338
339
341
349
352
355
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No.
2.1
2.2a
2.2b
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12a
2.12b
2.13
2.14a
2.14b
2.14c
2.14d
2.15
2.16
4.2a
4.2b
4.2c
4.3a
4.3b
4.3c
4.3d
4.3e
Description
Proposed Project Site at Village Gorakhpur, District Fatehabad, Harayana
Reactor Building Elevation View 1
Reactor Building Elevation View 2
Secondary Shut Down System
37 Element Fuel Bundle
Simplified Schematic Flow Diagram for 700 MWe PHWR
End Fitting Assembly
Sectional View of Calandria
Diagrammatic Representation of PHT System
Pictorial view of main control room panels for 700 MWe Plant
Scematic Diagram of Liquid Waste Management Scheme
Solid Waste Management Scheme
Longitude and Latitude of the Proposed Project Site
Longitude and Latitude of the Township at Badopal Village
Water Balance Diagram for Haryana Atomic Power Plant 1 & 2.
Views of Township Site (February 2012)
View of Township Site - Prosopis juliflora Growth in Waste Land
(February 2012)
Views of Township Site (February 2012)
Road Leading by the Side of Township Site (February 2012)
Conceptual Pant of the Township
Flow Sheet of Sewage Treatment Plant
Wind-Rose During Summer Season: Day Time
Wind-Rose During Summer Season: Night Time
Wind-Rose During Summer Season: Day & Night (Overall)
SO2 Concentration in the study area
NOx Concentration in the study area
PM10 Concentration in the study area
PM2.5 Concentration in the study area
Ozone concentration in the study area
Page No.
19
32
33
36
37
38
39
41
46
54
80
82
87
88
91
93
94
95
96
99
105
115
116
117
121
122
122
123
124
Page (xii)

Fig. No.
4.4a
4.4b
4.5a
4.5b
4.5c
4.6a
4.6b
5.1a
5.1b
5.2a
5.2b
5.2c
5.3
5.4
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
8.1
8.2
9.1a
9.1b
9.1c
9.1d
9.2
9.3
9.4
10.1
11.1
Description
Noise levels during day time in the study area
Noise levels during night time in the study area
Basemap showing project site and radiological survey study area divided in to
different zones and sectors
Radiological survey study area showing terrestrial sampling locations
Radiological survey study area showing aquatic sampling locations
Depth of water level pre-monsoon in the study area (CGWB, 2008)
Depth of water level post-monsoon in the study area (CGWB, 2008)
Pathways of Exposure to Man Air Route
Pathways of Exposure to Man Water Route
Isopleths for SO2 Concentration Due to Proposed Project
Isopleths for NOx Concentration Due to Proposed Project
Isopleths for SPM Concentration Due to Proposed Project
Predicted Noise Levels due to Noise Sources in the Proposed Atomic Power
Plant
Steps for Assessment of Significance of Environmental Impact
Sources and Treatment of Liquid Wastes
Schematic section diagram of RCC trench
Schematic section diagram of the tile hole
Process flow diagram for package rotary klin incinerator
Schematic Diagram of Greenbelt Development
Distribution of Population by Land Holding Size
Occupational Structure of the Study Area
Earthquake Hazard Map Showing Project Site
Flood Hazard Map Showing Project Site
Cyclone Hazard Map Showing Project Site
Landslide Hazard Zone Map of India Showing Project Site
Occupiers Guide
Public Dose at 1.6 Km distance from NPPs (2006-2010) (AERB Prescribed
Annual Limit is 1000 micro-Sievert)
Action Flow Diagram for Site / Off Site Emergencies
Comparison of Waste Production from Nuclear and Thermal Power Stations
Organisation Chart Proposed for Environmental Survey Laboreatory
Page No.
125
126
145
Page (xiii)
146
147
161
162
179
179
195
196
197
204
223
245
249
250
251
255
296
298
307
308
309
310
314
322
331
340
348

LIST OF DRAWINGS
SN
1
2
3
4
Description
Drawing No.
Plant Layout 1 to 4 with Water

Storage Ponds and Green Belt Area
Locator Map of 10km Radius
Showing Monitoring Stations
Physigraphy in the Study Area
Land-Use in the Study Area
HAPP 1 to 4 / 70000 / 2002 / GA.

(DR.LWS) Rev. 01
Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01
At end of
Chapter No.
2
4
4
4
CONTENTS OF VOLUME II
SN
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
Description (List Of Annexures)

In-principal Approval for Harayana Site form Central Government
Haryana R & R Policy2010
MoEF Approved TOR for Haryana Atomic Power Project.
Part of presentation to MoEF for approval of TOR
Executive Summary of Flood Analysis Report & Safe Grade Elevation of the
Site
Commitment of Bhakhra Canal Water Availability from Haryana Irrigation
Department Authorities
Detailed Meteorological Data at Gorakhpur
Detailed Ambient Air Quality Data in Study Area
Authentication of flora and fauna from State Forest Department.
Authentication of Wild Life that no National Park or Wildlife Sanctuary exists
within the Study Area
Provisional Public Dose calculation for Twin unit 700 Mwe PHWR Station at
Gorkhpur, Haryana, HPD, BARC
Proceedings of Public Hearing and Commitments - English
Proceedings of Public Hearing and Commitments - Hindi
Annexure
ANNEXURE IA
ANNEXURE IB
ANNEXURE IC
ANNEXURE ID
ANNEXURE II
ANNEXURE III
ANNEXURE IVA
ANNEXURE IVB
ANNEXURE IVC
ANNEXURE IVD
ANNEXURE V
ANNEXURE VI
ANNEXURE VII
Page (xiv)

INDEX TO MOE&F TOR COVERAGE IN THE EIA REPORT

SN.
TOR POINTS GIVEN BY MOE&F
1.
Based on the presentation made and held, the Committee

prescribed the following TORs for undertaking detailed EIA
study :A note on site selection should be given in EIA report.
The data contained in EIA report for the ultimate capacity of the
plant.
All the co-ordinates of the plant site as well as the township
with toposheet should be given.
The study area should cover an area of 10km radius around the
proposed site for conventional pollutants and 30 km radius for
radiological parameters.
Land use of the study area as well as project area shall be
given separately.
Location of any National Park, Sanctuary, Elephant / Tiger
Reserve (existing as well as proposed), migratory routes, if any,
within 10km of the project site shall be specified and marked on
the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
Land requirement for the project, along with usage for different
purposes should be given. It should give information relating to
right of way (ROW), if required for pipeline etc, as well as
details of township.
Location of intake as well as outfall points (with coordinates)
should be given.
Topography of the area should be given clearly indicating
whether the site requires filling. If so, details of filling, quantity
of fill material required, its source, transportation etc. should be
given.
Impact on drainage of the area and surroundings should be
given.
Information regarding surface hydrology and water regime and
impact of the same, if any due to the project should be given.
xii)
One season site specific meteorological data shall be provided.
xiii)
One complete season AAQ data (except monsoon) to be given

along with the dates of monitoring for the purpose of the EIA
report for obtaining environmental clearance; however, data
collection should continue for entire one year (three seasons).
COVERAGE IN EIA
REPORT
Section 2.4, Chapter 2

Chapter 2
REMARKS
Provided
Section 2.17.1,
Chapter 2.
Section 4.1.3, Chapter
4.
4
Section 2.6, Chapter

2.
No National
Park,
Sanctuary,
Elephant /
Tiger Reserve
(existing as
well as
proposed),
migratory
routes, present
within 10km
radius of the
site.
No ROW
required
Section 2.19.1, Table

2.5, Chapter 2
5
Refer Section 5.5.3.3,

Chapter 5
Refer Cause 4.5,
Chapter 4 & 5.5.3.2,
Chapter 5
Refer Section 4.2.1,
Chapter 4
For AAQ refer Cause
4.2.2, Chapter 4.
For radio-nuclides and
Page (xv)

SN.

The parameters to be covered shall include PM2.5, PM10, SO2
and NOx. Besides, conventional pollutants information on long
lived radio nuclides and background natural radio activity, gross
alpha and gross beta levels should also be given. The location
of the monitoring stations should be so decided so as to take in
to consideration the pre-dominant wind direction, population
zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests. There
should be at least one monitoring station in the predominant
down wind direction at a location where maximum ground level
concentration is likely to occur. Baseline data on noise levels
may also be generated.
Impact of the project on the AAQ of the area. Details of the
model used and the input data used for modelling should also
be provided. The air project site, habitation nearby, sensitive
receptors, if any. The wind roses should also be shown on this
map. Levels due to radioactive releases should be predicted
and radiation dose there from at the fence post should also be
worked out.
Source of water and its availability. Commitment regarding
availability of requisite quantity of water from the competent
authority. The availability of water during canal closure should
also be detailed and discussed in the report. It may clearly be
stated whether any groundwater is to be used in the project or
township. If so, detailed hydro-geological study should be
carried out.
Details of rainwater harvesting and how it will be used in the
plant.
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
Optimization of COC should be done for water conservation.

Other water conservation measures proposed in the project
should also be given. Quality of water requirement of the
project should be optimized.
Details of water balance taking into account reuse and recirculation of effluents.
Details of greenbelt i.e. land with not less than 1500 trees per
ha giving details of species, width of plantation, planning
schedule etc.
Detailed R&R plan/compensation package in consonance with
the National / State R&R Policy for the project affected people
including that due to fuel transportation system/pipeline and
their ROW, if any, shall be prepared taking into account the
socio economic status of the area, homestead oustees, land
oustees, landless laborers.
Details of flora and fauna duly authenticated should be
provided. In case of any scheduled fauna, conservation plan
COVERAGE IN EIA
REPORT
background natural
radio activity, Section
4.3, Chapter 4.
REMARKS
For baseline noise

levels refer Section
4.2.3., Chapter 4.
For predicted AAQ

refer Section 5.5.3,
Chapter 5.
Predicted radiological
releases Section 5.5.2
Chapter 5.
Refer Cause 2.19,
Chapter 2
Section 2.28.5,
Chapter 2
Ground Water
will not be
used for the
project.
In the plant
area rain water
harvesting will
not be done to
avoid ground
water
contamination
Section 2.19.3,
Chapter 2
Section 2.19.2,
Chapter 2
No ROW
required

4.
Page (xvi)

SN.
xxii)
xxiii)
xxiv)
xxv)
xxvi)
xxvii)
xxviii)
xxix)
xxx)
xxxi)
xxxii)
xxxiii)
xxxiv)
xxxv)
2.
i)
should be provided.
Details regarding waste management, liquid and solid waste
(conventional and radioactive) should be given in the EIA
report.
Details regarding storage and management of spent fuel should
be given.
Details regarding storage of hazardous chemical including
maximum inventory to be stored at any point of time should be
given.
Detailed risk assessment and disaster management plan
should be given. The risk contours may be plotted on location
map.
Issues relating to de-commissioning of the plant and the related
environmental issues should be discussed.
Demographic data of the study area as well as pre-project
health survey of the population in study area around the project
site should be collected.
Detailed environmental management plan to mitigate the
adverse environmental impacts due to the project should be
given. It should also include possibility of use of solar energy
for the project including measures for energy conservation.
Details of post project monitoring should also include in the EIA
report.
Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation,
fuel, restroom, medical facilities, safety during construction
phase etc. to be provided to the labour force during
construction as well as to the casual workers including truck
drivers during operation phase.
Public hearing points raised and commitment of the project
proponent on the same. An action plan to address the issues
raised during public hearing and the necessary allocation of
funds for the same should be provided.
Measures of socio economic influence to the local community
proposed to be provided by project proponent. As far as
possible, quantitative dimension to be given.
Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such as
road network and whether any additional infrastructure would
need to be constructed and the agency responsible for the
same with time frame particularly keeping in view the
transportation of over sized consignments should be given.
EMP to mitigate the adverse impacts due to the project along
with item wise cost of its implementation.
Any litigation pending against the project and /or any direction
/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so,
details thereof.
In respect of the township, the following TORs are prescribed
for addressing the same in the EIA report.
A site plan showing the project site and its surroundings with
COVERAGE IN EIA
REPORT
REMARKS
Refer Section 5.3 &

5.3.4, Chapter 5, page
2 & 21.
Refer Section 6.3.3.4,
Chapter 6
9.
Refer Chapter 9

5,
8.
Chapter 6, 7 & 11
For Solar energy
refer Sections 2.28.6
& 2.28.7, Chapter 2.
Refer Chapter 7 & 11.
Section 5.4.1,
Chapter 5.
5.
To be
addressed
after public
hearing
8.
Sections 5.5.3.8 &
5.5.3.9, Chapter 5
Refer Chapter 7
Nil
Section 2.24.1,
Page (xvii)

SN.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)

physical features and topographical details, such as land use,
contours and drainage pattern, along with photographs of the
site from all four sides, shall be examined in detail.
If the site is low lying and will require extra earth, examine the
quantity required and identify the area from where the earth will
be borrowed and whether any permission will be required or
not.
Examine in detail the proposed site with reference to impact on
infrastructure covering water supply, storm water drainage,
sewerage, power, etc., and the disposal of treated/ raw wastes
from the complex on land/water body and into sewerage
system.
Consider soil characteristics and permeability for rainwater
harvesting proposals, which should be made with due
safeguards for ground water quality. Maximise recycling of
water and utilisation of rainwater.
Provision should be made for guard pond and other provisions
for safety against failure in the operation of wastewater
treatment facilities. Identify acceptable outfall for treated
effluent.
Examine existing education and health facilities, police and
other services and include adequate provisions in the proposal.
Study the existing flora and fauna of the area and the impact of
the project on them.
Landscape plan, green belts and open spaces should be

described.
Assess soil erosion in view of the soil characteristics,
topography and rainfall pattern.
Application of renewable energy/alternate energy, such as solar
and wind energy may be described including solar water
heating. Provide for conservation of resources, energy
efficiency and use of renewable sources of energy in the light of
ECBC code.
Arrangements for waste management may be described as
also the common facilities for waste collection, treatment,
recycling and disposal of all effluent, emission and refuse
including MSW. Identification of recyclable wastes and waste
utilisation arrangements may be made.
Traffic management plan including parking and loading /
unloading areas may be described. Traffic survey should be
carried out both on weekdays and weekend.
Use of local building materials should be described.
Application of resettlement and rehabilitation policy may be

described. Project affected persons should be identified and
COVERAGE IN EIA
REPORT
Chapter 2.
REMARKS
Section 2.27.3,
Chapter 2.
Section 2.27 and 2.28,

Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.5,
Chapter 2
Section 2.28.1,
Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.4,
Chapter2.
For details of Flora &
Fauna refer Section
4.2.6, Chapter 4 &
Section 2.27.2,
Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.9 &
2.28.10, Chapter 2.
Section 2.27.1
Section 2.28.6 and
2.28.7, Chapter 2.
Sections 2.28.1 &

2.28.2, Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.2,
Chapter 2 and Section
5.5.3.8, Chapter 5.
Section 2.27.3,
Chapter 2 and Section
5.4.1, Chapter 5.
5, and Section 2.26.1,
Page (xviii)

SN.
xv)
xvi)
3.
a)
b)
c)

rehabilitation and resettlement plan should be prepared.
Examine separately the details for construction and operation
phases both for Environmental Management Plan and
Environmental Monitoring Plan.
Examine and prepare in detail the Disaster Management Plan
and emergency Evacuation Plan for natural and manmade
disasters like earthquakes, cyclones/flooding, Tsunami and
terrorists attack.
Besides the above, the below mentioned points will also be
followed:All the information contained in various project documents
should be rechecked and reconciled.
All documents to be properly referenced with index, page
numbers and continuous page numbering.
Where data are presented in the report especially in tables, the
period in which the data were collected and the sources should
be indicated.
COVERAGE IN EIA
REPORT
Chapter 2.
Refer Chapter 6, 7 &
11
REMARKS
Section 2.28.11 and

Chapter 9
Followed in the report

Page (xix)

ABBREVIATIONS
AAQM
AERB
AFR
AOO
AP
AVS
BA
BARC
BDBAs
BDL
BHAVINI
BOD
COD
CCWS
CDF
CEC
CFU
CHC
CPCB
CVCS
D
D.O.
DAE
DBAs
DBF
DNB
DS
EBS
EDG
EFWS
EIA
EMP
ESL
ESP
F
FA
FBRs
FP
FPCS
FPNGs
GSI
GWPS
HEPA
HP
HPD
I&C
IAEA
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Atomic Energy Regulatory Board
Away From Reactor
Anticipated Operational Occurrence
Activation Products
Annulus Ventilation System
Basal Area
Bhabha Atomic Research Centre
Beyond Design Basis Accidents
Below Detectable Level
Bhartiya Nabhikiya Vidyut Nigam
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
Chemical Oxygen Demand
Component Cooling Water System
Core Damage Frequency
Cation Exchange Capacity
Colony Forming Unit
Community Health Center
Central Pollution Control Board
Chemical and Volume Control System
Density
Dissolved Oxygen
Department of Atomic Energy
Design Basis Accidents
Design Basis Flood
Departure from Nucleate Boiling
Down Stream
Extra Borating System
Emergency Diesel Generator
Emergency Feed Water System
Environmental Impact Assessment Study
Environmental Management Plan/ Environmental Monitoring Plan
Environmental Survey Laboratory
Exchangeable Sodium Percentage
Frequency
Fuel Assemblies
Fast Breeder Reactor
Fission Products
Fuel Pool Cooling System
Fission Product Noble Gases
Geological Survey of India
Gaseous Waste Processing System
High Efficiency Particulate Air
High pressure
Health Physics Division
Instrumentation and Control
International Atomic Energy Agency
Page (xx)

ICRP
IIG
IMR
IRWST
IUCN
IVI
KAPP
KKNPP
LBLOCA
LCO
LHSI
LOCA
LP
LRF
MDR
MF
MFW
MHSI
MoEF
MOU
MSS
NAPP
NOx
NPCIL
ODC
OSHA
PAPs
PFBR
PGA
PHC
PPED
PHWRs
PSAR
PWD
PWRs
PZR
R&R
RCC
RAPS
RBA
RCP
RD
RHR
RPM
RPV
RSPM
RSS
SAHRS
SDI
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
International Commission on Radiation Protection

Indian Institute of Geomagnetism
Infant Mortality Rate
In- containment Refueling Water Storage Tank
International Union for Conservation Of Nature And Natural Resources
Importance Value Index
Kakrapar Atomic Power Project
Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project
Large Break Loss Of Coolant Accident
Limiting Conditions for Operation
Low Head Safety Injection
Loss Of Coolant Accident
Low Pressure
Large Release Frequency
Major District Road
Membrane Filter
Main Feed Water
Medium Head Safety Injection
Ministry of Environment & Forests
Memorandum of Understanding
Main Steam System
Narora Atomic Power Project
Oxides of Nitrogen
Nuclear Power Corporation of India Ltd
Over Dimensional Consignment
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Project Affected Persons
Prototype Fast Breeder Reactor
Peak Ground Acceleration
Primary Health Centre
Power Projects Engineering Division
Pressurised Heavy Water Reactors
Preliminary Safety Analysis Report
Public Work Department
Pressurised Water Reactor
Pressurizer
Rehabilitation And Resettlement
Reinforced Cement Concrete /Risk Reduction Category
Rawatbhata Atomic Power Station
Relative Basal Area
Reactor Coolant Pump
Relative Density
Residual Heat Removal
Respirable Particulate Matter
Reactor Pressure Vessel
Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter
Remote Shutdown Station
Severe Accident Heat Removal System
Simpson Diversity Index
Page (xxi)

SG
SO2
SPM
SRW
SSE
SSS
TAPS
TDS
TSS
US
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Steam Generator
Sulphur dioxide
Suspended Particulate Matter
Solid Radioactive Waste
Safe Shutdown Earth Quake
Start-up and Shutdown System
Tarapur Atomic Power Station
Total Dissolved Solids
Total Suspended Solids
Up Stream
Page (xxii)
Executive Summary
AT GORAKHPUR HARYANA
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited (NPCIL) is a Public Sector Enterprise under
Department of Atomic Energy (DAE), Government of India. NPCILs objective is to develop
nuclear power technology and to undertake generation of electricity under the provisions of
Atomic Energy Act, 1962. NPCILs emphasis is to produce Nuclear Power as a safe,
environmentally benign and economically viable source of electrical energy to meet the
increasing needs of the country.
In pursuance of Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986 and EIA notification 2006, new projects
necessitate statutory prior environmental clearance by conducting an Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) study. NPCIL entrusted MECON Limited to conduct an EIA study for the
proposed project.
2.0
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.01

The Haryana Atomic Power Project (HAPP) will produce 4X700 MWe power. It falls under
category of "Nuclear Power Project & Processing of Nuclear Fuel".
2.02
Location
The project site is located in Gorakhpur Village, Bhuna Block, Tehsil, Sub-division & District
Fatehabad, Haryana, at geographical co-ordinates of longitude 750 37 56 E and latitude 290
26 30 N. and situated about 215 to 218m above mean sea level (MSL). The site is about 28
km in SE direction of Fatehabad town (district head-quarter) and is about 6.0 km from NH10
(connecting Hisar to Fatehabad).
The nearest railway station is Uklana Mandi (23 km) on Northern railway. Hisar is situated
about 33 km on the SSE of the project site. The nearest Airports to the plant site is at Hisar
(used for Helicopter training) at a distance of about 40 km from the plant site and Indira
Gandhi International Airport, Delhi is about 208 km from project site. The Bhakhara Canal
(Fatehabad Branch) flows from east to west towards north close to the site. There is no
major industry and no place of historical importance within 10 km off the site. There are no
facilities for handling, storing or transporting inflammable/toxic material and no major railway
siding or road transport depot within 10 km of the site. The site connects NH10 by
Kharakheri-Gorakhpur road. The Index map showing the location of the plant site is shown in
Fig. 1.
The total 1503.5 acres (608.48 ha) land required is private land, of which that required for
the project is about 1318 acres (533.5 hectares) and that for township is about 185.42
acres (75.04 hectares). The project site land (534 ha) comprises 1273.2 acres or 515.24 ha
of land under agricultural category and 32 ha of land is not cultivable. The land at the
township comprises mostly barren land. The locations of proposed site at Gorakgpur is
shown in Fig. 1.
2.03
The Proposed Project

The Nuclear Power Corporation of India Ltd (NPCIL) is intended to setup Haryana Atomic
Power Project (HAPP) 4x700 MWe Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor (PHWR) units at
Gorkhapur, Dist Fatehabd. The major equipments needed are Steam Generators, End-
Page ES-1 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Shield, Calandria, Coolant Channels, End Fittings, Primary Coolant pumps, Heat
Exchangers, Fuelling Machine components, etc.
Proposed Site
NH
NH
Other Roads
Canals
Fig.1: Proposed Project Site at Village Gorakhpur, District Fatehabad, Haryana

The above equipments will be housed in Nuclear buildings consisting of:
Reactor Building (RB) and Reactor Auxiliary Building (RAB) house the main reactor and
associated process systems,
Safety related Buildings other than Nuclear Building consisting of Control Building (CB),
Station Auxiliary Building (SABs), Ventilation Stack with Monitoring Room and Station
Auxiliary Buildings (SABs), D2O Upgrading Plant Building, Waste Management Facility
and Exhaust Ventilation, Induced Draught Cooling Towers, Safety Related Pump House
(SRPH), Fire Water Pump House, Underground Tunnels and Trenches, Diesel Oil
Storage Area (DOSA), Emergency Makeup Water Pond, Covered Passage, etc as per
the design features of the plant.
Power Evacuation in principal is feasible for 2800 MWe power from site. The Power
generated at HAPP will be evacuated through 400 kv transmission system. The number of
Page ES-2 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
transmission outlets and their destination will be finalized taking into account share of
beneficial state in due course after a detailed power system studies are carried out by Power
Grid Corporation of India Limited (PGCIL) and approved by the concerned authorities
The project will use Natural uranium oxide as fuel and heavy water (D2O) as coolant and
moderator for the reactor with on-power refueling of reactor.
Steam generators supply nearly dry saturated steam to the turbine and turbine is directly
coupled to an electrical generator, which produces electricity. Generator voltage is stepped
up by the generator transformer. Generated power is transmitted to the grid from the nuclear
power station at 400 kV.
The concept of defense-in-depth is adopted in design of safety systems. Provision of multiple
barriers, double containment structures with liner on inner containment wall of Reactor
Building, containment spray cooling system, emergency core cooling system, reactor shut
down systems etc. as engineered safety systems ensure safe operation of reactor. Reactor
protection system ensures shutdown requirements through two independent fast acting shut
down systems. Reactor regulating system enables automatic control of reactor power and
maintains neutron flux profile.
Construction of the project will be taken up in two stages of 2X700 MWe each. Subsequent
two units are expected to be four years later. The 1st stage project will be commissioned in
60 months from the Zero-Date as August 2013 i.e. the start of construction activities at
site.
During construction stage maximum of 8000 persons (when construction of stage-I will be
nearing completion and construction of stage-II will be started) will be temporarily deployed
and up to the final stage of the project about 1700 manpower will be required (covering
technical and general administration).
During construction & commissioning maximum 10 MW power will be required which will be
sourced from State Grid. The water requirement for the project will be met from Fatehabad
Branch of Bhakra Canal. Assurance has been given to supply 783 Million Liters per Day
(MLD) or 32625 m3/hr and that for the township about 0.65 MLD or 27 m3/hr of water from
Haryana Government. About 18000m3/hr of water will be required for unit 1 to 4 for cooling
tower makeup and other plant requirements. Out of which 12680 m3/hr will be towards
consumptive use and the rest of the 5320 m3/hr will be returned to canal.
Township
A residential colony for about 1700 employees has been envisaged, with main features as
follows:
a. Land area is : 75 Ha
b. Ground Coverage area : 28.4 Ha (37.8%)
c. Built up area = 26.00 Ha [Floor Space Index (FSI1) : 0.34].
d. The township will have a maximum height of Ground + two stories limited to maximum
height of 11.45 m.
e. Water Consumption = 1.250 Million Litres Per Day (MLD) or 1250 m3/d
f. Power requirement = 2000 KVA for stage one and 2000 KVA for stage two. A 500 KVA
Standby DG set will be provided.
g. Connectivity: Via local roads near Badopal village on National High way number (NH-10)
connecting Hisar and Fatehabad.
1 Floor Space Index (FSI) = Total floor area including walls of all floors / Plot Area / Building Unit
Page ES-3 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
h. Parking requirements: Adequate parking space of about 1500 cars, light commercial
vehicles, buses etc. - available in the township.
i. Community facilities:
Hospital, Community centre, School and shopping centre
recreation club, sports complex, play ground, bank, post office, petrol pump etc. will be
provided in the proposed township.
j. All the civic amenities.
k. Measures to minimize energy consumption
Use of CFL2
Use of Low-pressure sodium lamps for outdoor lighting along the road and security
lighting with Solar Street Lights mix.
Use of solar water heater for hospital, guest house.
Automatic timing control mechanism will be incorporated in the street lighting to save
energy. Mechanism will involve staggering of on-off sequence of street lights.
l. Sewage treatment plant of 1MLD envisaged for treatment of sewage water. The treated
sewage shall be disinfected / filtered and used for gardening purpose.
m. Green belt will be developed in and around the township.
n. A fire extinguishing system as per the requirements of national Building Code will be
provided.
The estimated cost of 4 X 700MWe PHWR Atomic Power Project is about Rs 23502 Crores
(base cost 2011-12).
3.0
DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
3.01
General
Study area has been taken as 10km radius around the project site for conventional pollutant
and other baseline study for which the baseline environmental data monitoring was
conducted during March 2011 to May 2011 (summer season). Whereas for baseline
radiological monitoring the study area taken was 30km radius around the project site and the
study was conducted during January to March 2011.
3.02
Meteorology
In summer season overall, the predominant wind directions for March 2011 May 2011 were
NW, W, NE, SE, SW, and N (prevailing for 16.03%, 10.06, 6.33, 4.75 and 4.34 of the time).
Calm conditions prevailed for 29.39% of the time. The wind velocity was mostly between 1.6
to 18.0 km/hr (70.59% of the time).
3.03
Ambient Air Quality (AAQ)

Eight AAQ monitoring stations were monitored. The maximum values of Particulate Matter
(PM10 & PM2.5), SO2 , NO x and Ozone (O3) at all the monitoring stations the values of
different pollutants were below the National AAQ Standards for Industrial, Residential, Rural
& Other Areas as well as for ecologically sensitive areas (Table ES.2).
Parameters
SO2
Max
3
(g/m ) Min.
Avg
C 98
Table ES 2: Summarised Results of AAQ Monitoring

Gorakhpur Nehla
Siwani Kirmara Chaubara Sabarwas Kajalheri
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
15
14
20
18
12
13
14
5
4
4
4
5
4
5
9
7
10
9
8
8
9
15
12
19
17
12
13
14
Khaujri
A8
11
5
7
11
2 Compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) or Compact Fluorescent Light

Page ES-4 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Parameters
NOx
Max
3
(g/m ) Min.
Avg
C 98
PM10 Max
(g/m 3) Min.
Avg
C 98
PM2.5 Max
(g/m 3) Min.
Avg
C 98
O3
Max
3
(g/m ) Min.
Avg
C 98
Gorakhpur
A1
31
9
17
29
85
53
78
85
49
22
37
48
35
22
28
35
Nehla
A2
23
7
13
20
84
52
72
84
49
29
41
49
33
21
26
33
Siwani
A3
36
8
21
36
84
49
72
84
46
28
39
46
34
20
26
33
Kirmara Chaubara Sabarwas Kajalheri

A4
A5
A6
A7
46
19
30
24
6
8
5
8
17
13
14
14
40
19
27
23
86
72
87
83
42
52
59
50
74
63
76
64
86
72
87
80
48
46
49
48
25
29
29
29
41
35
43
38
47
44
49
47
33
36
34
34
21
20
21
20
26
27
26
25
33
36
34
33
Khaujri
A8
17
8
13
17
65
45
59
65
44
30
38
44
34
21
26
33
3.04
Ambient Noise
Noise mmonitoring was conducted at ten locations in and around the project site. The values
at all stations were below the respective statutory norms as applicable.
3.05
Water Environment
Four surface and four ground water samples were analysed for the study. All the parameters
in surface waters were within the CPCB norms for Classes B, C, D, and E for surface water.
Ground water analysis reveals that in village Sabarwas (GW2), total hardness, Chloride,
TDS, Ca, Mg and Alkalinity is exceeding the respective desirable / permissible norms of
IS:10500. Whereas in village Samani (GW3) TDS is higher than desirable limits. Other
parameters of all the samples are within the limits with the drinking water quality standards
(IS :10500).
3.06
Soil
Soil samples were analysed for ten locations in and around the project site and were found
good for plant growth.
3.07
Ecological Features
There is no wildlife or bird sanctuary within the study area. The study area falls under agroclimatic zone Trans-Gangetic Plains Region and under climatic region arid to semi arid characterised by dryness and extremes of temperature and scanty rainfall. The vegetation is
characterized by tropical desert thorn and comprises predominantly of xerophytes.
3.08
Traffic Density
The traffic density on NH 10 is highest for LMV (5167/d), followed by HMV (1841/d) and two
wheelers (1940/d), whereas that on road leading to project site from NH 10 is highest for two
wheelers (452/d), followed by LMV (341/d) and HMV (11/d).
3.09
Hydrogeology
Normal annual rainfall of Fatehabad district is 373 mm falling in 22 rainy days. The
groundwater is in water table condition at a depth of 3 to 20m below ground level and in semi
confined.
3.10
Socio-economic Status
Page ES-5 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
The 10 km study area consists of 83044 persons. Basic socio-economic conditions are:
The population density up to 5 km is minimum followed by that in 10 km radius.
The study area consists of mostly rural population.
Predominance of individual land holdings in small to marginal category. Wheat is mostly
grown followed by cotton, paddy, gwar, etc.
The employment rate is moderate: 43% are engaged as main workers, 17% as marginal
workers and 40% as non-workers. Agriculture and small commercial activities plays an
important role in rural economy.
3.11
Baseline Study for Radiological Environment

The 30 km study area for radiological monitoring was divided into four zones 1, 2, 3 and 4
(1.0 - 5 km, 5 - 10 km, 10 - 15 km, and 15 - 30 km, respectively) and further divided in to 16
circle-segments / sectors from A to P, taking the project site as centre.
The Ambient Radiation Levels (Gamma radiation level) was measured using Gamma dose
rate tracer. The gamma radiation levels ranged between 0.07-0.22 Gy/h, which is normal
and comparable with Kakrapar and Kaiga sites.
The pre-operational Base Line Levels of Natural and Fallout Radio-nuclides were measured
in terms of radio-nuclides of natural (238U, 232Th, 40 K) and fallout (137Cs and 90Sr) origin by
taking environmental samples from terrestrial and aquatic environs. Canal water, soil,
cereals, pulses and vegetation samples were collected from the study area.
Air samples
Five air samples were analysed for gross alpha and beta activities. The gross beta activity
ranged between BDL (<0.007 Bq.m-3) to 0.017 Bq.m-3 and gross alpha ranged from 0.0002
to 0.003 Bq.m-3.
Radioactivity levels in water samples
Fifteen (15) water samples were analysed for gross alpha and beta activities. The Gross
alpha activity ranged from 6.7 mBq.l-1 to 281.3 mBq.l-1 and the gross beta activity ranged
from MDL (<225 mBq.l-1) to 332.6 mBq.l-1. Higher gross alpha activities as compared to
other power station sites may be attributable to comparatively higher concentrations of
Uranium in ground water.
Radioactivity levels in soil
Fourteen samples were analysed for baseline radio-activity level in soil. The 226Ra activity
ranged from 9.6 to 70.9 Bq.kg -1dry wt, 238U activity varied from 11.5 to 70.8 Bq.kg-1dry dry wt,
the 232Th activity varied from 20.2 to 118.7 Bq.kg-1dry dry wt. The 226Ra and 238U
concentrations are found to be higher than those observed in other power station sites of
India. 40K concentrations in soil varied from 249.6 to 1353 Bq.kg-1dry wt. The observed
values are comparable with those observed in other power station sites. The 137Cs and 90Sr
concentrations in soil samples from the study area are comparable to the levels reported
elsewhere(3).
Radioactivity levels (137Cs, 90Sr and 40K) in biological samples
3 UNSCEAR 2000, Sources and effects of ionizing radiation, Report to General Assembly, with Scientific
Annexes, United Nation, 2000.
Page ES-6 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Radioactivity levels in food and related matrices are monitored in terms of 137Cs and 90Sr in
ten (10) biota (biological) samples, covering grass, cereals, leaves, fruits, etc. The activity
levels of 137Cs and 90Sr are comparable to the levels reported elsewhere(4).
4.0
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES
4.01
Impact and Mitigation : Construction Phase

The main Plants units of the project will be establish in 608.5 ha of area which includes
exclusion zone of 1 km around the reactor building of the main plant of the project. For land
acquisition, R&R policy 2010 of Government of Haryana agreed with local bodies / PAPs will
be implemented in phases. Only land Oustees and no homestead population involved. A
total of 979 PAPs due to land acquisition. For acquisition of the private land, R&R policy
2010 of Haryana - shall be followed. No forest land is involved in the project.
4.02
Impacts and Mitigation : Project Design

The HAPP is being envisaged based on the state of art technology as presently available in
the country. A number of environment friendly / safety features have been envisaged which
ensures that the anticipated adverse environmental impacts are either avoided or minimized.
The basic design of the Atomic Power Plant allows for
a. Normal Releases of radioactive or chemical pollutants to the environment within
statutory limits.
b. There could be accidents, off normal situations with potential for large uncontrolled
releases are minimized with probability of occurrence within statutory limit.
The first approach aims to avert such situations to the best extent possible. This is done by
monitoring and rigorously controlling the plant operating conditions.
The second approach aims at designing the facility with multilayer of safety system in such a
way that even if the event were to occur, the resulting unplanned releases are contained as
far as practical. Provisions are made for directing the releases along planned flow paths,
thereby permitting their collection and treatment before discharge to the environment. This is
facilitated by handling / processing radioactive material in confined space, the confinement
being assured by providing multiple barriers between the environment and the radiation
sources. The multiple barrier approach is applied not only in processing, but also in storage
of hazardous materials / wastes.
Apart from the steps taken to avert / contain unplanned releases, the design provides for the
reduction of pollution burden by minimizing the quantum of wastes generated in normal
operation also.
The concept of defense-in-depth is adopted in design of safety systems, various state of the
art safety systems mechanisms are engineered to ensure safe operation of the reactor, viz
Barriers to radioactive release:

Multiple series of fission product barriers designed to prevent radioactivity release, viz.
i) Fuel matrix
ii) Fuel sheath
iii) Primary Heat Transport System
iv) Containment
Page ES-7 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Special safety zones :

The entire operating island is designed to be divided into 3 distinct zones based on the
contamination potential. These zones have been designated as Zone-1, Zone-2 and
Zone-3 in the ascending order of contamination potential. These zones are equipped
with required safety features to limit the potential radiation within limits.
Exclusion zone
Double containment structures with liner on inner containment wall of Reactor Building,
Containment spray cooling system,
Emergency core cooling system,
Reactor shut down systems etc.
Reactor protection system ensures shutdown requirements through two independent fast
acting shut down systems.
Reactor regulating system enables automatic control of reactor power and maintains
neutron flux profile.
4.03
Operational Phase Impact
4.3.1
Radio-active Releases
The uranium dioxide (UO2) is used as fuel. At normal operating conditions all solid fission
products are permanently retained in UO2 matrix and only a fraction of noble gases and
volatile products diffuse into the inter space between fuel and cladding. Waste management
operations (liquid and solid), involves handling of radioactive wastes from all the facilities for
their ultimate storage/disposal.
All the processes / operations are carried out in leak tight enclosures, under negative
pressure so that the probability of the radioactive materials reaching the working
environment is reduced to a minimum. However, a small fraction of these radio-nuclides are
released into the environment in the form of gaseous emissions and liquid effluents are
released into the environment within statutory limit.
The radiation dose limit specified by AERB for the general pubic at the fence post (exclusion
zone) due to operation of all facilities within the site through all pathways is 1 mSv/yr (100
mrem/y). Compliance to this regulatory requirement is ensured by dose apportionment
estimation for different types of radio-nuclides of all the facilities. The dose apportionment
estimation implicitly specifies discharge limits for each kind of anticipated radionuclide. A
conservative estimate of dose apportionment of radioactivity released from HAPP has been
done as 0.40 mSv for the twin-unit 700-MWe HAPP.
Radioactive Air Emissions
Impacts:
The radioactivity through air route will be discharged within AERB limit which will not cause
any adverse impact to surrounding life systems.
Mitigation Measures
Design of the plant is based on minimizing the leakages from the plant system in to plant
buildings so that generation of radioactive effluents is minimized.
Gaseous radioactive effluents from reactor and service building ventilation exhaust
systems are passed through pre filters and absolute filters (to confine any radioactive
materials in the exhaust streams) before discharge through the 100m ventilation stack.
Page ES-8 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Gaseous effluents are continuously monitored for radioactivity content before discharging
through ventilation stack.
Radioactive Liquid Effluent Discharges

Impacts
Effluent waste containing radioactivity levels above AERB norms if discharged to
receiving water bodies may cause radiation exposure to canal biota and downstream
users of the canal water.
The cooling water if discharged at high temperature may cause concern to the flora and
fauna in the receiving water bodies.
Mitigation Measures
Design of the plant is based on minimizing the radioactive leakages from the plant system
in to plant buildings to minimized generation of radio-active effluents.
Designed radioactive waste management facilities will treat different levels of radioactive
effluents to meet the authorized release limits stipulated by AERB.
Total Dilution water to be discharged will be 5320 m3/hr, which will be continuously
monitored for radioactivity levels. .
Periodical monitoring of receiving water body water quality at up-gradient and down
gradient of the effluent discharge point.
Radio-active Solid Waste Disposal
Radioactive solid waste will be segregated at source depending upon its nature
(compactable / non-compactable) and surface dose rate.
Impacts
Solid waste generated from different units to the tune of 514m3/yr will not cause radiation
dose to the member of public beyond AERB approved Dose limit as it will be segregated,
handled and disposed off with the application of advanced technology.
Mitigation Measures
Treatment and disposal of radioactive solid waste at the plant is carried out as per AERB
/ SG / D-13.
Solid wastes will be transported to Waste Management Plant (WMP) in shielded
containers / casks, for treatment / conditioning (if needed) and then will be disposed off in
engineered barriers (trenches, vaults and holes) at the Near Surface Disposal Facility
(NSDF).
Packages having higher activity will be disposed off at the bottom of trenches / vaults
and will be suitably sealed permanently as per established practices.
The NSDF area will be fenced and necessary access control procedures will be
established.
The dose rate on the top of the sealed earth trenches and RCC trenches / vaults will not
exceed 0.01 mGy/h.
4.3.2
Conventional Pollutants
Air Environment : Impacts
No direct use of fossil fuel in the plant process. However, for each unit of 700MWe there are
4 DG sets (1w + 3 stand by), for use during power failure. Each DG set is of capacity 4.2 MW
(sufficient for supplying power to one 700MWe reactor unit) with fuel (HSD) consumption of
979kg/hr. Thus 4 DG set will run for 24 hours during emergency power failure situation.
Page ES-9 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
The resultant ambient air concentrations if the DG sets are run for 24 hrs continuously has
been presented in Table 3 for PM, SO2 & NOx. The values of different parameters are well
within the National Ambient Air Quality norms. Thus there will not be any adverse changes in
AAQ in the study area due to the project.
Table 3: Expected Ambient Air Quality after Proposed Plant
Monitored
Anticipated Maximum contribution of
AAQ after
(Max. C98)
pollutants in g/m3 due to proposed plant
proposed plant
(g/m3)
(g/m3)
(maximum GLC occurrence co-ordinate)
Four DG sets of 4.2 MW capacity each during emergency running continuously for 24 hrs
RPM
87.0
1.5 (18, 2.5km)
88.5
SO2
19.0
1.29 (17, 2.5km)
20.3
NOx
40.0
1.3 (17, 2.5km)
41.3
*Concentrations are in g/m3 and of 24 hours averaging time. Values in the parenthesis indicate
the coordinates of the grid points in Km (10, 10 km) is the centre of the plant.
Pollutants
Mitigation Measures
During the design phase all efforts have been made to adopt latest state of art technology
and to install adequate pollution control measures for point and fugitive emission sources so
as to meet the MOE&F / CPCB air emission norms. The following mitigation measures will
be employed to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of pollution control systems.
Air monitoring in the Work-zone.
Adequate plantation in and around different units and around the plant.
Monitoring of ambient air quality (AAQ).
4.3.3
Water Environment: Impacts

The plant water requirement will be 4.5 m3/hr per MWe, with cycle of concentration (COC)
as 3, to be met from Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra Canal. Necessary permission has been
accorded from Government of Haryana. About 18000m3/hr water will be required for unit 1
to 4, out of which 12680 m3/hr will be towards consumptive use and the rest of the 5320
m3/hr will be returned to canal. Total sewage generated from township will be about 34
m3/hr and from plant will be 3.5m3/hr. No impact on ground water is envisaged as ground
water will not be drawn. Plant operation does not have any impact on drainage pattern and
expected to remain as it is.
Mitigation Measures
Effluent quality monitoring at inlet and outlets of STP in plant and in township. The STP
treated water will be used for green belt development in the respective areas and only
the excess will be discharged.
In addition, rain water harvesting and monitoring of ground water levels in and around
the area of the proposed project will be done.
4.3.4
Solid Waste Disposal: Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The Hazardous wastes like active Organic Liquid waste like Oil, lubricants, scintillation liquid
etc are burnt along with low radioactive level solid waste in incinerator, with burning capacity
20 kg/hr consuming 50 liter/hr furnace oil. The incinerator will be operated for 2 to 3 days per
month. The flue gas will passed through two stage water scrubber. The ash and scrubbing
water after solidification / embedment in cement will disposed in RCC trenches. Continuous
monitoring system is provided to monitor the gas emitted from the chimney. The Lead Acid
Battery generated will be sold to registered recyclers.
Page ES-10 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
4.3.5
Noise Levels: Impacts

Considering the attenuation due to specially designed building within which noise generating
machineries will be housed, the increase in noise levels will be around 1-2 dB(A) just outside
the building. Thus, there will not be any change in the ambient noise levels due to operation
of nuclear power plant. Noise in the work place generated from operation of equipment is the
only concern.
Mitigation Measures:
All the equipment in different units designed/operated that the noise level will not exceed
85 dB (A) at a distance of 1m.
The noise generating equipments are housed in acoustic enclosures / buildings. The
presence of exclusion zone (1 km) with greenbelt will serve to insulate generated noise.
Periodical monitoring of work zone noise and outside plant premises.
4.3.6
Workers exposed to noise level will be provided with protection devices like earmuffs and
will be deployed with rotational duties.
All workers will be regularly checked medically for any noise related health problem and
if detected, they will be provided with alternative duty.
Impact of Transportation
During construction stage there will be only marginal increase in traffic load on the road
leading to the project site, thus no impact is anticipated due to the same. However, the over
sized consignment maximum one vehicle per day will be plying on the road. For catering to
oversized consignment, the road leading to project site will be adequately widened and
strengthened.
During operation phase, the increase in vehicular movement for manpower transportation
from township to the plant (4 km), there will be some increase in traffic load only for short
duration during the opening and closing time of main shift office hours. Thus no congestion
of traffic on the road leading to project site is envisaged.
4.3.7
Ecological Features: Impact

After the plant operation, the maximum predicted SO2 levels is 20 ug/m3 and NOx level is
41ug/m3, which is well below the permissible SO2 and NOx levels for sensitive areas.
Thus it is expected that the flora and fauna in the study area will not get affected.
Noise generated due to the project may cause disturbance to the faunal species.
Strong light in the project premises during night may cause disturbance to the fauna in
the near by areas.
Mitigation Measures
All technological measures to limit air emissions, waste water discharge and noise
generation are envisaged in the proposed plant design.
An elaborate green belt / cover has been planned within and around the plant covering
about 33% of the project area to ameliorate the fugitive emissions and noise from the
project operation.
The STP waste water after treatment will be used for gardening, plant road dust
suppression, etc.and only excess water will be discharged out side the plant premises.
Mitigation Measures for Reducing Impacts on Faunal Species
Page ES-11 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Direct Disturbance: Ten feet high fencing erected all around the project site and the
green belt erected along the fencing will reduce the impact of direct disturbance.
Noise disturbance to faunal species: All technological measures to reduce noise
generation envisaged in plant design, moreover the green belt along the project boundary
will reduce the noise level.
Strong Light during Night: All the light posts erected along the boundary will face
inwards and down wards to reduce light spread out side the plant boundary.
4.3.8
Occupational Safety and Health: Impacts

Negligence in plant operations may cause risk to safety and health problems.
Mitigation Measures
4.3.9
Proper control of fugitive dust from sources inside plant including open stockyards. The
dust in work zone will be regularly monitored and reported for necessary control action.
Based on the environmental monitoring for dust, gases, radioactivity levels, noise &
vibration, the workers exposed to these will be regularly checked in medical unit and
results will be intimated to management.
Spot cooling facilities for workers exposed to high heat generating shops and will be
checked periodically.
Socio-economic Impacts
Advantages
i.
Project may generate more employment, directly and indirectly, and major portion of
it may be provided to the local people.
ii. Development of business opportunity in the area.
iii. Development of infrastructure facilities including roads may help in improving the
whole area.
iv. Improvement in living standard.
Disadvantages
ii. The releases from the plant during normal as well as off normal situations will be
maintained within the AERB approved limits and hence will not cause any advense
impact in the public domain.
iii. People perceive that the increase in pollution may cause damage to agriculture and
damage to health of people due to pollution.
iv. Loss of agricultural land.
Mitigation Measures
The community development efforts of the project for its stakeholders will fulfill their
aspirations.
The project will have structured interactions with the community to disseminate the
measures taken by the plant and also to elicit suggestions for overall improvement for
the development of the area.
Proper compensation to the Project Affected Persons (PAP).
More Higher secondary schools
Dispensaries / Health Centers and availability of doctors and other para-medical staff
Drinking water supply schemes
Page ES-12 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
Loan facility for self employment to open petty shops, purchase of cycle rickshaws,
agricultural tools and implements, bullock carts, fertilizers, improved seeds and digging
of well for irrigation.
4.3.10 Impacts During Decommissioning Phase

At the end of the operating life of 60 years of different units, a detail decommissioning plan
will be worked out as per AERB to bring the land to its original use, which will ensure that no
radioactive releases exists in the public domain / environment.
4.3.11 Impacts and Mitigation Measures Because of Accidents
A detailed risk assessment, on-site emergency plans & Disaster Management Plan has been
made to take care of any on-site emergency. In addition, regular mock drills will be
conducted to check the effectiveness of the system. An offsite Disaster Management Plan
will be prepared in consultation with District Authorities before the plant operation.
4.4

A total of about 35% of total project area will be developed as green belt or green areas in
project area.
5.0
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

All the environmental aspects will be regularly monitored by Technical Services Unit and
Environmental Survey laboratory (ESL), HPD, BARC. The two will ensure the
implementation and effectiveness / monitoring of various mitigative measures envisaged /
adopted. An Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC), comprising of
senior management level officers will periodically assess and monitor the implementation of
mitigation measures and environmental monitoring programme, and tackle the bottlenecks of
the implementation of mitigation measures.
6.0
RISK ASSESSMENT
The major chemicals which will be stored by the project is only High Speed Diesel Oil (HSD).
However, the handled quantity is well below the lower threshold limit. Accordingly only rule
17 (of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical (Amendment) Rules, 1989
and its Amendment Rules 2000) applies, i.e. preparation and maintenance of material safety
data sheets are required and has been taken care off.
7.0
BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES

The estimated capital cost of the proposed project is around Rs 23502 Crores (base cost
2011-12).and the item wise estimated cost towards environmental protection and
enhancement measures are given in Table Es. 4.
SN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.0
Table Es 4: Cost of Environmental Protection Measures (Rs. Crores):

Environmental Protection Measures
Capital Cost
Recurring Cost / Annum
Pollution Control Radiological Aspects
2350
40.0
Pollution Control - Conventional Aspects
15.0
0.3
Environmental Pollution Monitoring
30.0
1.2
Green Belt for 200 ha. 1.5 lakhs / ha.
3.0
0.3
Social Welfare Measures
1.5
0.3
Total
2399.5
42.1
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
Page ES-13 of ES-14

Executive Summary
Executive Summary
The plant is designed with latest state of art technology so as to achieve minimum
radioactive releases (within AERB norm) from air and water route and minimal release of
conventional pollutants emitted from plant operation in form of air emissions, waste water
and noise levels. Further, maximum re-use wastewater has been envisaged.
The EIA report has thoroughly assessed all the potential environmental impacts associated
with the project. The environmental impacts identified by the study are manageable. Site
specific and practically suitable mitigation measures are recommended to mitigate the
impacts and to comply with AERB stipulation with considerable margin. Further, a suitably
designed monitoring plan has been provided to monitor and control the effectiveness of
envisaged mitigation measures during the operation phase.
Page ES-14 of ES-14

Executive Summary

AT GORKHAPUR HARYANA
CHAPTER 1 : INTRODUCTION
1.1
GENERAL
The report is an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report for the proposed 4X700
MWe PHWR Haryana Atomic Power Project (HAPP) of Nuclear Power Corporation of
India Limited (NPCIL). The report is prepared as per the procedure specified in the EIA
2006 Notification of Ministry of Forest and Environment (MoE&F).
1.2
PURPOSE OF THE EIA REPORT

In pursuance of Government of India policy vide Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986
new projects or expansion of any existing plant necessitates statutory prior
environmental clearance in accordance with the objectives of National Environmental
Policy as approved by the Union Cabinet on 18th May, 2006 and MoE&F EIA Notification
dated 14.09.06, by preparing Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report.
In view of the above, the EIA report for HAPP has been prepared taking into
consideration the requirement and guidelines of MOE&F.
The objective of the EIA study report is to take stock of the prevailing quality of
environment, to assess the impacts of proposed industrial activity on environment
including public and to plan appropriate environmental control measures to minimise
adverse impacts and to maximise beneficial impacts of the proposed project. The
following major objectives have been considered:
1.3
1.3.1
Assess the existing baseline status of environment.

Assess the impacts due to the proposed project.
Suggest pollution control and ameliorative measures to minimise the impacts.
Prepare an action plan for implementation of suggested ameliorative measures.
Suggest a monitoring programme to assess the efficacy of the various adopted
environmental control measures.
Assess financial considerations for suggested environmental control plans.
Clearances from statutory authorities.
IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT

The Project
NPCIL intends to set up a 4X700 MWe PHWR (Pressurised Heavy Water Reactor)
Atomic Power Project in Haryana State at Fatehabad District at an estimated cost of
around Rs 23502 Crores (base cost 2011-12) for twin units.
Page 1
Chapter 1

1.3.2
Project Proponent
Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited (NPCIL) is a Public Sector Enterprise under
the administrative control of the Department of Atomic Energy (DAE), Government of
India. NPCILs objective is to develop nuclear power technology and to undertake the
activities of design, construction, operation and maintenance of atomic power stations
for generation of electricity in pursuance of the schemes and programme of the
Government of India under the provisions of Atomic Energy Act, 1962. NPCILs
emphasis is to produce Nuclear Power as a safe, environmentally benign and
economically viable source of electrical energy to meet the increasing needs of the
country.
1.4
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Role of AERB on Establishment of Nuclear Power Project

Since the inception of Atomic Energy Programme in the country, importance has been
given to the adoption and maintenance of high safety standards. In order to enforce
safety standards, the Government of India constituted AERB in November 1983. AERB
is entrusted with the responsibilities for laying down safety standards and framing rules
and regulations covering regulatory and safety functions envisaged under the Atomic
Energy Act-1962. AERB has also been empowered as an enforcing agency in respect
of implementation and monitoring aspects (including for industrial safety) of Factory Act
1948.
While undertaking the activities of establishment and operation of nuclear power plant,
the safety of workers, public and the environment is to be ensured, and this is achieved
through compliance with the relevant provisions of the Atomic Energy Act-1962. AERB
has developed safety standards, codes, guides and manuals for nuclear facilities,
covering all aspects such as siting, design, construction, operation, quality assurance,
de-commissioning and regulation thereof. The details of these are presented in Table
1.1a to 1.1d.
Safety standards contain internationally accepted safety criteria for design, construction
and operation of specific equipment, systems, structures and components of nuclear and
radiation facilities. Safety codes are intended to establish objectives and to set minimum
requirements that shall be fulfilled to provide adequate assurance for safety in nuclear
and radiation facilities.
AERB strongly emphasizes and regulate the reduction in generation, treatment,
handling, monitoring, disposal & safe storage of radioactive waste generated in a nuclear
facility.
The major stages of AERBs consenting process for Nuclear Power Plants are as
follows:
(a) Siting
(b) Construction
Page 2
Chapter 1

(c)
(d)
(e)
Commissioning
Operation
De-commissioning
Safety in siting, construction, commissioning and operation of the NPPs is ensured by

AERB through regulatory actions including granting of consent for activities to the facility.
Regulatory body performs its activities on the basis of its review and assessment. In
general, a three-tier review process is followed by regulatory body before any major
activity concerning Nuclear Power Project / station is granted consent.
The AERB also monitors the status on various statutory clearances. During various
submissions and discussions with AERB, the status on stipulations on various statuary
clearances and its compliance report is required to be submitted. During its regulatory
inspections programme, the inspection team of AERB verifies the status of compliance
of rules / stipulations at site.
1.4.2 Consent for Siting for the Proposed Project
The process of Siting for the proposed Haryana Atomic Power Project (HAPP) involves
statutory clearances from:
Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoE&F)
Atomic Energy Regulatory Board(AERB)
Consent for Siting from Ministry of Environment & Forests
In order to comply with the requirements of Ministry of Environment of Forests (MOE&F),
Government of India, The Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited entrusted the work
of Environmental Impact Assessment Study (EIA) to MECON Limited, Ranchi with a
view to establish the baseline status with respect to various environmental components
viz. air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-economic including parameters of human
interest and to evaluate and predict the potential impacts due to the proposed activities
and advise appropriate Environment Management Plan (EMP).
Consent for Siting from AERB
The process of Siting Consent by AERB is based on the AERB Safety Code No.
AERB/SC/S (Code of practice on Safety in Nuclear Power Plant Siting). This Safety
Code defines the criteria for selection of sites for nuclear power plant, effects of site
characteristics on plant and impact of nuclear power plant on site. The main objective of
this siting consent review of AERB is from the point of view of Nuclear Safety to ensure
safe construction and operation of the nuclear power plant and to provide protection of
the public and environment against the radiological impact resulting from unlikely event
of release of radioactive materials during operation. The objective is achieved by
ensuring:
a) The risk to the nuclear power plant due to external events should not exceed the
range of risk associated with accidents of internal origin.
b) The possible radiological impact of a nuclear power plant on the environment should
be acceptably low for normal operation and accident conditions and within the
stipulated criteria for radiological safety.
Page 3
Chapter 1

For evaluating the suitability of the site for locating the Nuclear Power Plant,
following are the major aspects that are considered.
i) Effect of external events (natural and man-induced) on the plant
ii) Effect of plant on environment and public
iii) Implementation of emergency procedures particularly protective counter measures
in the public domain.
The Site Evaluation Committee conducts its review based on the AERB Safety Code
No. AERB/SC/S.
Other Consents and Authorizations
The lists of consents / authorizations that have to be obtained and maintained for HAPP
are given in Table 1.2. These authorizations / consents shall be obtained prior to start of
construction or before the actual occurrence of the activity whichever is early.
Table 1.1a:
Safety Codes/Guides for Regulation of Nuclear and Radiation Facilities
AERB Safety
Code/Guide Number
AERB/SG/G-1
AERB/SG/G-2
AERB/SG/G-3
AERB/SG/G-4
AERB/SG/G-5
AERB/SG/G-6
AERB/SG/G-7
AERB/SG/G-8
Title
Consenting Process for Nuclear Power Plants and Research Reactors:
Documents Submission, Regulatory Review and Assessment of Consent
Applications.
Consenting Process for Nuclear Fuel Cycle and Related Industrial Facilities:
Documents Submission, Regulatory Review and Assessment of Consent
Applications.
Consenting Process for Radiation Facilities: Documents Submission,
Regulatory Review and Assessment Of Consent Applications.
Regulatory Inspection and Enforcement in Nuclear and Radiation Facilities.
Role of Regulatory Body with respect to Emergency Response and
Preparedness at Nuclear and Radiation Facilities.
Codes, Standards and Guides to be Prepared by the Regulatory Body for
Nuclear and Radiation Facilities.
Regulatory Consents for Nuclear and Radiation Facilities: Contents & Format
Criteria for Regulation of Health and Safety of Nuclear Power Plant
Personnel, the Public and the Environment
Table 1.1b:Safety Codes/Guides for Nuclear Power Plant Siting

AERB Safety
Code/Guide Number
AERB/SC/S
AERB/SG/S-1
AERB/SG/S-2
AERB/SG/S-3
AERB/SG/S-4
AERB/SG/S-5
AERB/SG/S-6A
AERB/SG/S-6B
AERB/SG/S-7
AERB/SG/S-8
Title
Code of Safety in Siting of NPPs
Meteorological Dispersion Modeling
Hydrological dispersion of Radioactive Materials in relation to Nuclear Power
Plant Siting
Extreme value Analysis for Meteorological Parameters
Hydro-geological Aspects related to NPP Siting
Calculation Models for Dose from Concentrations
Design Basis Flood for Inland Sites
Design Basis Flood for Coastal Sites
Man induced events and establishment of DBs
Influence of Site Parameters on Emergency Preparedness
Page 4
Chapter 1

AERB Safety
Code/Guide Number
AERB/SG/S-9
AERB/SG/S-10
AERB/SG/S-11
Title
Population Distribution and its Analysis
Quality Assurance in Siting
Design Basis Ground Motion for Nuclear Power Plant Sites
Table 1.1c:Safety Codes/Guides for Operation of Nuclear Power Plants

AERB Safety
Code/Guide Number
AERB/SC/O
AERB/SG/O-1
AERB/SG/O-2
AERBSG/O-3
AERB/SG/O-4
AERB/SG/O-5
AERB/SG/O-6
AERB/SG/O-7
AERB/SG/O-8
AERB/SG/O-9
AERB/SG/O-10A
AERB/SG/O-10B
AERB/SG/O-11
AERB/SG/O-12
AERB/SG/O-13
AERB/SG/O-14
AERB/NF/SM/O-1
Title
Code of Practice on Safety in NPP Operation
Training & Qualification of Operating Personnel of NPPs
ISI of NPPs
Operational Limits and Conditions for NPPs
Commissioning of NPPs
Radiation Protection during Operation of NPP
Preparedness of the Operating Organization for Emergencies at NPPs
Maintenance and Modifications of NPPs
Surveillance of Items Important to Safety in NPPs
Management of NPPs for Safe Operation
Core Management and Fuel Handling for Heavy Water Reactor Based NPPs
Core Management and Fuel Handling for Boiling Water Reactor Based NPPs
Operational Management of Radioactive
Effluents and Wastes Arising in NPPs
Renewal Of Authorisation for Operation of NPPs
Operational Experience Feedback for NPPs
Life Cycle Management of NPPs
Probabilistic Safety Assessment Guidelines
Table 1.1d: Safety Codes/Guides for Quality Assurance

AERB Safety
Code/Guide Number
AERB/SC/QA
AERB/SG/QA-1
AERB/SG/QA-2
AERB/SG/QA-3
AERB/SG/QA-4
AERB/SG/QA-5
AERB/SG/QA-6
AERB/SG/QA-7
AERB/SG/QA-8
AERB/SG/QA-9
Title
Code of Practice on QA for Safety in NPPs
Quality assurance in the design of nuclear power plants.
Quality assurance in procurement of items and services for nuclear power
plants.
Quality assurance in the manufacture of items for nuclear power plants.
Quality assurance during site construction of nuclear power plants.
Quality assurance during Commissioning and Operation of nuclear power
plants.
Assessment of Implementation of QA Program
Establishing and Implementing QA Program
Non-conformance control and Corrective Actions
Documents and Records
Page 5
Chapter 1

Table 1.2: List of Consents / Authorizations

SN.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Aspect
Regulatory Consent for Siting
Regulatory Consents for
Construction.
Excavation
First pour of concrete
Erection of Major Equipment
Commissioning
Regulatory Consents for Operation
Authorization for Power Generation.
6.
Authorization for Storage and

Import of Hazardous Chemicals
7.
Authorization for safe disposal of

Radioactive Waste
Authorization for transfer/safe
disposal of Radioactive Waste
Environmental Clearance
Consent to establish plant
8.
9
10.
11.
Authorization for Storage and

Disposal of Hazardous Waste
12.
Consent to Discharge emissions in

to air
Consent to Discharge effluent in to
Water
13.
14
18
Bulk Consumers of Batteries as per

Form VIII of Batteries Rules 2001
License to Import & Export
Petroleum
License to store petroleum in tank
or tanks in connection with pump
out fit for filling motor conveyances
License to Store Compressed Gas
in Cylinders.
Inspection of Electrical Installations
19
Lifts / Elevators
20.
Vehicle Registration / PUC
21.
Fixed & Portable Mobile / wireless

hand sets
15
16.
17.
Legislation reference
Atomic Energy Act 1962
Issuing authority
AERB
AERB
AERB

Section 6 of Factory Act-1948
read in conjunction of Atomic
Energy Act 1962
Manufacture, Storage & Import
of Hazardous Chemicals Rule
1989 (Amendment Rule 2000)
AERB
AERB
AERB
Environment Protection Act 1986

Water Act 1974 and Air Act 1981
MoE&F
State Pollution Control
Board
Board
Hazardous Waste (Management,

Handling & Trans-boundary
Movement) Rule-2008
Air (Prevention & Control of
Pollution) Act-1981
Water (Prevention & Control of
Pollution) Act-1974 as amended
up to 1978
Batteries (Handling and
Management) Rule 2001
Petroleum Act-1934
--
Storage of Gas Cylinder Act1981

Indian Electricity Act 1910/1948
& Indian Electricity Rules 1956
State Lift and Escalator Rules
(Latest)
Motor Vehicle Act-1936
--
AERB
AERB

Board
Board
Board
Chief Controller of
Explosives
Chief Controller of
Explosives
Chief Controller of
Explosives
Central Electricity
Authority.
Chief Inspector,
Energy Department.
Regional Transport
Officer.
Ministry of
Communication.
Page 6
Chapter 1

1.5
1.5.1
PROJECT BREIF
Importance of the Project
National
The development of power generation projects plays a key role in the economic growth
of a country. Power is the most important and crucial factor for growth and development.
Per capita electricity consumption is a major indicator of economic status of a country
and an index of industrial prosperity.
The development of the power sector in the country since independence has been
predominantly through the thermal and hydro power plants. Electric power generation
through nuclear power plant is essential and the need of the hour as coal reserves are
limited and only hydro power generation will not be able to meet the growing countries
demand of power in future. Hence setting up of new nuclear power plants is inevitable.
Although several new power projects of diversified energy sources have been identified
by Government of India with a view to bridge the gap between the demand and
availability, only a few could be taken up for implementation due to financial and other
constraints. This has resulted in large shortfall in the availability of both peak power and
energy as per 17th Electric Power Survey carried out by Central Electricity Authority
(CEA). The present demand for electrical power continues to grow and will continue to
outstrip the available and planned generation capacity leading to chronic shortage of
available power and energy in the future years.
Nuclear power is the fourth-largest source of electricity in the country after thermal,
hydroelectric and renewable sources of electricity. In the country, as on April 2012, 20
nuclear reactors with a total capacity of 4780 MWe are in operation - generating 4,680
(excluding Rajasthan Atomic Power Station (RAPS) 1 MWe while seven numbers of
reactors are under construction with this the total installed capacity will be 10080 MWe.
The nuclear power industry in the country is undergoing rapid expansion with plans to
increase nuclear power output to 63,000 MWe by 2032.
Considering the increasing demand of electricity, NPCIL intends to install a 4X700MWe
PHWR atomic power project at Gorakhpur, District Fatehabad, Haryana. NPCIL is well
positioned to fulfill its role in the nations quest for higher growth and development in the
new millennium.
Regional
The growth of industry significantly contributes to economic growth of the Nation as well
as to the region as it generates employment both directly and also due to development
of infrastructure and market. The infrastructural and other social amenities grow in the
region leading to overall development of the region. Establishment of the proposed
atomic power plant at Fatehabad District will promote the overall development of the
region and will reduce coal transportation from large distances for land locked Northern
Grid.
Page 7
Chapter 1

1.5.2
The planned project will use state of art technology which will result in manufacture of
products at a lower cost and more importantly in an environment friendly way.
Background
The site has been approved by Govt. of India based on the recommendation of the site
selection committee constituted by Government of India for identifying suitable sites for
Nuclear power projects and assigned to NPCIL through an authorization by Department
of Atomic Energy (DAE) to establish NPP units (Annexure IA). During site selection /
approval process, as a procedural requirement Haryana Government granted
permission for Harayana Atomic Power Plant (HAPP) which implicitly grants
administrative approval for acquisition of land and power connectivity for construction
and operation of HAPP.
MoE&F accorded Terms of Reference (TOR for conducting EIA study for the project at
Gorakhpur site in the 9th meeting of the Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) on
Environmental Appraisal of Nuclear Power Projects of Ministry of Environment & Forest
(MoE&F) held on 21st September 2010
1.5.3
Location of the Project

The proposed site is at village Gorakhpur, Tehsil Fatehabad, District Fatehabad,
Haryana.
The proposed site and study area of 10km radius is covered in the Survey of India Toposheets No. H43 P/7, H43 P/11, H43 P/8 & H 43 P/12. The geographical co-ordinates of
the proposed site is longitude 750 37 56 E and latitude 290 26 30 N. The proposed site
is about 28 km away in NW direction of Fatehabad District Headquarters. NH 10 passes
about 6 km from the project site, connecting Hisar to Fatehabad. Hisar Railway station
(North-Western Railways - connecting New Delhi to Firojpur and Jaipur to Amritsar) is
about 30 kms on the southern side of the project site.
The nearest Airports to the plant site are at Hisar (a small air port, presently used for
Helicopter training purpose) located at a distance of about 40 km from the plant site and
Indira Gandhi International Airport, Delhi is about 208 km from project site. The
Bhakhara Canal (Fatehabad Branch) flows from east to west towards north close to the
site. There is no major industry within 10 km of the project site. The Index map showing
the location of the plant site is shown in Figure 2.1.
1.5.4

The proposed project falls under the category of "Nuclear Power Project and Processing
of Nuclear Fuel". The proposed plant of NPCIL will produce 4X700 MWe electricity.
1.6
SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY

The following Terms of Reference (TOR) for EIA study (Copy of the same is presented
in Annexure-IC, Volume II) has been finalised and approved in the 9th meeting of the
Page 8
Chapter 1

Expert Appraisal Committee on Environmental Appraisal of Nuclear Power

Projects of Ministry of Environment & Forest held on 21st September 2010 (vide letter
no: J-14011/2/2010-IA.II (N) dated 13.10.2010) and the point wise coverage of the TOR
in the EIA report is referenced in the Table 1.3, Index to MOE&F TOR Coverage In
the EIA Report .
Table 1.3 : Index to MoE&F TOR Coverage in the EIA Report
SN
1.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)

Based on the presentation made and held, the Committee
prescribed the following TORs for undertaking detailed EIA
study :A note on site selection should be given in EIA report.
The data contained in EIA report for the ultimate capacity of
the plant.
All the co-ordinates of the plant site as well as the township
with toposheet should be given.
The study area should cover an area of 10km radius around
the proposed site for conventional pollutants and 30 km
radius for radiological parameters.
Land use of the study area as well as project area shall be
given separately.
Location of any National Park, Sanctuary, Elephant / Tiger
Reserve (existing as well as proposed), migratory routes, if
any, within 10km of the project site shall be specified and
marked on the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife
Warden.
Land requirement for the project, along with usage for
different purposes should be given. It should give information
relating to right of way (ROW), if required for pipeline etc, as
well as details of township.
Location of intake as well as outfall points (with coordinates)
should be given.
Topography of the area should be given clearly indicating
whether the site requires filling. If so, details of filling, quantity
of fill material required, its source, transportation etc. should
be given.
Impact on drainage of the area and surroundings should be
given.
Information regarding surface hydrology and water regime
and impact of the same, if any due to the project should be
given.
One season site specific meteorological data shall be
provided.
One complete season AAQ data (except monsoon) to be
given along with the dates of monitoring for the purpose of the
EIA report for obtaining environmental clearance; however,
data collection should continue for entire one year (three
seasons). The parameters to be covered shall include PM2.5,
PM10, SO2 and NOx. Besides, conventional pollutants
COVERAGE IN EIA REPORT

Chapter 2
Section 2.17.1, Chapter 2.

No National Park, Sanctuary,
Elephant / Tiger Reserve
(existing as well as proposed),
migratory routes, present
within 10km radius of the site.
Section 2.6, Chapter 2.
Section 2.19.1, Table 2.5,

Chapter 2
Section 5.4.2, Chapter 5
Refer Section 5.5.3.3, Chapter

5
Refer Cause 4.5, Chapter 4 &
5.5.3.2, Chapter 5
Refer Section 4.2.1, Chapter 4
For AAQ refer Cause 4.2.2,
Chapter 4.
For radio-nuclides and
background natural radio
activity, Section 4.3, Chapter
Page 9
Chapter 1

SN
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
xxii)
xxiii)
xxiv)

information on long lived radio nuclides and background
natural radio activity, gross alpha and gross beta levels
should also be given. The location of the monitoring stations
should be so decided so as to take in to consideration the
pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive
receptors including reserved forests. There should be at least
one monitoring station in the predominant down wind direction
at a location where maximum ground level concentration is
likely to occur. Baseline data on noise levels may also be
generated.
Impact of the project on the AAQ of the area. Details of the
model used and the input data used for modelling should also
be provided. The air project site, habitation nearby, sensitive
receptors, if any. The wind roses should also be shown on
this map. Levels due to radioactive releases should be
predicted and radiation dose there from at the fence post
should also be worked out.
Source of water and its availability. Commitment regarding
availability of requisite quantity of water from the competent
authority. The availability of water during canal closure should
also be detailed and discussed in the report. It may clearly be
stated whether any groundwater is to be used in the project or
township. If so, detailed hydro-geological study should be
carried out.
Details of rainwater harvesting and how it will be used in the
plant.
Optimization of COC should be done for water conservation.
Other water conservation measures proposed in the project
should also be given. Quality of water requirement of the
project should be optimized.
Details of water balance taking into account reuse and recirculation of effluents.
Details of greenbelt i.e. land with not less than 1500 trees per
ha giving details of species, width of plantation, planning
schedule etc.
Detailed R&R plan/compensation package in consonance
with the National / State R&R Policy for the project affected
people including that due to fuel transportation
system/pipeline and their ROW, if any, shall be prepared
taking into account the socio economic status of the area,
homestead oustees, land oustees, landless laborers.
Details of flora and fauna duly authenticated should be
provided. In case of any scheduled fauna, conservation plan
should be provided.
Details regarding waste management, liquid and solid waste
(conventional and radioactive) should be given in the EIA
report.
Details regarding storage and management of spent fuel
should be given.
Details regarding storage of hazardous chemical including

4.
For baseline noise levels refer
Section 4.2.3., Chapter 4.
For predicted AAQ refer

Predicted radiological releases
Section 5.5.2 Chapter 5.
Refer Cause 2.19, Chapter 2



No ROW required
Refer Section 5.3 & 5.3.4,

Chapter 5, page 2 & 21.
Refer Section 6.3.3.4, Chapter
6
Page 10
Chapter 1

SN

maximum inventory to be stored at any point of time should
be given.
xxv)
Detailed risk assessment and disaster management plan
should be given. The risk contours may be plotted on location
map.
xxvi) Issues relating to de-commissioning of the plant and the
related environmental issues should be discussed.
xxvii) Demographic data of the study area as well as pre-project
health survey of the population in study area around the
project site should be collected.
xxviii) Detailed environmental management plan to mitigate the
adverse environmental impacts due to the project should be
given. It should also include possibility of use of solar energy
for the project including measures for energy conservation.
xxix)
Details of post project monitoring should also include in the

EIA report.
xxx)
Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation,
fuel, restroom, medical facilities, safety during construction
phase etc. to be provided to the labour force during
construction as well as to the casual workers including truck
drivers during operation phase.
xxxi) Public hearing points raised and commitment of the project
proponent on the same. An action plan to address the issues
raised during public hearing and the necessary allocation of
funds for the same should be provided.
xxxii) Measures of socio economic influence to the local community
proposed to be provided by project proponent. As far as
possible, quantitative dimension to be given.
xxxiii) Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such
as road network and whether any additional infrastructure
would need to be constructed and the agency responsible for
the same with time frame particularly keeping in view the
transportation of over sized consignments should be given.
xxxiv) EMP to mitigate the adverse impacts due to the project along
with item wise cost of its implementation.
xxxv) Any litigation pending against the project and /or any direction
/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so,
details thereof.
2.
In respect of the township, the following TORs are prescribed
for addressing the same in the EIA report.
i)
A site plan showing the project site and its surroundings with
physical features and topographical details, such as land use,
contours and drainage pattern, along with photographs of the
site from all four sides, shall be examined in detail.
ii)
If the site is low lying and will require extra earth, examine the
quantity required and identify the area from where the earth
will be borrowed and whether any permission will be required
or not.
iii)
Examine in detail the proposed site with reference to impact
Refer Chapter 9
Section 5.8, Chapter 5,

Chapter 6, 7 & 11
For Solar energy refer
Sections 2.28.6 & 2.28.7,
Chapter 2.
Refer Chapter 7 & 11.
Section 5.4.1,
Chapter 5.
To be addressed after public
hearing
Sections 5.5.3.8 & 5.5.3.9,

Chapter 5
Refer Chapter 7
Nil
Section 2.27 and 2.28,

Page 11
Chapter 1

SN
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
3.
a)

on infrastructure covering water supply, storm water drainage,
sewerage, power, etc., and the disposal of treated/ raw
wastes from the complex on land/water body and into
sewerage system.
Consider soil characteristics and permeability for rainwater
harvesting proposals, which should be made with due
safeguards for ground water quality. Maximise recycling of
water and utilisation of rainwater.
Provision should be made for guard pond and other
provisions for safety against failure in the operation of
wastewater treatment facilities. Identify acceptable outfall for
treated effluent.
Examine existing education and health facilities, police and
other services and include adequate provisions in the
proposal.
Study the existing flora and fauna of the area and the impact
of the project on them.
Landscape plan, green belts and open spaces should be
described.
Assess soil erosion in view of the soil characteristics,
topography and rainfall pattern.
Application of renewable energy/alternate energy, such as
solar and wind energy may be described including solar water
heating. Provide for conservation of resources, energy
efficiency and use of renewable sources of energy in the light
of ECBC code.
Arrangements for waste management may be described as
also the common facilities for waste collection, treatment,
recycling and disposal of all effluent, emission and refuse
including MSW. Identification of recyclable wastes and waste
utilisation arrangements may be made.
Traffic management plan including parking and loading /
unloading areas may be described. Traffic survey should be
carried out both on weekdays and weekend.
Use of local building materials should be described.
Application of resettlement and rehabilitation policy may be
described. Project affected persons should be identified and
rehabilitation and resettlement plan should be prepared.
Examine separately the details for construction and operation
phases both for Environmental Management Plan and
Environmental Monitoring Plan.
Examine and prepare in detail the Disaster Management Plan
and emergency Evacuation Plan for natural and manmade
disasters like earthquakes, cyclones/flooding, Tsunami and
terrorists attack.
Besides the above, the below mentioned points will also be
followed:All the information contained in various project documents

Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.4, Chapter2.
For details of Flora & Fauna

refer Section 4.2.6, Chapter 4
& Section 2.27.2, Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.9 & 2.28.10,
Chapter 2.
Section 2.27.1
Section 2.28.6 and 2.28.7,
Chapter 2.
Sections 2.28.1 & 2.28.2,

Chapter 2.
Section 2.28.2, Chapter 2 and

Section 5.5.3.8, Chapter 5.
Section 2.27.3, Chapter 2 and
Section 5.2, Chapter 5, and
Refer Chapter 6, 7 & 11
Section 2.28.11 and Chapter 9

Page 12
Chapter 1

SN

should be rechecked and reconciled.
All documents to be properly referenced with index, page
numbers and continuous page numbering.
Where data are presented in the report especially in tables,
the period in which the data were collected and the sources
should be indicated.
b)
c)
1.7

BASIC DATA GENERATION, FIELD STUDIES AND DATA COLLECTION

This report has been prepared on the basis of three months baseline environmental data
monitored during March May 2011 by field study. The data includes meteorological
conditions, ambient air quality, noise, water quality and soil quality. Site survey has been
conducted for studying the flora and fauna, socio-economic conditions including public
consultation, land use, hydrology, geology, ecology etc. Additional information is also
collected from several agencies and departments, both under State and Central
Governments pertaining to above.
The collected data have been analysed in detail for identifying, predicting and evaluating
the environmental impacts of the proposed project. The maximum anticipated impacts
on environment are assessed and suitable environmental management plan has been
suggested.
In Addition, following special studies have been carried out by independent institutes /
agencies, organized by NPCIL for generation of important baseline data / specific
information required for the subject EIA study, viz.
1.8
Preoperational baseline radiological survey in the area of 30 km around the project

site by Health Physics Division (HPD), Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC), in
the year 2011.
Estimation of Design Basis Flood and Safe Grade Elevation for Nuclear Power
Project at Gorakhpur, Haryana, by National Institute Of Hydrology, Roorkee,
Uttarakhand
Provisional public dose calculation for Twin unit 700 MWe PHWR station at
Gorakhpur, Haryana, by Health Physics Division, BARC.
STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT

This report contains information on the existing environment and evaluates the predicted
environmental and socio-economic impacts of the proposed project. A detailed coverage
of background environmental quality, pollution sources, anticipated environmental
impacts (including socio-economic impacts) and mitigation measures, environmental
monitoring programme, additional studies, project benefits, environmental monitoring
plan and all related aspects have been covered in this report.
The structure of the EIA report has been made as per the requirements of Environmental
Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification 2006 (S. O. 1533). The subject EIA report has
been organized in two volumes viz. Volume I, which consists of main contents of the EIA
Page 13
Chapter 1

studies, whereas the Volume II contains the special study reports (as Annexures) as
carried out by various independent institutes / agencies and other supporting documents.
EIA Volume I consists of the following chapters:
Executive Summary
Chapter 1
Introduction
Chapter 2
Project Description
Chapter 3
Description of the Environment
Chapter 4
Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
Chapter 5
Technologial details of environmental protection measures
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Additional Studies: Public consultation and Socio-economic Studies
Chapter 8
Additional Studies: Risk Assessment Studies
Chapter 9
Project Benefits
Chapter 10
Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
Chapter 11
Summary and Conclusion
Chapter 12
Disclosure of Consultant Engaged
EIA Volume II
The Volume II contains special study reports from the Institutes / Agencies including
supporting documents / Annexures of the Volume I (the main EIA study report) as
presented below :
Annexure IA
Annexure IB
Annexure IC
Annexure ID
Annexure II
Annexure III
:
:
Annexure IVA
Annexure IVB
Annexure IVC
Annexure IVD
:
:
:
:
Annexure V
:
:
Annexure VI :
Annexure VII :
In-principal Approval for Harayana Site form Central Government

Haryana R & R Policy 2010
MoEF Approved TOR for Haryana Atomic Power Project.
Part of presentation to MoEF for approval of TOR
Flood Analysis Report & Safe Grade Elevation of the Site
Commitment of Bhakhra Canal Water Availability from Haryana
Irrigation Department Authorities
Detailed Summer Season Meteorological Data at Gorakhpur
Detailed Summer Season Ambient Air Quality Data in Study Area
Authentication of flora and fauna from State Forest Department.
Authentication of Wild Life that no National Park or Wildlife
Sanctuary exists within the Study Area
Provisional Public Dose calculation for Twin unit 700 Mwe
PHWR Station at Gorkhpur, Haryana, HPD, BARC
Proceedings of Public Hearing and Commitments - English
Proceedings of Public Hearing and Commitments Hindi
Page 14
Chapter 1

CHAPTER 2 : PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1
INTRODUCTION
Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited has developed comprehensive capability in
the Design, Construction, and Operation & Maintenance of Pressurized Heavy Water
Reactors (PHWRs) type of nuclear power reactors. Considering the scenario of power
demand in the country, NPCIL have planned to set up a 4X700 MWe Atomic Power
Project at Gorakhpur Village, in the district of Fatehabad, Haryana.
2.2
TYPE OF PROJECT
The proposed project falls under the project or activity type - "Nuclear Power Project and
Processing of Nuclear Fuel" falling under Category A (as per Ministry of Environment
and Forests (MoE&F) EIA Notification 2006), which requires prior environmental
clearance from the Central Government in the MoE&F. The proposed plant of NPCIL
will produce 4X700 MWe electricity.
2.3
NEED FOR THE PROJECT

The project is needed to fulfill the power demand of the country and to fulfill the chronic
shortage of available power and energy in the future years. In the country, as on April
2012, 20 nuclear reactors with a total capacity of 4780 MWe are in operation generating 4,680 (excluding Rajasthan Atomic Power Station (RAPS) 1 MWe while
seven numbers of reactors are under construction with this the total installed capacity
will be 10080 MWe. The nuclear power industry in the country is undergoing rapid
expansion with plans to increase nuclear power output to 63,000 MWe by 2032.
Considering the increasing demand of electricity and future plan of Government of India,
NPCIL intends to install a 4X700MWe PHWR atomic power project at Gorakhpur,
Fatehabad District, Haryana. NPCIL is well positioned to fulfill its role in the nations
quest for higher growth and development in the new millennium.
2.4
SITE SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS

The Gorakhpur, Fatehabad, Haryana site is considered suitable for setting up multi-unit
NPPs of PHWR category and approved by Government of India in October, 2009. The
site selection is based on the recommendations of Site Selection Committee,
(Constituted by Government of India / Department of Atomic Energy), which is one of the
input among the several other considerations to Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) and
Govt. of India to take final decision on particular site. The site so approved is assigned
to NPCIL through an authorization by Department of Atomic Energy to take further
actions for obtaining statutory clearances from various agencies / Govt. Organizations to
establish NPP units at such site. DAE Authorisation to NPCIL for Gorakhpur site is
presented as Annexure IA. The Site Selection Committee had surveyed the Gorakhpur
site to establish Nuclear Power Project (NPP) by analyzing a number of parameters as
listed hereunder and submitted their recommendations to Govt. of India. As a procedural
requirement the State Government offers a number of sites, complying with the
requirements of NPP site and subsequently site selection committee surveys and
Page 15
Chapter 2

analyses the site with respect to the requirements of NPPs. As the State Government
Haryana has given umbrella consent for establishment of HAPP at Gorakhpur, the
Government subsequently facilitates the administrative approval for acquisition of private
and government land and power connectivity for construction and operation of HAPP.
The parameters analysed by site selection committee while selecting a candidate site:
a. Location and General Area
b. Land availability
c. Available source of cooling water
d. Electrical System
e. Meteorology
f. Population Distribution
g. Land Use
h. Foundation Conditions & Seismicity
i. Flood Analysis & Safe grade elevation at site etc.
j. Solid Waste Management & Radiological Burden
k. Proper access for transportation of heavy / over dimensional equipment.
l. Environment aspects
The site selection committee, during process of site evaluation and while submitting their
recommendations in June 2003, had recommended Gorakhpur site suitable for setting
up of four units of 700 MWe PHWRs in two stages of 2X700MWe PHWRs.
The following are some of the salient features of the proposed site for Atomic Power
Project:
Site Location :
(i) The adequate land required to set up multi unit APPs at Gorakhpur for plant site and
residential complex is being acquired in one go. The land to be acquired for the
plant site and the township involves no displacement of homestead population. Most
of the land being acquired for residential complex is barren.
(ii) Water availability and drawl of cooling water from Fatehabad branch of Bhakra canal
is assured at the site by State Government of Haryana.
(iii) The site is located in the Indo-gangetic alluvial plains with soil made up of both older
and newer alluvium with a thickness estimated to be of the order of about 300m.
The above geological formations are favorable for foundation conditions as required
for APP.
Site Seismicity :
(iv) The site area lies in Seismic Zone-III in the Seismic Zoning Map of India. The
seismo-tectonic study has concluded that there is no capable fault within five
kilometers of the project site. The site is engineer-able from seismo-tectonic
considerations.
Site Elevation :
Page 16
Chapter 2

(v) The ground elevation at plant site varies from RL + 215 m to RL + 218 m. The
detailed analysis / studies have been carried out by National Institute of Hydrology,
Roorkee to arrive at the safe grade elevation for proposed HAPP due to flood. The
maximum flood elevation level due to severe most anywhere within the plant site as
derived through model simulation is 218.1m and has been considered as base flood
elevation and flood submersion line. A free board of 1.0 m has been assumed and
the safe grade elevation has been worked out to be 219.1 m. The safe grade
elevation of 219.1 m is recommended for proposed HAPP site. The detailed report
on Estimation of Design Basis Flood and Safe Grade Elevation for Nuclear Power
Project at Gorakhpur, Haryana as studied by National Institute of Hydrology,
Roorkee, is enclosed as Annexure II.
Power Evacuation :
(vi) Power evacuation in principle is feasible for 2800 MWe power from site. The
Power generated at HAPP will be evacuated through 400 kv transmission system.
The number of transmission outlets and their destination will be finalized taking into
account share of beneficial state in due course after a detailed power system
studies are carried out by PGCIL and approved by the concern authorities.
Population Distribution :
(vii) As per the estimates based on census data 2001, the average population density
within 10 km around the site as estimated for 2011 is about 264 persons / sq .km as
compared to the population density of Haryana State of 478 per km2.
Site Approachability :
(viii) The nearest National Highway is NH-10 at 6 km distance from the site. The nearest
railway station Uklana Mandi (23 km) north-east of the project site on Northern railway
Jalandhar Doab extension.
(ix) The Over Dimensional Consignment (ODC) of APP equipments of HAPP will be
transported by road. Separate studies will be required to be carried out for
improvements of roads for transport of normal consignment of APP units at HAPP.
Site Land-use :
(x) The proposed site for the project is agricultural land whereas the township is almost
barren with no ecologically sensitive areas like National Parks or wild life sanctuary
exists up to 10km from the site.
No industries handling toxic chemicals or
explosives are reported to exist within 10 km. There are no railways sidings or road
transport depots within 10 km. There are no civil or military airports within 50 km
around the site (the nearest Airports to the plant site is at Hisar about 33 km from
the site, small air port - not used for commercial flights). In general, the industrial
activities in the area are practically nil and as such, impact on environment arising
out of human utilization is negligible .
Page 17
Chapter 2

2.5
PROJECT LOCATION
The project site is located in Gorakhpur Village in Bhuna Block of Tehsil, Sub-division
and District Fatehabad of Haryana State. The proposed site is located at geographical
co-ordinates of longitude 750 37 56 E and latitude 290 26 30 N. and situated about
215m -218 m above mean sea level. The site is about 28 km in SE direction of
Fatehabad town which is the district head-quarter of Fatehabad district. The site is
located about 6.0 km from NH10, which connects Hisar to Fatehabad. The site is
connected to NH10 by the Kharakheri-Gorakhpur road.
The nearest railway station is Uklana Mandi (23 km) north-east of the project site on
Northern railway Jalandhar Doab extension. Rail head Adampur at a distance of 32 km
south-western of the site on Northern railway Rewari-Bhatinda section (Hisar-Sirsa
Broad-Gauge section). The road from Adampur station to the site is 22m wide good
road. The North Railway track, New Delhi Firojpur and Jaipur to Amritsar passes
through Rail Station at Hisar, situated about 33 km on the SSE of the project site. The
Narwana or Jakhal Rail Junction is located on the Delhi-Bhatinda sections of the
Northern Railway, towards NE of the project site at about 33km from the project site. The
above Railway Stations caters to the commuter needs and transportation of goods in the
region.
The nearest Airports to the plant site are at Hisar (a small air port, presently used for
Helicopter training purpose) located at a distance of about 40 km from the plant site and
Indira Gandhi International Airport, Delhi is about 208 km from project site. The
Bhakhara Canal (Fatehabad Branch) flows from east to west towards north close to the
site. There is no major industry within the study area. The nearest coal fields are at
Patha Khera in MP, at a distance of about 1185 km from the site via Adampur-HisarNew Delhi-Itarsi-Amla. The nearest distance of site from the international border is about
180km. The Index map showing the location of the plant site is shown in Figure 2.1.
There are no installation for handling, storing or transporting inflammable/toxic material
within a distance of 10km. There is no major railway siding or road transport depot within
10 km of the site. There is no place of historical importance within 10 km from the
proposed site.
Page 18
Chapter 2

Proposed Site
NH
NH
Other Roads
Canals
Figure 2.1: Proposed Project Site at Village Gorakhpur, District Fatehabad, Haryana
Page 19
Chapter 2

2.6
LAND REQUIREMENT
2.6.1
Land Area
The land requirement for the proposed project is set to about 1318 acres (533.5
hectares) and that required for housing colonies of plant personnel and CISF personnel
is about 185.42 acres (75.04 hectares). The land for the power plant (534 ha) site
comprises 1273.2 acres or 515.24 ha of land under double crop agricultural category.
The remaining 32 ha of land is not cultivable (which includes 6.0 ha of low lying area,
which will be suitably used). The land at the township comprises mostly barren land.
The total land required 1503.5 acres (608.48 ha) for the project is private land (Table
2.1a).
Table 2.1a: Break-up of Land in different Villages to be Acquired
SN.
1
2
3
Village
Gorakhpur
Kajhalheri
Bodapal
Total
Atomic Power Plant (Acres)

Private Government
Total
1313.68 0
1313.68
4.46
0
4.46
0
0
0
1318.2
0
1318.2
Private
0
0
185.42
185.42
Township (Acres)
Government
0
0
0
0
Total
0
0
185.42
185.42
The village wise actual land requirement for the project, classification of land and
Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) issues are given in Table 2.1b.
Table 2.1b: Actual Land Requirement, Classification of Land and R&R Issues
Nonagricultural
land
Acres
Ha.
Acres Ha.
1 Gorakhpur 1270.49 514.16 43.19 17.48
2 Kajhalheri 2.68
1.08
1.79 0.72
3 Bodapal
70.23
28.42 115.19 46.61
Total
1343.4 543.66 160.17 64.81
SN Name of
Village
2.6.2
Agricultural
Land
Total Land
Affected
People
(Khatedar)
Acres
Ha.
Numbers
1313.68 531.64
844
4.46
1.81
10
185.42 75.04
125
1503.56 608.48
979
R&R Issues
Land
to
be
acquired through
Haryana
Government taking
in to account the
R&R issues of
Haryana
R&R
policy 2010.
Resettlement and Rehabilitation of PAPs for the Land under Acquisition Process
For the proposed project the Project Affected Persons (PAPs) includes only land
Oustees and no displaced population is involved. The total PAPs involved in the project
is 979. The village-wise breakup of land and Project Affected People (PAPs) of the land
under process of acquisition for the proposed plant is given in Table 2.1b.
Page 20
Chapter 2

2.6.3
Land Acquisition
2.7
Section 4 notification completed. Objections received under section 5(a) addressed

by district authorities. Section 6 notification issued, meaning thereby that the land is
being acquired for public purpose.
There are only land oustees and no homestead oustees involved. Compensation to
the land oustees will be paid as per the Haryana R & R Policy 2010, enclosed as
Annexure IB.
SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

The proposed Atomic Power Project is intended to setup 4x700 MWe Pressurised Heavy
Water Reactor (PHWR) units. The major equipments needed are Steam Generators,
End-Shield, Calandria, Coolant Channels, End Fittings, Primary Coolant pumps, Heat
Exchangers, Fuelling Machine components, etc. These equipments will be housed in
Nuclear buildings consisting of:
Reactor Building (RB) and Reactor Auxiliary Building (RAB) house the main reactor
and associated process systems,
Safety related Buildings other than Nuclear Building consisting of Control Building
(CB), Station Auxiliary Building (SABs), Ventilation Stack with Monitoring Room and
Station Auxiliary Buildings (SABs), D2O Upgrading Plant Building, Waste
Management Facility and Exhaust Ventilation, Induced Draught Cooling Towers,
Safety Related Pump House (SRPH), Fire Water Pump House, Underground
Tunnels and Trenches, Diesel Oil Storage Area (DOSA), Emergency Makeup Water
Pond, Covered Passage, etc as per the design features of the plant.
Power evacuation in principle is feasible for 2800 MWe power from site. The Power
generated at HAPP will be evacuated through 400 kv transmission system. The number
of transmission outlets and their destination will be finalized taking into account share of
beneficial state in due course after a detailed power system studies are carried out by
PGCIL and approved by the concern authorities.
A residential colony has been envisaged for the proposed project for accommodating
1700 employees. The total land area required for the same is 186 acres. A sewage
treatment plant of capacity 1.0 MLD will be installed to treat the sewage water
emanating from the township. The proposed township and the proposed power plant is
depicted in 10 km locator map of the study area in No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01.
2.8
PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION

Construction of the project will be taken up in two stages of 2X700 MWe each. Planned
schedule for the proposed two units of 1st stage is given in Table 2.2. Subsequent two
units are expected to be four years later. The 1st stage project will be commissioned in
60 months from the Zero-Date which is reckoned as start of construction activities at
site.
Page 21
Chapter 2

Table 2.2: Time Schedule for the First Two Units of the Project
SN
1
2
3
2.9
Name of Milestone
First Unit of the twin unit

project Completion date
Units 2X700
Land Acquisition and Statuary Clearances
Start of Construction Activities
Completion of Construction & start of operation
Unit 1
Unit 2
2011- July 2013

June 2015
Dec 2020
June 2021
MANPOWER PLANNING
During construction stage maximum of 8000 persons (when construction of stage-I will be
nearing completion and construction of stage-II will be started) will be temporarily deployed.
Whereas during operation and maintenance stage the manpower deployed will be as
follows:
At the beginning of Stage I

By the completion of Stage I
By the completion of Stage II
: 760
: 1620
: 1700
The manpower includes technical and general administration needs. The estimate
covers the top management, middle and junior level executives and other supporting
staff. The estimate, however, does not cover the personnel for township, medical
facilities, etc.
2.10
TECHNOLOGY / PROCESS DESCRIPTION
2.10.1 Salient Features

The capacity of the proposed plant is 4X700 MWe PHWR. A PHWR is a nuclear power
reactor, commonly using natural uranium as fuel, which uses heavy water (deuterium
oxide D2O) as its coolant and moderator. The heavy water coolant is kept under
pressure in order to raise its boiling point, allowing it to be heated to higher temperatures
without boiling, much as in a PWR1 (Pressurised Water Reactor). While heavy water is
significantly more expensive than ordinary light water, it yields greatly enhanced neutron
economy, allowing the reactor to operate without fuel enrichment facilities (mitigating the
additional capital cost of the heavy water) and generally enhancing the ability of the
reactor to efficiently make use of fuel .
In the proposed project Natural uranium oxide will be used as fuel and heavy water
(D2O) will be used as coolant and moderator for the reactor. Refueling of the reactor will
1 Pressurized water reactors (PWRs): In a PWR the primary coolant (water) is pumped under high
pressure to the reactor core where it is heated by the energy generated by the fission of atoms. The
heated water then flows to a steam generator where it transfers its thermal energy to a secondary system
where steam is generated and flows to turbines which, in turn, spins an electric generator. PWRs use
ordinary light water as both coolant and neutron moderator.
Page 22
Chapter 2

be carried out "on-power".

Steam generators supply nearly dry saturated steam to the turbine. Turbine is a tandem
compound machine directly coupled to an electrical generator, which produces
electricity. Generator voltage is stepped up by the generator transformer, which in turn is
connected, to a switchyard. Generated power is transmitted to the grid from the nuclear
power station at 400 kV.
The concept of defense-in-depth is adopted in design of safety systems. Provision of
multiple barriers, double containment structures with steel liner on inner containment
wall of Reactor Building, containment spray cooling system, emergency core cooling
system, reactor shut down systems etc. as engineered safety systems ensure safe
operation of reactor.
Reactor protection system ensures shutdown requirements through two independent
fast acting shut down systems. Reactor regulating system enables automatic control of
reactor power and maintains neutron flux profile.
2.10.2 Engineering
The design of the proposed 2x700 MWe PHWRs of Haryana Atomic Power Projects
(HAPP 1&2) will be identical to the design of 700MWe units under construction at
Kakrapar Atomic Power Project (KAPP 3&4) except for the site specific changes that
are mainly associated with plant water systems and power evacuation system.
The major components / equipments comprises of Steam Generators, End-Shield,
Calandria, Coolant Channels, End Fittings, Primary Coolant pumps, Heat Exchangers,
Fuelling Machine components, etc. However, slight modifications in the above
equipments will be required as that used for KAPP 3&4, depending on the site
conditions.
2.11
PROJECT DETAILS
2.11.1 Safety Objectives and Principles

Objectives
The basic objective of nuclear power plants safety is to ensure protection of individuals,
society and the environment from radiation. Accordingly, the design, construction and
operation of nuclear power plants are aimed at achieving the following safety goals:
1. During routine operation, to minimize the radiation doses to plant personnel and to
members of the public in accordance with the principle of Às low as Reasonably
Achievable' (ALARA), and in any case not in excess of the prescribed limits,
specified by AERB.
2. To minimize the risk to public from accidental release of radioactivity, if any under
abnormal/postulated accident conditions for scenarios within the design basis, the
Page 23
Chapter 2

calculated releases shall be within specified release limits. This requirement is met
by ensuring that plant conditions associated with high radiological consequences
have low likelihood of occurrence, and plant condition with a high likelihood of
occurrence have only small or no radiological consequences.
3. Incorporate emergency preparedness measures to deal with situations arising out of
highly unlikely Beyond Design Basis Accidents.
4. To meet nuclear security requirements as specified in AERB manual on security
Principles and Guidelines
The safety goal of protection of public from accidental release of radioactivity is achieved
by adherence to the following well-established principles and guidelines:
1. Application of defense-in-depth approach, incorporating several echelons of defense
viz.
Sound design, construction and operation to prevent failures and deviation from
normal operation.
To detect and intercept incipient failures and deviation from normal operation
conditions, in order to prevent these from escalating into accidents.
To limit the consequences of accident conditions.
In addition to the above, for more severe events, protection of the public by
making use of ultimate safety capability of the plant, and appropriate emergency
preparedness plan.
2. Application of defense-in-depth concept to containment of radioactive material, by a
series of physical barriers, each backing the others.
3. Provision of more than one means / systems for performance of each of the three
safety functions viz. shutdown of reactor, core cooling, and containment of
radioactivity.
4. Provision of redundancy in systems important to safety having mitigation function,
including safety systems, such that at least minimum safety function can be
performed even in the event of failure of a single active component in the system.
5. Specifying unavailability targets for safety systems.
6. Provision of physical and functional separation, and independence to the extent
practicable, among/between following systems including their services (including
cabling etc.) to prevent common cause failures:
i) Between process systems and related safety systems.
ii) Among systems performing same safety function.
iii) Among redundant components within a system.
7. Consideration given at all stages of design for logics and instrumentation to fail in the
safe direction.
8. Provision of periodic testability of active components in systems important to safety
having mitigation function, preferably on-power.
9. Provision of periodic in-service inspection of components important to safety.
Safety Analysis
To demonstrate that the safety objective of protection of the public from accidental
Page 24
Chapter 2

releases is met, safety analysis is performed to evaluate the consequences of postulated

initiating events, and event sequences.
In the approach adopted here, the identification of design basis events is based on
definition of `single' and `multiple' failures. A single failure is the failure of a plant process
system/component. Multiple failure is a much more severe, and much less likely
accident sequence involving a single process system failure plus simultaneous
unavailability of a safety system*, which was meant to mitigate the effect of the particular
process system failure.
The various postulated accident scenarios considered are identified in terms of failures
in, or of, individual systems. These failures may themselves be the initiating events, or
be the result of some other initiating events, including external events. The influence of
external events on system safety is taken care of by proper site selection and design
basis.
The results of the safety analysis for various postulated accidents, in terms of
radiological consequences to the public, are checked to ensure that limits specified by
AERB are not exceeded. For evaluation of the dose, from postulated accidents,
inhalation and external dose are considered. Ingestion route is considered for LOCA
condition. For severe accidents, ingestion route is not considered as appropriate counter
measures are to be implemented as a part of emergency procedure.
In addition to the evaluation of radiological consequences of design basis events/event
sequences, an essential part of the safety analyses as performed here, is the reliability
analysis of safety & safety related systems. Each safety system is designed to have
unavailability targeted below 1x10-3 /yr.
2.11.2 Barriers to Radioactivity Release
The release of radioactivity to the environment and the public is prevented by
incorporating a series of fission product barriers in the system. These are:
Fuel matrix
Fuel sheath
Primary Heat Transport System
Containment
Exclusion zone
Fuel:
The uranium dioxide (UO2) used for fuel is a ceramic with high melting point and
chemically inert to water at operating conditions. So long as the ceramic fuel does not
melt, the fission products remain entrapped in its matrix. During normal operation
virtually all solid fission products are permanently retained in UO2 matrix and only a
fraction of noble gases and volatile products diffuse into the inter space between fuel
and cladding.
Page 25
Chapter 2

Fuel Sheath:
Fuel Sheath also called fuel cladding, made of Zircaloy-2, encapsulates the fuel pellets.
This forms the second barrier and is designed to withstand stresses resulting from UO2
expansion, fission gas pressure, external hydraulic pressure and mechanical loads
imposed by fuel handling.
Primary Heat Transport System:
The fuel bundles and coolant are contained in Primary Heat Transport (PHT) system.
This is a closed system and forms the third barrier for fission product release.
Containment:
The fourth barrier is the containment building which houses the reactor and associated
nuclear systems. The containment is a leak tight pre-stressed concrete structure with
quick isolation feature. The containment structures are designed to withstand maximum
pressure and temperature generated by postulated accidents and maintains acceptably
low leak rates consistent with specified dose limits following the postulated accident
conditions. Containment system performs its functions in association with related
engineered safety features (ESFs).
Exclusion zone:
The exclusion zone of 1.0 km is provided around the reactor building where no
habitation is allower. This measure gives as added safety. Public domain starts from
exclusion zone and dose limit to public is defined at exclusion zone boundary
2.11.3 Special Safety Requirements
Radiation zoning:
The entire operating island is divided into 3 distinct zones based on the contamination
potential. These zones have been designated as Zone-1, Zone-2 and Zone-3 in the
ascending order of contamination potential
The Zone system ensure radiological safety to occupational worker.
2.11.4 Safety Classification
To ensure adequate safety to the public and plant site personnel, the plant design meets
following general safety requirements.
1. The capability for safe shutdown of the reactor and maintaining it in the safe shut
down condition during and after all operational states and postulated accident
conditions.
2. The capability to remove residual heat from the core after reactor shut down, and
during and after all operational states and postulated accident conditions and
maintain a cool-able geometry.
Page 26
Chapter 2

3. The capability to reduce the potential for the release of radioactive materials and
ensure that releases are within the prescribed limits during and after all operational
states and, postulated accident conditions.
4. To meet these requirements, systems, components and structures have to perform
certain safety functions. These safety functions include those necessary to prevent
accident conditions as well as those necessary to mitigate the consequence of
accident.
5. The relative importance of the safety function determines the safety class of the
systems, components and structures performing the safety function.
Based on the above methodology, the following four different safety classes (Class 1,2,3
& 4) are generally considered appropriate in view of the design codes and standards in
vogue.
Safety Class 1 The systems, Structures and Components (SSCs) required to perform
the safety functions necessary to prevent the release of a substantial fraction of core
fission product inventory to the containment / environment are classified as safety class
1.
Safety Class 2 The SSCs that perform the safety function necessary to mitigate the
consequences of an accident which would otherwise lead to release of substantial
fraction of the core fission product inventory or activation product inventory into the
environment are classified as safety class 2. The consequences of failure of these safety
class 2 safety functions need only be considered after an initial failure of another safety
function. Safety class 2 also includes those safety functions necessary to prevent
anticipated operational occurrences from leading to accident conditions; and those
safety functions whose failure under certain plant conditions may result in severe
consequences, e.g., failure of decay heat removal system.
Safety Class 3 SSCs required to perform a support role to safety functions in safety
classes 1, 2 and 3 are classified as safety class 3. They include :
a) Those safety functions necessary to prevent radiation exposure to the public or site
personnel from exceeding the relevant acceptable limits from sources outside the
reactor coolant system.
b) Those safety functions associated with reactivity control on a slower time-scale than
the reactivity control functions in safety classes 1 and 2.
c) Those safety functions associated with decay heat removal from spent fuel stored
outside the reactor coolant system and with maintaining sub-criticality of fuel stored
outside the reactor coolant system.
Safety Class 4 The SSC which incorporate safety functions that do not fall within safety
classes 1, 2 or 3. Not Important to Nuclear Safety (NINS) Class. This class includes all
Page 27
Chapter 2

other systems which are not associated with any of the safety functions listed above and
designed as per industrial standards.
Seismic Classification to meet the requirement given in the previous section, a three tier
(or level) system has been adopted for the seismic classification of systems,
components, instruments and structures, i.e. (i) Seismic category-1 (Safe Shut down
Earthquake (SSE)), (ii) Seismic category-2 (Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE))
and (iii) Seismic category-3 (General (Codal))
Seismic Category 1 Structures : All systems, components, instruments and structures
required for safe shut down of the reactor shall be designed for the maximum seismic
ground motion potential site (i.e. SSE) obtained through appropriate seismic evaluations
based on regional and local geology, seismology and soil characteristics. The equipment
and systems that are required to be qualified for SSE are classified as seismic category
1. Seismic Category 1 structure shall be qualified as SSE and OBE.
Seismic Category 2 Structures : All systems, components, instruments and structures
which are to remain functional for continued operation of the plant without undue risk fall
under OBE category and the design basis shall be a lower level seismic ground motion
than SSE which may reasonably be expected during the plant life. A seismic event,
exceeding OBE level, would require a shutdown of the plant and carrying out a detailed
inspection of the entire plant. The equipment and systems that are required to be
qualified for OBE are classified as seismic category 2.
Seismic Category 3 Structures : This category incorporates those systems, structures,
instruments and components, the failure of which would not cause undue radiological
risk and includes all systems, components, instruments and structures which are not
included in SSE or OBE category. The seismic design basis shall be that prescribed by
the relevant Indian standards (IS-1893, Year 2002). The equipment and systems those
are required to be qualified for CODAL requirements are classified as seismic category
3.
2.11.5 General Design Criterion
Nuclear building
Nuclear buildings consisting of RB (Figure 2.2a & 2.2b) and
and associated process systems. RB is provided with
containments. Primary containment is made of pre-stressed
containment is reinforced concrete. RAB is a framed RCC
category 1 structure.
RAB house main reactor

primary and secondary
concrete and secondary
structure. NB is seismic
Safety Related Buildings other than Nuclear Building

(a) Control Building (CB)
A separate control building, common for both units, has been provided next to the
Nuclear Buildings to house Main Control Rooms (MCR) & Control Equipment Rooms
(CER), main steam lines, emergency feed water tanks and auxiliary boiler feed pumps
Page 28
Chapter 2

for both units. In addition, the Control Building acts as a main entrance to the station
complex and is located appropriately. This is a safety related structure and has been
classified as Category 1 (SSE) structure from seismic considerations.
(b) Station Auxiliary Building (SAB)
Separate buildings called station auxiliary buildings are provided to house emergency
power systems. Each unit has two station auxiliary buildings. Station Auxiliary Building
1A and 2A are located on either side of control building, while 1B and 2B are located
abutting the nuclear buildings 1 & 2 respectively.
These are safety related structures and are classified as Category-1 (SSE) structures
from seismic considerations. The buildings are three stories structure. Two D.G. sets are
located in each SAB, making the number of DG sets available for each unit four. The
internal layout of all the four buildings is identical except for some minor variations.
The day oil tanks with proper fencing are located outside the SABs in a fenced area.
CO2 fire fighting cylinder room is located in between the two day oil tanks.
(c) Ventilation Stack With Monitoring Room
The ventilation stack is common for both the units. It is located next to Waste
management plant building. The Stack is 100.0 m high above ground level and has an
internal diameter of 3.0 m at the top. The ventilation stack is of RCC construction. The
structure will be suitably founded and is unlined. External outside diameter at top is
3.440 m, with a shell thickness of 220 mm. The outside diameter of concrete shell
increases uniformly from 3.440 m at top to 9.00 m at top of foundation level (shell
thickness 500 mm).
(d) D2O Upgrading Plant Building
The building accommodates various equipments required for purifying the downgraded
Heavy Water collected from various sources during the operating of power stations. The
building is located to the west of Nuclear Building-4 abutting the covered passage. The
upgrading plant may be generally divided into four major areas D2O distillation towers,
D2O upgrading plant, D2O clean-up and evaporation area and downgraded D2O storage
area.
(e) Waste Management Facility and Exhaust Ventilation Building
This building is a two storied RCC framed structure with a basement and is designed as
seismic category 1. The building is located to the west of nuclear buildings abutting the
covered passage.
Proper passages are provided within the building, wherever zone change occurs. LESS
facility is located at the basement of the building and the decontamination facility is
provided just above LESS at EL 100000, for ease of drainage. The decontamination and
resin fixation areas, being in zone-3, are provided with shielding walls of sufficient
thickness. Evaporator system is provided for the disposal of Tritiated waste through air
route, instead of liquid route. The ventilation discharge from plant buildings is routed to
Page 29
Chapter 2

the exhaust ventilation system, at first floor of the building. The final gaseous exhaust is
then taken through the ventilation duct and led to stack.
(f) Induced Draught Cooling Towers
Two Induced Draught Cooling Towers (IDCT) per unit are provided. The main function of
IDCT is to remove heat from the active process water system. Active process water is
cooled in plate type heat exchanger. The cooling of hot water (from outlet of plate of
plate type heat exchangers) is achieved by mechanical induced draught created by fans
mounted on top of the Towers. This structure is classified as safety class 3 & seismic
category 1.
(g) Safety Related Pump House (SRPH)
The Safety Related Pump House (SRPH) is a R.C. framed building catering for both
units of plant. The Building is designed for seismic category 1.
(h) Fire Water Pump House
Firewater pump house is a RCC framed structures for pumps for firewater. FWPH is
located close to SRPH. The building is designed for seismic category 1.
(i) Underground Tunnels And Trenches
There are many reinforced concrete tunnels and trenches carrying a number of safety
related service pipelines and cables. The seismic category is 1 and safety class is 3. The
tunnels are buried under soil, with overburden, while the trenches have no earth cover
on top. The main safety related tunnel in the plant area, is the tunnel carrying APW and
SW lines from reactor auxiliary system to safety related pump house and IDCTs. Local
tunnels are also provided, wherever the trenches are crossing the roads.
Page 30
Chapter 2

(j) Diesel Oil Storage Area (DOSA)

Two Diesel Oil Storage areas, one per unit are provided for storing high speed diesel oil
for diesel engines, in underground tanks (4 nos.). Additional tanks are provided which
caters to fire water pump house (FWPH) where diesel operated pumps are located.
Since, DG operation is safety related, more importance is given to system reliability and
supporting arrangement.
(k) Emergency Makeup Water
IDCT basins are designed to meet the emergency water make up requirement for a
period of 7 days, over and above the minimum basin level to be maintained for
operational requirement.
(l) Covered Passage
A covered passage is provided between nuclear buildings and WMP / workshop
buildings, for equipment and personnel movement between the buildings. Grade slab is
provided at EL 100000. The roof slab is supported on brackets from the columns nuclear
building and WMP building.
Page 31
Chapter 2

FIG 2.2a: Reactor Building Elevation View 1
Page 32
Chapter 2

FIG 2.2b: Reactor Building Elevation View 2
Page 33
Chapter 2

2.12
REACTOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
2.12.1 Reactor Physics

Reactor Core Characteristics
The reactor chosen is of a Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor type (PHWR), using
natural uranium dioxide fuel in the form of 37 rod cluster (bundles). The reactor
generates about 2291 MW of total fission power out of which 2166 MW is delivered to
the coolant.
The primary heat transport (PHT) system consists of 392 horizontal coolant channels
forming two independent loops.
Reactor Control and Protection
The reactor is controlled to deliver the set demanded power. On-power refueling takes
care of the reactivity changes due to burn-up of fuel and build-up of fission products.
Further, the reactor is controlled and protected with the help of Regulating and
Protective devices as explained below.
Reactor Control
The core reactivity and spatial power distribution on a long-term basis are controlled by a
planned scheme of regular on-power bi-directional refueling. Fine control of reactivity
and spatial power distribution are achieved by Reactor Regulating System (RRS). The
negative reactivity worth of reactivity devices is augmented by Moderator Liquid Poison
Addition System (MLPAS) controlled by RRS. The RRS provides supervised shut-off rod
withdrawal during reactor start-up. The Zone Control Compartments (ZCCs) are the
primary reactor control devices. The power error and flux tilt error are the signals to
actuate reactivity devices.
The reactivity devices used in the control of the reactor are the following:
Zone Control Compartments (ZCCs) The 14 liquid (light water) zone control
compartments are the primary devices for reactor regulation providing positive / negative
reactivity control. They are actuated together for regulating reactor bulk power and
differently for regulating spatial power distribution. The nominal average fill is 46% full
level.
Adjuster Rods (AR) The 17 stainless level ARs are normally fully inserted in the core
where they contribute to flux flattening. The rods are grouped into 8 banks. They are
either withdrawn or inserted sequentially to achieve minimum flux distortion and limit
reactivity addition rate (two banks of ARs can be moved together depending on the error
signal). They are withdrawn for providing xenon override capability. They can also be
used for compensating reactivity loss due to core burn up in case of non-availability of
fuelling machine.
Control Rods (CR) The 4 CRs, each consisting of cadmium absorber sandwiched
between stainless steel tubes, normally remain fully out of the core. The rods are
grouped into 2 banks. They are either withdrawn or inserted sequentially (two banks of
Page 34
Chapter 2

CRs can be moved together depending on the error signal). They are capable of rapid
power reduction by action of controlled gravity fall and to compensate the reactivity
increase following power reduction.
Shutdown Systems
When certain plant parameters exceed operating limits and conditions, the shutdown
systems trip the reactor by fast insertion of a large amount of negative reactivity into the
core. Two independent and fast acting systems, SDS #1 and SDS # \2 capable of
independently shutting down the reactor are provided. The Reactor Protective System
(RPS) refers to equipment provided to generate actuation signals and devices to trip the
reactor. There are two reactor protection systems, RPS # 1 and RPS # 2. Each system
is designed to sense demand for reactor trip and give actuation command to respective
shutdown systems. The shutdown system instrumentation of SDS #1 and #2 provide
means to actuate the system. Instrumentation is provided for health and performance
monitoring. Each system is designed to perform the intended function assuming single
failure criteria. The design objectives of the shutdown systems are
1. Upon trip, to provide an initial negative reactivity insertion rate high enough to
countered all credible reactivity excursions.
2. Upon full insertion, to provide enough negative reactivity depth to ensure that the
reactor remains sub critical following shutdown.
SDS #1
SDS #1 consists of 28 vertical Shut-off Rods (SRs) consisting of cadmium absorber
sandwiched between stainless steel tubes, which fall into the reactor under gravity
upon its actuation.
SDS #2
SDS #2 consists of 6 horizontal tubes through which liquid poison in the form of
gadolinium nitrate is injected directly into the moderator. The schematic of SDS #2 is
given in Fig. 2.3.
Page 35
Chapter 2

Figure 2.3: Secondary Shut Down System

2.12.2 Reactor Fuel
The fuel bundle (Fig. 2.4) is similar to the one being used in TAPP 3&4 reactors. It
consists of 37 cylindrical fuel elements of 495.3 mm length, held together by welding the
elements to end plates at both ends. The elements are arranged in concentric rings of 1,
6, 12 and 18 elements in different rings. Each element contains a 480 mm long stack of
sintered natural UO2 pellets in a thin zircaloy-4 clad coated with 3 to 9 micro-meter thick
graphite on inside diameter with end caps welded at both ends. The elements are
separated by spacers attached to the cladding near the mid-plane of the bundle. Interelement spacers are of the skewed split spacer type. One half of the spacer is attached
to each of the neighboring elements such that half spacers contact each other at a
skewed angle to reduce any tendency to `lock because of vibration. The design of the
split spacers is such that the minimum inter-element spacing at the spacer location after
maximum anticipated fretting wear will not be less than 0.89 mm. Bearing pads are
provided on each element of the outer ring to prevent the fuel sheaths from touching the
coolant tube.
Page 36
Chapter 2

Figure 2.4: 37 Element Fuel Bundle

2.12.3 Reactor Core Systems
The reactors are of pressurized heavy water type using heavy water moderator, heavy
water coolant and natural uranium dioxide as fuel. The overall Process Schematic / flow
sheet of 700 MWe PHWR is given in Fig. 2.5. Reactor consists of integral assembly of
two end shields and a Calandria with the later being submerged in the water filled vault.
Uranium dioxide fuel bundles are contained in the Zirconium-Niobium pressure tubes,
arranged in a square lattice of 28.6 cm pitch.
At each end, the pressure tubes are rolled in AISI 403 modified stainless steel end
fittings, which penetrate the end shields and extend into the fuelling machine vaults so
as to facilities on power fuelling. Around each coolant tube, a concentric Calandria tube
has been provided with an annular gap. Carbon dioxide gas filled in this gap serves as
thermal insulation between the high temperature primary coolant and low temperature
moderator. In addition, annulus gas system is intended to detect leaks in the coolant /
Calandria tubes. Axial shielding to the coolant channel is provided by removable shield
plug fitted in the end fittings. At the face of each end fitting, a seal plug is installed which
serves as a leak tight mechanical joint and can be removed during fuelling operation.
Figure of an End fitting Assembly is given in Fig. 2.6.
Page 37
Chapter 2

Figure 2.5: Simplified Schematic Flow Diagram for 700 MWe PHWR
Page 38
Chapter 2

Figure 2.6: End Fitting Assembly

The bulk of the space available in the Calandria, i.e. the one available around the
Calandria tubes is filled with heavy water moderator, which is continuously circulated
with the help of moderator pumps. The moderator temperature is controlled with 76C (at
Calandria outlet). On power fuelling which is a characteristic feature of PHWR, is
required on a continuous basis mainly in view of the use of natural uranium fuel. Reactor
control devices are required to regulate the reactor power to control flux tilt, optimize fuel
performance and for the start up process. Besides these, two fast acting independent
shutdown systems are provided as a part of protection system. Both these systems are
fast acting and independent with adequate capability to suppress and terminate fast
reactivity transients under various operating and accident conditions and bring the
reactor to safe shut down state. Shutdown system no. 1 (Shut-off Rod Mechanism)
consists of 28 shut-off rods with Cadmium sandwiched stainless steel elements and
normally acts first during a reactor trip. The shutdown system no. 2 (SDS #2 Liquid
Poison Injection System) consists of six perforated horizontal injection tubes located
inside Calandria through which gadolinium nitrate solution is injected into the moderator
when actuated. SDS #2 has independent set of trip parameters, sensors, trip settings
and signal processing for actuation. The worth of these shut down systems are
adequate, to take care of long term effects such as xenon decay.
Calandria
Calandria is the reactor vessel containing heavy water as moderator and reflector,
various reactivity controls, monitoring and shut down mechanisms, fuel and coolant
channel assemblies. Abutting to the ends of the Calandria are two end shields, which
are welded in in-situ with Calandria to form an integral assembly.
Calandria is a horizontal, single-walled, austenitic stainless steel (304L) vessel
consisting of a Main Shell, which is stepped down at each end and site welded to similar
Page 39
Chapter 2

extensions of End shields on either side. The stepped down shells, called `Small Shells,
are joined to the Main Shell by means of flexible Annual Plates, thereby forming vertical
annular sections, which deflect to allow for the differential thermal expansion of stainless
steel shell with respect to the Calandria tubes and the concrete vault walls. The location
of the annular plates is selected to give an optimum reduction in inventory of expensive
heavy water in the low flux regions of the vessel and to provide adequate space for
welding of Calandria to the End shields at site. Sectional view of Calandria is given in
Fig. 2.7.
There are 392 coolant tubes and 392 Calandria tubes arranged in a square lattice of 286
mm pitch. The Zircaloy-4 Calandria tubes are rolled into the end shields. Four annular
spacers (garter springs) have been provided in each coolant channel to maintain
appropriate gap between the Calandria tube and coolant tube, carrying fuel and coolant.
The Calandria shell has 85 nozzles on top and another 13 on west side for housing
mechanisms for reactor control and monitoring. Corresponding to each reactivity
mechanism nozzle, housing is provided at bottom of the vessel to locate and support
different devices.
Four numbers of 500 mm NB over pressure relief lines are also provided on the top of
Calandria. These lines terminate in the pump room and are provided with rupture-discs
at the ends. The rupture discs are of reverse buckling type having a set pressure of 1.4
kg/cm2.
12 numbers of 150 mm NB moderator inlet connections (6 nos. on either side) are
welded to the main shell near its horizontal centerline plane. At each moderator inlet
location, an inlet diffuser of gradually increasing rectangular cross-section is provided.
These diffusers are oriented in such a manner that they discharge the incoming heavy
water all along the curved surface towards the top of the shell with low velocity and
without impinging directly on any Calandria tube. The lower end of the diffuser is welded
to the stainless steel nozzles already welded to the Calandria main shell. Four
moderator outlet nozzles of 250 mm NB are provided at the bottom of the main shell at
locations slightly away from the vertical axial plane.
Page 40
Chapter 2

Figure 2.7: Sectional View of Calandria

End Shields
The end-shields provide shielding on the reactor ends to reduce the dose rate in fuelling
machine vaults to an acceptable level, support and locate coolant channel assemblies
and provide integral support to reactor assembly. The stainless steel end-shields are
filled with 10 mm dia. spherical carbon steel balls and light water in 57:43 volumetric
ratios, which provides adequate shielding properties. For cooling, the End shield water is
circulated through external cooling circuit.
The support structure for end shield consists of a cylindrical shell called as outer shell of
8088 mm ID which is concentric with the main shell and two end flanges welded to it to
form an `H section. The outer edges of end flanges are octagonal in shape. The inner
edges of end flanges are machined circular and welded to the extensions of fuelling side
tube sheet and Calandria side tube sheet. The portions of the end flanges and
extensions of tube sheets between outer shell and main shell are machine to a thickness
of 24 mm to serve as flexible diaphragms for accommodating the radial thermal
expansion of the End shield and longitudinal thermal expansion of Calandria tubes
(these are rolled in the Calandria side tube sheets of both end shields). The diaphragm
plates also transfer the entire weight of the reactor assembly to the vault concrete.
The space enclosed by the two diaphragm plates, the main shell and outer shell is filled
with light water. The weld between flange plates and extensions of the fuelling machine
side tube sheet and Calandria side tube sheet is located in a region of diaphragm which
is subjected to the minimum stress. Three numbers of annular shielding plates are
provided adjacent to diaphragm plate on fuelling machine side to enhance shielding
capacity.
Page 41
Chapter 2

2.12.4 Reactivity Devices

Reactivity devices include those devices which are required for reactor regulation,
reactor shutdown and flux monitoring. Reactivity devices are provided for following
functions :
a.
b.
c.
d.
To regulate zonal and bulk reactor power

To shape core flux distribution to maximize the power output
To provide xenon poison override time after reactor trip
To raise or lower reactor power to desired level i.e. power maneuvering including set
back and step back.
e. To rapidly shutdown the reactor and keep it sub-critical for prolonged period to time
through one of two diverse, independent systems.
f. To measure reactor power over a wide range from shutdown to 150% full power
g. To provide reactivity shim during extended fuelling machine outages
Liquid Zone Control System, Adjuster Rod Mechanism, Control Rod Mechanism, Shutoff Rod Mechanism and Vertical Flux Units are located vertically inside the reactor core
while Liquid Poison Injection System and Horizontal Flux Units are located horizontally.
The ionization chamber housing assemblies are located horizontally outside Calandria in
the east and west walls of Calandria vault.
Mechanical and process design details of Shutdown system no. 1 and no. 2 are covered
in Section 5. Details of other reactivity devices are brought out in the following sections:
Liquid Zone Control System
Liquid Zone Control System provides zonal and bulk power control. Zonal power control
is required due to large size of reactor core and consequent neutronic decoupling. There
are six Liquid Zone Control Units having 14 Zone Control Compartments (ZCCs). Water,
as neutron absorber is maintained in the ZCCs and the level of water in the ZCCs is
varied to get a bi-directional change in reactivity. Level of water in a ZCC is varied by
varying the inlet flow using a control valve and keeping the outlet flow constant. The
outlet flow is maintained constant by controlling the differential pressure between the
ZCCs and the Delay Tank (where the water outlet are collected) to a constant valve.
Helium is used as cover gas to the water. Water is circulated through Heat exchanger
and Ion Exchange Column for heat removal and chemical cleaning respectively. Helium
over-gas is also kept under circulation to remove products of radiolysis and to pass
through recombination unit. Helium is bubbled into the ZCCs and is used for
measurement of water levels in the ZCCs. Water and helium pressures in the circuits are
maintained by pump(s) and compressor(s) respectively.
Adjuster Rod Mechanism
The system consists of seventeen adjuster rods utilizing tubular stainless steel or cobalt
absorbers. At each of the seventeen locations, adjuster rod mechanism consists of
adjuster rod assembly, guide tube assembly, locator assembly, standpipe-thimble
assembly, shield plug, push tube cum magnet assembly, drive mechanism and the
supporting, sealing and shielding arrangements. The adjuster rod consists of a vertical
tubular stainless steel element and a zircaloy rope attachment at its top. The upper end
of SS wire rope is attached to and wound on a sheave inside the drive mechanism. An
electric motor, through a set of gears drives the rod up or down inside a guide tube
Page 42
Chapter 2

assembly. While not in motion, the rod is held in position by the self-locking feature of
drive mechanism provided by proper design of worm gear unit. Adjuster rods remain
within the reactor core during normal operation. For regulating purposes, the adjuster
rods are driven out and driven into the core by Reactor Regulating System (RRS), as
required.
Control Rod Mechanism
The system consists of four control rods utilising cadmium absorber elements. At each of
the four locations, the system consists of control rod assembly, guide tube assembly,
guide tube locator assembly, stand-pipe-thimble assembly, shield plug cum push tube
assembly, drive mechanism and the supporting, sealing and shielding arrangements.
The control rod consists of a vertical tubular cadmium absorber sandwiched between
stainless steel tubes, a rope attachment at its top and an orifice at bottom. The upper
end of SS wire rope holding the CR is attached to and wound on a sheave inside the
drive mechanism. The rod is held in parked position with help of self locking feature
provided by design in worm gear unit of drive mechanism. An electric motor, through
gear drive and electromagnetic clutch, drives the rod up or down inside a guide tube
assembly. On de-energizing the electromagnetic clutch, the rod falls under gravity into
the guide tube assembly inside reactor core.
For the purposes of regulating functions, the control rods are driven into and out of the
core by Reactor Regulating System (RRS), as required. During a reactor set back, one
or both banks of control rods are driven partially or fully into the reactor core by RRS.
During reactor trip both banks of control rods are also dropped into the core along with
shut-off rods of shutdown system no. 1 (SDS #1).
In Core Flux Units
Self-Powered Neutron Detectors (SPNDs) are used for in-core flux measurement. There
are SPNDs belonging to Reactor Regulating System (RRS), known as Zone Control
Detectors (ZCDs), SPNDs belonging to Reactor Protection System 1 & 2 (RPS), know
as Regional Over Power Protection System ROPPS) Detectors and SPNDs belonging to
Flux Mapping System (FMS), known as Flux Mapping Detectors. In addition to these
SPNDs, there are Traveling In-Core Probes (TIPs) and in-core Start Up Counters
(SUCs). All these are housed in tubular in-core Carrier Tuber Assemblies (CTAs). These
Carrier Tube Assemblies along with related components are known as Vertical and
Horizontal Flux Units (VFU, HFU) depending on whether they are oriented vertically or
horizontally in the core.
Vertical Flux Units
There are 26 Vertical flux units located vertically inside the Calandria. The VFUs houses:
ZCDs of RRS
ROPPS Detectors of RPS # 1,
Flux Mapping Detectors,
Vertical Travelling In-core Probes (TIPs) and
In-core Start up counters (SUCs).
Page 43
Chapter 2

Typically, a VFU is attached to Calandria shell, at the bottom, by means of a locator

assembly and extends up to the top of Calandria vault top-hatch beam. Beyond the
Calandria nozzle, standpipe-thimble assembly, which is the extension of Calandria,
surrounds the VFU. The SPNDs are houses in Zircaloy Carrier Tube Assembly. Soft
cables are run from cable connectors mounted on or near the terminal box at the top of
the assembly, beyond the hatch beam area.
Horizontal Flux Units
The function of horizontal flux units is to house SPNDs for Reactor Protection System
(RPS) # 2, known as ROPPS Detectors, at the required locations in the reactor core.
There are 9 horizontal flux units, laid normal to both Calandria tubes and vertical
reactivity device assemblies. A HFU, typically, is attached to the Calandria shell by
means of locator assembly at the east side and extends beyond Calandria up to the
outside of Calandria vault west wall. The thimble assembly, which is the extension of
Calandria, surrounds the HFU in the region beyond Calandria. The HFU surrounded by
the thimble assembly passes through an Embedded Part (EP) in the Calandria vault
west wall. The SPNDs are housed in Carrier Tube Assembly. The Mineral Insulated (MI)
cables of the SPNDs are terminated on or near the terminal box at the west end of the
HFU, just outside the vault wall. Other components include shielding structure, sealing
bellows assemblies, tensioning arrangement, freeze jacket etc.
Ionization Chamber Housing Assemblies
The requirement of thermal neutron flux measurement from the source level of about 1014 Full Power (FP) to 150% FP is met by employing in-core and out of core neutron
detectors. The out of core neutron detectors are of two types viz. boron coated uncompensated proportional counter (start-up counter) and boron coated un-compensated
ionization chambers. The out of core detectors are housed in ionization chamber
housing assemblies located in the east and west walls of Calandria vault.
For housing the boron coated start-up counters and the ionization chambers (known as
detectors) located outside the core, six ionization chamber housing assemblies, three
each on the Calandria vault east wall and west wall are provided. Each ionization
chamber housing assembly on the east wall houses three ionization chamber cylinders,
one each belongs to Reactor Regulating System (RRS), Reactor Protection System No.
1 (RPS # 1). Each ionization chamber housing assembly on the west wall houses one
ionization chamber cylinder belonging to Reactor Protection system No. 2 (RPS # 2) and
the start up counter.
A typical ionization chamber housing assembly consists of a housing pipe assembly
located in an Embedded Part (EP) in the Calandria vault wall. The assembly houses 3
tubes, known as guide pipes. These pipes house ionization chamber cylinder or start-up
counters along with shielding and other accessories. The third pipe is provided as spare.
The guide pipes are arranged in a triangular pitch and the space surrounding the pipes
within the housing assembly is filled with heavy concrete. The Calandria end of the
housing assembly is provided with lead shielding to achieve discrimination against
gamma radiation. The housing assembly is supported from the inside face of the
Calandria vault wall. The Calandria vault water is sealed by a plate welded between the
housing assembly and the EP flange at the inside face of the Calandria vault wall.
Page 44
Chapter 2

2.12.5 Moderator Liquid Poison Addition System

Moderator Liquid Poison Addition System (MLPAS) is provided to augment the reactivity
worth of control rods, which are controlled by reactor regulating system. The system also
facilitates manual addition of a pre-determined limited quantity of poison into the
moderator, based on the status of reactor core and stipulated conditions of start up after
a poison out. The system is used to control the reactivity of the core by adding soluble
chemicals with large neutron capture cross-sections in to heavy water moderator. Boron
as boric anhydride (B2O3) and Gadolinium as gadolinium nitrate hexa-hydrate (Gd
(NO3)3.6 H2O) are the chemicals used. The need of this system arises due to following
considerations :
1. Control rods provide capability to handle setback to low power level to the reactor
regulating system. To ensure that this capability is always available, control rods are
normally parked in the fully ÒUT position. If due to any unanticipated reactivity
change during power operation, corrective action is taken by the regulating system,
such that reactor operates with control rods partially ÌN. Additional negative
reactivity must be made available to regain the full worth of control rods. Adding
small shots of poison into the moderator through MLPAS does this. The shots are
repeated at regular intervals, till the causative factor is removed.
2. Any uninterrupted reactivity disturbances at a time, when the worth of control rods is
not available, will result in bulk power increasing beyond demand power. MLPAS will
provide a means for limiting the actual power under such conditions depending upon
the reactor power and effective power error.
3. To provide a means for manual addition of negative reactivity to the core, such as
required during xenon burn up, when the reactor is brought to full power, just after
the poison out period.
The moderator Liquid Poison Addition System works on ejector principle using
moderator circulation as the motive force. Depending upon system requirement, either
boric acid or gadolinium nitrate is sucked from respective tanks.
2.12.6 Primary Heat Transport System
The Primary heat transport (PHT) system transports heat produced in the rector core to
steam generators to generate steam, which is fed to the turbine. The transport medium
is pressurised Heavy Water.
PHT main circuit is arranged in two identical loops. The core is divided vertically into two
halves, to form two loops. Partial boiling is allowed in the channels to the extent to
obtaining a nominal quality up to 4% at reactor outlet header (ROH). The two reactor
outlet headers of both the loops are interconnected to avoid flow instability.
Diagrammatic Representation of PHT system is given in Fig. 2.8.
Page 45
Chapter 2

Figure 2.8: Diagrammatic Representation of PHT System

Main Functions and Objectives
The functional requirements of the system are :
1. To transport 2166 MW of thermal power from reactor core to steam generators (4
SGs) during normal operation.
2. To ensure core cooling during all operational states and accident conditions.
3. To prevent the failure or limit the consequence of failure of a component or structure
whose failure would cause impairment of a safety function.
4. To maintain cool-able geometry of the core during all operational states and
postulated accident conditions.
It also acts as a barrier against release of radioactivity from the core.
The heat transport system includes following sub-systems :
1. Pressuriser feed and bleed, for pressure and inventory control.
2. Relief system for over pressure protection.
3. Fuelling Machine heavy water supply system to supply high pressure heavy water to
the fuelling machines.
4. Purification system for maintaining desired water chemistry and removal of corrosion
products.
5. Shutdown cooling system for removal of decay heat.
6. Emergency core cooling system (ECCS) to maintain core cooling following a loss of
coolant accident (LOCA).
7. Inventory addition and recovery system (IARS) to maintain PHT inventory in the
event of a small leak, which is within the capability of primary pressurizing pump.
Page 46
Chapter 2

8. Leakage collection system to collect, contain and transfer the collected heavy water
and to provide venting and draining facility to the equipment.
9. Service system to facilitate filling and draining of steam generator primary coolant
pump loop and header level control.
10. Sampling system for monitoring the system chemistry.
11. Passive Decay Heat removal system (PDHRS) for decay heat removal during station
blackout condition.
Passive Decay Heat Removal System (PDHRS)
Primary function of the Passive Decay Heat Removal System (PDHRS) is to ensure
continued availability and recirculation of the inventory on the secondary side of the
Steam Generators in the event of class IV failure simultaneous with non-availability of
Auxiliary Boiler Feed Pumps (ABFPs) or Station blackout and in the process ensure
continued removal of decay heat from the core.
2.12.7 Moderator System
The purpose of heavy water moderator is to maintain criticality in the reactor core by
slowing down the high-energy neutrons to a lower energy level where their probability for
fission capture is higher.
Heavy water used as moderator inside the Calandria gets heated up due to neutron
moderation and capture, attenuation of gamma radiation as well as due to transfer of
heat from other reactor components in contact. The primary function of moderator
circulation system is to maintain equilibrium moderator temperature in the core, by
providing sufficient cooling to remove about 123 MW to heat generated in moderator at
full power. 6 x 20% canned motor pumps are provided for moderator circulation.
The system supplies heavy water to adjuster rod mechanisms for cooling of the adjuster
rods. Reactivity control by chemical shimming is done using boron / gadolinium nitrate
as liquid poison in moderator. The system supplies heavy water, as power water, to
Moderator Liquid Poison Addition System (MLPAS).
Presence of ionic impurities in moderator increases transport and buildup of radioactivity
in the circuit as well as increases rate of radio-lytic decomposition of heavy water within
Calandria. In view of this, a portion of the moderator flow is continuously circulated
through ion exchange columns. Separate ion exchange column are provided for removal
of boron or gadolinium nitrate poison from moderator, which are added through MLPAS
or Shut Down System #2.
Heavy water in the Calandria also functions as a heat sink in the unlikely event of Loss
of Coolant Accident (LOCA) coincident with the failure of Emergency Core Cooling
System (ECCS).
Moderator level in Calandria is maintained at 100% full tank (FT) level at full power.
Moderator level in Calandria varies from cold shutdown state to full power, due to
variation in temperature. The extent of variation could be 95.7% FT level under cold
Page 47
Chapter 2

shutdown condition. In addition, there is change in level due to insertion or withdrawal of

Shut off Rods, Control Rods and Adjuster Rods. The level variation affects interface
between the Calandria heavy water and the gadolinium nitrate poison in Shut Down
System #2 leading to migration of poison towards Calandria. To minimize the level
variation, a head tank has been provided.
Moderator system is designed to remove about 123 MW heat. However, each heat
exchanger is rated at 63 MW to provide margin of 3 MW. The moderator temperature
has been optimized based on the following considerations.
1. Heat exchanger size and heavy-water hold-up.
2. Thermal stresses in Calandria and end shield
3. To have enough sub-cooling to act as heat sink in the event of failure of ECCS
following LOCA.
Considering these aspects, normal operating temperature of moderator at Calandria
outlet has been selected, as 76C and maximum temperature is restricted to 83C by
providing reactor setback.
Full tank level in Calandria during normal operation is chosen on the basis of following
considerations :
1. If level is kept less than 100%, these could be more ripples on the surface which can
cause more vibration of the various guide tubes and flux monitoring tubes inside
Calandria. Surface ripples and consequent vibration will be much less if Calandria is
100% full, because, open surface area is only in the four 500 mm O.D.OPRD lines.
2. With level less than 100%, there will be sloshing of D2O in Calandria during and
earthquake.
3. With moderator level at 100%, the release of deuterium is low because of less
exposed surface area.
4. With moderator level at 100%, flux distortion will be less
Moderator Cover Gas System
To accommodate volumetric changes in moderator due to temperature variations and
injection of liquid poison on actuation of SDS #2 and to control system pressure, a gas
space is provided in the top portion of Calandria, above the free surface of the
moderator in the overpressure relief lines. This space is filled with helium, which is an
inert gas that does not react chemically with heavy water. Helium is also stable under
nuclear radiation.
In Calandria, during reactor operation, high neutron flux and the gamma radiation cause
radiolysis of the moderator. The moderator breaks down into its constituent elements of
deuterium and oxygen. These dissolved gases are released into the helium gas space
where they collect and may eventually reach unacceptable concentrations. To avoid this,
the helium is continuously circulated through recombination units.
Page 48
Chapter 2

The main cover gas circulation system consists of Calandria, four over-pressure relief
pipes, standpipes of Reactivity Devices, helium blowers, Recombination Units and
necessary valves and piping.
2.12.8 End Shield and Calandria Vault Cooling Systems
The End Shield cooling system serves to remove nuclear heat generated in the End
Shield and heat transferred from the primary coolant across insulating gaps between
end fittings and lattice tubes and across support bearings of coolant channels.
The criteria for design are :
1. To limit Calandria side tube sheet temperature to levels acceptable from the point of
view of radial expansion.
2. To obtain a fairly uniform temperature distribution in the end shields structure and
minimise thermal stresses.
3. To maintain compatible water chemistry with the end shield components.
Water in the end shields also provides neutron shielding.
The minimum heat to be removed from each end shield is about 2450 kW and the heat
transferred from primary system is about 1130 kW. Water chemistry compatible with the
end shield structure is maintained and a purification loop is incorporated for removal of
impurities from the circuit.
The Calandria vault cooling system serves to remove the heat generated in the
Calandria vault water. Calandria vessel is submerged inside a pool of water in the
Calandria vault. The function of water is two-fold, firstly to serve as thermal shield
around the Calandria and secondly to cool the vault walls which serve as biological
shield. The radiation heat generated in the light water and the vault walls as well as the
heat from the Calandria shell is transferred to the Calandria vault water. The vault water
is recirculated through the Calandria vault cooling system by pumps and is cooled by
heat exchangers. The average temperature of vault water is about 52C and the vault
concrete temperature is about 60C. The acceptable maximum concrete temperature for
continuous operation is 65C. The heat to be removed from the vault water is about
4505 kW and system is designed for 5000 kW.
The End Shield and Calandria vault cooling systems reject the heat to the Active
Process Water System. The system is classified as safety class 3.
2.12.9 CO2 Annulus Gas System
CO2 is circulated through the annuli between coolant tubes and Calandria tubes.
Monitoring of moisture content of CO2 is done to assess the coolant tube integrity. High
purity CO2 is circulated through all the annuli continuously at a rate of 30 Nm3/hr. The
maximum permissible dew point of makeup CO2 is (-) 20C. Provision is made for on-line
dew point monitoring. Besides pressure rise monitoring in the circuit is also annunciated.
Annunciation is given if the dew point of circulating CO2 rises to (-) 5C, which indicates
Page 49
Chapter 2

leak from one or more of the coolant tubes. Manual shutdown of the reactor is initiated.
The annulus gas tubes from individual channels are grouped into several strings and
these are grouped in sub groups and a process of elimination identifies the sub group
containing the leaky tube, isolating one group at a time. Design pressure of annulus gas
system is 1.75 kg / cm2.
2.12.10 Secondary Systems
The main steam supply system has been designed with the following objectives.
1. To act as a heat sink for the reactor coolant.
2. To transport steam from the steam generator outlet nozzles to the HP turbine reliably
and economically for power generation.
3. To supply steam to auxiliaries forming part of the turbine cycle and to other
miscellaneous needs.
4. To maintain the integrity of the pressure boundary of fluid system under normal
operation and anticipated operational occurrences.
5. To minimise poison outages of the reactor due to turbine faults, certain grid faults
and certain primary side conditions.
2.12.11 Fuel Handling and Control System
Two Fuelling Machines (FM) operating in conjunction, one at each end of Reactor, carry
out on-power refueling. Fresh fuel bundles are inserted at one end while the other
machine at the other end receives the spent fuel bundles. Bi-directional refueling in
adjacent channels is adopted (in the direction of flow) to smoothen axial flux pattern.
Spent Fuel Bundles received in the Fuelling Machine are transferred to the Fuel Transfer
Equipment i.e. mobile Transfer Machine and subsequently transferred from mobile
Transfer Machine to the Tray loading Bay (TLB) located in the Spent Fuel Building. The
spent fuel bundles are stored under water in trays in storage Bay for sufficient period
before they are transported to a reprocessing plant.
Normally eight bundles refueling is adopted to optimize utilizations of Fuel and operation
of Fuelling Machines. In an equilibrium core it would add reactivity of about 0.3 mK on an
average, for each channel in a refueling operation which normally takes about 4 hours.
Total number of channels to be refueled in a day is determined from the point of view of
addition of reactivity required for sustained operation.
Spent Fuel Bundles, while in FM Head, are cooled by re-circulating heavy water
whereas in mobile Transfer Machine cooling is done by re-circulating light water. From
the Fuelling Machine, only one pair of bundles at a time is transferred to light water
environment in the mobile Transfer Machine. This dry transfer operation normally lasts
about 4 minutes. During abnormal condition, if the dry transfer operation is not
completed within 5.72 minutes, cooling by water spray / filling is provided. After transfer
to light water environment, submerging the bundles in light water ensures cooling.
Thereafter the bundles are transferred to Tray loading bay and then to Storage Bay by
underwater operations only. Storage Bay water is cooled by re-circulation through heat
exchangers.
Page 50
Chapter 2

The Spent Fuel Storage Bay and Tray Loading Bay are lined with stainless steel to
provide a primary leak tight barrier. The liner has provision to collect any leakage of bay
water. Spent fuel bundles are loaded in the trays at tray loading bay.
The tray loading bay also incorporates inspection facility for detection of ruptured spent
fuel bundles. The storage bay has capacity to store spent fuel discharged for about 10
reactor years in addition to provision for unloading of one core in case of emergency.
Provision also exists to ship spent fuel to either reprocessing plant or any other
consolidated interim storage facility.
A large number and variety of devices such as Pumps, Valves, Hydraulic Cylinders,
motors etc. are used in the Fuel Handling and Control System. The design of these
devices is based on following considerations :
1. Redundancy is provided to ensure cooling of Spent Fuel bundles after it is taken out
of the core.
2. Fail-safe devices and auto initiated back up actions are employed to the extent
feasible.
3. The maximum risk is limited to damage of only four pairs of bundles, which are also
always contained in a vessel.
The Fuel Handing Control System enables the control of Fuelling systems comprising
Fuelling machines, Fuel transfer, Vault and Service area doors and Roll-on shield. The
control system is computerized, which gives sequential commands to the two fuelling
machines to enable automatic refueling of reactor at any selected coolant channel. The
system also gives sequential commands to Fuel Transfer Tray Loading Bay. Both
Software and hardware interlocks are provided to ensure that the commands issued to
the system result in safe operation. The system provides for safe manual mode
operations during conditions when the control computer is not available. The
subsystems, which are not computer controlled, are designed to be operable only in
manual mode.
2.12.12 Instrumentation and Control (I&C)
The Instrumentation & Control (I&C) systems in 700 MWe include a variety of equipment
intended to perform display, monitoring, control, protection & safety functions. The
concepts presented form the basis for the system design and development. General
guidelines followed are :
1. Electrical transmission of signals is preferred to pneumatic, because of better
amenability to further processing in addition to inherent fast response etc.
2. Equipment free from ageing, wear and not needing routine and preventive
maintenance are preferred. Microprocessor-based systems, solid-state semiconductor devices are preferred over mechanical systems having moving parts. The
computerization of control algorithms and operator interface are provided wherever
required.
Page 51
Chapter 2

3. The component / equipment quality requirements are covered in the individual

specification / requirement sheets. The quality of equipment is met by selection of
components (e.g. grade of components / screening), routine testing as per Indian /
International standards environmental testing as per Indian / International standards
and rigorous functional testing. For computerized system, software verification and
validation review / audit procedure based on AERB-SW-D25 guide is followed. The
quality requirements commensurate with the safety class. Principles of redundancy,
diversity, fall-safe, testability and maintainability are extensively employed to
maximize availability while ensuring safety. Physical separation of redundant
channels is provided.
4. Modular construction of I&C systems is followed to minimise repair time.
5. For all safety systems Triplicated sensors and logic based on majority coincidence (2
out of 3) principles is used. On line testing facility for protection channel is provided.
6. Independence between control & data communication is maintained for safety
systems.
7. The sensors and associated electronics for each channel is physically separate and
follows diversified cable routing.
8. Instrumentation & Controls of the shutdown system #1, Emergency core cooling
system and Decay heat removal system are located in Control Equipment Room
(CER) / Main Control Room (MCR). I&C of Shut-down system #2 & Containment
Isolation are located in Reactor Auxiliary Building. I&C of fire water, decay heat
removal under Emergency conditions is located in Fire water pump house.
9. The overall I&C design is such that all the safety functions are normally achievable
from MCR. In case MCR is inhabitable then all the safety functions can be carried
out from Back-up Control room (BCR) and Back-up control points.
10. In the control loops for Neutronic signals and for some important signals (e.g. PHT
pressure) traditional approach of Triplicated sensors is maintained. The Triplicated
process variable signals are processed for rationality and median signal is used for
control. The microprocessor-based systems with hot standby configuration are used
as controllers for these loops. When duplicate sensors are used, average signal of
sensors is used for further processing (e.g. level transmitters of LZC, rod position
signals etc.). In case of failure of one sensor, other sensor signal is used. Any gray
failure is detected by monitoring deviation among sensors of same parameter and is
indicated. The operator will identify the failed sensor by inference from other
parameters, local gauges etc. In case of gray failure, the system selects the
conservative signal, wherever applicable. For non-critical systems, control,
monitoring and indication functions are achieved by single sensor (e.g. air
compressor control, leakage collection system, monitoring of hydrogen concentration
in cover gas etc.). Due credit is taken for manual sampling / monitoring facilities.
Page 52
Chapter 2

11. Instrument air, wherever required meets the availability requirements of I&C
systems, Independence and functional isolation is incorporated. Local instrument air
accumulators are provided wherever operation of valve is required even after
instrument air supply failure.
12. A high degree of automation is aimed at to eliminate human error affecting
availability / reliability. However, some systems, e.g. D2O leak detection, failed-fuel
detection etc. will need operator surveillance and action for remedial measures.
13. Simplicity in design, operator acceptance, obsolescence, current trend in technology
are given due consideration.
Main Control Centre
The control of power plant is based on the philosophy of a centralized control room
sufficiently instrumented to provide adequate information to the operator regarding the
status of the plant and to enable safe and efficient control of the plant. Main Control
Room (MCR) is located in the Control Building at 111 m floor. A common control room is
provided for two units. Fig. 2.9 indicates pictorial view of main control room panels for
700 MWe Plant.
VDU based soft controls are provided for all IB, IC & NINS systems. Conventional
controls, indication and displays are provided for safety critical applications and for some
safety related systems hard-wired backup is also provided. These controls, indications
and displays are provided on main control panels and operator consoles. Number of
large video screens is provided for displaying the plant information. The main control
room panels and operator consoles of each unit are arranged in Horse-shoe
arrangement. Arrangement of the systems on the main control room panels is done on
the basis of the functional requirements.
Window annunciations are provided on top portion of the panels. Window annunciations
call for immediate operator attention and are very important under all plant conditions.
With a view to present the desired information to the operator in an overall compact
fashion, a computer based operator information system is provided. Operator
Information Concoles (OIC) with VDU & Keyboard of various computerized systems are
provided in the MCR. OICs are designed for sitting operation. On these VDUs operator
can get information on various systems of the plant.
One computer room is provided for each unit. In this room, computers and peripherals of
computerized systems are located.
Only very essential controls and indications are provided on MCR panels. However, to
supplement these devices many other type of components / requirements are required.
These are mounted on auxiliary panels, which are located in Control Equipment Room
(CER). CER is located at the same floor are MCR. Physical separation of channel
equipment with total fire barriers is achieved by providing 3 separate rooms for each unit
for triplicated channels Power supply for illumination of control room of unit-3 is
independent of unit-4. Similarly, independent air-conditioning systems are provided for
Page 53
Chapter 2

control rooms of both the units. In MCR, emergency fresh air ventilation system is
provided. During radioactivity release, air is made to pass through charcoal and HEPA
filters before being supplied to Control room.
Control and Instrumentation cables of redundant systems are segregated as per IEEE
384. Non-safety related cables are also segregated from the safety related cables as per
IEEE 384.
Fig. 2.9 : Pictorial view of main control room panels for 700 MWe Plant
Page 54
Chapter 2

Back-Up Control Room

Back-up Control Room (BCR) is provided in nuclear building, diametrically opposite to
MCR, so that some of the essential functions of the MCR relating to monitoring of the
important parameters, controls relating to reactor safe shutdown can be carried out in
the event the main control room becomes inhabitable. For decay heat removal and for
monitoring the PHT pressure, two nos. of back up control points are provided in Station
Auxiliary Buildings (SAB) for safety related group Y and Z loads.
Separate sensors, power supplies & cables are provided for most of the back up control
room indications. A VDU is also provided to give the total information of the plant.
Control and Instrumentation cables of redundant systems of back up control room are
also segregated as per IEEE 384.
Radiation Monitoring System
Radiation Monitoring System helps to control exposure of the plant personnel / public
and gives advance indication of malfunctioning of Reactor Systems. There are about 60
Area Radiation Monitors located all over the plant area. These units provide information
pertaining to radiation fields within the plant and also provide alarms when the field
exceeds the alarm limits. 6 Nos. of environmental monitors are located within the plant
exclusion area. Signals from these units are transmitted to control room for display and
annunciation. The reactor-building is isolated when the release rate exceeds the set
limits. The triplicate ventilation duct monitors are provided to monitor primary
containment exhaust activity and keep 2/3 signals for Reactor building isolation when
release rate exceeds. A set of stack monitoring instruments is also provided in the stack
monitoring room to measure the discharge activity.
Release rate display and alarms are provided in the control room for Iodine, particulate
gross gamma and tritium activity releases. Inter-zonal contamination monitors are
provided to help preventing spread of contamination in case local contamination occurs.
2.12.13 Electrical System
Various auxiliaries (i.e. various electrical loads) of the power station are provided with
power supply from Off-site and On-site sources. The offsite power supply is derived from
400 kV and 220 kV switchyards. The 400 kv system is primarally used for evacuating te
power generated by HAPP. The switchyard structures and equipment are designated as
codal category.
Start up transformers (SUTs) are connected to 220 kV switchyard. These are used as
one of the source of station auxiliary power. Turbo-Generators (TGs) are connected to
the LV side of Generator Transformers (GTs) and serve as another source off-side
power. When a shutdown has to be taken up on TG, it is isolated by means of generator
circuit breaker (GCB) and Unit Transformer (UTs) will continue to be available. The
number of transmission lines connected to the switchyard is such that the requirements
of AERB safety guide AERB / SG / D11 are met. The station auxiliary power supply
system is classified into four classes depending on the required availability. These are :
Page 55
Chapter 2

Class I system
Class II system
Class III system
Class IV system
:
:
:
:
220 V DC control power supplies

415 V AC 3 phase system
6.6 kV and 415 V AC 3 phase systems
6.6 kV and 415 V AC 3 phase systems
Class I power supply system (based on batteries) is used for the supply of control power
for circuit breakers and controls such as control of DG sets, turbo-generator, etc. The
DC supply system is normally supplied from Class III AC power system of the
emergency electric power supply system through AC-DC converter (ACVR). In case of
failure of AC power to ACVR, the batteries continue to supply to the loads without
interruption.
Class II power supply is derived from uninterruptible power supply system comprising of
rectifier, inverter and a dedicated battery bank. The battery bank is capable of feeding
inverter loads for a period of at least 30 minutes after the failure of AC supply to the
rectifier. Important loads on Class-II include FM supply pumps, emergency lights, ECCS
Valves.
Class III power supply is connected to emergency diesel generators which automatically
provide power supply in the event of class IV power supply failure. The system consists
of 4 numbers of diesel generator (DG) sets for each unit, each of 100% capacity. Loads
connected to the class III supply can tolerate short time interruptions (up to two minutes)
in power supply.
Major loads connected to class III power supply are primary feed pumps, power and
control UPS, moderator circulating pumps, ECCS pumps, air compressors, auxiliary
boiler feed pumps, shut down cooling pumps and process water pumps.
Class IV power supply is derived from 400 kV and 220 kV systems through GT & UT
combination and start-up transformers respectively. Further, Class IV power supply is
also derived from the turbo-generator through unit transformers. There are two numbers
of UTs and two numbers of SUTs per unit. Either two SUTs or two UTs are capable of
supplying the entire station load. Loads connected to this system can tolerate prolonged
power supply interruption.
Safety Related Electrical power supply system is divided into two independent,
redundant Divisions. One of the Divisions is normally supplied from the startup
transformers and the other Division is normally supplied from the unit transformers. The
capacity of each Division, their location and routing of the cables are such that common
mode failures are minimized. The electrical power supply systems catering to all safety
related loads are designed to meet the requirement of single failure criterion.
Redundant electrical power supply equipment are housed in separate rooms with walls
of appropriate fire rating. Cables to redundant loads are routed through independent
routes.
Page 56
Chapter 2

Adequate sealing has been provided at the reactor building penetrations to minimize
leakages. All cables are of fire retardant and low smoke type. Cables used in areas of
high radioactivity (like F/M vault) is designed to safety withstand the applicable radiation
levels.
The design and selection of equipment has taken into consideration steady state voltage
& frequency variations and transient voltage drops during switching operation.
The ambient conditions applicable for the station, fault conditions at the place of
installation are considered for selecting the equipment.
All safety related electrical equipment are qualified for the safe shut down earth quake
as well as OBE requirements.
Provision is made for testing of safety related electrical equipment during the operation
of the station. Unavailability of one DG set for a specified period due to maintenance has
been considered in providing redundancy.
2.12.14 Plant Auxiliaries
Cooling water systems
The various cooling water systems employed are as follows :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Plant Water System

Active Process Water System
Service water system
Condenser cooling water system
Auxiliary cooling water system
Auxiliary service water system
Plant Water System

The Plant Water System is provided for making up the losses (i.e. evaporation, drift,
blow down and leaks) in the Cooling tower based cooling water systems. Natural
Draught Cooling Tower (NDCT) are provided for Condenser Cooling Water System and
Auxiliary Service Water System. Induced Draught Cooling Tower (IDCT) based system
is Service Water (SW) for Active Process Water (APW) cooling and also to cool other
safety related non active systems.
In addition to above major requirement, Plant Water system provides water for other
systems like Domestic Water and DM Plant.
a. Active Process Water System
The main objective is to remove heat from various equipments and heat exchangers in
Reactor Building, Reactor Auxiliary Building, Spent Fuel Building, etc.
Page 57
Chapter 2

Secondary objective is to have a secondary barrier to the potential release of

radioactivity to the environment due to leakages from the Reactor Process equipments
and heat exchangers handling radioactive fluids.
Capability for removal of heat from various equipments and heat exchangers (Moderator
HXs, Shut down cooling HXs, etc.) in Reactor Building shall be available at all times. The
Active Process Water System is designed for safe shutdown earthquake (SSE)
condition.
b. Service Water System
The system is provided to extract heat from Active Process Water System through
Process Water Heat Exchangers, Diesel engine coolers and to dissipate the same to the
atmosphere through Induced Draft Cooling Tower. Reliability of heat removal from
process water heat exchangers is ensured even under Class IV failure and earthquake
(SSE) condition.
c. Auxiliary Cooling Water System
This system is provided to extract heat during power operation of the unit from various
equipment and heat exchangers pertinent to T/G Auxiliaries, Steam Generator (SG)
Blow Down coolers, Class IV Air Compressors and Chiller Condensers. The heat is then
transferred ASW system which in turn dissipates heat to atmosphere through Natural
Draft Cooling Tower (NDCT). This system is classified as Codal Category.
d. Condenser Cooling Water System
To extract heat rejected from the turbine heat cycle through the steam condenser
system is employed to dissipate heat to atmosphere through Natural Draught Cooling
Towers (NDCT) is used. This system is classified as codal category.
e. Auxiliary Service Water System
This system is an open re-circulation system through NDCT catering to cooling
requirements of reject heat from ACW system and of chiller condenser.
Fire Water System
The main plant area is provided with extensive hydrant and sprinkler system for
minimizing the consequences of any fire hazard. High Velocity Water Spray System is
provided for all transformers, turbine oil storage tanks, and day oil tanks. Medium
Velocity Water Spray System is provided for cable vaults, cable trays and PHT pump
motors. Indoor and Outdoor hydrants located suitably provide fire protection within and
around the plant building. Water for personnel sprays in the Reactor Building is also
supplied through fire water system.
The fire fighting system is sized for the simultaneous requirement of a hydrant as well as
sprinkler system. Diesel engine driven fire water pumps, electrical fire water pump and
jockey pump are provided. The main source of firewater is the firewater sumps in the
Fire Water Pump House.
Page 58
Chapter 2

Under extreme emergencies (station black out etc.), firewater is available through diesel
driven pumps. Normally isolated `Hook up type arrangements for injecting water from
fire water system, Fire tender or some other suitable water source are provided for
injecting water into Passive Decay Heat Removal System (PDHRS), Auxiliary SG feed
water system, End Shield and Calandria vault cooling system, Emergency Core Cooling
System (ECCS) and Moderator circulation system. Fire Protection System is detailed
under Section 2.13.6.
Chilled Water System
A centralized chilled water plant caters to the following requirements :
1) Process load (D2O Recovery and upgrading plant) and local cooling load in Reactor
Building & Nuclear Building.
2) Air conditioning load in Nuclear Building, Turbine Building, Control Building, and
Station Auxiliary Building etc.
The system is designed with a bypass arrangement in order to match system
requirement under various operating conditions.
An expansion tank is provided to maintain system pressure and also to serve as a make
up for the system.
Ventilation System
Primary Containment Ventilation System
The Reactor Building (RB) is of double containment where the inner one is known as
Primary Containment (PC steel lined) and the outer one are Secondary Containment
(SC). The PC is further classified into two volumes namely high enthalpy areas and low
enthalpy areas. High enthalpy areas comprise of areas which contain high enthalpy
fluids and are potential source of heavy water (D2O) leakage. These areas are normally
not accessible. The SG room, Pump Room (PR) and Fuelling Machine (FM) vaults areas
fall under this category. Rest of the areas fall under the category of low enthalpy areas
and are normally accessible except moderator room, Fuel Transfer (FT) rooms, Delayed
Neutron Monitoring (DNM) and FM service areas (FMSA) during communication with FM
vault.
For the purpose of contamination control and ventilation requirements, separate high
enthalpy and low enthalpy areas are maintained as described above.
The PC ventilation system is designed fro the following requirements.
To supply cooled, filtered and dehumidified fresh air and exhaust stale air to meet
the fresh air requirement of O&M personnel during normal and Shutdown period.
Ensure flow of air from low active zones to high active zones thus preventing the
spread of activity inside RB.
Maintaining the PC under negative pressure with respect to SC and ambient to
prevent leakage of air from PC during normal operation.
Page 59
Chapter 2

The desired area temperatures inside PC are maintained by the APW fed air-cooling
units (ACUs) in high enthalpy areas and chilled water-cooled air handling units
(AHUs) in low enthalpy areas.
Ventilation flow has been decided in such a way as to meet the ventilation requirements,
while limiting heavy water vapor loss & tritium release (through exhaust) at a minimum.
Provision is made to monitor the activity release through stack. In order to ensure
negative pressure in PC with respect to SC and outside atmosphere, only exhaust fans
are provided in the ventilation system.
Provision is made to isolate moderator room and FM service areas from PC ventilation
system and connect them to Heavy Water Vapour Recovery (HWVR) system by
providing air operated dampers in supply and exhaust ventilation lines and also in
branch lines connecting these areas to dryer. The exhaust from FT room is passed
through a Combined HEPA and Charcoal filter to take care lodine release, if any. To
reduce the dust ingress into the PC, filers with minimum 90% efficiency down to 10
microns are provided at the intake. The exhaust to the stack is through pre filters
(designed for 99% efficiency down to 5 microns) and HEPA (designed for minimum
99.97% efficiency down to 0.3 microns) filters.
SC surrounds PC from raft to dome with a gap of about two meters. The objective of the
SC ventilation is to prevent the SC atmosphere from becoming stale and to provide fresh
air for occasional occupancy. SC ventilation system is designed on the following basis :
SC does not have any continuous occupancy as it does not house any equipment and
also there is no major heat load other than that from lighting. Consequently continuous
ventilation for SC is not required. However to prevent the atmosphere from becoming
stale, ventilation system with exhaust air flow is provided. Under normal operating
condition of the reactor, PC is negative with respect to SC and hence leakage flow can
take place from SC to PC and not vice versa. Hence activity will not spread from PC to
SC. Provision is made to isolate SC under RB isolation logic, with provision of two
isolation dampers on both supply and exhaust line.
Primary Containment Cooling System
The function of this system, provided in primary containment (PC) of Reactor Building
(RB), is to remove heat from equipment and piping under normal reactor condition and
to maintain desired area temperature in high enthalpy area such as pump room and
fuelling Machine vaults (FMVs) and low enthalpy areas like accessible areas, moderator
room, FM service areas (FMSAs) and Delayed Neutron Monitoring (DNM) rooms. Since
water spray system is provided for energy management during post accident condition,
PC cooling system is not performing any safety function during post accident condition.
PC air cooling system consists of air cooling units (ACU) for pump room & FM Vaults
and air handling units (AHU), located at various locations.
Page 60
Chapter 2

a. Low Enthalpy Areas (Moderator Room DNM and Other Accessible Areas) Cooling
System
Air handling units, are provided for this purpose. The system is designed to maintain the
area temperature 35C. Humidity in these areas is about 50 60%.
Air Handling Units (AHUs) are standard package units, each consisting of a cabinet,
which houses one or two cooling coils, fan, filters, inlet and outlet, grills. Room air is
drawn in, filtered, cooled and returned to the area. Chilled water at 8C at inlet is used as
the cooling water in the AHUs. Chilled water continues to flow to all AHUs. AHUs are
designed for air inlet temperature of 33C. Fan motors are on class IV electric power
supply. The units are provided with drain pan(s), directed to nearby floor drains.
b. High Enthalpy Areas (FM Vaults and Pump Room) Cooling System
FM vaults and Pump room are provided with air-cooling units (ACU) to maintain area
temperature around 48C and 45C respectively. Active process water (APW), supplied
at a design temperature of 35C at inlet is the cooling medium and it is continuously
flowing to all ACU during normal & hot shut down conditions. In the scheme of pressure
balance between various volumes, high enthalpy area atmosphere is maintained at
negative pressure with respect to rest of the area (About 15 mm wc) and hence a
continuous purge is maintained. Leak thightness and integrity of the boundaries is
maintained in order to minimize the purge. The purge copes with the in leakage of
compressed air and steam. A closed loop heavy water vapor recovery system is
provided to recover the heavy water vapor from the containment atmosphere.
Reactor Building Heavy Water Vapour Recovery System
The system is provided to recover heavy water vapor arising out of chronic leakages /
spills from primary heat transport, moderator and fuelling machine circuit in the Reactor
Building (RB) Primary Containment (PC) atmosphere. Recovery is made by adsorption
of the vapor on molecular sieves and then regeneration of the bed and condensing the
water. Condensate from the dryer equipment is collected by condensate collection
system.
Heavy water vapor recovery system maintains the fuelling machine vaults and pump
room (high enthalpy) areas under negative pressure with respect to low enthalpy
accessible areas thus preventing activity spread from these areas to accessible areas.
Heavy water vapor recovery system also helps in reducing the tritium activity levels in
pump room, fuelling machine vaults, fuelling machine service areas, moderator room,
delayed neutron monitoring room, fuel transfer room, fuelling machine valve station, etc.
High enthalpy area contains all high enthalpy heavy systems and includes pump room
(PR), fuelling machine vaults (FMVs) and fuelling machine service areas (FMSAs) when
connected with FMV. These areas are generally accessible only during shutdown period
of the reactor.
Page 61
Chapter 2

Low enthalpy areas like PHT equipment room, feed pump equipment room, moderator
room, delayed neutron monitoring room, fuel transfer rooms, north and south galleries,
staircase, FMSAs (when the area is not connected with FMV) are normally accessible
during reactor operation with a few exceptions. Some areas like moderator room,
delayed neutron (DN) monitoring rooms, fuel transfer (FT) rooms are not accessible
during normal operation.
Different areas in PC are connected to heavy water vapor recovery system, in which
heavy water vapors are recovered as downgraded heavy water condensate. Typically
each dryer consists of adsorption & regeneration circuits, ducting and condensate
collection system piping. Purge dryer is provided to maintain slight negative pressure in
FMV & Pump room with respect to accessible areas.
Air Conditioning (A/C) & Ventilation are provided for Reactor Auxiliary Building (RAB) of
HAPP-1 & 2. The system is designed with an objective of ensuring adequate supply of
fresh & filtered air for the operating personnel, remove heat load generated in the
operating areas due to equipment and / or human occupancy and maintaining air flow
from lower contaminated areas to higher contaminated areas to minimize spread of
contamination. RAB consists of the portion of Nuclear Building (NB).excluding Reactor
Building (RB). This building houses Spent Fuel Storage Bay (SFSB), equipment of
moderator and PHT purification systems, workshops & maintenance areas, change
rooms, Backup Control Room (BCR), Heavy water vapor recovery systems, supply unit
of RAB ventilation system including air washer, cable passage area, etc. Nuclear
building is divided into zone 3 or 2 or 1 based on contamination levels and potential for
activity release. Ventilation design for these buildings is based on activity considerations,
zoning and desired area temperature requirements. For the purpose of design, the
various areas may be categorized as follows :
1. Areas where occasional fission product activity release, particularly of I-131 is likely
spent fuel storage bay (SFSB) and Tray Loading Bay (TLB) areas, spent fuel flask
decontamination area.
2. Areas where high tritium release is likely PHT purification area, evaporation clean
up, dedeuteration facility etc.
3. Areas where occasional beta-gamma and tritium release are likely chemical
laboratories, mechanical maintenance shops, and decontamination areas.
4. Other areas where radiation levels are low.
(Exhaust from areas under category (1) requires to be filtered for iodine removal. The
number of air changes in all these areas is based both on activity considerations, heat
load and the local air coolers provided for the area).
Fresh air supply system caters to the fresh air requirements of the above areas and
Secondary Containment (SC) of Reactor Building (RB. Exhaust system is common for
RAB-1 and RAB-2, Waste Management Plant (WMP), Mechanical and FM workshops.
Page 62
Chapter 2


The Main Control Room at 111 M Elevation of control building is provided with fresh air
during emergency condition when outside air becomes contaminated due to accidental
release of radioactivity during postulated LOCA involving fuel failure. The system
consists of louvers, pre-filters, combined HEPA & charcoal filters, centrifugal fans,
dampers, ducting, grills, etc. During normal condition Emergency Fresh Air Ventilation
system remains boxed up and non-operational, and fresh air requirements for AHUs of
Control Room is met by the normal make up route. In case of radioactivity in the outside
air, normal fresh air make up route is closed and makeup supply to the aforesaid room is
provided by Emergency Fresh Air Ventilation route.
Outside air is sucked by a centrifugal fan through louvers, pre-filters and combined
HEPA & Charcoal filters and is supplied to the MCR. The pre-filter removes dust
particles and combined HEPA & charcoal filters reduces the radioactivity from the air
before it is supplied to MCR.
Air Conditioning and Ventilation for CB & SABs
Air Conditioning (A/C) & Ventilation are provided for Control Building (CB) & Station
Auxiliary Building (SAB). The system is designed with the main objective of ensuring
adequate air circulation to maintain healthy atmosphere, supply of fresh & filtered air for
the operating personnel, remove heat load generated in the operating areas due to
equipment and or human occupancy and maintaining desired area temperatures.
Areas in CB & SAB, selected for A/C, are cooled by local air handling units (AHUs),
supplied with class-III chilled water. The cooled and dehumidified air from the outlet of
AHU is supplied through supply air ducting with equipment like grilles, diffusers to the
area. All AHUs are supplied with chilled water for cooling the air. Each of AHUs is
provided with drain pan and drain line to direct condensate water, if any, to nearest nonactive drainage system floor drain.
Clean Air Ventilation for other Areas
This system caters to the following areas :
1. Turbine Building (TB)
2. DG buildings
3. Condenser Cooling Water Pump House (CCW PH)
4. Safety Related Pump House (SRPH)
5. DM water plant
6. Filtration & Chlorination plant building
7. Fire Water Pump House (FWPH)
8. Safety Related Electrical House (SREH)
The ventilation system for all the areas except for DG rooms is designed to limit the
inside temperature to 43C. For the areas, i.e. DG rooms where dry ventilation is
provided, the inside temperature in these area may exceed 43C in summer.
Compressed Air System
The compressed air system provides the following :
Page 63
Chapter 2

a) Instrument Air for Pneumatic Instrument & Control,

b) Mask Air for breathing & protective clothing
c) Service Air for general purpose
The plant compressed air systems for each unit are divided in two categories, namely
class III compressed air system which is safety related and qualified for SSE, and class
IV compressed air system. Four numbers bulk air receivers are provided in reactor
building to ensure uninterrupted supply of instrument air during failure of class IV till
class III picks up.
The instrumentation and control system requires oil and dust free dry air {free air dew
point (-) 40C} while for breathing & protective clothing the air is moist for human
comfort.
2.12.15 Design Life
Design life of the plant is 40 years. With life extension and replacement of aged parts /
components extension of plant life is possible for about 10 / 20 years.
Design of 700 MWe PHWR is extension of already operating 540 MWe stations at TAPP
3 & 4.
2.13
2.13.1
REACTOR SAFETY SYSTEMS

Shutdown Systems
Two independent fast acting, physically separately shutdown systems operating on
diverse principles are provided for shutting down the reactor when required. They are
Shut-off Rod Mechanism (Shutdown System no. 1 SDS # 1) and Liquid Poison
Injection System (Shutdown System no. 2 SDS # 2). Both the systems are capable of
rapidly shutting down the reactor and keeping it in sub-critical condition for prolonged
period of time. Whenever SDS # 1 is actuated, Control Rods are also dropped along with
Shut-off Rods. Further, during a reactor trip, Zone control compartment are filled and
Adjuster rods are frozen irrespective of their positions.
Shutdown System No. 1 (Shut-Off Rod Mechanism)
The shutdown system #1 consists of twenty eight shut-off rods (SRs) utilizing cadmium
absorber elements, which are inserted into the reactor core on actuation of the system.
At each of the twenty eight locations, the system consists of shut-off rod assembly, guide
tube assembly, guide tube locator assembly, standpipe-thimble assembly, initial
acceleration spring cum shield plug assembly, drive mechanism and the supporting,
sealing & shielding arrangements. The SR assembly consists of a vertical tubular
cadmium absorber sandwiched between stainless steel tubes and a rope attachment at
its top. Five SRs each in the outer most rows are shorter in absorber length. The upper
end of the wire rope holding SR is attached to and wound on a sheave inside drive
mechanism. The shut-off rod assembly is held in parked position with the help of self
locking feature provided by design, in worm gear unit of drive mechanism. An electric
motor, through gear drive and electromagnetic clutch, drives the rod. On de-energisation
Page 64
Chapter 2

of the clutch, the rod falls into a guide tube inside the reactor core. The initial gravity fall
of the rod is assisted by a spring.
Shut Down System No. 2 (Liquid Poison Injection System)
Liquid Poison Injection System, as Shut Down System #2, employs direct injection of
liquid poison viz. Gadolinium nitrate solution in heavy water into moderator to shut down
the reactor. Gadolinium nitrate solution is stored in six poison tanks, each tank being
connected to a perforated injection tube. The injection tubes are horizontally oriented in
the Calandria. High-pressure helium is stored in a tank known as helium storage tank.
This is connected to the poison tanks through an array of six quick opening valves.
These valves are opened during an SDS # 2 trip and consequently the high-pressure
helium forces the gadolinium nitrate solution into the Calandria through the holes in the
injection tubes. The system is designed to introduce about 70 mK in about 2.5
seconds. However, the total negative reactivity introduced when the gadolinium nitrate
solution is completely dispersed in the moderator is about 300 mK.
2.13.2
Containment
Double containment philosophy has been followed. The containment system consists of
an inner (primary) containment enveloped by an outer (secondary) containment. The
Primary Containment is provided with Carbon Steel (CS) liner to reduce leak rate. The
annulus between the inner and outer containments is kept at a slightly negative pressure
with respect to the atmosphere so as to minimize ground level activity releases to the
environment during an accident condition.
The containment associated engineered safety features (ESFs) are specified to be
operable under post Loss of Coolant Accident (LOCA) condition. These ESFs are
qualified for Safe Shut down Earthquake (SSE) as well as LOCA environment.
i. Design Basis
ii. For Normal Operation
The purpose of containment building during normal operation is to:
Provide an envelope around the structure housing / supporting Calandria, end
shields, reactivity mechanisms, PHT and moderator systems, fuelling systems and
various associated systems.
Provide shielding, as also to permit access to equipment within the containment
building under reactor operating / shutdown conditions.
To keep the release of radioactivity during normal operation within prescribed limits.
For Accident Conditions
Under accident conditions, the system must limit the activity release to environment such
that the exposure to an individual would remain within acceptable limits even at the
exclusion boundary. The stipulated dose limit is 0.5 Sv (50 rem) to thyroid of a child, and
0.1 Sv (10 rem) to whole body.
Page 65
Chapter 2

Containment Isolation :
Automatic isolation of containment is initiated in the event of Pressure rise in
volume V1 OR,
Activity in containment ventilation exhaust duct exceeding a pre-set limit.
Provision for remote manual isolation by hand switch is also kept.
Two isolation devices have been provided in each line communicating to the main PHT
system or containment atmosphere. These devices would either remain normally closed
or actuate automatically to provide leak tight barriers under an accident condition.
Design ensures that these barriers remain close or close during any failure of control
power or air supply to actuator. Preferably one of the isolation devices of these lines is
kept within the Primary Containment. For lines not communicating to the containment
atmosphere or to the main PHT system at least one isolation device is provided. The
system generally meets the requirements of the IAEA safety guide 50-SG-D12.
2.13.3
Containment Spray System

The objective of the Containment Spray System (CSS) is to remove the airborne lodine
following a loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA) by spraying water along with appropriate
additives (i.e. Sodium hydroxide solution etc.) into the containment. This spray also
removes heat from the containment atmosphere and reduces the pressure of the
containment thereby minimizing the driving force for leakage of fission products and
consequent ground level releases. Containment Spray System (CSS) is designed to
operate during accident conditions only.
Containment Spray System Pumps (CSSPs)
These are proposed to be of centrifugal type. Each pump takes suction from APWST
and ECCS / CSS sump through common suction intake arrangement. The pump is
proposed to have a preliminary specification as follows :
2.13.4
Secondary Containment Recirculation and Purge

Secondary containment recirculation and purge (SCRP) system is an engineered safety
feature which can be put in operation after an accident to achieve the following :
1. To maintain a negative pressure in the Secondary containment by purging of air
thereby reducing ground level leakage of radioactivity.
2. To reduce concentration of iodine in the secondary containment by re-circulation
through charcoal filters.
3. To dilute the local concentration of radioactivity by mixing the leaked radioactivity
with the large volume of air in the secondary containment.
Two fans are provided for recirculation, one being standby to the other. Each fan loop
has a combined HEPA-charcoal filter. From the fan discharge a branch line is connected
to the stack through a separate HEPA and charcoal filter unit.
Page 66
Chapter 2

2.13.5
Primary Containment Controlled Discharge System (PCCD)

It is desirable to depressurize the containment following an accident in the shortest
possible time so that the integrated leakage from the primary containment is minimized.
Following the initial suppression of pressure due to condensation on the containment
internal structures, the Containment spray system is used for long-term heat removal
from the containment atmosphere. The spray system also removes the radio nuclides
from the containment atmosphere.
In order to achieve de-pressurization to lower pressures, there is a provision to
discharge, in a controlled manner, to the stack via absolute and iodine filters, if the
circumstances demand and if environmental conditions permit. This discharge can also
used to prevent pressurization due to in leakage of compressed air.
To meet the above objective, a branch duct designed for a flow of 3400 std. cubic m/hr is
taken from main ventilation exhaust duct before the first containment isolation valve and
is connected directly to stack via a demister, a combined HEPA and charcoal filter, a
HEPA filter and a fan. Each of the two parallel paths has two isolation valves in series.
2.13.6
Fire Protection System

Design Objectives :
1. To minimize potential fire loads with a view to prevent fire.
2. To identify fire loads for various areas
3. To provide appropriate fire prevention, fire detection, and fire fighting systems, based
on fire loads, in the plant design,
4. To ensure that capability for performing safe shut down and decay heat removal
functions is not impaired in case of fire.
5. To ensure that mitigation means are available for all safety related equipments as
required including SSE and station black out conditions.
Fire Hazards, Prevention & Protection
Fire Hazards
The major fire hazards in the plant are as follows :
Oil system
Electrical fires
Charcoal filter fires
Diesel oil fires
Turbine/Pump Lubrication oil system, Turbine Relay Oil system,

Fuelling, machine oil hydraulic systems, transformer oil, and primary
coolant pump oil supply system.
All over the plant
In SFB, RAB and Reactor buildings
In DG room, fire water pump house and Diesel Oil Storage Area
(DOSA)
Fire Prevention
Following methods have been adopted for fire prevention :
Page 67
Chapter 2

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Physical barriers
Separation redundant systems with fire barriers.
Use of Fire Resistant Low Smoke (FRLS) and Fire Survival (FS) cables.
Early detection
Fire break
Fire Protection
A general network of water hydrants has been provided covering the plant area.
Following three categories of fire hazard are identified, based on fire load as per
handbook of Industrial Loss Prevention, prepared by Factory Mutual Engineering
Corporation :
Low fire hazard
Medium fire hazard
High fire hazard
2.7 x 105 kcal/sq.m

2.7 x 105 to 5.4 x 105 kcal/sq.m
5.4 x 105 to 10.8 x 105 kcal/sq.m
For low fire hazard areas of Reactor Building, smoke detectors have been provided as
fire detection measure and firewater as fire fighting system.
For low fire hazard areas of Nuclear building, turbine building, station auxiliary building
etc., generally, smoke detectors and portable fire extinguishers are provided.
For high fire hazard areas such as turbine oil tanks, day oil tanks, and transformers,
High Velocity Water Spray Systems on automatic mode are provided for fire protection.
For DG room, smoke detectors and CO2 fire protection are provided.
For high and moderate fire hazard areas such as cable vaults, cable trays and PHT
motors etc. Medium Velocity Water Spray System with electrically operated deluge valve
is provided.
2.13.7
Emergency Core Cooling System (ECCS)

ECCS is provided to cool the core and thereby limit core damage in the event of
postulated loss of coolant accidents (LOCA).
The design requirement of the emergency core cooling system is to provide sufficiency
cooling of the core following a LOCA, so as to limit the release of fission products from
the fuel and to ensure the integrity of fuel channels.
The emergency core cooling system incorporates the following :
1. High pressure light water injection.
2. Low pressure long term recirculation.
High pressure injection is provided by light water accumulators, which get connected to,
pressurized air tanks (accumulator) on demand. Injection of water to the PHT system
Page 68
Chapter 2

starts when the system pressure drop below 40 kg/m (g) with conditioning signal for
LOCA. The long term ECCS recirculation phase, takes over core cooling on, low level in
light water accumulator and low pressure in air accumulator. ECCS pumps, which take
suction from ECCS sumps, are poised for action at PHT pressure 40 kg/m (g).
However, recirculation starts only when the PHT system pressure falls below the pump
delivery head. During initial phase of recirculation, inventory of PDHRS system is
utilized. The Motorized Valve in the lines leading from PDHRS tank to ECCS sump /
suction would actuate on LOCA by suitably engineering logics.
All motorized valves in the system are duplicated to satisfy the single failure criterion.
For low-pressure injection and recirculation, 4 x 50% pumps are provided for
redundancy. They are powered from Class III electric power supply. Operability checks
for all ECCS valves and pumps, together with logic checks, are possible even when the
reactor is in operation. No operator action is envisaged in the operation of the ECCS
following a LOCA.
2.13.8
Ultimate Heat Sink

Emergency water storage, sufficient for seven days of make-up requirements of both the
units, has been provided for emergency cooling purpose (under reactor shut down
conditions) through make up to IDCTs. Within 7 days, alternative external sources of
water supply will be established.
2.13.9
Overall Risk to the Public

The studies conducted by ESLs at operating stations amply demonstrate that exposure
to public due to NPP is much lower than that due to ambient natural background
radiation.
2.14
2.14.1
RADIOLOGICAL PROTECTION
Radiation Levels and Access Control
Design Objective
1. During normal operation, to minimize the radiation dose to plant personnel and
members of the public in accordance with the principle of Às low as Reasonably
Achievable (ALARA) and in any case not exceeding the prescribed limits specified
by the Regulatory Body. (Refer Radiation Protection Manual, AERB 2005 Rev 4).
2. To minimize the risk to the public from the release of radioactivity, if any, under
abnormal / postulated accident conditions. For scenarios within the design basis, the
calculated releases shall be within the specified release limits given in Technical
Specifications.
This objective is met by ensuring that plant conditions associated with high radiological
consequences have low likelihood of occurrence and plant conditions with a high
likelihood of occurrence have only small or no radiological consequences.
Page 69
Chapter 2

Design Criteria
The shielding has been designed to achieve the radiation levels below 1 Gy/h (0.1
mR/h) in all areas of the plant, intended for full-time personnel occupancy. For areas
with lower occupancy, shielding has been designed as under.
SN.
i)
ii)
Areas
Normal full-time occupancy areas (Supervised Areas)
Reactor Building (Controlled Areas)
a) Areas accessible during reactor power operation (Accessible Areas)
Occupancy 8 hours / day
b) Areas inaccessible during reactor operation (Shutdown areas)
General field during reactor shut down
Areas with limited occupancy (70 h/y)
Max Radiation
Level (Gy/h)
1
5
10
20
40
40
150
Entry into inaccessible radiation areas is governed by appropriate access control

procedure. The ventilation system design is such that the concentration of radioactivity in
air does not normally exceed 1/10th of the new Derived Air Concentration (DAC) values
for full occupancy areas as specified in the AERB Guide (AERB/SG/D-12).
Occupational Dose Limits
The dose limits for occupational workers are as under
1) An effective does of 20 mSv averaged over five consecutive years (calculated on a
sliding scale of five years. (Sliding scale of five years means current year and
previous four years)).
2) An affective dose of 30 mSv in any year.
3) An equivalent dose to the lens of eyes of 150 mSv in a year.
4) An equivalent dose to the extremities (hands and feet) or the skin of 500 mSv in a
year.
2.14.2
To control the spread of radioactive contamination, the plant is divided into three distinct
radiation zones, (Section 2.11.3) classified according to their potential for radioactive
contamination and / or radiation exposure.
The Zoning Philosophy is Implemented as Follows :
A single point entry is provided. This is in the Zone-1 area of the Nuclear building.
Personnel and material movement from higher to lower zone and vice-versa
permitted in sequence only.
Barriers and radiation monitors are provided at inter-zonal boundaries for effective
control of spread of contamination.
Page 70
Chapter 2

Decontamination Facilities :
For personnel decontamination, showers have been provided in Zone 2.
A special decontamination room near the main airlock of each unit is provided for
highly contaminated personnel.
Equipment decontamination facility is provided at 100m elevation in Waste
Management Plant (Zone-3).
2.14.3
In order to monitoring continuously the radiological status, fixed radiation monitors are
installed in certain areas of the reactor building, spent fuel building and reactor auxiliary
building. Each monitor has both local and control room indication / annunciation which
provides visual indication / audio annunciation when the radiation level exceeds a preset value. High-alarm (at pre-set values) are indicated / annunciated by the warning
buzzer as well as flashing lights. Monitors of appropriate ranges are installed in various
areas to monitor the radiation fields during various operational states and accident
conditions. In addition, portable radiation monitors are also available for monitoring, as
required. On-line sampling provisions are made for the assessment of air-borne activity
in different areas of Reactor Building.
The radiation dose rates at different areas in and around the plant areas are monitored
by installed monitors with indications / alarms in a number of locations around the plant.
In addition, thermo-luminescent dosimeters (TLDs) are also installed at a number of
locations. These TLDs will be collected periodically and the dose accumulated during the
period will be measured.
For personnel monitoring, thermo-luminescent dosimeters and direct reading dosimeters
are provided. Bioassay analysis and whole-body counting are done for monitoring
internal dose received by personnel. In addition, hand and foot monitors are installed at
inter zonal boundaries of various radiation zones.
Appropriate radiation monitoring instruments are installed for the sampling and
monitoring of radioactive effluents from the plant. The continuous monitors are provided
with alarms in control room to indicate if the releases exceed the preset values, in order
to enable the operating personnel to initiate corrective actions. All the materials, articles
or solid wastes released from the plant are monitored for radioactivity content and
contamination. All radioactive materials are handled, transported and stored as per
approved Radiation Protection Procedures (RPPs). Records of all the active materials
released from the plant will be maintained.
2.14.4
Environmental Monitoring
A programme of environmental monitoring is being carried out by Environmental Survey
Laboratory (ESL) with the following scope and objectives :
a. Establish the background radiation levels in the pre-operational period.
b. Collect meteorological data, especially on diffusion climatology, during the preoperational period.
Page 71
Chapter 2

c. Determine the safe recipient capacity of the air and water environment after studying
the dispersion pathways.
d. Establish allowable release limits to air and water from the plant.
e. Identify critical groups and critical radio nuclides based on trace element studies.
f. Identify indicator organisms and vegetation for regular monitoring.
g. Measurement of radiation levels in the environment during operational phase by
TLD.
h. Carry out demographic studies and monitor station release by measurements of
radioactivity in soil, vegetation, food, etc., on routine basis.
i. Evaluate impact of the NPP on the environment and population.
j. Be organized to cope with different aspects of monitoring and assessment for
radiological protection in the public domain in the case of an emergency.
2.14.5
Effluent Release Criteria

As per the AERB Safety Directive 2/91, the effective dose to the members of the critical
group through various pathways like water route, air route and terrestrial route shall not
exceed 1 mSv/yr (100 m rem/year). This limit is considered applicable at the `Fence
Post of the nuclear installation site, the radius of which is the exclusion radius.
2.15
2.15.1
RADIO ACTIVE WASTE MANAGEMENT

Radioactive Waste Management Plant
A Waste Management Plant (WMP) is provided for segregation, collection, treatment,
conditioning, storage, monitoring and safe disposal of liquid and solid radioactive wastes
generated in the plant.
2.15.2

The gaseous radioactive effluents from Reactor Building and Reactor auxiliary building
ventilation exhaust systems are passed through pre filters and High Efficiency
Particulate HEPA filters. These gaseous effluents are then continuously monitored for
radioactivity content before discharge through stack of 100 m high. There are triplicated
Y (Gamma) activity detectors and monitors on each of the Reactor Building (RB)
ventilation exhaust ducts (located in waste Management Building). The alarm contacts
provided by the monitors are used in isolation logics. The detectors / monitors are
triplicated and actuate the logic required for isolation of RB when the gross gamma
activity release rate through the RBPC exhaust duct exceeds a preset limit. Two out of
three logic is used to avoid any spurious isolation. Simultaneously, the sample of active
air discharged is collected in the sample bottle of the air sample collection system for
later analysis in the laboratory.
The radioactivity in the gaseous effluents, are monitored by the following monitoring /
sampling systems before being released to the environment through stack.
Page 72
Chapter 2

Inert gas (gross gamma) monitors: These monitors consist of scintillation

detector assembly mounted inside aluminum chambers with inlet / outlet
connections.
Iodine - in - air monitors: These monitors consist of Nal Scintillation detector
assembly and electronics processing unit.
Particulate activity monitors: These monitors consist of thin plastic scintillator
assembly facing particulate filter paper and associated electronics.
Tritium-in-air monitors: Bubbler sample collection system / Gamma compensated
ionization chambers.
All these stack-activity monitoring instruments are housed in a room known as the Stack
Monitoring Room, which is located, near the stack. This location provides low radiation
background. Iso-kinetic probe draws the air sample, which successively passes through
the filter detector assemblies of the air particulate and iodine activity monitors.
Subsequently, it is led to the inert gas monitor chamber and then routed back to the
stack. Individual signal processing unit provides release rate and integral releases over a
set period for the above mentioned activities. These are also compared with set levels
and alarms are generated if the activity exceeds the set levels.
2.15.3
Permissible Gaseous Discharges

The radiation dose limit for the general pubic at the fence post due to operation of all
facilities within the site through all pathways is 1 mSv/y (100 mrem/y). The annual
average rate of discharge of gaseous radioactive effluents from all the four units of 700
MW(e) shall not exceed the following limits. Corresponding dose to the public at 1.0 Km
boundary is also given.
Gaseous Radio-active Effluents
Tritium
C-14
Fission Product Noble Gases (FPNGs)

Ar-41
I-131
Particulates
Total
Stack Release
4X700 MWe unit
GBq/d
2.02E+04
1.08E+01
1.10E+04
7.66E+03
2.02E-01
2.02E-01
Dose at Exclusion
Boundary (mSv/y)
Adult
Infant
1.61E-02
1.61E-02
9.28E-03
9.28E-03
3.04E-02
4.56E-02
3.72E-02
5.58E-02
4.70E-03
5.74E-02
4.12E-02
8.00E-02
1.39E-01
2.64E-01
Radioactive gaseous effluents when averaged over one day shall not exceed ten times
the annual average release rates specified above.
2.15.4

The liquid waste streams generated from the plant are segregated at source and are
collected in collection storage tanks located in Liquid Effluent Segregation System
(LESS) area. The waste management design philosophy is based on the principle of
Page 73
Chapter 2

ALARA (As low As Reasonably Achievable). The principles used for the management of
radioactive wastes are:
Dilute and disperse applicable to low level wastes,
Delay, delay and disperse applicable to wastes containing short lived radio
nuclides
Concentrate and contain applicable to relatively high active wastes containing long
lived radio nuclides
Though complete prevention of radioactive waste generation is a difficult task, keeping
the waste generation to the minimum practicable is an essential objective of radioactive
waste management. In doing so, it is essential to minimize waste generation in all the
stages of a nuclear power plant. Waste minimization refers to waste generation by
operational and maintenance activities of plant and secondary waste resulting from
predisposal management of radioactive waste. Nuclear effluents are being given the
prime attention right from generation, handling, treatment, conditioning, transportation,
storage and final disposal, in a manner that it meets the requirements of the Safety
Guide AERB/SG/D 13 Liquid and Solid Radioactive Waste Management in PHWRs
and the discharge limits specified by them.
Following systems are provided at waste management plant :
a. Liquid effluent segregation system (LESS)
b. Storage, treatment and disposal system for low level activity and high volume liquid
waste.
c. Evaporation system (after ion-exchange process) for evaporating the relatively high
active and low volume tritium bearing liquid waste followed by dispersal through air
route / stack.
d. Spent Ion Exchange (IX) resin management system
e. Volume reduction facility
f. Decontamination system
g. Laundry system.
Liquid Effluent Segregation System (LESS)
LESS design philosophy is to ensure segregation and collection at source of all the liquid
wastes generated in the station based on level of activity and chemical nature, so as to
i. Minimize cross contamination and
ii. Facilitate judicious decision for management of each category of waste.
The classifications and the category they belong to and the origin of the wastes are
given in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3: Classification of Liquid Wastes
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
Classification
Category
Sources
Potentially Active Waste

(PAW)
Active
Non-chemical
I, II
Showers from Nuclear building and upgrading plant,

wash room and laundry waste
Equipment and floor drains from Nuclear building,
I, II
Page 74
Chapter 2

Sl.
No.
Classification
Category
Waste (ANCW)
3.
4.
Active Chemical Waste

(ACW)
Tritiated Waste (TTW)
5.
Organic Waste (OW)
I, II, III
I, II
Sources
drains from decontamination centre and other areas
of WMP and vent exhaust room. Laboratory rinses
and washes.
Laboratory solutions from nuclear building and
decontamination centre drains.
D2O upgrading reject, moderator room sump in RB,
drains from heavy water handling areas in Nuclear
building.
Liquid scintillation counters, contaminated oil, grease,
etc.
Waste Categorization
Categorization of liquid waste streams based on radioactivity concentration (as approved
by AERB) is as follows :
Category I :
Gross beta gamma activity less than 1 x 10-6 Ci/ml (0.037

MBq/m). This category waste does not normally require
treatment. However filtration followed by dilution and monitoring is
provided for the category.
Category II:
Gross beta gamma activity between 1 x 10-6 to 1 x 10-3 Ci/ml

(0.037 to 37 MBq/m). This category of waste may require
treatment. Filtration or filtration and ion exchange treatment
followed by dilution is provided for this category. However tritium
bearing liquid effluent will normally be evaporated, diluted with
large volume of exhaust air and discharged through 100 meter
high stack.
Category III:
Gross beta activity between 1 x 10-3 to 1 x 10-1 Ci/ml (37 to 3700

MBq/m). This category waste requires treatment. Equipment
shielding may be necessary. Generation of this category is
occasional.
Category IV:
Gross beta activity between 1 x 10-1 to 1 x 104 Ci/ml (3700 to 3.7

x 108 MBq/m). This category of waste requires treatment.
Equipment shielding is also necessary. Waste of this category is
also not encountered in PHWRs.
Category V:
Gross beta activity more than 1 x 104 Ci/ml (3.7 x 108 (MBq/m).
This category waste is heat generating waste. Shielding,
treatment and cooling is required for such wastes. However waste
of this category is not encountered in PHWRs.
The quantity of liquid waste in each classification and the treatment methods are given in
Table 2.4.
Page 75
Chapter 2

Table 2.4: Estimated volumes of liquid waste generation at HAPP 1 & 2

Waste stream
Quantity
m/day
Activity levels
(Bq/ml)
Gross Tritium
-
1.0 Potentially Active Waste (PAW)
Showers
30
3.7E-3
250
Washings
20
3.7E-2
250
Laundry
25
3.7E-1
100
2.0 Active NonChemical
Waste
(ANCW)
12
3.0 Tritiated Waste (TTW)

Moderator
2
room sump
D2O
6
upgrading
plant
4.0 Active
1
Chemical
Waste
(ACW)
5.0 Organic
13.7 litre
waste
/ day
Total
Activity inventory
Gross
- (KBq)
Tritium
(MBq)
111
740
10360
7500
5000
2500
Treatment
Filtration, dilution with

plant water drainage
system and discharged
to Bhakra canal.
Filtration,
polishing
through IX column,
evaporation,
dilution
with exhausts air and
discharged
through
stack.
1.85
1850
22200
2220
1.85
11E4
3700
222000
0.371
7.4E4
2220
444000
- Do -
1850
18500
Occasional
Occasional
Neutralized & treated

like ANCW.
0.037
1850
Occasional
Occasional

to Bhakra canal.
39331
683220
96.01
Storage Treatment and Disposal System

Storage
Adequate capacity for liquid waste storage is provided through 12 nos. of large diameter
hold up tanks at RCC dyke area of Waste Management Plant (WMP). Total storage
capacity in the dyke provided is 3200 m to take care of unusual conditions when
discharge of liquid waste is not possible due to canal closure and also the storage
required for off-normal waste like Steam Generator (SG) tube leak, contaminated APW
etc. and in line with the requirements of AERB guide AERB/SG/D-13. Liquid waste of all
categories can be stored for about one month period.
Treatment and Disposal through Water Route
All the twelve number steel tanks are located in a RCC containment (top open) called
dyke area. This is water tight structure and seismically qualified to SSE level of
earthquake.
Page 76
Chapter 2

Two nos. of receipt tanks for each stream have been provided at RCC dyke area in
which one will be receiving the liquid waste and the liquid from other tanks will be under
processing. Two nos. of micron filters (1 working and 1 standby) are provided for each
stream. The segregated liquid effluents, to decide the mode of discharge, are divided
into two categories viz. i) low level high volume waste (PAW and LW) and ii) tritium
bearing waste (ANCW, TTW and neutralized ACW). After filtration, the low level high
volume liquid wastes (waste water from shower, washroom and laundry area) are stored
in the post treatment tank.
Low level treated liquid waste from post treatment tank is sampled, analyzed in the
laboratory and monitored after preparing a batch of treated waste. This treated waste is
then injected into the plant water discharge (Blow down) piping. Inline mixers are
provided in the pipe line to ensure thorough mixing of treated waste with plant water
discharge system, before it gets discharged.
Liquid waste discharges are made in batches normally on single shift basis. Availability
of blow down flow is ensured through control logics and administrative control before
commencing of discharge of treated waste. The activity concentration of liquid waste
being discharged is monitored by an online activity monitor located on treated waste line
in WMP (before injecting it in plant water discharge system) in addition to sampling and
analysis carried out in laboratory. On attaining set level of activity the activity monitor
fitted in the discharge line will trip the discharge pump.
Liquid wastes having relatively high tritium and Beta gamma activity like Tritiated Waste
(TTW) generated from Upgrading plant rejects, Moderator room sump & Clean-up
system and Active Non Chemical Waste (ANCW) generated from Equipment
decontamination system of WMP, chemical laboratory & SFSB cask wash down area, of
less volume will be evaporated, diluted with exhaust air and discharged through stack to
air route. This quantum of liquid waste activity constitutes a major portion of the total
activity in the liquid waste. Therefore only less than 10% of total activity contained in
major volume of liquid effluent activity from HAPP 1&2 will be added to the liquid route
discharge point.
Treatment and Disposal Liquid Waste through Air Route (Evaporation System)
Liquid effluent having relativity higher activity are treated by filtration and ion exchange
process and disposed through air route using Evaporation system. Streams like ANCW,
ACW and TTW, after filtration, will be diverted to a synthetic ion exchange column to
remove the dissolved Beta-gamma activity and then stored in evaporation system feed
tank. These polished tritium bearing liquid waste streams (free of gross beta activity) are
sent to a steam heated evaporator with a controlled flow rate of 1.4 m/hr. This vaporized
stream is then injected into the ventilation exhaust ducting leading to 100 m high stack.
Evaporation of effluents having relatively higher level of activity ensures the discharges
through water route are kept at minimum. The air route mode of disposal offers unique
advantage of higher release limits per unit of dose allocation as compared to liquid route.
This mode of disposal suits inland site where water body is scarce and extensively used
by the surrounding population. The liquid waste disposal scheme is shown in Fig. 2.10.
Page 77
Chapter 2

2.15.5
Discharge Limits
For the plant, at the common discharge point the following discharge limits are
considered.
Radionuclide
Tritium
C-14
Cs-137
Sr-90
Total
Stack Release 4X700

MWe unit GBq/d
2.02E+03
1.08E-01
1.00E-01
1.00E-01
Dose at Exclusion Boundary (mSv/y)

Adult
Infant
4.04E-02
4.80E-02
6.96E-05
5.60E-05
1.44E-03
7.76E-04
3.10E-03
8.50E-03
4.50E-02
5.72E-02
Main Out Fall (MOF) Sampling System

A Main Outfall (MOF) sampling system at the downstream of low level treated waste
injecting point in plant water discharge (blow down) system is provided to further ensure
that the liquid waste discharges made from WMP have been adequately diluted with
plant water discharge system and are within the permissible discharge limits. This
sampling is done on continuous basis over a period of 24 hours. This sample is analyzed
in the laboratory for tritium and gross beta activity.
Page 78
Chapter 2

Fig 2.10: Schematic Diagram of Liquid Waste Management Scheme
Page 80
Chapter 2

2.15.6
Solid Waste Management

Treatment and disposal of radioactive solid waste at the plant is carried out as per AERB
/ SG / D-13. The solid waste disposal scheme is shown in Fig. 2.11.
Radioactive solid waste generated at the plant is segregated at source depending upon
its nature (Combustible / compactable / non-compactable) and surface dose rate.
Different types of radioactive solid wastes that get generated are spent ion-exchange
resins, paper-waste, cotton waste, air filter, liquid filter, shoe covers, hand gloves, mops,
discarded clothing and components, sludge etc. Solid wastes are transported to WMP in
shielded containers / casks, if required, for treatment / conditioning. Conditioning system
for solid waste provided in WMP include processes like spent resin management for
resins from Primary Heat Transport (PHT) System, Moderator system, end shield
cooling system, calandria vault cooling system, SFSB cooling and purification system,
cementation of liquid filters / sludge and compaction of compressible wastes. The waste
after treatment / conditioning shall be disposed off in engineered barriers like stone lined
earth trenches, RCC vaults / trenches and tile holes / high integrity containers (HIC)
located at the Near Surface Disposal Facility (NSDF), depending upon their surface
dose rate.
Solid Waste Categorisation
Solid waste is categorised on the basis of its surface radiation dose-rate and its physical
characteristics which call for specific treatment and handling processes. These are :
Cat. I : Waste with surface dose rate up to 2 mSv/h. For the purpose of segregation of
source, Cat. I waste is further divided into two groups viz.
a. Dose rate less than 0.02 mSv/hr Disposed off in stone lined earthen trenches.
b. Dose rate more than 0.02 mSv/hr and less than 2 mSv/h Disposed off in RCC
trenches / Vaults.
Depending upon the physical nature, these wastes are also classified as :
a. Compactable waste and
b. Non compactable waste.
c. Combustible waste
Cat. II : Waste with surface dose rate more than 2 mSv/h but less than 0.02 Sv/h.
Cat. III : Waste with surface dose rate more than 0.02 Sv/h.
Cat. III waste is further sub-divided into two groups viz.
a. Cat. III A : Waste packages with surface dose rate upto 0.5 Sv/h, and
b. Cat. III B : Waste packages having surface dose-rate more than 0.5 Sv/h.
Page 81
Chapter 2
COMPACTABLE
CAT. I
UPTO 200 mR/Hr
(upto 2mSv/Hr)
ASSORTED WASTE
<2mR/Hr
(0.02 mSv/Hr)
BALER
NON-COMPACTABLE
EARTH
TRENCH

>2mR/Hr <200mR/Hr
(>0.02 mSv/Hr <2mSv/Hr)
COMBUSTIBLE
CHIMNEY
INCINERATION
ABH
CAT. II
>200mR/Hr UPTO 2R/Hr
(>2mSv/Hr upto 20mSv/Hr)
RESIN FROM MOD

AND OTHER SYS.
TRANSFERRED TO CS
HOPPERS AND
DEWATERED
CAT. IIIA
UPTO 50R/Hr
(500mSv/Hr)
RESIN FROM PHT

AND SFSB SYS.
IMMOBILISED IN
POLYMER MATRIX
CAT. IIIB
ABOVE 50R/Hr
(ABOVE 500mSv/Hr)
SPENT IX RESIN
Fig. 2.11: Solid Waste Management Scheme
Page 82
Chapter 2
TILE HOLES
CAT. III
2R/Hr & ABOVE
(20mSv/Hr & ABOVE)
SOLIDIFICATION /
EMBEDDMENT IN
CEMENT
SLUDGES LIQUID
FILTERS COMPONENTS
RCC TRENCHES
SCRUBBING WATER

Resin Transfer and Fixation System

Radioactive Spent Ion-Exchange resin is generated from Primary Heat Transport,
Moderator, End shield / calandria vault cooling and Spent Fuel Storage and Inspection
Bay (SFSB) clean-up systems in PWHR type reactors. These resins vary widely in dose
rate, radio nuclide content and their concentrations.
Disposal of Resins with Short Lived Radioactivity
Spent resins are transferred from the Ion Exchange vessel (Stainless Steel Hopper) of
moderator, End Shield / Calandria vault cooling system, into a Carbon Steel Hopper,
dewatered by compressed air and these CS Hoppers are disposed (after closure of all
nozzle openings) in engineered barriers provided at Near Surface Disposal Facility
(NSDF).
Disposal of Resins with Long Lived Radioactivity
PHT / SFSB spent resins contain fission product radio-nuclides having long half life of
about 30 years. These resins are required to be fixed in a monolithic block so as to
prevent the release of radio-nuclides to environment. Conditioning of spent ion exchange
resin in polymer / cement matrix is aimed at immobilising the resin in monolithic blocks
and arresting release of radioactive nuclides to the environment. The resins are in the
form of beads which are easily dispersed if not contained in a suitable matrix.
At WMP, Resin Transfer system and resin fixation system is provided at Ground floor
(EL 100.000 M) and is provided with all around shielding wall. All the equipment and
piping, handing active resins, are provided with adequate shielding to have ease of
operation and maintenance and also to reduce the back ground radiation level. The
system material is of stainless steel for ease of decontamination.
Management of Spent Liquid Filters
Spent liquid filters are received at WMP from various purification systems. PHT gland
filters are disposable vessel type and are received in lead shielded casks. These vessels
are disposed off after embedding the in-vessel cartridges in cement grout. Filter
cartridges received from systems like SFSB purification, Fuel Handling System (FHS)
and WMP are placed in a drum and immobilized by cementation before disposing in
RCC trenches. Suitable shielded casks for transportation of the active filters are used.
Cementation of Sludge
Active sludge from tank bottoms and sump are collected in a drum and fixed with cement
matrix. Such solidified wastes are disposed in RCC trenches.
Volume Reduction of Category-I Solid Waste Using Baling Press (Compactor)
A hydraulic Baling press with variable compaction force up to 70 Te is provided for soft
compactable waste to achieve volume reduction before disposal. Generally a volume
reduction factor of 5 can be achieved by this compaction method. However, this largely
depends upon nature and composition of assorted waste received for compacting.
All compacted waste in drums are disposed off in earth trenches / RCC Trenches /
Vaults after capping the drums.
Page 83
Chapter 2

Decontamination system (DC)

An equipment Decontamination Centre is provided at WMP building for decontamination
of removable and reusable small equipment, components, pipes, heavy water drums etc.
having a maximum size of 600 mm dia. and 3500 mm length. This system provides
surface decontamination of various parts using ultrasonic cleaning and steam.
Decontamination Centre (DC) is designed to decontaminate items having surface dose
rate up to 0.01 Sv/hr. However, components having surface dose rate more than 0.01
Sv/hr and up to 0.1 Sv/hr, can be decontaminated using this system in Ultrasonic tank
I (UT-I) which is provided with a hematite shielded enclosure. In addition, special
operating procedure will be made for handling such components having higher surface
dose rate. Such components having surface dose rate more than 0.01 Sv/hr may come
once in a while and not on a regular basis.
Laundry System
An active laundry is provided to decontaminate clothing and rubber wears such as lab
coats, hand gloves, Shoe cover, coveralls etc received from the station. The laundry
equipment are provided to take care of the entire washing load of contaminated
protective wears from HAPP 1&2 on a single shift operation basis. However, increased
load requirements, if any, during shutdown and other contingencies can be met by
increasing the number of shifts. This system is located in reactor auxiliary building at EI
100.000 M very close to change room (point of generation) and new cloth issue room
(point of utilization) thereby avoiding movement of contaminated clothing from change
room to laundry system. The drain lines from these laundry machines are led to laundry
waste collection sump from where it is filtered and pumped to laundry waste collection
tank of dyke area.
Incineration of Low Level Combustible Solid Waste
An oil fired incinerator is provided to incinerate organic liquid waste and low level (less
than 2mR/hr) combustible solid waste (other than plastic waste). The off-gas is cleaned
by two stage water scrubbers before discharging it through 30m tall chimney.
Continuous monitoring system is provided to monitor the gas emitted from the chimney.
Solid Waste Disposal
Solid wastes after conditioning will be disposed off in the Near Surface Disposal Facility
(NSDF) area in earth trenches / RCC trenches / vaults / tile holes / HIC depending upon
their surface dose rate. As a matter of practice packages having higher activity are
disposed off at the bottom of trenches / vaults will be suitably sealed permanently as per
established practices. These data will be utilised to assess the safety aspects of the
waste repository. Necessary geo-hydrological & soil analysis studies for the NSDF site
will be carried out to assess the safety of NSDF containing solid waste generated from
50 years of plant operation. Proper surveillance of Solid Waste Management Facility is
carried out through bore holes provided all around the NSDF to check the integrity of the
engineered barriers through periodic water sampling. Additional array of boreholes will
be provided, whenever the facility is augmented. The NSDF area is fenced and
necessary access control procedures are established. A waste assaying is carried out to
Page 84
Chapter 2

assess and record the radioactive content in each conditioned waste packages before
disposing them. Name of the vault and their identification also recorded.
The dose rate on the top of the sealed earth trenches and RCC trenches / vaults would
not exceed 0.01 mGy/h.
Spent Fuel
Spent fuel is removed from the reactor core and transferred to spent fuel inspection bay
(SFIB) where it is inspected for leaks / pin holes / damage. It is then stored in spent fuel
storage bay (SFSB) which is under continuous radiological surveillance. The spent fuel
is stored in SFSB till it cools down to dry storage level (about 5 years). Subsequent
action on the spent fuel is dictated by the policy of the Department of Atomic Energy /
Government of India.
Size of Spent Fuel Storage Bay
The size of one SFSB can accommodate 10 years of spent fuel discharge and one core
load.
2.16
SAFETY ANALYSIS
The objective of Safety Analysis is to demonstrate that the public is adequately protected
from the effects of power plant operation and abnormal events that might occur during
the plant life. It is to be ensured that the plant does not significantly add to the health
risks to which individuals and society are already exposed.
The basic approach adopted in the safety analysis centers on:
1. Identifying all abnormal events during the plant life that can lead to radiation
exposures, and their classification according to their probability of occurrence.
2. Identifying consequences of such events.
The events are further classified in two categories.
1. Single failure events
2. Multiple failure events
Single Failure Events
A single failure is defined as a failure of a process system.
Multiple Failure Events
Multiple failure events are defined as failure of a process system along with its
associated safety system. Safety analysis will be carried out for typical single / multiple
failure events in line with AERB safety guide.
Some example of postulated single failure / multiple failure are given below.
Safety analysis will be carried out for typical single / dual failure events :
Page 85
Chapter 2

List of Postulated Single Failures :

Fuel failures
Loss of Regulation Accident (LORA).
Pipe failures in the PHT system (Loss of Coolant Accident LOCA)
Failure in Secondary Steam Line
Loss of Feed Water
Failures in Primary System (other than LOCA)
o Loss of coolant circulation (failure of primary circulating pump)
o Channel flow blockage
o Failure in PHT pressurizing system
o Failure of shut down cooling system
o Failures in Moderator System
- Loss of Moderator circulation
- Fall in moderator level
Failure in shield and vault cooling systems (including loss of end shield water)
Failure of electrical power supplies
Failure in fuel handling system
Failure of process water systems
List of Postulated Dual Failures
Coincident failure of PHT system pressure boundary and Emergency Core Cooling
System
Coincident failure of PHT system pressure boundary and Containment Isolation
Fuel Handling Accidents Coincident with failure of containment
Following considerations are incorporated in the analyses in a conservative manner for
evaluation of radiological consequences of the postulated accidents.
1. Behavior of fuel and fission product release from thermal or mechanically induced
failures.
2. Coolant tube behavior under overheated conditions.
3. Response of the containment and associated engineered safety failures.
4. Dispersion of radioactive materials in the atmosphere.
Safety analysis will also cover the plant response to various operational transients
originating from the internal or external disturbances and also equipment tripping /
starting, which can be broadly classified as follows :
1.
2.
3.
4.
Secondary side events (eg, turbine trip, BFP trip steam leaks)
Plant power change events (eg, power drops)
Electrical disturbances (eg. Net load rejection, frequency swing)
PHT system malfunctions (eg. Pressurizing pump trip, pressure controller
malfunction)
In addition to the deterministic analysis mentioned above probabilistic safety analysis

(PSA) will also be carried out.
Page 86
Chapter 2

It is demonstrated that under the design basis accident, the dose to the members of the
public would not exceed 0.5 Sv (50 rem) to child thyroid and 0.1 Sv (10 rem) for the
whole body.
2.17
PLANT LAYOUT AND MAIN PLANT BUILDINGS
2.17.1 Plant Layout

The latitude and longitude of the project site is shown in Fig. 2.12a and that of the
township is given in Fig. 2.12b. The general layout of the proposed project is shown in
Drg. No. HAPP-1 to 4 /70000/2002/GA (DR.LWS). Rev. 01. Composite plan of the main
plant and colony is given in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01. Only barren land has been
selected for the colony.
Fig. 2.12a : Longitude and Latitude of the Proposed Project Site

2.18
POWER REQUIREMENTS
During construction & commissioning Max 10 MW will be required which will be sourced
from State Grid as follows:
Construction power supply will be drawn from the existing 33 KV/ 11 KV sub-station
nearby.
Start up / commissioning power from 220 KV sub-station. This sub-station will
connect to nearby 220 KV sub-station.
Page 87
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.12b: Longitude and Latitude of the Township at Badopal Village
Page 88
Chapter 2

2.19
WATER REQUIREMENTS
2.19.1 Provision of Water

The water requirement for the project (four units) will be met from Fatehabad Branch of
Bhakra Canal. Assurance has been given to supply 783 Million Liters per Day (MLD)
or 32625 m3/hr (9.07m3/sec or 320 cusecs) of water for consumptive use by the project
including township from Haryana Government (Annexure III). Even during lean season,
Haryana State Government has assured a full supply of 320 cusecs on a continuous
basis.
The design discharge of this canal near the site RD 48,159 m (158000 ft) is 57.25
m3/sec (2021.70 cusecs). The average discharge in this canal for the last 10 years is
42.5 m3/sec (1500 cusecs). The canal has been in service since 1954-55 and is fully
lined. The details of this canal near site are given in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 : Details of Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra Canal near Project site
Full supply level
Design discharge near the site
Full supply depth
Bed level
Natural ground level near the canal
Geographical co-ordinates of In take Point
Geographical co-ordinates of outfall Point
216.45 (710.13 ft)

57.25m3/sec (2021.70 cusecs)
2.51 m (8.25 ft)
213.94 m (701.88 ft)
214.67 m (704.30 ft)
longitude 750 37 40 E and latitude 290 26 03 N.
longitude 750 36 25 E and latitude 290 26 44 N.
Water Supply during Canal Closure

The canal is closed for about 2 weeks once in 10 years. During such situations, so as to
maintain continuous committed water supply, Government of Haryana has assured that
both of the parallel Fatehabad branch canals will not be closed at a time and water
through one of the parallel canal will be available to meet the requirement of the project.
Simultaneously, NPCIL is also exploring the possibility to ensure availability of water for
nuclear safety of 1 cusec / unit through an alternative source of water like Yamuna Canal
system.
In case of canal closure, specific design provision exist for removal of nuclear decay
heat and storage of low level liquid effluents at site which will not be discharged in the
canal.
2.19.2 Water Balance
The Government of Haryana has made commitment to NPCIL for availability of 320
cusec (32,652m3/hr) of water. NPCIL will carry out its activities including all conditions of
the plant operations within this sanctioned water.
The water from Bhakra Canal will be stored in 1512000m3 Plant Makeup Storage
Reservoir. The water balance diagram for unit 1 & 2 of HAPP is given in Fig. 2.13. The
water requirement for two units will be 9000 m3/hr and that for all the four units will be
18000m3/hr. Out of which 12680 m3/hr will be towards consumptive use and the rest of
the 5320 m3/hr will be returned to canal. The return flow will be utilized for low level
treated liquid waste dilution purpose. This return flow led to canal will meet the
Page 89
Chapter 2

requirement stipulated by AERB and State Pollution control Board and there will not be
any restrictions on any use on downstream side.
2.19.3 Cycle of Concentration of Water
The estimated rate of water consumption for 4X700 MWe will be to the tune of 4.5 m3/hr
per MWe, taking cycle of concentration (COC) as 3. The major portion of this water is
lost through evaporation in evaporation tower and thus further reduction in water
consumption is not possible. The COC for HAPP, Haryana power project the COC value
of three is worked out based on studies carried out at Kakarapar site considering the
optimization of techno commercial considerations, water chemistry, nuclear safety and
water conservation.
2.20
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
2.21
POWER EVACUATION
2.22
All construction facilities like stone, metal, aggregate etc from Tosham village which
is about 40 km from Hisar and from other places like Chandigarh and Delhi.
Sand would be sourced from Karnal and / or Ghaghar river.
Construction power supply of about 10 MW is available from nearby 33 KV /11 KV
Water for construction purpose will be drawn from nearby canal system.
Power evacuation lines from project to major load centers at Hisar, Bhivani,
Fatehabad, Bahadurgarh and other load centers in northern grid through Centralised
Transmission Utility (CTU).
Power Evacuation in principal is feasible for 2800 MWe power from site. The Power
generated at HAPP will be evacuated through 400 kv transmission system. The number
of transmission outlets and their destination will be finalized taking into account share of
beneficial state in due course after a detailed power system studies are carried out by
PGCIL and approved by the concerned authorities
ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF

TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE
The PHWR technology in India is evolved based on the extensive expertise developed
indigenously. As of now India is self reliant in this technology and successfully,
designing, commissioning and operating 220 and 540, MWe PHWRs. It is a matter of
satisfaction that India has designed the latest 700Mwe PHWR which are under
constructed at Kakrapara and Rawatabhata sites. It is envisaged to implement the
similar 700Mwe PHWR at the proposed Haryana site.
2.23
PROJECT COST
The estimated cost of 2X700MWe PHWR (Pressurised Heavy Water Reactor) Atomic
Power Project along with the residential complex at Gorakhpur, District Fatehabad,
Haryana is about Rs. 11751 Crores (estimates based on base cost of 2011-12) and that
for 4x700MWe is about Rs 23502 Crores (base cost 2011-12).
Page 90
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.13 : Water Balance Diagram for Haryana Atomic Power Plant 1 & 2.
Page 91
Chapter 2

2.24
RESIDENTIAL COMPLEX OF HAPP
2.24.1 Basic Features and Site Plan

The proposed township is located at a distance of 6 Km from project, within 3 Km of
Badopal village and approximately 28 km from Fatehabad. The township site is barren
land and doesnt involve any rehabilitation. The soil is alluvial and the land is almost
plain terrain. The area comes under earthquake zone III as per IS 1893:2002 (Part-I)
Fifth Revision. The buildings/structures will be designed in accordance with IS-1893 for
earthquake resistance. The site plan of the township site and its surroundings with
physical features and topographical details, such as land use, contours and drainage
pattern shown in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01 and MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/02. The
photographs of the site is shown in Fig. 2.14a & 2.14d.
After site acquisition a detailed topographical survey of the township site and
surrounding areas will be conducted and keeping in view of all the site features in
consideration a master plan for the township will be prepared taking in to consideration
the followings:
Water supply,
Storm water drainage, sewerage, power, etc.,
Disposal of treated wastes from the complex on land / water body and into
sewerage system.
The proposed facilities in the township includes, Environmental Survey Laboratory,

Residential Buildings, Shopping Complex, Hospital, Dispensary, Recreation Club, Parks,
Senior Hostel, Junior Hostel, Guest House, Maintenance Office, Civic Amenities and
Services etc. A conceptual plan of the township is shown in Fig. 2.15.
The main features of the township are as follows:
a. Land area is : 75 Ha
b. Ground Coverage area : 28.4 Ha (37.8%)
c. Built up area = 26.00 Ha [Floor Space Index (FSI2) : 0.34].
d. The township will have a maximum height of Ground + two stories limited to
maximum height of 11.45 m.
e. Water Consumption = 1.250 Million Liters Per Day (MLD) or 1250 m3/d
f. Power requirement = 2000 KVA for stage one and 2000 KVA for stage two. A 500
KVA Standby DG set will be provided.
g. Connectivity: Via local roads near Badopal village on National High way number
(NH-10) connecting Hisar and Fatehabad.
h. Parking requirements: Adequate parking space of about 1500 cars, light commercial
vehicles, buses etc. is available in the township.
2 Floor Space Index (FSI) = Total floor area including walls of all floors / Plot Area / Building Unit
Page 92
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.14a : View of Township Site (February 2012)
Page 93
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.14b : View of Township Site - Prosopis juliflora Growth in Waste Land
(February 2012)
Page 94
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.14c : View of Township Site (February 2012)
Page 95
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.14d : Road Leading by the Side of Township Site (February 2012)
Page 96
Chapter 2

i.
Community facilities: Hospital, Community centre, School and shopping centre

recreation club, sports complex, play ground, bank, post office, petrol pump etc. will
be provided in the proposed township.
j. All the civic amenities.
k. Measures to minimize energy consumption
Use of CFL3
Use of Low-pressure sodium lamps for outdoor lighting along the road and
security lighting with Solar Street Lights mix.
Automatic timing control mechanism will be incorporated in the street lighting to
save energy. Mechanism will involve staggering of on-off sequence of street
lights.
l. A sewage treatment plant is envisaged for treatment of sewage water. The treated
sewage shall be disinfected / filtered and used for gardening purpose.
m. Green belt will be developed in and around the township.
n. A fire extinguishing system as per the requirements of national Building Code will be
provided.
2.24.2 Power Requirement
a. The energy consumption will be 1kwh/ sqf per unit.
b. Total power requirements will be 2000KVA + 2000KVA for both the stages. .
c. 500 KVA Standby DG set shall be provided.
2.24.3 Water Requirement
The total requirement of the proposed township has been worked out on average
consumption of 135 lpcd4 water for individuals in residential buildings and of 35 lpcd in
case of institute like schools etc. On an average five persons per flat are considered in
residential areas. In case of hospital the consumption of 350 lpcd including laundry etc
has been envisaged. The breakup of the total water requirement for the township is
shown in Table 2.6. The water supply source will be Fatehabad branch of Bhakra Canal
and stored rainwater. Water demand shall be around 0.625 MLD (maximum) during
stage 1 and 1.25 MLD at the beginning of Stage-II. Assurance has been given to supply
water for the township from Haryana Government (Annexure III).
Table 2.6 : Breakup of Total Water Requirement for Township
SN.
Type of Quarter / Building
1
2
3
3
F-Type
E-Type
D-Type
C-Type
No of
Quarters
4
110
512
1004
Estimated No
of Persons
20
550
2560
5020
Consumption
in Liters /Day
2700
74250
345600
677700
3 Compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) or Compact Fluorescent Light

4 Liters per capita per day
Page 97
Chapter 2

SN.
Type of Quarter / Building
4
4A
5
6
7
8
9
10
Hospital
No of Beds
50
50
School
2000
Guest House with 50 rooms (occupancy 50%)
25
Service Personnel Hostel
30
100
Junior Hostel
30
60
Senior Hostel
6060
Shopping Centre & Convenience Shopping
30
Centre
Community Centre
30
Barrack
234
234
Single Officer Hostel
48
48
Administration Building
50
Environmental Survey Lab
15
Club House
25
Grand Total
Say in m3/d
Total Water requirement in liters per second (LPS)
Total Water requirement in Cubic Foot Per Second (Cusec)
11
12
13
14
15
16
2.25
No of
Quarters
Estimated No
of Persons
Consumption
in Liters /Day
17500
70000
3375
3500
8100
8100
1050
1050
31590
6480
1750
2025
875
1255645
1250.0
14.5
0.52
BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL SCENARIO

The baseline environmental study for HAPP project including the township was
conducted during summer season from March 2011 to May 2011. The same is
described in detail in Chapter 4. Hence the same is not being repeated here.
2.26
IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DUE TO PROJECT SITING (LOCATION)

The impacts and mitigation measures due to project siting or locating the project at the
proposed site including the residential complex is detailed in Section 5.2, Chapter 5.
However, the impacts and mitigation measures specifically for the following aspects
related to the residential complex are described hereunder.
2.26.1 Application of R & R Policy

The project location may lead to displacement of people and loss of land to local
population. The project site is located in Gorakhpur Village in Bhuna Block of Tehsil,
Sub-division and District Fatehabad of Haryana State as shown in Fig. 2.1 (Chapter 2).
The impact due to siting of the project is that a total of 75.04 ha land is to be acquired
and the total PAPs involved are 125.
Only land oustees and no homestead are involved in the project. Due compensation will
be provide to the Project Affected People (PAPs) as per the R & R Policy 2010 of
Haryana State (for details refer Section 5.2, Chapter 5).
Page 98
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.15 : Conceptual Plan of the Township
Page 99
Chapter 2

2.26.2 Maintenance of Area Drainage Pattern

The location of the project may obstruct the drainage pattern in the area. Township is
located in a low rainfall zone. There are no natural drainage channels in the area. Care
will be taken while designing the master plan that natural drainage pattern / slope of
surroundings is not obstructed. The same will be incorporated in the landscaping. Proper
drainage scheme using network of storm water drains will be incorporated, with no
flooding of nearby areas.
Township buildings are proposed to be built on level ground. Care will be taken to divert
the water from these areas, using adequate storm water drains to the nearest water
charging pits. Since, the building design corresponds to site topography, minimal cut and
fill are envisaged.
2.27
IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION STAGE

The impacts and mitigation measures during the construction stage for the total project
including the residential complex is detailed in Section 5.4, Chapter 5, covering impact
and mitigation measures envisaged for:
Land-use (Section 5.4.1, Chapter 5)
Air Quality (Section 5.4.3, Chapter 5)
Water Quality (Section 5.4.4, Chapter 5)
Noise (Section 5.4.5, Chapter 5)
Site Security (Section 5.4.6, Chapter 5)
Industrial Safety (Section 5.4.7, Chapter 5)
However, the impacts and mitigation measures specifically for the following aspects
related to the residential complex are described hereunder.
2.27.1 Soil Erosion, Topography and Rainfall

During construction stage large scale soil erosion may take place at the construction site.
The average rainfall in the area in last five years is about 291mm (Table 4.10a), which
indicates that the area is arid to semiarid. The township site is barren land and doesnt
involve any rehabilitation. The soil is alluvial and the land is almost plain terrain. Thus
chances of soil erosion due to rain are less. However, due care will be taken during
construction phase that excavation and construction activities which causes soil erosion
is not taken up during rainy season. Moreover, garland drain at suitable places around
the site of construction will be places to arrest soil from the construction site.
2.27.2 Impact on Flora and Fauna
The construction of the township may cause disruption of flora and fauna at the project
site. The details of flora and fauna as present in the area are detailed under Section
4.2.6, Chapter 4. The residential complex project site is almost barren as shown in Fig.
2.14a and 2.14b. During construction phase all care will be taken to cause minimum
Page 100
Chapter 2

disturbance to the existing flora and fauna at the project site. Moreover, while designing
the township proper landscaping will be done and adequate green area, green belt and
avenue plantation will be undertaken to make a positive contribution to the status of flora
and fauna in the area.
2.27.3 Use of Local Building Material
The site is not in low lying area. It is a almost flat terrain no filling is required at the
township site. Sourcing of raw material during construction stage may cause
environmental concern to the site from where the material is being sourced. During
construction all efforts will be made to use local building material and due care will be
undertaken to avoid all environmental concerns arising due to sourcing of local building
material (for details refer Section 5.4.1, Chapter 5).
2.28
IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE

The impacts and mitigation measures during the operation phase for the total project
including the residential complex is detailed in Section 5.5, Chapter 5. However, the
impacts and mitigation measures specifically for the following aspects related to the
residential complex are described hereunder.
During operation phase of a residential complex impacts may be due to sewage
disposal, solid waste disposal and traffic congestion. Moreover, issues like water, energy
conservation, education and health facilities, etc. also needs to be addressed. The
mitigation measures on the above aspects during operation phase of the residential
complex are described under following subheads.
2.28.1 Sewage Treatment Facilities and Guard Pond

The untreated sewage of the township may cause water pollution in the receiving water
bodies. A sewage treatment plan has been envisaged for the residential complex.
The total quantum of sewage waste generated from the township will be 816 KL/day (@
75 lpcd). However, to treat the same a sewage treatment plant of 1.0 Million Liters Per
day (MLD) has been envisaged. The swage treatment plant will employ the highest
degree of biological treatment using Sequencing Batch Reactor technology which will
not only achieve higher biodegradation level but clear water also. The treated sewage
shall be disinfected and filtered. pH 6.5 to 8.5, TSS < 30 mg/l, BOD< 10 mg/l.
Treated sewage will be utilized for irrigating plantation and green belt in the residential
complex and only excess water will be let out of the residential complex. The out let
water will meet the statutory norms. The stabilized dried sludge cake obtained from STP
will be utilized as manure for the plantation. Additionally, for storm water, a suitable
scheme will be designed such that the storm water drain does not have any adverse
impact on the near by water body. It will be collected and utilized through a rain water
harvesting scheme as described in Section 2.28.5.
Page 101
Chapter 2

A guard pond will be provided in parallel to sewage treatment plant to store the domestic
wastewater in case breakdown or failure of wastewater treatment facility. The guard
pond will have capacity of 2000 m3 storage area for retaining wastewater during repair of
treatment plant. An adequate out fall for discharge of treated sewage from township will
be planned.
The residential complex of JNPP will be provided with a guard pond and a sewage
treatment plant (STP) for hold of slightly polluted water generated during various
activities in the residential complex and treatment of sewage from the houses and other
facilities. The design parameters of the STP shall be based on the conditions given in
Table 2.7a. The design criteria for different units in sewage treatment plant are given in
Table 2.7b. The flow sheet of sewage treatment plant is shown in Fig. 2.16. The STP
system will comprise the following sections:
Primary Treatment
- Screen Chamber
- Grit Chamber
- Sewage Collection Sump
Biological Treatment
- Fluidized Bed Bio Reactor (FBR)
- Clarisettler
Tertiary Treatment
- Chlorine Contact Tank
- Dual Media Filter
- Activated Carbon Filter
Sludge Handling / Guard Pond
- The sludge drying beds / pond of suitable capacity will be designed to dry the
sludge generated from the sewage treatment plant during its normal operation as
well as its break down. In case of failure of the STP, the sewage will be pumped
to the guard pond directly to allow the gravity settling of the solid waste / sludge.
This sludge will be removed from the guard pond regularly and will be used as
manure for development of green belt at the project site and residential complex.
Table 2.7a : Sewage Treatment Plant : Design Parameters (Total Flow : 1000m3/day)
SN.
Parameters
1
2
3
4
pH
BOD (mg/I)
COD (mg/I)
TSS (mg/I)
Before
Treatment
7.65
250
350
250
After Treatment (Before

Dual Media Filter)
7 to 8
< 20
<100
< 30
After Treatment (After

Carbon Filter)
6.5 to 8
5 to 10
50 to 80
10 to 15
Table 2.7b : Sewage Treatment Plant: Design Criteria

SN.
Description of Treatment Units
Screen Chamber
Velocity through screen
Value to be Considered
for Design
Range of Value
Specified by the Codes
0.75 m/sec
0.6 to 1.2 m/sec
Page 102
Chapter 2

2
3
5
6
7
Clear openings
Grit Chamber
Detention time
Sewage Collection Sump at STP
Detention time
Air requirement for mixing
FBR (Two Stages)
Organic loading rate
Oxygen required
Oxygen transfer efficiency
Clarisettler
Detention time
Sludge Drying Beds
Drying cycle
Chlorine Contact Tank
Detention time
Dosage
20 mm
20 to 50 mm
60 sec
30 to 60 sec
6 hrs
750 to 800 m 3/d
6 to 8 hrs
0.9 m 3/m 3 of tank volume
3.2 to3.6 kg BOD/m 3/d

2.0 kgO2/kg BOD
removed
12 %
3.2 to 3.6 kg BOD /m 3 /d

1.5 to 2.0 kg O2/ kg BOD
removed
8 - 12 %
12 - 2.0 hrs
15 - 2.0 hrs
10 - 12 days
6 - 12 days
45 - 60 min
To be maintained so that
residual chlorine is 2ppm
30 - 60 min
2.28.2 Domestic Solid Waste Management at Township

The solid waste generated from the residential complex if not properly disposed may
cause foul smell, un-aesthetic look, and land and water pollution in the area. A municipal
solid waste management plan has been envisaged for the project.
There are about 1700 dwelling unit at township. It is estimated that about 3800kg of
waste will be generated per day, out of which about 3290kg will be compostible waste
and 510kg will be non-compostible / recyclable waste. It has been planned to segregate
the two types of waste at the source and right up to final disposal. Separate bins for
compostlble and non-compostible waste, will be provided at each dwelling unit. The two
type of waste from each house will be collected in to respective area bins designated for
compostible and non-compostible waste. From area bins the two type of waste will be
transported separately to central garbage station located at remote place in the township
to avoid foul smell in the area. The entire area of the central garbage station will be
fenced and thick plantation will be done all around the same. The non-compostible
waste from central garbage bins will be sent to municipal solid waste dumping ground of
Fatehabad / Hisar district.
The compostible waste will be composted in pits with vermin-culture technique. The
exact details of the vermin-culture composting will be worked out in consultation with
Hisar Agriculture University. However, the basic concept should be adequate number
and size of vermin-culture pits will be there to collect compostible waste from 2 weeks to
4 weeks and once the running pit is closed another pits are ready to receive the
compostible waste being collected from the township. Thus sufficient number of pits will
Page 103
Chapter 2

be worked out so that to run the pits in rotation taking into consideration the time taken
by a closed pit to decompose completely and time required evacuating the pit of manure
and the rate of compostible waste generation in the township. The compost by verminculture will be sold to the township houses for use in their kitchen garden. The excess
will be distributed free to the local farmers.
2.28.3 Traffic Management
Mass scale movement of residents of the township may cause traffic congestion the
area. Considering the traffic load in the area, an adequate traffic management plan has
been envisaged.
As per the master plan of the complex, no public road or highways (state or national) will
be allowed to pass through the residential complex. The official and private vehicles of
the employees will be parked in the residential complex at designated places and in the
stilt area provided in the residential buildings. The roads will be provided with footpaths
on both the sides of the roads and other essential road safety features. It is envisaged
that there would not be any loading / unloading heavy machinery and component in the
residential complex. All the official vehicles will be regularly checked and maintained for
their road worthiness.
During baseline data generation traffic survey was carried out during week days and
week ends at NH10 and road connecting NH10 to project site (Chapter 4, Tables 4.9a1
& 4.9a2 and 4.9b1 & 4.9b2), the traffic on the week ends is slightly more on the NH10
and road connecting NH10 with project site as compared to the weekdays. Detailed
traffic management plan for the project and the township has been planned taking in to
consideration the existing traffic load in the region (Section 5.5.3.7, Chapter 5).
2.28.4 Education and Health Facilities, Police and Other Services
The education, health, police and other facilities, post and telegraph, transport, etc in the
area is described in detail in Chapter 8, under Section 8.2.4. The above facilities in the
area considering a rural setup are adequate. The same may get overloaded due to the
residential project. Provisions have been made that all such basic facilities will be made
available to the residents of the township - matching to the facilities as available in cities.
The same will be accordingly planned and setup in the township.
Page 104
Chapter 2

Fig. 2.16: Flow Sheet of Sewage Treatment Plant

DMF Dual Media filter, ACF- Activated Carbon Filter, FBR- Fixed Bed Reactor
Page 105
Chapter 2

2.28.5 Rain Water Harvesting

Large scale residential complex may cause water crises in the area. All measures have
been taken to ensure minimum wastage of water. A detailed rain water harvesting
scheme will be designed and implemented.
After site acquisition a detailed soil investigation will be carried out to design the rain
water harvesting system so as to take in to account the soil characteristics and
permeability of rainwater to ground water table with due safeguards for ground water
quality.
Provision for rain water harvesting has been provided in the township only so as
to avoid any chances of pollutants percolation to ground water through harvested
rain water.
In the township, runoff from hard surfaces and landscaped areas will be collected
through catch basins interlinked with pipe network or grated open drains. Rainwater from
terraces and open areas to be diverted to catch basins through down take pipes. Details
of water harvesting structures are as follows:
a. The total annual average rainfall in the area of interest is 358 mm approximately.
b. The total roof area is 106415 sq m. and the run off coefficient is 0.7. The total water
available from the roof area will be 26663 m3 will be available
c. The catchment area is 643600 sq m with a run off coefficient of 0.2. The total water
available will be 46081 m3.
d. The total rain water that can be made available will be 72,744 m3. Same will be
made available for gardening and ground water recharging.
e. Water harvesting pits would be constructed in the township area and runoff from the
rooftops and hard landscape areas would be diverted into these pits. Separate pits
would be provided for the different buildings in the Complex and all pits would be
provided with sedimentation/ siltation chamber.
f. RCC or Polystyrene tanks would be created to store and reuse runoff from roof
surfaces. Each of these tanks would be provided with a roof washer to ensure water
quality is maintained. Apart from this, different recharge structures would also be
used to recharge groundwater. These are:
Storage tanks of appropriated size will be provided.

Recharge trenches with Bore-wells of appropriate size will be provided.
Gabion structures these would be provided with a wire mesh of 5mm dia wires.
Percolation pond: A percolation of suitable size would be provided. Desilting
chambers and filtration chambers would be provided adjacent to these recharge
structures.
If required, catchment drains will also be provided.
Page 106
Chapter 2

2.28.6 Energy Conservation Measures

Large scale residential complex may require considerable amount of power / energy.
Properly implemented energy saving measures may reduce considerable amount of
expenditure and emission of green house gases. A number of measures have been
envisaged in the township to conservation of energy, the measures undertaken are as
follows:
Use of CFL
Use of Low-pressure sodium lamps for outdoor lighting along the road and security
lighting with Solar Street Lights mix.
Automatic timing control mechanism will be incorporated in the street lighting to save
energy. Mechanism will involve staggering of on-off sequence of street lights.
Designing the structures having proper ventilation and natural light.
The hostels, guest house, hospital etc. shall have solar water heating systems. The
street lights shall have 20% mix of solar lights.
The street lighting shall be controlled by staggering of putting on-off of lights in
particular sequence.
Passive solar architectural features have been envisaged in designing the buildings of
the township. In general passive solar architecture features includes:
North South facing building orientation with minimum faade facing East West
Orientation
Vertical staggering of elevation and horizontal staggering of plan to create mutually
shaded facades and roofs
Provision of light wells and ventilation shafts to reduce energy requirements
Provision of green landscaped areas in covered and semi covered areas
West side shaded by plantations / vegetation; Proposed Plantation on site to shield
the buildings from West and South sun.
Evaporative cooling by water bodies in covered and semi covered areas.
Semi covered corridors to create verandah like impact and enable wind tunnel effect.
Buildings oriented along the direction of flow of wind (North East South West).
Most of the buildings have North South orientation and streets are largely free of
shadows (with largely NS orientation).
Buildings oriented along the direction of flow of wind (NE SW).
2.28.7 Use of Renewable and Alternate Source of Energy
A detailed survey of the site will be carried out for preparing a feasibility analysis for use
of renewable and alternate source of energy such as wind energy and solar energy.
However, based on techno-economic considerations, public buildings such as guest
houses, canteens, hospital etc may be provided with solar heaters and solar lights. The
street lighting will be provided with solar lights - limited to 20%. The street lighting shall
be controlled by staggering of putting on-off of lights in particular sequence. Most of the
buildings will have North South orientation and streets will be largely free of shadows
(with largely NS orientation).
Page 107
Chapter 2

Energy conservation measures as given under Section 2.24.1.k will be implemented.

Use of energy efficient devices such as CFL etc. may be used for all public buildings in
the residential complex.
2.28.8 Aesthetics
Unplanned residential complex may give an ugly look to the surroundings. The master
plan of the residential complex will be so designed so as to give an aesthetic look to the
surroundings, especially the features described under Section 2.28.9 & 2.28.10.
Further, good quality roads will be maintained in the residential complex along with traffic
guidelines near sensitive areas like schools, colleges, hospitals and markets. Belt of
avenue trees on both sides of the roads will be maintained apart from parks, tree
plantation around public buildings and waste management areas. The commercial
places like guest house, hostels, market place, and playing ground will be away from
residential zones.
2.28.9 Landscape Plan, Green Belts and Open Spaces
The total land area for the project is 75 ha, out which the ground coverage is 28.4 ha
(37.8%) and the built-up area will be 26.0 ha with FSI as 0.34. Thus it can be seen that
sufficient open spaces have been envisaged which will be suitably land escaped and
planted with green belt and lawns. A conceptual plan of the township is shown in Fig.
2.15.
2.28.10 Landscape Development and Roadside Plantation in Residential Complex
The residential complex site will be leveled and compacted. Subsequently, at suitable
locations and identified places as per master plan, landscape gardens, and lawns will be
developed with the fertile soil brought from the nearby areas and mixed with the manure
generated from the municipal solid waste management plant at the residential complex
of HAPP.
The township boundary will be planted with green belt all around as given under Section
6.4.3, Chapter 6. The approach roads in the residential complex will be planted with
avenue and ornamental trees as suggested in Section 6.4.3, Chapter 6 for avenue,
vacant spaces and around office and other buildings. In 10 m area on both sides of road
will be planted large, medium and small trees alternating with each other.
Besides this, all the local voluntary organizations will be encouraged to undertake
massive plantation along the roadside at suitable places to uplift the regional ecosystem
of the area.
2.28.11 Disaster Management Plan for Residential Complex of HAPP
The residential complex is the integral part of the project. The risk assessment and
emergency preparedness plan as presented in Chapter 9 will be applicable to
Page 108
Chapter 2

Residential Complex also. Hence during any emergency situations arising due to natural
disasters and man made such as earthquake, cyclone/ flooding and radiological
emergencies will be dealt in line with the plan as presented in Chapter 9.
2.28.12 Security
The residential complex will be secured by fencing and no unauthorized entry will be
permitted in the construction area.
2.29
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

The monitoring and evaluation of the mitigation measures envisaged are critical activities
in implementation of the Project. Monitoring involves periodic checking to ascertain
whether activities are going according to the plans. It provides the necessary feedback
for project management to keep the program on schedule.
A detailed environmental monitoring programme has been envisaged for the atomic
power and the residential complex project covering the construction and operation
stages of the project (for details refer Chapter 7.0).
Page 109
Chapter 2

CHAPTER 3 : ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES TECHONOLOGY AND SITE

3.0
ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES : TECHNOLOGY & SITE

The Department of Atomic Energy (DAE) has an ongoing programme for
development of Nuclear Power by pursuing different technologies. Accordingly, three
stage programme for generation of nuclear power has been adopted.
The First Stage program involves utilization of available resource of natural Uranium
in the country for generation of nuclear power by Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor
(PHWR) technology.
The Second Stage program involves Fast Breeder Reactor (FBR) technology
wherein plutonium is utilized, which is obtained by reprocessing spent fuel from
PHWR units from first stage and at the same time using Thorium as blankets in these
type of reactors, which will be converted into uranium.
The Third Stage involves use of uranium obtained from second stage and later on
from third stage itself as fuel and thorium as blanket (which is available in abundance
in India) and will be converted into uranium for long term energy generation.
In order to meet the growing demand of electricity in the country, Government of
India has decided to enhance the share of nuclear power in overall electricity
generation of the country. In order to meet the gap between supply and demand, it
has been planned to generate nuclear power by importing reactors of LWR
technology from various countries. A beginning has been made in this line by
importing 2 x 1000 MWe VVER reactors of LWR technology from Russian
Federation, which are at the advanced stage of construction at Kudankulam, Tamil
Nadu State. Due to International embargo, the above mission could not be further
pursued in the past but as a sequel to the Nuclear Supplier Group (NSG) wavier
during 2008 for having Civil Nuclear Trade by India with other countries, now doors
are open to import reactors from various countries like Russian Federation, France,
USA etc.
As such today our country has option for generating nuclear power by PHWR
technology with capacity of 220 MWe to 700 MWe, FBR technology with capacity of
500 MWe and Advanced Heavy Water Reactor of 300 MWe capacity which is under
launching stage by DAE. In addition, LWR technology of 1000 to 1650 MWe from
various countries are available for establishing at various sites in India.
The sites for location of a Nuclear Power Plant is surveyed, selected and
recommended by a Site Selection Committee constituted by Department of Atomic
Energy, Government of India. The above Committee has members from various
departments including one member from Ministry of Environment and Forest. The
above committee has a standard procedure as prescribed by AERB for selection of the
site covering all the studies, data, parameters which are necessary to meet the
requirements to establish a nuclear power plant at a particular site. The participation
of representative from AERB and MoEF in the higher level Site Selection committee
Page 110
Chapter 3

ensures first order inputs from AERB & MoEF during site selection process. The
recommendation of the site selection committee are considered by Atomic Energy
comission which has member from the higher level of decision making bodies of
government of India The in Principal approval for the site is by theUnion Cabinat
which has in built provisions for under ministerial consultation, with the above
procedure in place for in principle approval of site..
The nuclear power plants are located either on inland site like Rawatbhatta, Narora,
Kakarpara and Kaiga and the coastal sites like, Tarapur and Madras. The inland sites
are assigned for reactor capacities varying from 220 MWe to 700 MWe. The above
limit of the capacity of reactor is mainly due to requirement of cooling water as well
as availability of infrastructure for transportation of heavy equipment of nuclear power
plant. The coastal sites are assigned for reactor capacity of 1000 MWe and more
because these units require huge amount of cooling water, which is available in
abundance from the sea and availability of sea route for transportation of heavy
equipment of nuclear power plant.
In line with the above program, Fatehabad site has been identified as the site, which
is having potential of setting up 4x700MWe PHWRs. The site has several favorable
factors for locating 4x700 MWe PHWRs. Some of the major ones are summarized
below:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Availability of sufficient cooling water.

Foundation conditions are favorable.
Power evacuation is feasible for around 2800 MWe power from the site.
No physical displacement of the members of the public
Connectivity of the site via road and train
Therefore, it is proposed to set up an Atomic Power Plant of 4X700 MWe capacity at

Fatehabad site with 4 units Pressurized Heavy Water Reactors (PHWRs).
Government of India has accorded in principal approval for taking up of pre project
activities like land acquisition, obtaining environmental clearance & initiation of
required studies, technical investigations required for setting up the proposed project
at Fatehabad site in advance of the financial sanction.
The PHWRs proposed to be set up at Fatehabad are indigenously designed, based
on the technology evolved in India. The design of plant is consistent with the
standard international practices for safety systems. The emissions in water, air and
land from proposed project will be within the limits prescribed by State Pollution
Control Board / AERB.
Though the site is being considered for PHWR from a technical point of view but site
could also be utilized for PHWRs and LWRs or combination of both with a overall
capacity limit of 2800 MWe.
Page 111
Chapter 3

CHAPTER 4 : DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

4.0
DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT
4.1
INTRODUCTION
4.1.1
General
EIA is the most important aspect of overall environment management strategy. EIA
needs a datum on which the prediction can be done. Information on the existing
baseline environmental status is essential for assessing the likely environmental
impacts of the proposed project. For studying the existing baseline environmental
status the following basic steps are required:
Delineation of project site and study area.
Delineation of the environmental components and methodology
Delineation of study period.
After delineation of the above the following studies were conducted:
Environmental settings within the study area based on secondary data.
Baseline data generation / establishment of baseline for environmental
components.
Traffic density at the inter-phase of project site and study area.
4.1.2
Industries within 25km Radius

There is no major industry within 10km radius of the proposed plant. However, there
are few small scale industrial units within 10km radius of the proposed site. There is
one power plant within 20km radius of the proposed site as listed in Table 4.1.
SN
1
4.1.3
Table 4.1: List of Major Industries within 25 km Radius of the Proposed Plant
Name of Industry
From Project Centre
Capacity
Distance (Km)
Direction
2X300MW
Thermal Power Plant at village Khedar
20
E
(HPGCL)
Project Site and Study Area
The project site for the proposed project is at Gorakhpur Village, Fatehabad,
Haryana. The land requirement for the proposed project is about 1319 acres (534
ha), which is private land for which land acquisition process is in progress with the
approval of Government of Haryana. The proposed township for the project covers
about 186 acres (75 hectares), which is mostly barren land. The project will house
four 700 MWe PHWR units. Two of such units i.e. 2X700 MWe will form one twin unit
and there will be two twin units in the project. The two twin units will be separated by
a distance of 640m. The two units within a twin unit will be separated by 108m. The
exclusion zone of 1km is maintained around each 700 MWe PHWR unit. The outer
boundary of exclusion zone circle combining the four units will form the project site
(Fig. 2.12a).
Page 112
Chapter 4

The study area for all the environmental studies, except for radiological studies, is
taken as 10 km radius around the proposed project site (with Reactor Building (RB)
as center). About 3/4th of the 10 km study area falls in Fatehabad district and about
1/4th falls in Hisar district. However, for radiological studies the study area is taken as
30 km radius around the Reactor Building (RB). No forest land is involved in this
area.
4.1.4
Baseline Data Generation for Environmental Components and Methodology

The monitoring of environmental components and the methodologies followed are
given in Table 4.2a.
The establishment of baseline for different environmental components in the study
area and at the project site has been done by conducting field monitoring for baseline
data generation. The data generation was carried out covering Meteorology, Ambient
Air Quality, Noise Levels, Water Quality, Soil, Radiological Survey (air, water, soil and
biota), Ecology and Socio-economic features. Besides additional data/information
regarding ecology, demographic pattern and socio-economic conditions were
collected from various government agencies and secondary sources.
4.1.5
Study Period
The baseline environmental data generation for conventional pollutant was carried
out during March 2011 to May 2011 and that for radiological survey was carried out
during January to March 2011.
Table 4.2a: Environmental Components and the Methodologies Adopted For the Study
S
Area
Environmental
Parameters
N
Components
Monitoring of Conventional Pollutants and other Environmental Components
1
Study area / project

site
Air

site
Water

site
site
Interface of Study
Area & Project Site
site
site
site
Soil
4
5
6
7
8
Radiological Survey
1
30 km Radius
Methodology*
Meteorology
Ambient Air Quality (prescribed parameters
by MoEF).
Noise Levels
Water Quality
Surface (parameters as per surface water
quality criteria)
Ground (parameters as per IS: 10500)
Soil Quality (Physico-chemical characteristics)
Field monitoring
Ecological
features
-
Flora & Fauna
Field
study
secondary data
Field monitoring
Geology
and
hydrogeology
Land-use
pattern
Socioeconomic
Study
Air
Traffic Density
Field monitoring
Field monitoring
/
Field
study
/
secondary data
Satellite imagery /
secondary data
Field
study
/
secondary data
Pre-operational base line levels of

natural and fall out radionuclides in air.
Field Monitoring
Page 113
Chapter 4

S
N
2
Area
30 km Radius
Environmental
Components
Water
30 km Radius
Soil
30 km Radius
Biota
(biological
samples)
Parameters
Methodology*
Pre-operational base line levels

natural and fall out radionuclides
water.
Soil.
base line concentration levels
Biota.
of
in
Field Monitoring
of
in
Field Monitoring
of
of
in
Field Monitoring
* Detailed in respective sections
4.2
BASELINE DATA GENERATION / ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE FOR

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS CONVENTIONAL POLLUTANTS
4.2.1
Meteorology
A meteorological station was set up at Gorakhpur Village, which lies within the
proposed study area at a distance of 3.5km E of the project site. The location of the
meteorological data monitoring station is marked in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01.
At the meteorological station, Wind Speed & Direction, Temperature, Relative
Humidity, Cloud Cover and Rain Fall were recorded at hourly intervals throughout the
monitoring period. The detailed metrological data collected at the project site is
presented as Annexure IVA and summarised meteorological data is given in Table
4.2b.
Table 4.2b: Summarised Monitored Meteorological Data at Gorakhpur March to May

2011
Period
Wind Speed (km/hr)

Max. Min.
Avg.
March 35.2
- May
0.0
5.11
Temperature ( C)
Max. Min.
Avg.
Relative Humidity (%)

Max.
Min.
Avg.
45.0
70
5.0
25.6
27
38.5
Total
(mm)
53.75
Rainfall
Rainy Days
(Nos)
5
Cloud
Cover
(Oktas)
Clear
Wind frequency distribution during the monitoring period at the site is given as Table
4.2c (1 to 3) for the period March 2011 to May 2011 (summer season). The Wind
Rose diagrams are given as Figs. 4.2a, 4.2b and 4.2c respectively.
From Table 4.2c1 it was observed that overall, the predominant wind directions for
March 2011 May 2011 were NW, W, NE, SE, SW, and N (prevailing for 16.03%,
10.06, 6.33, 4.75 and 4.34 of the time). Calm conditions prevailed for 29.39% of the
time. The wind velocity was mostly between 1.6 to 18.0 km/hr (70.59% of the time).
Page 114
Chapter 4

Table 4.2c1: Wind Frequency Distribution (%) During Day & Night (Overall) March to
May 2011
Wind
Wind Speed Ranges (m/s)
Direction
0.44 2.0
2.0 3.0
3.0 5.0
4.0 - 5.0
N
3.39
0.59
0.27
0.09
NNE
1.27
0.09
0.09
0.04
NE
4.44
0.59
0.68
0.40
ENE
0.86
0.27
0.09
0.18
E
2.67
0.86
0.36
0.04
ESE
0.77
0.18
0.14
0.04
SE
2.85
1.22
0.32
0.36
SSE
0.36
0.41
0.27
0.18
S
2.40
0.86
0.27
0.14
SSW
1.13
0.45
0.27
0.18
SW
2.85
1.27
0.32
0.18
WSW
2.26
0.82
0.50
0.00
W
5.80
2.08
1.27
0.68
WNW
1.12
0.77
0.32
0.09
NW
9.69
3.76
1.54
0.59
NNW
0.72
0.23
0.09
0.04
Sum (%)
42.58
14.45
6.8
3.23
Calm ( Wind Speed <0.44 m/s or <1.6 km/hr) = 29.41%
Sum
5.0 6.0
0.00
0.04
0.18
0.18
0.04
0.00
0.23
0.23
0.14
0.09
0.09
0.14
0.09
0.09
0.36
0.00
1.9
>=6.0
0.00
0.04
0.04
0.00
0.09
0.00
0.00
0.32
0.09
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.14
0.04
0.09
0.00
0.97
4.34
1.57
6.33
1.58
4.06
1.13
4.98
1.77
3.9
2.16
4.75
3.76
10.06
2.43
16.03
1.08
70.59
Fig. 4.2a: Wind-Rose During Summer Season: Day & Night (Overall)
While during the Day (Table 4.2.c2), the predominant wind directions were NW
(prevailing for 20.95% of the time), W (14.34%), SW (7.22%), NE (6.43%), SE
(6.52%), and NE (6.43%). Calm conditions prevailed for 10.47% of the time. The
wind velocity was mostly between 1.6 to 18.0 km/hr (89.53% of the time).
Page 115
Chapter 4

Table 4.2c2 : Wind Frequency Distribution (%) During Day Time March to May 2011
Wind
Direction
0.44 2.0
2.0 3.0
3.0 5.0 4.0 - 5.0 5.0 6.0
N
3.36
0.69
0.20
0.10
0.00
NNE
1.78
0.10
0.09
0.00
0.00
NE
4.45
0.69
0.49
0.40
0.30
ENE
0.49
0.20
0.00
0.30
0.30
E
2.67
1.09
0.69
0.00
0.00
ESE
0.79
0.20
0.00
0.10
0.00
SE
2.96
2.08
0.59
0.79
0.10
SSE
0.59
0.59
0.30
0.10
0.10
S
3.66
1.58
0.47
0.10
0.00
SSW
1.19
0.79
0.09
0.10
0.00
SW
4.05
1.98
0.59
0.30
0.20
WSW
1.98
1.38
0.79
0.00
0.30
W
6.72
3.66
2.57
1.19
0.20
WNW
1.88
1.38
0.69
0.20
0.10
NW
10.97
5.93
2.77
0.69
0.59
NNW
0.79
0.40
0.20
0.10
0.00
Sum (%)
48.33
22.74
10.53
4.47
2.19
Sum
>=6.0
0.00
0.00
0.10
0.00
0.10
0.00
0.00
0.69
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.00
0.00
0.10
0.00
0.00
1.29
4.35
1.97
6.43
1.29
4.55
1.09
6.52
2.37
5.91
2.27
7.22
4.45
14.34
4.35
20.95
1.49
89.53
Fig. 4.2b: Wind-Rose During Summer Season: Day Time

During the night (Table 4.2.c2), the predominant wind directions were NW (11.87%),
W (6.44%), NE (6.26%) and N (4.34%) of the times. Calm conditions prevailed for
45.41% of the time. The wind velocity was mostly between 1.6 18 km/hr (54.59% of
the time).
Page 116
Chapter 4

Table 4.2c3 : Wind Frequency Distribution (%) During Night Time March to May 2011
Wind
Direction
0.44 2.0
2.0 3.0
3.0 5.0
4.0 - 5.0
N
3.43
0.50
0.33
0.08
NNE
0.84
0.08
0.08
0.08
NE
4.43
0.50
0.83
0.42
ENE
1.17
0.33
0.17
0.08
E
2.68
0.67
0.08
0.08
ESE
0.75
0.17
0.25
0.00
SE
2.76
0.50
0.08
0.00
SSE
0.17
0.25
0.25
0.25
S
1.34
0.25
0.08
0.17
SSW
1.09
0.17
0.42
0.25
SW
1.84
0.67
0.08
0.08
WSW
2.50
0.33
0.25
0.00
W
5.02
0.75
0.17
0.25
WNW
1.59
0.25
0.00
0.00
NW
8.61
1.92
0.50
0.50
NNW
0.67
0.08
0.00
0.00
Sum (%)
38.89
7.42
3.57
2.24
Sum
5.0 6.0
0.00
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.00
0.33
0.33
0.25
0.17
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.08
0.17
0.00
1.65
>=6.0
0.00
0.08
0.00
0.00
0.08
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.08
0.00
0.00
0.08
0.25
0.00
0.17
0.00
0.74
4.34
1.24
6.26
1.83
3.67
1.17
3.67
1.25
2.17
2.1
2.67
3.16
6.44
1.92
11.87
0.75
54.59
Fig. 4.2c: Wind-Rose During Summer Season: Night Time

4.2.2
Ambient Air
General
Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) was monitored in terms of Particulate Matter (PM10 &
PM2.5), Sulphurdioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and ground level ozone.
These parameters were monitored at selected Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) monitoring
stations.
Page 117
Chapter 4

Selection of Monitoring Stations

For locating the ambient air quality (AAQ) monitoring stations, the evaluation area
may be considered a circle of radius 50 times the maximum stack height. Since the
maximum stack height (ventilation stack) for the proposed project is 100m, the
evaluation area is a circle of radius 5.0 km. However, as the project site is about 1.0
km radius circle drawn around each 700 MWe PHWR unit, so to have a conservative
approach the monitoring stations has been fixed in a radius of 10 km around the
proposed Plant taking Reactor Building as centre.
To select the locations of the ambient air quality monitoring stations, information
published by India Meteorological Department (IMD) was used. The IMD observatory
nearest to plant site is at Hisar about 33 km SSE of the project site.
As per Hisar IMD's data (Indian Meteorological Department observations from 1955
to 1980 nearest observatory to the Project site), the annual temperature varies from
varies from 41.0oC to 5.5oC and relative humidity varies from 27 - 82%. The annual
average rainfall at Hisar is 490.6mm most of it occurs during monsoon. The annual
and summer predominant wind directions are shown in Table 4.2d.
Table 4.2d: Pattern of Annual and Summer Winds in Study Area
Wind
Annual % Frequency
Predominance Sequence
N
10.5
4th
NE
6.5
6th
E
8.5
5th
SE
8.5
5th
S
5.0
7th
SW
12.5
3rd
W
17
1st
NW
13
2nd
Calm
17.5
Summer % Frequency
Predominance Sequence
14.7
3rd
5.8
8th
6.0
7th
6.7
6th
7.2
5th
13.8
4th
17.8
1st
17.5
2nd
11.6
The main objective of AAQ data generation / establishment of baseline for AAQ is to
assess the future scenario of the surrounding environment by superimposing the
predicted pollution levels on the existing pollution levels. Thus it will be possible to
identify the location where maximum concentrations of pollutants are likely to occur
due to emissions from the proposed plant. The predominant wind direction of nearest
IMD observatory at Hisar was identified with the help of wind frequencies. The
predominant annual wind frequencies are W (17%), NW (13%), SW (12.5%), N
(10%) and E & SE (8.5%), while the calm value is 17.5%. The predominant wind
frequencies during summer season are W (17.8%), NW (17.5%), SW (13.8), N (13.7)
and S (9.2%), while the calm values are 11.6% (Table 4.2d).
The locations of AAQ stations are given in Table 4.3a. The AAQ stations were
located in the upwind and downwind direction of annual and summer winds with
respect the proposed plant by considering the points mentioned below:
1. Location of AAQ stations within 10 km radius around the proposed plant.
2. Approachability to and habitation near the monitoring stations.
3. Location of other industries within 10 km radius around the proposed plant.
Page 118
Chapter 4

Table 4.3a: Location of AAQ Monitoring Stations

Stat
-ion
No.
Location
A1
Gorakhpur
A2
Nehla
9.5
A3
Siwani
5.5, SE
A4
Kirmara
9.0, SE
A5
Chaubara
5.5, NE
A6
Sabarwas
5.0, S
A7
Kajalheri
A8
Khaujri
3,
WSW
4.25,
NNW
Project
Site
3.5, E
E
Distance & Direction With Respect to

Relative Location With Relative Location With
Respect to IMD Annual Respect to IMD Summer
Wind Pattern
Wind Pattern
st
st
D/W of 1 predominant D/W of 1 predominant
Annual wind W.
summer wind W.
st
st
Annual wind W.
summer wind W.
nd
nd
annual wind NW.
summer wind NW.
nd
nd
annual wind NW.
summer wind NW.
rd
th
D/W of 3 most
D/W of 4 most
predominant annual
predominant summer
wind SW
wind SW
th
rd
annual wind N.
summer wind N.
th
D/W of 5 predominant D/W of 7th predominant
annual wind E.
summer wind E.
th
D/W of 7 predominant D/W of 5th predominant
annual wind S.
summer wind S.
Remarks
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Methodology
As per the CPCB guidelines on methods of monitoring & analysis, 8 (eight) AAQ
monitoring stations were selected. These stations are marked in Drg. No.
MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01.
During the monitoring periods, 24 hourly samples were collected twice a week for
PM10, SO2 and NOx, on each monitoring day. However as the site is a green field
site, for PM 2.5 24 hourly samples were collected on selected monitoring days. Eight
hourly samples were collected on selected monitoring days for ozone. The
methods of sample collection, equipment used and analysis procedure as
followed are given in Table 4.3b. The AAQ results have been compared with MoEF
Revised National ambient Air Quality Standards 2009 as given in Table 4.3c. The
days on which monitoring was conducted at different AAQ stations is given in Table
4.3d.
Table 4.3b: Methodology of Sampling and Analysis for AAQ Monitoring
Parameter
3
SO2 (g/m )
3
NOx (g/m )
PM10 (g/m3)
PM2.5 (g/m3)
Ozone (O3) (g/m3)
Instrument/Apparatus
Used
HVAS with Impinger Tube,
Spectrophotometer
Spectrophotometer
Respirable Dust Sampler
PM 2.5 Sampler
Spectrophotometer
Methodology
Reference
Improved West & Gaecke

Method
Jacobs
&
Hoccheiser
Modified
(Na-Arsenite)
Method
Gravimetry
Gravimetry
Chemical Method
MoEF G.S.R 826
(E) dtd. 16.11.09

-do-
-do-do-do-
Page 119
Chapter 4

Table 4.3c: National Ambient Air Quality Standards

SN
1
2
3
4
5
*
**
Parameter
Time
Weighted
Average
Concentration in Ambient Air

Industrial,
Ecologically Sensitive
Residential, Rural
Area (Notified by
& Other Areas
Central Government)
SO2 ; (g/m3)
Annual*
50
20
24 Hours**
80
80
NOx ; (g/m3)
Annual*
40
30
24 Hours**
80
80
PM10; (g/m3)
Annual*
60
60
24 Hours**
100
100
PM2.5; (g/m3)
Annual*
40
40
24 Hours**
60
60
Ozone (O3); (g/m3)
8 Hours **
100
100
1 Hour **
180
180
Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular site taken
twice a week 24 hourly at uniform intervals
24 hourly or 08 hourly or 01 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be compiled with
98% of the time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two
consecutive days.
Table 4.3d: Dates of AAQ Sampling During Summer

S
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Location
Gorakhpur A1
Nehla A2
Siwani A3
Kirmara A4
Chaubara A5
Sabarwas A6
Kajalheri A7
Khaujri A8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
March11
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
9 13 17 21
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
Date of Sampling
April11
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
May11
13 17 21
13 17 21
13 17 21
13 17 21
13 17 21
13 17 21
13 17 21
13 17 21
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
Results of Ambient Air Quality

The summarised AAQ results are given in Table 4.3e and shown in Fig. 4.3a, 4.3b,
4.3c, 4.3d and 4.3e. The detailed AAQ results have been given in Annexure IVB.
The results have been compared with MoEF Revised AAQ Standard 2009. The
results of SO2, NOx, PM10, PM2.5 and O3 at all the monitoring stations are below the
MoEF industrial, residential, rural & other area norms for the respective pollutants.
Table 4.3e: AAQ During Summer
Parameters
SO2
Max
3
(g/m ) Min.
Avg
C 98
NOx
Max
3
(g/m ) Min.
Avg
C 98
PM10 Max
(g/m3) Min.
Avg
Gorakhpur
A1
15
5
9
15
31
9
17
29
85
53
78
Nehla
A2
14
4
7
12
23
7
13
20
84
52
72
Siwani
A3
20
4
10
19
36
8
21
36
84
49
72

A4
A5
A6
A7
18
12
13
14
4
5
4
5
9
8
8
9
17
12
13
14
46
19
30
24
6
8
5
8
17
13
14
14
40
19
27
23
86
72
87
83
42
52
59
50
74
63
76
64
Khaujri
A8
11
5
7
11
17
8
13
17
65
45
59
Page 120
Chapter 4

Parameters
C 98
PM2.5 Max
(g/m3) Min.
Avg
C 98
O3
Max
(g/m3) Min.
Avg
C 98
Gorakhpur
A1
85
49
22
37
48
35
22
28
35
Nehla
A2
84
49
29
41
49
33
21
26
33
Siwani
A3
84
46
28
39
46
34
20
26
33

A4
A5
A6
A7
86
72
87
80
48
46
49
48
25
29
29
29
41
35
43
38
47
44
49
47
33
36
34
34
21
20
21
20
26
27
26
25
33
36
34
33
Max
Min.
Khaujri
A8
65
44
30
38
44
34
21
26
33
Avg
90
80
SO2 Norm
60
SO2 (g/m )
70
50
40
30
20
10
A8
Khaujri
Kajalheri A7
A4
Kirmara
Sabarwas A6
A3
Siwani
Chaubara A5
A2
Nehla
Gorakhpur A1
AAQ Stations
Fig. 4.3a: SO2 Concentration in the Study Area
Page 121
Chapter 4

Max
90
Min.
Avg
NOx Norm
80
NOx (g/m )
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Khaujri
A8
Kajalheri
A7
Sabarwas
A6
Chaubara
A5
Kirmara
A4
Siwani
A3
Nehla
A2
Gorakhpur
A1
AAQ Stations
Fig. 4.3b: NOx Concentration in the Study Area
Max
Min.
Avg
120
PM10 Norm
PM 10 (g/m )
100
80
60
40
20
A8
Khaujri
Kajalheri A7
Sabarwas A6
Chaubara A5
A4
A3
Siwani
Kirmara
A2
Nehla
Gorakhpur A1
AAQ Stations
Fig. 4.3c: PM10 Concentration in the study area
Page 122
Chapter 4

Max
Min.
Avg
80
PM 2.5 (g/m )
PM2.5 Norm
60
40
20
Khaujri
A8
Kajalheri
A7
Sabarwas
A6
Chaubara
A5
Kirmara
A4
Siwani
A3
Nehla
A2
Gorakhpur
A1
AAQ Stations
Fig. 4.3d: PM2.5 Concentration in the study area
Max
3
Ozone (g/m )
120
Min.
Avg
Ozone Norm
100
80
60
40
20
Khaujri
A8
Kajalheri
A7
Sabarwas
A6
Chaubara
A5
Kirmara
A4
Siwani
A3
Nehla
A2
Gorakhpur
A1
AAQ Stations
Fig. 4.3e: Ozone concentration in the study area

4.2.3
Noise
Selection of Monitoring Locations
A total of ten noise monitoring stations were selected to cover all type of areas as
Page 123
Chapter 4

Table 4.4a: Noise Monitoring Locations

Station
No.
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
Location
Distance w.r.t.
Site Centre (km)
Gorakhpur
3.5
Nahla
9.5
Siwani
5.5
Kirmara
9.0
Chaubara
5.5
Sabarwas
5.0
Kajalheri
3.0
Khaujari
4.25
Badopal Near NH 8.0
Direction w.r.t
Site Centre
E
E
SE
SE
NE
S
WSW
NNW
WSW
Type of Area*
Date of
Sampling
14.04.11
15.04.11
16.04.11
17.04.11
18.04.11
19.04.11
20.04.11
21.04.11
22.04.11
Commercial
Residential Area
Residential Area
Residential Area
Residential Area
Residential Area
Residential Area
Residential Area
National Highway
(Industrial Area)
N10
Project Site
0
E
Project Site
23.04.11
(Proposed Industry)
* Note: Type of area for representing Commercial, Residential & Industrial selected at site. NH 10
is taken as Industrial area.
Methodology
To have an idea of the present background noise level of the project site, a detailed
measurement of noise level was carried out at 10 locations during the monitoring
period. Precision integrated sound level meter (type 2221 of Bruel & Kjaer of
Denmark) was used for measurement of noise level for the study. The
measurements were carried out for 24 hours. Hourly readings were recorded by the
operating the instrument for 1520 minutes in each hour at one-hour intervals in
which leq(A) have been measured. The noise monitoring stations are marked in Drg.
No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01.
Results
The results of ambient noise monitoring are given in Table 4.4b and shown in Fig.
4.4a and 4.4b. The results have been compared with MoEF norms [Noise
(Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000] given in Table 4.4c. The result shows that at
Gorakhpur (N1) both day and night time noise is below the norm for commercial
area. At Nahla (N2), Siwani (N3), Gorakhpur (Project Site) (N10) and Kirmara (N4)
both day and night time noise values are within the norm for residential area. At NH
near Badopal (Hisar to Sirsa) (N5), the noise levels are below the norm for industrial
area both during day and night time.
Table 4.4b: Results of Noise Monitoring
Stn. No.
Location
Day (0600-2200 hr.)

Night (2200-0600 hr.)
Max. Min. Mean* Max
Min
Mean*
N1
Gorakhpur
63.7
53.4
60.1
55
51.2
41.8
N2
Nahla
54.2
42.9
50.8
45
43.6
41.8
N3
Siwani
54.5
40.5
49.7
45
43.7
38.2
N4
Kirmara
53.4
41.1
50
45
43.5
35.1
N5
Chaubara
53.8
41.8
50.1
45
44.4
38.4
N6
Sabarwas
53.5
44.2
51
45
43.8
38.7
N7
Kajalheri
53.5
40.1
49.4
45
43.6
37.4
N8
Khaujari
53.4
45.4
51
45
43.6
37.5
N9
Badopal
65.8
51.4
60.3
70
55.9
46.8
N10
Project Site
53.9
40.9
47.8
45
44.4
39.7
Day - 0600 to 2200 hrs.; Night - 2200 to 0600 hrs.; All values in dB(A); * Logarithmic Averages
Page 124
Chapter 4

Table 4.4c: Ambient Noise Level Norms

Type of Area
Industrial Area
Commercial Area
Residential Area
Silence zone
All values in dB (A)
Day (0600-2200 hrs)

75
65
55
50
Night (2200-0600 hrs)

70
55
45
40
Noise Levels During Day Time
Max dB (A)
Min. dB (A)
Avg. dB (A)
Project
Site N10
Badopal
N9
Khaujri N8
Kajalheri
N7
Sabarwas
N6
Chaubara
N5
Kirmara
N4
Siwani N3
Nehla N2
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
Gorakhpur
N1
Noise Levels dB (A)
Norm dB (A)
Noise Level Monitoring Stations
Fig. 4.4a: Noise Levels During Day Time in the Study Area
Page 125
Chapter 4

Noise Levels During Night Time
Badopal
N9
Project
Site N10
Avg. dB (A)
Khaujri N8
Kajalheri
N7
Min. dB (A)
Sabarwas
N6
Chaubara
N5
Kirmara
N4
Max dB (A)
Siwani N3
Nehla N2
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
Gorakhpur
N1
Noise Levels dB (A)
Norm dB (A)
Noise Level Monitoring Stations
Fig. 4.4b: Noise Levels During Night Time in the Study Area
4.2.4
Water Environment
Water quality monitoring was carried out with the following objectives:
To collect baseline data on existing water quality.
To assess the impact of the proposed outfalls on water quality of receiving
water bodies.
To assess the raw water quality to be used by the proposed project.
Selection of Sampling Locations
A total of eight water-sampling locations were selected for the present study covering
four surface water and four ground water sampling locations. The Surface water
sampling locations were selected at different locations all along the Canal up-stream
and down-stream of project site keeping in view the confluence point of surface water
channels receiving proposed plant outfalls. The canal water is being used by the
villagers for bathing, washing and cattle washing. The ground water sampling
locations were selected up gradient and down gradient of the different units of the
proposed plant. These stations are marked in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01.
Methodology
In order to study the existing water quality within the study area, grab samples of
water were collected from locations, as given in Table 4.5a. Surface water samples
were analysed for different parameters as required by CPCB surface water criteria
and ground water samples were analysed for different parameters as per IS: 10500.
The water samples analysed for different parameters as per American Public Health
Association (APHA), 1995 - "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Waste Water" and IS: 3205 (Part 39) 1990 (reaffirmed 1996).
Page 126
Chapter 4

Results of Surface Water Quality:

The result of Surface Water quality is given in Tables 4.5b. The surface water quality
was compared with CPCB norm for surface water, as given in Table 4.5c. The
surface water quality is within the norms for Classes B, C, D, and E (Table 4.5c). The
BOD levels in all the samples were also within the norm for Class B (3mg/l max.).
Station /
Sample
No.
Surface Water
SW1
Table 4.5a: Location of Water Monitoring Station

Location
Distance
Direction Source
w.r.t. Site
w.r.t Site
Centre (km) Centre
SW3
Bhakhra Canal Fatehabad

Branch (U/S of Project site)
Bhakhra Canal Fatehabad
Branch (D/S of Project site)
Sirsa Branch Canal
SW4
Sub-branch
SW2
Kishangarh
Canal
Ground Water
GW1
Gorakhpur
GW2
Sabarwas
GW3
Samani
GW4
Kajalheri
2.5
NE
1..0
NNE
3.0
WNW
2.5
3.5
5.0
5.5
3.0
E
S
SE
WSW
Surface
Water (Canal)
Surface
Water (Canal)
Surface
Water (Canal)
Surface
Water (Canal)
Ground Water
Ground Water
Ground Water
Ground Water
Date of
Sampling
28.04.11
28.04.11
28.04.11
28.04.11
28.04.11
28.04.11
28.04.11
28.04.11
Table 4.5b: Surface Water Quality

SN
Parameters
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Colour, Hazen units, Max

Turbidity, NTU, Max.
pH Value
Temp oC
Total suspended solid, mg/l, Max
Dissolved Oxygen (as O2), mg/l
BOD, 5 days at 20 C, mg/l
Electrical conductivity, mhos/cm, Max
Iron (as Fe), mg/l, Max
Chloride (as Cl), mg/l, Max
Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max
Copper (Cu), mg/l, Max
Manganese (as Mn), mg/l, Max
Sulphate (as SO4), mg/l, Max
Nitrate,(as NO3), mg/l, Max
Phenolic Compounds (as C6 H5OH), mg/l Max.
Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l, Max.
Selenium (as Se), mg/l, Max.
Arsenic (as As), mg/l, Max.
Cyanide (as CN), mg/l, Max.
Lead (as Pb), mg/l, Max.
Zinc (as Zn), mg/l, Max.
Anionic detergent (MBAS) mg/l, Max
Hexavalent Chromium (as Cr6 +), mg/l, Max.
Oil & Grease mg/l, Max.
Surface Water Monitoring Location

SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
<5
10
<5
11
8
7
6
2
8.4
8.4
8.6
8.4
25
26
26
25
19
12
24
22
5.8
5.9
5.5
5.2
2.7
2.5
2.5
2.7
638
710
774
720
0.26
0.22
0.17
0.43
67
64
16
12
0.81
0.80
0.67
0.64
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.02
<0.01
0.044
0.042
88
115
68
84
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.03
<0.03
<0.03
<0.03
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
0.26
0.15
0.12
0.15
<0.03
<0.03
<0.03
<0.03
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
Page 127
Chapter 4

SN
Parameters
26.
27.
28.
29
Aluminium (as A1) mg/l, Max.

Coliform organisms, MPN/100ml
Sodium Adsorption (SAR)
Boron (as B), mg/l, Max.
Surface Water Monitoring Location

SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
700
500
500
500
0.09
0.09
0.08
0.08
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
Table 4.5c: Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) Surface Water Quality Criteria
SN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Parameters
pH
Dissolved oxygen (as O2), mg/l, min
BOD, 5 days at 20 C, max
Total coliform organism, MPN/100 ml, max
Free ammonia (as N), mg/l, max
Electrical conductivity, mhos/cm, max
Sodium absorption ratio, max.
Boron (as B), mg/l, max.
Class A
Class B
Class C
Class D
Class E
Below E
Class A
6.58.5
6
2
50
-
Class B
6.58.5
5
3
500
-
Class C
6.0-9.0
4
3
5000
-
Class D
6.58.5
4
1.2
-
Class E
6.58.5
2250
26
2
: Drinking water source without conventional treatment but after dis-infection

: Outdoor bathing (organised)
: Drinking water source after conventional treatment and after dis-infection
: Propagation of Wild life and Fisheries
: Irrigation, Industrial Cooling, and Controlled Waste Disposal
: Not meeting A, B, C, D & E Criteria
Results of Ground Water Quality

The results of ground water quality are given in Table 4.5d. In absence of any
specific norms for Ground Water Quality, the results have been compared with
drinking water norms (IS: 10500). The results of analysis of ground water reveals that
in GW2, total hardness, Chloride, TDS, Ca, Mg and Alkalinity is exceeding the
respective desirable / permissible norms of IS:10500. Whereas in GW3 TDS is higher
than desirable limits. Other parameters of all the samples are within the limits when
compared with the drinking water quality standards specified in IS :10500.
Table 4.5d: Ground Water Quality
SN.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7
8
9
10.
11
12
13
14
Parameters
Essential Characteristics:
Colour, Hazen units, Max.
Odour
Taste
Turbidity, NTU, Max.
pH Value
Total Hardness (as CaCO3), mg/l,
Max
Iron (as Fe), mg/l, Max.
Chloride (as Cl), mg/l, Max.
Fluoride (as F) mg/L, Max.
Desirable Characteristics
Total Dissolved Solids mg/l, Max.
Calcium (as Ca), mg/l, Max.
Magnesium (as Mg), mg/L, Max.
Copper (Cu), mg/l, Max.
Manganese (as Mn), mg/l, Max.
* Norms
1
* Norms
2
5
Unobjectionable
Agreeable
5
6.5 to 8.5
300
Ground Water Monitoring Locations

GW1
GW2
GW3
GW4
4
Unobj.
5
Unobj.
3
Unobj.
3
Unobj.
10
NR
600
Agre.
4
8.07
172
Agre.
5
8.47
1404
Agre.
6
8.76
120
Agre.
6
8.4
148
0.3
250
1.0
1.0
1000
1.5
0.11
14
0.6
0.91
1082
0.6
0.101
122
0.3
0.080
49
0.3
500
75
30
75
0.1
2000
200
100
200
0.3
534
37
19
<0.01
0.08
3410
345
132
<0.01
0.06
603
14
20
<0.01
0.061
338
29
18
<0.01
0.050
Page 128
Chapter 4

SN.
* Norms
1
200
45
0.001
Parameters
15
16
17
18.
19
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
* Norms
2
400
100
0.005
Ground Water Monitoring Locations

GW1
GW2
GW3
Sulphate (as SO4), mg/l, Max.

124
464
133
Nitrate (as NO3), mg/l, Max.
14
11
14
Phenols (as C6 H5OH), mg/l,Max
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.001
NR
<0.0005
<0.0005
<0.0005
Mercury (as Hg), mg/l, Max.
Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l, Max.
0.01
NR
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
Selenium (as Se), mg/l, Max.
0.01
NR
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
Arsenic (as As), mg/l, Max.
0.05
NR
<0.03
<0.03
<0.03
Cyanide (as CN), mg/l, Max.
0.05
NR
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
Lead (as Pb), mg/l, Max.
0.05
NR
<0.05
<0.05
<0.05
Zinc (as Zn), mg/l, Max.
5.0
15
0.038
0.045
0.167
Anionic detergent (as MBAS)
0.2
1.0
<0.1
<0.1
<0.1
mg/l, Max
26 Hexavalent Chromium (as Cr6+),
0.01
NR
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
mg/l
27. Mineral Oil, mg/l, Max.
0.01
0.03
<1.4
<1.4
<2
28 Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l, Max.
200
600
150
232
102
29. Aluminium (as A1) mg/l, Max.
0.03
0.2
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.2
<0.2
<0.2
30 Boron, mg/l, Max.
1.0
5
* Norms as per Drinking Water Specification - IS: 10500 (1991) and amendment no. 1, 1993
1. Requirement (desirable limits); 2.Permissible limits in the absence of alternate source; NR: No
Relaxation
4.2.5
GW4
63
13
<0.001
<0.0005
<0.005
<0.005
<0.03
<0.01
<0.05
0.107
<0.1
<0.01
<2
116
<0.01
Soil
Selection of Sampling Location
The soil sampling locations were selected with the following objectives:
To assess the background / baseline soil quality of the region.
To assess the impact (if any) of proposed Plant air emissions, effluent outfall
and solid waste on soil of the study area.
A total of ten sampling locations as marked in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/01, were
selected for the study. The selected locations and the justification for their selection
are given in Table 4.6a.
Table 4.6a: Selection of Soil Sampling Locations and Justification
Distance w.r.t. Direction
Type of
Date of
Site Centre
w.r.t Site
Land
Sampling
Station /
Location
Sample No.
(km)
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
Gorakhpur
Nahla
Samani
Kirmara
Chaubara
Sabarwas
Kajalheri
Khaujari
Badopal
Project Site
3.5
9.5
5.5
9.0
5.5
5.0
3.0
4.25
8.0
0
Centre
E
E
SE
SE
NE
S
WSW
NNW
WSW
-
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
Agriculture
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
26.11.10
Page 129
Chapter 4
<0.2

Methodology
In order to have an idea about the baseline soil quality in the study area, samples of
topsoil were collected from the five locations once during the study period. The soil
samples were marked, brought to laboratory, air-dried and analysed for different
physico-chemical characteristics by following the methodology given in Jackson, M.L.
(1967): "Soil Chemical Analysis" (Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Limited, New Delhi) and
"Soil Test Methodology" (1992), Edited B.S. Mathur. SSAC (BAU) Tech. Bull. 3/92.
Pp. 312. Department of Soil Sciences and Agriculture Chemistry, Birsa Agriculture
University, Ranchi.
Results of Soil Analysis
The results of analysis are given in Tables 4.6b, 4.6c, 4.6d and 4.6e. Soil pH plays a
very important role in the availability of nutrients. The composition of the soil
microbial community is also dependent on the soil pH. In the study area the soil
samples had more or less neutral pH.
.
Electrical conductivity is a measure of the concentration of soluble salts and ionic
activity. Salt concentration is directly proportional to the osmotic pressure, which
governs the process of osmosis in the soil plant system. The electrical conductivity
in all the soil samples ranged from 0.075 mS/cm (S9) to 0.488 mS/cm (S4).
Table 4.6b: Physico-Chemical Properties of Soils
Characteristics
Type of Land
Colour
Texture (Soil
type)
Bulk Density
(gm/cc)
Water Holding
Capacity (%)
pH (1:5 ratio)
Electrical
Conductivity
(mS/cm)
Results
S1
Agr.
Bl.
White
S. Lm
S3
Agr.
Lgt
Brw
S. Lm
S4
Agr.
Ylw
White
S. Lm
S5
Agr.
Ylw
White
Sdy
S6
Agr.
Brw
Ylw
Sdy
S7
Agr.
Brw
Ylw
Sdy
S8
Agr.
Ylw
White
Sdy
134
S2
Agr.
Lgt
Brw
Lm.
Sand
140
S10
Agr.
Bl.
White
S. Lm
128
S9
Agr.
Ylw
White
Lm.
Sand
134
143
138
138
139
127
32.4
32.5
29.7
29.8
31.1
32.1
30.1
32.3
30.5
30.1
7.0
0.271
6.9
0.235
7.1
0.114
6.8
0.488
7.0
0.110
7.2
0.178
6.9
0.081
7.3
0.241
6.8
0.075
6.8
0.078
135
Phosphorus and Nitrogen are limiting nutrients. In the tested soil samples, availability
of Nitrogen is Medium (in S1, S5, S6, S7, S8, S9 & S10) to high (S2, S3, & S4) and
available Phosphorus is low in all the collected soil samples. However, Potassium is
high in all the soil samples. Organic carbon content is medium (S1, S2, S6 and S8) to
low (S3, S4, S5, S7, S9 & S10) in the soil samples.
Table 4.6c: Available Major Nutrients in Soil
Nutrients & Ratings
Organic Carbon (%)
Organic Matter (%)
Available Nitrogen
(kg/ha)
S1
0.71
M
1.6
364
M
S2
0.57
M
1.4
1254
H
S3
0.49
L
1.2
583
H
S4
0.47
L
1.2
715
H
Results
S5
S6
0.47
0.57
L
M
1.2
1.4
383
301
M
M
S7
0.38
L
1.0
326
M
S8
0.59
M
1.4
320
M
S9
0.44
L
1.1
354
M
Page 130
Chapter 4
S10
0.45
L
1.2
351
M

Nutrients & Ratings

Available
Phosphorus (kg/ha)
Available Potassium
(kg/ha)
Ratings:
Organic Carbon
Available Nitrogen
Available Phosphorus
Available Potassium
S1
2.0
L
709
H
:
:
:
:
S2
1.0
L
672
H
S3
2.0
L
560
H
S4
0.2
L
597
H
Results
S5
S6
2.0
1.0
L
L
299
1289
H
H
S7
1.0
L
373
H
S8
1.0
L
336
H
S9
1.0
L
336
H
S10
1.0
L
373
H
<0.50 Low; 0.50 to 0.75 Medium; >0.75 High

<280 Low; 280 to 560 Medium; >560 High
The results show that the Calcium and Magnesium constitutes the bulk of
exchangeable cations in the tested soil samples. This indicates that the collected soil
samples are showing the signs of increase in alkalinity (Sodium / Potassium).
Table 4.6d: Exchangeable Cations
Cations
Results
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
Calcium
12
8
4
8
4
24
(meq/100gm)
(47.21) (33.59) (27.03) (38.55) (26.44) (52.79)
Magnesium
12
14
10
8
10
20
(meq/100gm)
(47.21) (58.77) (67.57) (38.55) (66.09) (43.99)
Sodium
0.87
1.3
0.35
4.29
0.89
0.53
(meq/100gm)
(3.42)
(5.46) (2.36) (20.67) (5.88) (1.17)
Potassium
0.55
0.52
0.45
0.46
0.24
0.93
(meq/100gm)
(2.16)
(2.18) (3.04) (2.22) (1.59) (2.05)
Total base
25.42
23.82
14.8
20.75 15.13 45.46
(100)
(100) (100)
(100) (100) (100)
Values in ( ) give the % of respective cation of the total cations.
S7
32
(68.82)
14
(30.11)
0.2
(0.43)
0.3
(0.65)
46.5
(100)
S8
26
(63.55)
14
(34.22)
0.49
(1.20)
0.42
(1.03)
40.91
(100)
S9
4
(23.77)
12
(71.30)
0.51
(3.03)
0.32
(1.90)
16.83
(100)
S10
4
(23.95)
12
(71.86)
0.38
(2.28)
0.32
(1.92)
16.7
(100)
Soil micronutrients also play an important role in plant growth and can act as limiting
nutrients. Soil micronutrient analysis can be employed as a diagnostic tool for
predicting the possibility of deficiency of a nutrient and the profitability of its
application. For this it is necessary to fix the critical limits. The critical limit of a micro
nutrient is that content of extractable nutrient at or below which plantation practised
on it will produce a positive response to its application. Copper and Zinc is high in all
the tested soil samples. Iron is above the critical limits in all the soils samples. Since
in the study area, the level of some micronutrients are above the critical limits and
thus are in available amount and may prove helpful to plant growth. However it must
be noted that very high concentrations of one or more micronutrients may be
detrimental to plant growth and soil fertility may be adversely affected.
Table 4.6e: Available Micronutrients
Micro Nutrient
Iron (as Fe)
Copper (as Cu)
Zinc (Zn)
Manganese (Mn)
Iron
Results
S3
S4
S5
S6
0.3
0.41
0.4
0.32
0.57 0.61
0.64
0.51
5.5
5.7
5.9
4.8
2.5
2.7
3.4
3.8
Critical Limits (mg/kg)
4.5 6.0
Copper
0.20 0.66
S1
0.48
0.61
4.9
2.4
S2
0.31
0.52
5.6
2.7
S7
0.37
0.42
4.3
3.5
S8
0.31
0.52
4.6
2.9
Zn
S9
0.41
0.49
5.1
3.6
0.50 0.65
Page 131
Chapter 4
S10
0.47
0.58
4.8
2.5

4.2.6
Ecological Features
Objectives of the study
The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:
To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project
site within the study area;
To assess the type of faunal species within the study area;
To assess the biodiversity of natural system present in the study area;
To ascertain migratory routes of fauna and possibility of breeding grounds
within the study area;
To assess the trophic status of the water bodies present in the study area.
Methodology of the Ecology Study
The study area taken for the study is 10 km radius with the project site as center. The
different methods adopted were as follows:
Inventorisation of flora / fauna: The list of Flora and Fauna found in the Forest
Division (Fatehabad) was collected from the Working Plan of the division for
reference. The list of flora and fauna found in the region was prepared by
conducting field survey and by discussions with concerned Forest Department
personnel using the list available in the Working Plan as a base.
Generation of primary data through systematic ecological studies: The phytosociology of the vegetation (covering frequency, density, abundance and
species diversity) in the forest areas falling in the study area was to be
determined by conducting field studies in selected areas (by laying suitable
sizes of quadrat). Since there are no forests in the study area, only
inventorisation of flora and fauna was done.
Discussion with local people so as to elicit information about local plant,
animals and their uses and Gathering data for ethnobiology.
The present study is based on field studies conducted during winter season
September to November 2011. The study area falls under the category of tropical
desert thorn and comprise predominantly of xerophytes. The area is sparsely
populated and is almost plain. The study area contains plantations around villages.
There is no wildlife and bird sanctuary within the study area. The biotic environment
can be described under following heads:
1.
2.
Project Site
Study Area: The study area can further be described as per the type of land use.
i) Agricultural land
ii) Plantations around Human Settlements
iii) Waste land
iv) Faunal and avi-fauna
v) Water Bodies
Project Site
The project site as of now is barren or agricultural land. The waste land is without any
vegetation and only sparsely scattered plants of Leonotis sp., Lantana sp., Calotropis
spp, Croton sp., Zyziphus sp., Xanthium Straumarium, etc are growing. There is no
forest land involved within the project site. The project area is predominantly double
crop agriculture land. The details of Rabi and Kharif crops, cultivation area along with
yield per ha is given in Table 4.7a.
Page 132
Chapter 4

Table 4.7a: Status of Agriculture at the Project Site

SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Crop
Rabi
Wheat
Gram
Mustard
Kharif
Bajra
Cotton
Paddy
Area (ha)
Yield Kg/ha)
463.4
4.76
32.80
4920
980
1680
307.8
154
39.2
3040
973
3020
In between the agricultural fields, at the bund of the plots trees have been planted in
scattered manner. There are about 1027 Eucalyptus spp trees growing in the project
site, out of which the plant area located in the central part of the project area contains
575 trees.
Study Area
The study area is almost plain in topography. The plain areas are best utilized for
cultivation during kharif and rabi seasons. Tree species found in cultivated fields,
waste lands and habitations are Jand, Rohera, Khairi, Beri, Reru, Jal Or Van, Barh,
Peepal, Mesquite or Pahari Kikar, Kachnar, Amaltas, Lasura, Imli, Banna, etc.
Shisham, Kikar, Siris, Neem, Bakain Gultmohar. Parkinsonia Eucalyptus, etc. have
been planted along rail, road and canal strips and in other private areas. Eucalyptus
is also planted in agricultural and under farm forestry scheme. The Jand, Farash,
Khairi, Castor, kana and Ruhera have been planted to check soil erosion by high
velocity winds.
Common shrubs found are Hins, Bansa, Panwar, Babool, Karir, Phoa, Khip and Ak.
Medicinal herbs found in the district are Bansa, Indirain, Asgandha, Glo, Kharuthi,
Bhakhra, Dhatura, etc. Their collection becomes uneconomical because these are
available in scattered form.
The important grasses found in the district are Anjan, Dhamang, Dub, Kana and
Dabh. Anjan, Dhaman and Dub which are palatable fodder grasses are dwindling on
account of uncontrolled grazing. The grasses in waste, lands are poor in quality and
quantity. The plant species commonly found in the study area is given in Table 4.7b.
The authenticated list of flora and fauna found in the study area is given in Annexure
IVC.
Table 4.7b: List of Plants Growing in Study Area
SN.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Common
Names
Babool
Reru
Kikar
Khairi
Bansa
Unchti
Pahari Neem
Siris
Kala Siris
Safed Siris
Botanical Names
Family
Habbit
Remarks
Acacia jacquemontii
Acacia leucophloea
Acacia nilotica
Acacia senegal
Adhatoda Vasica
Ageratum conyzoides
Ailanthus excelsa
Albizia lebbeck
Albiziz odoratissima
Albizzia procera
Fabaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Acanthaceae
Asteraceae
Simaroubaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Shrubs
Trees
Trees
Trees
Herbs
Herbs
Trees
Trees
Trees
Trees
Medicinal
Medicinal
Page 133
Chapter 4

SN.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Common
Names
Dhinkwar
Gwarpatha
Chattin
Kalmegh
Sita Phal
Kadamb
Brhamadandi
Shatawar
Neem
Safed Kachnar
Semal
Dhak
Phoa
Botanical Names
Family
Habbit
Remarks
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
Ak
Bhang
Karir
Karaunda
Hins
Amaltas
Panwar
Panwar
Sadabahar
Anjan
Dhamanq
Indirain
Neebu
Lasura
Chota Lasora
Banna
Amarbel
Aloe barbeadensis
Aloe vera
Alstonia scholaris
Andrographis paniculata
Annona squamosa
Anthocephalus cadamba
Argemone maxicana
Asparagus racemosus
Azadirachta indica
Bauhinia verigata
Bombax ceiba
Butea monosperma
Calligonum
polygonoides
Calotropis procera
Cannabis sativa
Capparis decidua
Carissa carandus
Carissa spinarum
Cassia fistula
Cassia occidentalis
Cassia tora
Catharanthus roseus
Cenchrus ciliaris
Cenchrus setigerus
Citrullus colocynthis
Citrus medica
Cordia dichotoma
Cordia myxa
Crataeva adansonii
Cuscuta reflexa
Xanthorrhoeaceae
Xanthorrhoeaceae
Apocynaceae
Acanthaceae
Annonaceae
Rubiaceae
Papaveraceae
Asparagaceae
Meliaceae
Caesalpiniaceae
Malvaceae
Fabaceae
Polygonaceae
Shrubs
Shrubs
Trees
Herbs
Shrubs
Trees
Shrubs
Shrubs
Trees
Trees
Trees
Trees
Shrubs
Medicinal
Medicinal
Asclepiadaceae
Cannabaceae
Capparaceae
Apocynaceae
Apocynaceae
Caesalpiniaceae
Fabaceae
Caesalpiniaceae
Apocynacae
Poaceae
Poaceae
Cucurbitaceae
Rutaceae
Boraginaceae
Boraginaceae
Capparaceae
Convolvulaceae
Medicinal
Medicinal
Poaceae
Cyperaceae
Papilionaceae
Solanaceae
Caesalpiniaceae
Poaceae
Solanaceae
Verbenaceae
Myrtaceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Moraceae
Malvaceae
Asclepiadoideae
Fabaceae
Meliaceae
Fabaceae
Moringaceae
Moraceae
Musaceae
Shrubs
Herbs
Shrubs
Shrubs
Shrubs
Trees
Shrubs
Shrubs
Herbs
Grasses
Grasses
Herbs
Shrubs
Trees
Trees
Trees
Parasitic
Plant
Grasses
Grasses
Trees
Herbs
Trees
Grasses
Shrubs
Shrubs
Trees
Trees
Trees
Trees
Shrubs
Shrubs
Trees
Trees
Herbs
Trees
Trees
Shrubs
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
Dub
Motha
Shisham
Dhatura
Gulmohar
Dabh
Kala Dhatura
Duranta
Eucalyptus
Barh
Gular
Peepal
Gudhal
Khip
Subabool
Bakain
Lajvanti
Saijan
Shahtut
Kela
Cynodon dactylon
Cyperus scariosus
Dalbergia sissoo
Datura stramonium
Delonix regia
Desmostachya bipinnata
Dhatura metal
Duranta repens
Eucalyptus hybrid
Ficus benghalensis
Ficus glomerata
Ficus religiosa
Hibiscus rosa-sinensis
Leptadenia pyrotechnica
Leucaena leucocephala
Melia azedarach
Mimosa pudica
Moringa oleifera
Morus indica
Musa sapientum
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Page 134
Chapter 4

SN.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
92.
Common
Names
Kaneer
Harsingar
Kali Tulsi
Papeeta
Parkinsonia
Druping Ashok
Popular
Jand
Prosopis
Mesquite or
pahari kikar
Amrud
Anar
Castor
Arand
Kana
Jal or van
Sita ashok
Kharuthi
Makao
Jamun
Imli
Farash
Rohera
Teak
Arjun
Pili Kaneer
Glo
Bhakhra
Asgandha
Beri
Mallah
Botanical Names
Family
Habbit
Nerium odorum
Nyctanthes arbor-tristis
Oscimum basilicum
Papaya coorge
Parkinsonia aculeata
Polyalthia longifolia
Populus sp.
Prosopis cineraria
Prosopis juliflora
Prosopis juliflora
Apocynaceae
Oleaceae
Lamiaceae
Caricaceae
Caesalpiniaceae
Annonaceae
Saliceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Mimosaceae
Trees
Trees
Herbs
Shrubs
Trees
Shrubs
Trees
Trees
Shrubs
Trees
Psidium guajava
Punica granatum
Ricinus communis
Ricinus communis
Saccharum bengalense
Salvadora oleoides
Saraca indica
Sida acuta
Solanum nigrum
Syzygium cumini
Tamarindus indica
Tamarix articulata
Tecomella undulata
Tectona grandis
Terminalia arjuna
Thevetia peruviana
Tinospora cordifolia
Tribulus terrestris
Withania somnifera
Ziziphus mauritiana
Ziziphus nummularia
Myrtaceae
Punicaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Euphorbiaceae
Poaceae
Salvadoraceae
Leguminosae
Malvaceae
Solanaceae
Myrtaceae
Caesalpiniaceae
Tamariscineae
Bignoniaceae
Verbenaceae
Combretaceae
Apocynaceae
Menispermaceae
Zygophyllaceae
Solanaceae
Rhamnaceae
Rhamnaceae
Shrubs
Shrubs
Shrubs
Shrubs
Grasses
Trees
Trees
Herbs
Herbs
Trees
Trees
Trees
Trees
Trees
Trees
Shrubs
Herbs
Herbs
Herbs
Trees
Shrubs
Remarks
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
Saline soil
Medicinal
Medicinal
Medicinal
The ecological features of the study area can be described under following heads:
i)
Agricultural land
The study area falls under agro-climatic zone Trans-Gangetic Plains Region
(Planning Comission). The climate of the region is arid to semi arid (Koppen
Classification) - characterised by dryness and extremes of temperature and scanty
rainfall. It is very hot in summer and very cold during winters. Temperature ranges
from -1 to 48 degree Celsius. Annual rain fall is 373 mm. Topography of the district is
plain and sand dunes. Soils are sandy, sandy loam and clay with pH ranging from 7.5
to 9.00.
Paddy-wheat and cotton-wheat is the main crop rotation followed in the region. The
major crops grown are Wheat, Cotton, Paddy, Guar, Sugarcane, Bajra and Gram.
The other crops grown are oilseeds and pulses. Buffalo is the main milk animal
followed by cow, sheep and goat. Horticultural and vegetable crops are cultivated in
scattered form meant for home consumption. The region is gaining momentum to
produce Kinnow for domestic and international markets. Agro-forestry trees like Jandi
Page 135
Chapter 4

is a part and parcel of farming system since time memorial. District Fatehabad is
having nearly 92 percent of its area under irrigation by both the canal as well as the
tube wells. The crop productivity in the area is given in Table 4.7c.
Table 4.7c : Average Productivity of Crops in the Region
SN.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Kharif Crop (July - Sept)

Paddy
Sugarcane
Rabi Crop (Dec. - April)
Wheat
Jwar
Bajara
Gram
Mustard, Taramira & Toria
Cotton
Productivity (q/ha.)
43.54
76.04
46.46
37.15
23.57.
12.65
14.73
7.63
ii) Plantations around Human Settlements

Near the villages, the vegetation pattern abruptly changes from that in the agricultural
fields. The species commonly found are given in Table 4.7d. The trees commonly
grown are mostly of economic importance. Among the fruit trees, which are common
are Mango, Guava, Ber, Neebu, Banana, Papaya, etc. Among the non-fruit trees the
common ones are Neem, Karanj, etc.
Table 4.7d: List of Common Trees/Shrubs Growing in and Around Human Settlement
SN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Scientific Name
Albezzia lebbeck
Annona squamosa
Azadirchta indica
Bougainvellea spectabilis
Carica papaya
Citrus lemon
Delonix regia
Eucalyptus hybrid
Ficus bengalensis
Ficus religiosa
Mangifera indica
Moringa oleifera
Musa sapientum
Pongamia pinnata
Tamarindus indica
Zyziphus sp.
Embelica officinalis
Psidium guajava
Ricinus communis
Common Name
Siris
Sita Phal
Neem
Bougainvellea
Papita
Nimbu
Gulmohar
Eucalyptus
Bargad
Peepal
Mango
Saijan
Kela
Karanj
Imli
Ber
Aonla / Amloki
Amrud
Ashok
Rendi
iii) Waste land

Wasteland has developed in the area where the soil conditions are poor and under
high biotic pressure. Places where soil conditions are not appropriate to support plant
growth are commonly seen in the area. All such areas are either without any
vegetation or are covered with species like Lantana sp., Calotropis spp, Croton sp.,
Zyziphus sp., Leonotis sp., Xanthium straumarium, etc.
Page 136
Chapter 4

iv) Endangered Plants

The study area did not record the presence of any critically threatened species.
v) Fauna and avifauna
There are no forest stretches in the study area. The common animals and avi-fauna
found in the study area is given Tables 4.7e and 4.7f, respectively.
Table 4.7e: List of Faunal Species and their Conservation Status in Study Area
S
N
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Common Name / Local Name

Mammals
Blackbuck
Nilgai / Blue Bull
Indian Jackal
Jungle Cat
Palm Squirrels
Chinkara or ravine deer
Common Mongoose
Indian Porcupine
Indian hare
Rhesus Macaque / Bandar
Indian Field Mouse
Mice
Common Langur
Common house Rat
Bandar
Common yellow bat
Reptiles
Garden Lizard / Kiria or girgit
Common Skink
Nag
Yellow Rat Snake
Mendhak
Blind snake
Sanda
Russels Viper
Amphibians
Toad
Common toad
Tortoise
Tortoise
Indian burrowing frog
Indian cricket frog
Indian bull frog
Scientific Name
Wild Life Protection

Act Schedule
Antilope cervicapra
Boselaphus tragocamelus
Canis aureus
Felis chaus
Funambulus pennanti
Gazella gazella
Herpestres edwardsii
Hystrix indica
Lepus nigricollis ruficaudatus
Macaca mulatta
Mus booduga
Mus musculus
Presbytis entellus
Rattus rattus
Rhesus macaque
Scotophilus heathi
I
III
II
II
IV
I
II
IV
IV
II
V
V
II
V
II
V
Calotes versicolor
Mabuya macularia
Naja naja
Plyas mucosus
Rana tigrana
Typhlops parrectus
Uromastrix hardwickii
Vipera russelii
II
II
IV
IV
II
II
Bufo bufo
Bufo melanostictus
Geoclemys hamitloni
Kachuga dhongoka
Rana breviceps
Rana limnocharis
Rana tigrina
I
I
IV
IV
IV
Table 4.7f: List of Common Birds and their Conservation Status in the Study Area
SN
1
2
3
5
6
Common Name
Scientific Name
Jungle Myna
Common Mynah
Small blue kingfisher
Cattle Egret
Common crow pheasant
Acridotheres fuscus fuscus

Acridotheres tristris
Alcedo atthis
Bubulcus ibis
Centropus sinensis

Act Schedule
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
Page 137
Chapter 4

SN
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Common Name
Scientific Name
Indian pied kingfisher

Blue Rock Pegion
Indian magpie robin
Blue jay
Jungle Crow
Common Crow
Common quail
Black Drongo
Northern golden backed woodpecker
Lal munia
Koel
Black Partridge
Red Jungle Fowl
Saras
White breasted kingfisher
Stilts
Indian spotted munia
Coppersmith
Northern green barbet
Crested bunting
Indian small green bee-eater
Pariah Kite
Pied Wagtail
Painted Stork
Indian purple sunbird
Indian golden oriole
Tailor Bird
House Sparrow
More / Peafowl
Baya Weaver Bird
Large Indian parakeet
Rose-ringed Parakeet
Red Vent Bulbul
White eared bulbul
Little Brown Dove
Common Green Pigeon
Jungle Babbler
Hoopoe
Lapwing
Ceryle rudis
Columba livia
Copsychus saularis
Coracias benghalensis
Corvus macrorhynchos
Corvus splendens
Coturnix coturnix
Dicrurus adsimilis
Dinopium benghalense
Estrilda amandava
Eudynamis scolopacea
Francolinus francolinus
Gallus gallus
Grus antigone
Halcyon smyrnensis
Himantopus himantopus
Lonchura punctulata
Megalaima haemacephala
Megalaima zeylanica
Melophus lathami
Merops orientalis
Milvus migrans
Motacilla maderaspatensis
Mycteria leucocephala
Nectarinia asiatica
Oriolus oriolus
Orthotomus sutorius
Passer domesticus
Pavo cristatus
Ploceus philiphinus
Psittacula eupatria
Psittacula krameri
Pycnonotus cafer
Pycnonotus leucotis
Streptopelia senganis
Treron phoenicoptera
Turdoides caudatus
Upupa epops
Vanellus spp

Act Schedule
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
V
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
I
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
-
Due to biotic pressure in the region and near the project site, the only animals found
are few rodents, reptiles and birds.
vi)
Water Bodies
Phytoplanktons
So as to have the baseline status of the planktons (phyto and zoo) present in the lotic
(Bhakra Main Canal) water bodies in the study area, plankton density was
determined at the two locations. As there are no industries in the study area and the
human habitation is sparse, the water bodies on physical appearance seem to be
Page 138
Chapter 4

oligo to meso trophic in nutrient status. The planktons present in the water bodies
are given in Table 4.7g.
Phytoplankton groups as observed at are members of basillariophyceae (diatoms),
chlorophyceae, Dinophyceae, myxophyceae and euglenophyceae. About 15 species
of phytoplankton from Bhakra Canal were observed. The average density of
phytoplankton group was 28 organisms / ml. Dominance of members of
Bacillariophyceae members and least representation of euglenophyceae members
indicated the oligotrophic status of the water body. The highest percentage was
Ceratium sp, Ankistrodesmus falcatus and Anabeana sp. and the lowest percentage
was Euglena sp. was observed during study period.
Percentage composition of zooplankton species varied among different species.
Among the zooplankton group, Cyclops (Copepods) and Brachionous sp (Rotifer)
showed highest percentage composition.
Table 4.7g: Plankton Abundance in Bhakra Canal
Plankton
Phytoplankton
Achnanthes sp.
Ankistrodesmus sp
Ceratium sp
Euglena sp.
Melosira sp.
Microcystis sp.
Navicula sp.
Nitzschia sp.
Oscilaltoria sp.
Pediastrum sp.
Pinnularia sp.
Pleurosigma sp.
Scenedesmus sp
Spirulina sp.
Volvox sp.
Phyto-plankton density (nos./ml)
Zooplankton
Arcella sp.
Keratella sp.
Asplancha sp.
Brachonus sp.
Daphnia sp.
Cyclops sp.
Cypris sp.
Zoo-plankton density (nos./ml)
Nos. / ml
% Composition
1
4
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
1
3
28
3.6
14.3
17.9
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
7.1
7.1
3.6
3.6
10.7
3.6
10.7
100
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
10
10
10
10
20
10
30
10
100
Hydrophytes
The hydrphytes growing along the water bodies are Hydrilla verticellata Aponogeton
sp., Potamogeton sp., Vallisneria spirals, and Nymphaea sp., etc.
Page 139
Chapter 4

Fishes
The common fishes found in the area are Labeo rohita, Catla catla, Cirrhina spp,
Wallago attu, etc. The fishes found in the study area are given in Table 4.7h. There
is no organized fishing activity within study area.
.
Table 4.7h: Fishes found in the Study Area
SN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
4.2.7
Common Name
Parri
Katla
Mrigal
Chunni
Bata
Siriha
Rohu
Magur
Singhara
Ghally
Mallee
Dolla
Curd
Scientific Name
Notopterus notopterus
Catla catla
Cirrhina mrigala
Cirrhina reba
Labeo bata
Labeo gonius
Labeo rohita
Clarias batrachus
Mystys seenghala
Ompok bimaculatus
Wallago attu
Channa punctatus
Channa striatus
Location of National Park / Sanctuary within 10km Radius

There is no National Park / Wild Life Sanctuary within 10km radius of the proposed
site (Annexure IVD).
4.3
BASELINE DATA GENERATION/ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS RADIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT
4.3.1
Parameters of Radiological Status
FOR
Presence of radiation in the environment arises from the following sources:
Cosmic sources and from natural radioactivity namely U, Th, 40K and their
daughter products.
Those originated from fall out radio-nuclides (137Cs, 90Sr) atmospheric nuclear
tests conducted in western countries during 1960s.
This study concentrates on the estimation of pre-operational base line levels of

ambient radiation present in 30 km study area environment and also to establish the
pre-operational base line levels of natural and fall out radio-nuclides in air, water, soil
and biota.
In view of the above, the radiological status of the environment may be conveniently
described by two basic kinds of measurements.
a) The first one relates to the prevailing ambient radiation levels at different
locations around the proposed plant site. Ambient radiation level is expressed in
units of Gy/h or Sv/h.
b) The second set relates to the distribution and concentration of radio-nuclides in
different environmental matrices. The concentration of radio-nuclides is specified
with units like Bq/kg, Bq/m3 or Bq/l (i.e. disintegration rate per unit mass or unit
volume of the matrix).
Page 140
Chapter 4

The regulatory limits for radioactive substances are specified not directly in terms of
the measured quantities such as the concentration of radio-nuclides in the
environment or the radiation levels but in terms of the consequent exposure to
radiation. Exposure / dose provide a measure of energy imparted by the radiation
and the resulting biological effects on living things. Given the basic measurements
mentioned above, established procedures can be used to deduce the radiation dose
received by persons. The procedures call for supplementary data such as (a) the
dietary patterns of the population groups living in the surroundings (b) transfer factors
of radioactivity among various elements of the exposure pathways and (c) dose
conversion factors. While data on dietary pattern is site-specific, recommended
standard values are made use of for transfer factors and dose conversion factors.
4.3.2
Regulatory Limits for Radiation Exposure

The release of radio-nuclides into the environment should be restricted in such a
fashion that the consequent radiation exposure to the population meets well
established International criteria and the limits set by the International Commission
on Radiological Protection (ICRP), which are followed the world over. These have
been adopted in the form of International Basic Safety Standards for protection
against ionizing radiation and for the safety of radiation sources by international
organisations like IAEA, FAO, WHO, ILO etc. The Atomic Energy Regulatory Board
(AERB) has evolved its own safety standards in line with the Indian conditions. Dose
limits have been stipulated by AERB for exposure to the public as well as the
occupational workers. These are given in Table 4.8a.
Table 4.8a: AERB Dose Limits
Application
Effective dose
Occupational
20 mSv/year average over
defined periods of five years
Members of Public
1 mSv/year
Equivalent dose in
(a) Eye Lens
150 mSv/year
15 mSv/year
(b) Skin
500 mSv/year
50 mSv/year
(c) Hands and feet
500 mSv/year
--The limits specified are referring to radiation exposures over and above those received from
natural and medical sources.
When several nuclear facilities are located in a single site, the combined releases of
radio-nuclides by all the facilities should be such that the public exposure shall not
exceed the dose limit of 1 mSv in a year. Compliance with the regulatory requirement
is ensured by an apportionment of the dose limit among the different plants. The
apportionment is done by AERB based on technical considerations.
This practice of specifying the regulatory limits for radiation in terms of a single entity
(i.e. dose) is in contrast to the regulation of conventional pollutants where limits are
specified individually for each pollutant and environmental matrix. While the ultimate
regulatory criterion is the radiation dose, its practical implementation calls for
specification of discharge limits for each kind of anticipated radionuclide. This is done
by subdividing the apportioned dose limit among different nuclides and then
converting into corresponding dose (radioactivity) values by appropriate means.
Unlike the dose limits (Table 4.8a), these derived limits are specific to the plant and
the site.
Page 141
Chapter 4

4.3.3
Radiological Survey Around the Proposed Site

The study area for the radiological survey is taken as 30km radius around the
proposed project site, with the proposed Reactor Building (RB) as center.
Following the general practice of the Department of Atomic Energy, Health Physics
Division (HPD), BARC, Mumbai in association with Guru Jambeshwar University of
Science and Technology (GJUST), Hisar generated baseline data related to
radioactivity in different environmental matrices around proposed nuclear power plant
site at Gorakhpur, Fatehabad, Haryana. The data were collected since July 2010,
i.e. prior to the construction phase of the Haryana Atomic Power Pant. Its mandate
during the pre-operational phase is to carryout periodic baseline radiological survey
(up to a radial distance of 30 km from the project site) and to establish the natural
and fall out radioactivity levels and the background radiation levels in the
environment. The survey covers all seasons of the year. In the post-operational
phase, ESL will be set up at NPCIL and the laboratory will continue the monitoring
program as per the sampling schedule devised, throughout the operating life of the
plant.
The pre-operational survey is primarily devoted to the measurements of natural and
fallout radioactivity in air, water and terrestrial environment and the radiation levels in
the environment, and collection of demographic data particularly dietary pattern
among population groups etc.
Selection of Monitoring Stations
For locating the radiological monitoring stations, the evaluation area was considered
as 30 km around the proposed site. The project site is about 1.0 Km radius circle
around each 700 MWe PHWR unit, the survey area were divided into four zones 1, 2,
3 and 4 (1.0 - 5 km, 5 - 10 km, 10 - 15 km, and 15 - 30 km, respectively). The 30 km
radius circle was further divided in to 16 circle-segments / sectors from A to P, taking
the project site as centre. The base map showing different zones and sectors around
the HAPP is given in Fig. 4.5a.
The selected villages in different zones and sectors are given in Table 4.8b.
However, zone 1.0 - 5 km has 5 major villages, whereas in zone 5 -15 km there are
39 villages and in zone 15 - 30 km there are 212 villages. The selected locations for
radiological survey for terrestrial sampling are given in Fig. 4.5b and that for aquatic
sampling is shown in Fig. 4.5c.
Table 4.8b: Sector wise Major Villages in Different Zones
SN Directions Sector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N
NNE
NE
ENE
E
ESE
SE
SSE
S
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Name of Village(s) falling in Zone (Number of Villages)

0-5 km
5-15 km
Jandali kalan, Jandali khurd, Chandrawal, (03)
Mochiwali, chaubara, Bhuna (big town) (03)
Gorakhpur
Baijalpur, (01)
Dahman, Nehla, Kandol (03)
Siwani Bolani Pabra (01)
Kirmara, Kanoh (02)
Sandhol, Nangthala, Shamsuhk (03)
Kuleri, Nandhari (02)
Sabarwas
Agroha ( big village), Mirpur, Chikanwas (03)
Page 142
Chapter 4

10
SSW
J
11
SW
K
12
WSW
L
13
W
M
14
WNW
N
15
NW
O
16
NNW
P
Total No of villages
Name of Village(s) falling in Zone (Number of Villages)

Bhoda Hoshank, Khasa Mahajan, Fransi, Kali rawan (04)
Kumharia
Khara Kheri, Sarangpur, Khairampur (03)
Chindar, Bhodia Kheda, Bhana, (03)
Badopal ( Big village), Dharni, Suli Khera, (03)
Kajalheri
Dhangar (01)
Mohamadpur, Dhani majra (02)
Khajuri, Jhilania (2)
5
39
The terrestrial and aquatic sampling locations for radiological survey are given in
Table 4.8c and Table 4.8d respectively. Different types of samples were collected
from the terrestrial and aquatic environs of the 30km study area covering, canal
water, soil, cereals, pulses and vegetation samples. Table 4.8e gives the number
and types of samples collected from various locations. The levels of various radionuclides of natural (238U, 232Th, 40K) and fallout (137Cs and 90Sr) origin were
determined.
Table 4.8c: Terrestrial Sampling Locations
SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Locations
Kumharia
Sabarwas
Kajalheri
Kirmara
Badopal
Agroha
Kuleri
Nangthala
Landheri
Kanoh
Dhani Majara
Bhuna
Nahla
Sarangpur
Bhana
Fatehabad
Mandi Adampur
Barwal
Hisar
Siswal
Badon/ Bahbalpur
Zones ( km)
1.6
1.6
1.6 -5.0
5.0 10.0
5.0 10.0
5.0 10.0
5.0 10.0
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
15-30
15-30
15-30
15-30
15-30
15-30
Latitude/Longitude
N 29.40484,E 075.61498
N 29.40187,E 075.62905
N 29.44599,E 075.60875
N 29.38327,E 075.69610
N 291640.6",E0753810.6"
N292151.5E0753022.4
N 29.37080,E 075.66758
N 29.21413,E 075.53508
N 29.18228,E 075.39455
-N 2929105,E 07532434
--N 292038.7",E0753220.5"
N 292155.1",E0753021.0"
N293023.8",E0752730.5"
N 291653.2",E0752830.9"
N 29.21444,E 075.53527
N291018.77 E0754407.7
N 292109.5",E0755313.7"
N 29.17244,E 075.48570
Sector
K L
I
N
F
M
I
H
G
H
F
O
B
D
K
L
N
K
F
H
J
G
Table 4.8d: Aquatic Sampling Locations

SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Locations
Kajalheri
Kumharia
Between 1 & 2
Bhoda Hushnak
Kohli & Kalirawan
Khasa Mahajanan
Faransi
Ladvi
Baijalpur
Zones ( km)
2
2
5-10
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
>15
10-15
Latitude/Longitude
N 29.44599,E 075.60875
N 29.40484,E 075.61498
N 29.41760,E 075.59850
N 29.35190 ,E 075.60155
------
Sector
N
L
N-L
T
K-J
J
J
J
C
Page 143
Chapter 4

SN.
10
11
12
13
Locations
Diversion Point of Canal
Converging point of canal
Within 5 km
Within 5 km
Zones ( km)
5
5
<5
<5
Latitude/Longitude
-----
Sector
B
O
O
M
Table 4.8e: Environmental Samples collected in and around Hisar Site

Description
Air samples
Water samples
Dietary Items
Vegetables & Fruits
Cereals & Pulses
Trend Indicators
Soil
Leaf & Grass
Grand Total
Locations
5
28
No. of Samples
5
265
3
1
3
1
14
6
52
14
6
289
Page 144
Chapter 4

W
NN
NN
E
SE
SW
ESE
W
WS
WN
E
EN
N
W
NE
E
SS
SS
W
Fig. 4.5a : Base-map Showing Project Site and Radiological Survey Study Area
Divided in to Different Zones and Sectors.
Page 145
Chapter 4

Terrestrial
Sampling
Points
Fig. 4.5b : Radiological Survey Study Area Showing Terrestrial Sampling Locations
Page 146
Chapter 4

Aquatic
Sampling
Points
N
Fig. 4.5c : Radiological Survey Study Area Showing Aquatic Sampling Locations
Page 147
Chapter 4
4 X 700 MW PHWR GORAKHPUR ATOMIC POWER

PROJECT HARYANA
4.3.3.1 Ambient Radiation Levels

The radiological survey samples were collected as per the practice of Health Physics
Division BARC. These stations are marked in Fig. 4.5b and 4.5c.
Methodology
External gamma dose rate due to natural sources (cosmic rays, U, Th and K-40 deposits in
the earth) is established using appropriate monitoring techniques (e.g. thermo-luminescent
dosimeter (TLD) and high sensitivity background gamma chambers. Radioactivity levels in
the environment are very low and call for special techniques. These have been
standardized over the years by BARC. Sampling and analysis is carried out as per the
Standard procedures of Health Physics Division, BARC. Gamma radiation level was
measured in and around the site using Gamma dose rate tracer, using the instruments
calibrated at Health Physics Division, BARC. The dose rate (Gy) measurements were
carried out using Thermo-luminescent Dosimeter (TLD).
Results
Gamma radiation level was measured in and around the site using Gamma dose rate
tracer (Table 4.8h). The gamma radiation levels ranged between 0.07-0.22 Gy/h. The
measured gamma radiation levels around the project site are normal and comparable with
Kakrapar and Kaiga sites.
The dose rate (Gy) measurements were carried out using TLD. The results during
January-March, 2011 is given in Table 4.8i.
Table 4.8h: Gama radiation levels (Gy/h) in different villages during January to March 2011
SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Village
Kumharia (10)
Kajalheri (10)
Gorakhpur(10)
Siwani (10)
Kirmara (10)
Kuleri (10)
Agroha (10)
Badopal (10)
Talwandi (10)
Juglan (10)
Bahbalpur (10)
Badopal (8)
Bugana (8)
Sulakhani (8)
Dhansu (10)
Hisar (10)
Sector/ Zone
K/L (1.6-5 km)
N (1.6-5.0 km)
C (1.6-5.0 km)
E (1.6-5.0 km)
F( 5-10 km)
H ( 5 -10 km)
I ( 5 10 km)
M (5-10 km)
H (15 30 km)
G (15-30 km)
G (15-30 km)
G (15-30 km)
G (15-30 km)
G (15-30 km)
G (15-30 km)
H (15-30 km)
Latitude/Longitude
Range Gy/h Mean Gy/h
N 29.40484,E 075.61498
0.087-0.17
0.12
N 29.44599,E 075.60875
0.087-0.148
0.12
N 29.45767,E 075.65127
0.078-0.12
0.11
Not measured
0.096-0.13
0.11
N 29.38327,E 075.69610
0.11-0.17
0.14
N 29.37080,E 075.66758
0.10-0.18
0.14
N292151.5E0753022.4
0.11-0.18
0.14
N 291640.6",E0753810.6"
0.087-0.17
0.13
Not measured
0.07-0.16
0.12
Not measured
0.05-0.13
0.09
N 29.16534,E 075.48155
0.061-0.15
0.11
N 291640.6",E0753810.6"
0.061-0.15
0.12
Not measured
0.087-0.11
0.10
Not measured
0.078-0.14
0.10
Not measured
0.07-0.12
0.10
N291018.77 E0754407.7
0.12-0.22
0.16
Page 148
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Table 4.8i: Radiation Dose Rate Measurements using TLD January to March 2011
Location
Control
Hisar
Chikanwas
Asrawan
Fransi
Badopal
Kajalheri
Kumharia
Bhoda Hosank
Kuleri
Sabarwas
Gorakhpur
Nehla
Kirmara
Nangthala
Landheri
Fatehabad
Ratla
Bhutan Kalan
Chandrawal
Jandli Kalan
Mochiwali
Barawal
Adampur
Bhattu Kalan
Dhand
Bahana
Khajuri
Agroha
Thaska
Kanoh
Latitude/Longitude
---N291018.77 E0754407.7
---N 291640.6",E0753810.6"
N 29.44599,E 075.60875
N 29.40484,E 075.61498
N 29.35190 ,E 075.60155
N 29.37080,E 075.66758
N 29.40187,E 075.62905
N 29.45767,E 075.65127
-N 29.38327,E 075.69610
N 29.21413,E 075.53508
N 29.18228,E 075.39455
N293113.8",E0752616.8"
-----N 29.21444,E 075.53527
N 291653.2",E0752830.9"
--N 292155.1",E0753021.0"
-N292151.5E0753022.4
---
Days
Dose Dose Rate Dose Dose Rate
Exposed Received (Gy/90 Received (Gy/90
(Gy) days)
(Gy) days)
Indoor
Outdoor
97
424
---45714
93
670
307
69246
31413
93
463
428
47850
44226
93
475
275
49146
28518
93
305
216
3152.0
22422
93
461
353
47728
36416
93
438
383
45357
39532
93
500
51626
3298.0 318
93
414
287
42725
29715
92
545
512
55722
52324
92
353
4092.0 400
36140
92
446
45535
3016.0 295
92
513
429
52435
43928
92
446
45634
3171.0 310
92
436
268
4466.0
27425
92
319
4077.0 398
32620
91
560
422
56614
42712
91
421
454
42620
45964
91
532
299
53824
30216
91
432
284
43741
28729
91
448
45321
2497.0 247
91
4182.0 414
2674.0 264
92
520
6094.0 596
53251
90
510
51018
2746.0 271
90
535
513
43560
51929
90
340
387
43055
39275
90
517
299
51741
30226
90
397
330
39747
33413
90
431
362
43152
36645
89
438
359
43324
35521
89
496
349
49145
34572
4.3.3.2 Estimation of Pre-operational Base Line Levels of Natural and Fallout Radio-nuclides
in Environmental Samples
For base line survey, to estimate the levels of various radio-nuclides of natural (238U, 232Th,
40
K) and fallout (137Cs and 90Sr) origin, different types of environmental samples were
collected from the terrestrial and aquatic environs of the site up to a radial distance of
30km. The details of terrestrial and aquatic sampling locations are given in Table 4.8d and
4.8e, respectively. Figure 4.5b and 4.5c show the terrestrial and aquatic sampling
locations respectively. Canal water, soil, cereals, pulses and vegetation samples were
Page 149
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
collected around the site. Table 4.8f gives the number and types of samples collected from
various locations.
Methodology
The collected soil and biological samples were processed at site and were sent to Health
Physics Division, BARC for gamma spectrometry and radiochemical analysis. Gross alpha
and gross beta measurements were carried out at site.
Soil samples were dried and sieved and the fraction containing less than 180 m size were
packed in a standard geometry for gamma spectrometry and stored for one month to attain
secular equilibrium1, before analysis.
Biological samples were oven dried, powdered and packed in standard geometry(1).
Biological samples were ashed as per the standard procedure1 for the estimation 90Sr.
The gamma spectrometric analysis1 of processed soil and biological samples and the
analysis of levels of 238U, 232Th, 40K and 228Ra, were carried out at Health Physics Division,
BARC, Mumbai. The samples were counted by gamma spectrometry with HPGe detector
for the estimation of 238U, 232Th, 226Ra and 40K. 137Cs was estimated gamma spectrometrically using HPGe detector (50% RE) system.
90
Sr concentrations in soil and vegetation samples were estimated using radiochemical

separation followed by beta counting as per the prescribed standard procedure given in
Analytical Procedure Manual, 1992(1).
Analysis for gross alpha and gross beta levels in air and water samples were carried out by
radiochemical separation and gross beta counting / gross alpha counting.
Results
The results of radioactivity levels in air, water, soil and vegetation is given in Table 4.8j, k,
l, m and n.
Air samples
A total of five (5) air samples were collected from the study area of the proposed project
site and were analysed for gross alpha and beta activities. Table 4.8j presents the gross
activities (alpha, beta) in air samples. The gross beta activity ranged between BDL (<0.007
Bq.m-3) to 0.017 Bq.m-3 and gross alpha ranged from 0.0002 to 0.003 Bq.m-3.
Table 4.8j: Levels of Gross Alpha and Gross Beta in Air Samples
SN.
Location
1
2
Badopal
Bhana
Latitude/longitude
N292458.3 E0753300.4
N292211.8 E0752959.0
Gross Beta
Activity(Bq/m3)
BDL
BDL
Gross Alpha
Activity, (Bq/m3)
0.0003 0.00009
0.0030 0.0004
1 Analytical Procedure Manual, Health Physics Division, BARC/HPD/1992/002, Bhabha Atomic Research
Centre, Mumbai, India, 1992.
Page 150
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
SN.
Location
Latitude/longitude
Gross Beta
Activity(Bq/m3)
3
Sarangpur N292054.1 E0753146.6
0.0170.005
4
Hisar
N291018.77 E0754407.7
BDL
5
Agroha
N292151.5 E0753022.4
0.0110.005
3
Minimum Detection Limit (MDL) for Gross Beta = = 0.01 Bq/m
3
MDL for Gross Alpha =0.0002 Bq/m
Gross Alpha
Activity, (Bq/m3)
0.0002 0.00009
0.0006 0.0001
0.0005 0.0001
Radioactivity levels in water samples

A total of fifteen (15) water samples were collected from the study area of the proposed
project site and were analysed for gross alpha and beta activities. The activity levels are
reported in Table 4.8k. Gross alpha activity in water ranged from 6.7 mBq.l-1 to 281.3
mBq.l-1. The gross beta activity ranged from MDL (<225 mBq.l-1) to 332.6 mBq.l-1. The
gross alpha activities observed in water samples are higher than those observed in other
power station sites. This can be attributed to the comparatively higher concentrations of
Uranium in ground water.
Table 4.8k: Levels of Gross Alpha and Gross Beta in Water Samples
SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Location
Distance Sector
(km)
Latitude / Longitude
Kajalheri (8)
1.0-5.0
N
N 29.44599,E 075.60875
Kumharia(25)
1.0
K-L
N 29.40484,E 075.61498
Sabarwas(5)
1.0
I
N 29.40187,E 075.62905
Gorakhpur(13)
1.0-5.0
C
N 29.45767,E 075.65127
Between 1 & 2(6)
5-10
N-L
N 29.41760,E 075.59850
Siswal (4)
15-30
J
Bhoda Hushnak (8) 10-15
T
N 29.35190 ,E 075.60155
Adampur(5)
15-30
K
-Bhuna(2)
10-15
B
-Sarangpur(5)
10-15
K
N292054.1 E0753146.6
Jagan(3)
-Badopal(6)
5-10
M
-Muhamadpur(4)
N 2927284,E 07533454
Dhani Majra(5)
10-15
O
N 2929105,E 07532434
Fatehabad(10)
15-30
N
-Prescribed Limit for packaged drinking water by BIS (Ref)
Detection Limit for Gross Alpha in water
Detection Limit for Gross Beta in water
Gross Alpha Gross Beta

-1
-1
mBq.l
mBq.l
Range
Range
23.4-48.8
BDL
10.3-133.0 BDL -288.98
21.6-37.0
BDL
7.3 -58.8
BDL-271.4
16.8-190
-6.7 -29.8
BDL-306
10.1-94.8
BDL
9.9 -96.8
BDL
11.2-11.9
BDL
11.4 -40.0
BDL
10.0 -281.3
BDL
7.4 -48.2
BDL-278.8
24.9 32.2
BDL
21.4 -117.7
BDL-332.6
14.7-163.5
BDL
100
1000
-1
-5.6 mBq.l
- 225 mBq.l-1
Radioactivity levels in soil

A total of 14 soil samples were collected from the study area of the proposed project site
for assessing the baseline radio-activity level in soil. Table 4.8l presents the concentrations
of 226Ra, 238U and 40K in soil samples. The 226Ra activity in soil samples ranged from 9.6 to
70.9 Bq.kg-1dry wt. 238U activity varied from 11.5 to 70.8 Bq.kg-1dry dry wt. It can be seen
that the activities 232Th activity varied from 20.2 to 118.7 Bq.kg-1dry dry wt. The observed
concentrations of 226Ra and 238U in soil collected from the present study area are found to
be higher than those observed in other power station sites of India. 40K concentrations in
soil varied from 249.6 to 1353 Bq.kg-1dry wt. The observed values are comparable with
those observed in other power station sites.
Page 151
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Table 4.8m shows the 137Cs and 90Sr concentrations in soil samples from the study area of
the proposed project. The levels of 137Cs and 90Sr are comparable to the levels reported
elsewhere(2).
Table 4.8l : Natural Radioactivity Content in Soil Samples
Location
Agroha
Gorakhpur
Kirmara
Kumharia
Kuleri
Kirmara
Kuleri
Agroha
Siswal -1
Siswal -2
Badon
Kirmara
Kuleri
Bhana
Distance
(km)
5-10
1.6-5
5-10
1.6
5-10
5-10
5-10
5 -10
15-30
15-30
15-30
5-10
5 -10
5-10
Sector
226
Ra
238
232
Th
(Bq.kg dry)
26.61.5
41.7 1.5
18.41.1
32.61.1
11.50.9
20.20.9
15.81.0
30.71.0
45.12.0
83.82.1
14.90.9
26.10.9
49.33.6
97.53.6
61.55.0
103.75.1
50.03.8
89.33.4
49.53.3
83.03.2
70.816.2 118.713.8
53.73.5
91.73.6
49.33.6
97.53.6
27.12.4
90.72.4
40
-1
I
C
F
L
H
F
H
I
J
J
G
F
H
L
21.41.1
17.70.8
9.60.6
13.80.7
42.41.5
12.50.7
56.32.8
59.94.1
50.52.7
53.92.6
70.92.4
51.82.7
56.32.9
28.71.6
486.4 3.7
339.82.6
249.62.3
273.62.2
543.94.1
304.82.3
955.98.3
109112
771.87.5
798.27.4
1353 35
832.58.0
955.98.3
586.812.4
Table 4.8m: Concentrations of 137Cs and 90Sr in Soil samples

Location
Kumharia
Gorakhpur
Agroha
Kirmara
Kirmara
Kuleri
Bhuna (radish)
Kuleri
Kirmara
Kuleri
Agroha
Siswal (guave)
Siswal (amla)
Badon (guave)
Distance (km)
1.6
1.6-5
5-10
5-10
5-10
5 -10
5-10
5-10
5-10
5-10
5 -10
15-30
15-30
15-30
Activity levels at
Kaiga(3)
(4)
Punjab
Sector 137Cs (Bq.kg-1dry) 90Sr (Bq.kg-1dry)

L
<1.3
0.60.07
C
<1.3
0.80.08
I
<1.0
<1.3
F
<1.0
NA
F
<1.0
<1.3
H
<1.0
NA
L
NA
2.40.16
H
<1.0
<1.3
F
<1.0
<1.3
H
<1.0
NA
I
NA
2.50.4
J
NA
2.50.4
J
NA
4.90.3
G
NA
3.10.2
other locations of the country
BDL to 65.4
1.28-6.25
137
3 Karunakara N, Somashekarappa HM, Narayana Y, Avadhani DN, Mahesh HM, Siddappa K Cs
concentration in the environment of Kaiga of south west coast of India, Health Physics 2001 Aug; 81(2):14855.
Page 152
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Radioactivity levels (137Cs, 90Sr and 40K) in biological samples

Radioactivity levels in a number of food and related matrices are being monitored regularly.
Two radio-nuclides that are considered important in this context are 137Cs and 90Sr. A total
of ten (10) biota (biological) samples were collected from the study area of the proposed
project site. Table 4.8n presents the results of analysis of biological samples, covering
samples of grass, cereals, leaves, fruits, etc collected from the study area. The activity
levels of 137Cs and 90Sr are comparable to the levels reported elsewhere(5).
Table 4.8n: Levels of 137Cs, 90Sr and 40K in Biological Samples
SN
Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Kumharia
Kajalheri
Kuleri
Agroha
Kirmara
Bhana
Siswal
Siswal
Badon
Badon
4.4
Distance
km
1.6
1.6-5.0
5-10
5-10
5-10
5-10
15-30
15-30
15-30
15-30
Sector
L
N
H
I
F
L
J
J
G
G
Biota
Samples
Grass
Bajra grain
Grass
Grass
Grass
Radish leaves
Amla fruit
Guava fruit
Guava leaves
Guava fruit
Cs-137
-1
(Bq.kg dry)
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
<0.17
Sr-90
-1
(Bq.kg dry)
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
<1.0
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
K-40
-1
(Bq.kg dry)
3.380.027
0.160.003
2.620.02
1.380.01
2.270.02
1.9 0.01
0.460.008
0.470.007
0.420.007
0.760.01
TRAFFIC DENSITY
In order to assess the impact of future traffic load (due to the proposed plant) on the
existing traffic infrastructure of proposed project site, the existing / baseline traffic density
on NH 10 and at road inlet locations of proposed site was studied. The existing traffic
density for different types of vehicles was counted at two locations during the study on a
particular day for 24 hours. The monitoring locations are as follows:
On National Highway No. 10 (at Badapol) Hisar to Fatehabad

On road leading to proposed project site joining NH 10 at Badapol.
Tables 4.9a1 and 4.9a2 indicate the traffic density on NH 10 during weekends and
weekdays, respectively. There is not much difference in the traffic density between
weekends and week days. On weekends the traffic in all three categories is slightly more
than that on the weekdays. There to be conservative, all further analysis has been done on
the basis of traffic density on weekends. On weekends, the traffic density is highest for light
motor vehicles (5147/d), followed by heavy motor vehicles (1841/d), two wheelers (1930/d)
and there were no three wheelers. Total traffic density at this location is 14208.5 PCU per
day.
4 Ajaykumar et al. Distribution, enrichment and principal component analysis for possible sources of
naturally occurring and anthropogenic radionuclides in the agricultural soil of Punjab state, India. Radiation
Protection Dosimetry, 2011, pp. 1-11.
Page 153
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Table 4.9a1: Traffic Density on NH 10 Hisar Fatehabad on Weekends

Time (Hrs.)
Traffic Volume (Vehicles Per Hour) w.r.t Hisar
11.06. 2011
Heavy Motor
Light Motor
Two
Total
Total Vehicles
(Saturday)
Vehicles (HMV)
Vehicles (LMV)
Wheelers
(PCU)
322.5
24.00 - 00.59
66
82
3
151
380.5
01.00 - 01.59
90
72
5
167
270
02.00 - 02.59
56
67
3
126
702.5
03.00 - 03.59
171
126
1
298
423.5
04.00 - 04.59
86
109
4
199
314
05.00 - 05.59
48
109
13
170
289.5
06.00 - 06.59
47
80
57
184
592.5
07.00 - 07.59
79
187
150
416
626.5
08.00 - 08.59
72
230
131
433
834.5
09.00 - 09.59
80
340
169
589
760.5
10.00 - 10.59
72
312
153
537
728.5
11.00 - 11.59
72
302
119
493
727.5
12.00 - 12.59
68
309
120
497
764.5
13.00 - 13.59
102
272
101
475
806
14.00 - 14.59
101
307
85
493
776.5
15.00 - 15.59
92
299
104
495
837.5
16.00 - 16.59
82
356
115
553
864.5
17.00 - 17.59
76
371
160
607
902
18.00 - 18.59
84
378
166
628
831.5
19.00 - 19.59
95
312
157
564
479.5
20.00 - 20.59
47
204
65
316
388.5
21.00 - 21.59
61
128
27
216
306.5
22.00 - 22.59
48
102
19
169
279
23.00 - 23.59
46
93
3
142
Total Per Day
1841
5147
1930
8918
14208.5
Passenger Car Unit (PCU) : 3 for HMV, 1.5 for LMV; 0.5 for Two Wheelers
Table 4.9a2: Traffic Density on NH 10 Hisar Fatehabad on Weekdays

Time (Hrs.)
15.06. 2011
(Wednesday)
24.00 - 00.59
01.00 - 01.59
02.00 - 02.59
03.00 - 03.59
04.00 - 04.59
05.00 - 05.59
06.00 - 06.59
07.00 - 07.59
08.00 - 08.59
09.00 - 09.59
10.00 - 10.59
11.00 - 11.59
12.00 - 12.59
13.00 - 13.59
Heavy Motor
Vehicles (HMV)
65
85
52
102
80
52
41
85
68
84
76
68
73
98

Light Motor
Three
Two
Total Vehicles
Vehicles (LMV)
Wheelers Wheelers (PCU)
311.5
77
2
144
358
68
2
155
251
63
1
116
481.5
117
0
219
398.5
105
2
187
313
102
8
162
264.5
76
55
172
600
180
150
415
600
219
135
422
814
323
155
562
744.5
296
145
517
699
285
135
488
736.5
303
126
502
728.5
258
95
451
Page 154
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Time (Hrs.)
15.06. 2011
Heavy Motor
Light Motor
Three
Two
Total Vehicles
(Wednesday)
Vehicles (HMV)
Vehicles (LMV)
Wheelers Wheelers (PCU)
798.5
14.00 - 14.59
105
292
91
488
740.5
15.00 - 15.59
88
284
101
473
814.5
16.00 - 16.59
86
332
117
535
797.5
17.00 - 17.59
70
342
149
561
872
18.00 - 18.59
80
369
157
606
845
19.00 - 19.59
105
296
172
573
480
20.00 - 20.59
53
194
60
307
360.5
21.00 - 21.59
55
122
25
202
336.5
22.00 - 22.59
60
97
22
179
290
23.00 - 23.59
52
88
4
144
Total Per Day
1783
4888
1909
8580
13635.5
Tables 4.9b1 and 4.9b2 indicate the traffic density on road leading to project site from NH
10 on weekend and weekdays, respectively. There is not much difference in the traffic
density between weekends and week days. On weekends the traffic in all three categories
is slightly more than that on the weekdays. There to be conservative, all further analysis
has been done on the basis of traffic density on weekends. On weekends, the traffic
density is highest for two wheelers (452/d), followed by light motor vehicles (341/d) and
heavy vehicles (11/d). Total traffic density at this location is 766 per day. This road is
mostly used for the village transport from NH10.
Table 4.9b1: Traffic Density on Road leading to project site from NH 10 on Weekends
Time (Hrs.)
11.06. 2011
(Saturday)
24.00 - 00.59
01.00 - 01.59
02.00 - 02.59
03.00 - 03.59
04.00 - 04.59
05.00 - 05.59
06.00 - 06.59
07.00 - 07.59
08.00 - 08.59
09.00 - 09.59
10.00 - 10.59
11.00 - 11.59
12.00 - 12.59
13.00 - 13.59
14.00 - 14.59
15.00 - 15.59
16.00 - 16.59
17.00 - 17.59
18.00 - 18.59

Heavy
Motor Light
Motor Three
Two
Total Vehicles
Vehicles (HMV)
Vehicles (LMV)
Wheelers Wheelers
(PCU)
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
4
3
1
0
1
5
3
5
21
26
41
26
22
15
8
18
18
14
11
0
0
1
0
3
4
18
14
37
37
35
21
36
28
21
22
21
20
36
4
3
2
0
4
9
21
19
58
63
76
47
58
43
29
40
39
34
47
6
4.5
2
0
3
15.5
13.5
17.5
53
63.5
82
49.5
51
36.5
22.5
44
37.5
34
34.5
Page 155
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Time (Hrs.)
11.06. 2011
(Saturday)

Heavy
Motor Light
Motor Three
Two
Total Vehicles
Vehicles (HMV)
Vehicles (LMV)
Wheelers Wheelers
(PCU)
19.00 - 19.59
0
45
76
121
20.00 - 20.59
0
16
13
29
21.00 - 21.59
0
7
3
10
22.00 - 22.59
1
1
5
6
23.00 - 23.59
0
3
1
4
Total Per Day
11
314
452
766
105.5
30.5
12
7
5
730
Table 4.9b2: Traffic Density on Road leading to project site from NH 10 on Weekdays
Time (Hrs.)
15.06. 2011
(Wednesday)

Heavy Motor Light Motor Three
Two
Total
Vehicles
Vehicles
Wheelers Wheelers
Vehicles
(HMV)
(LMV)
(PCU)
1.5
24.00 - 00.59
0
1
0
1
01.00 - 01.59
0
2
0
2
3
0
02.00 - 02.59
0
0
0
0
0
03.00 - 03.59
0
0
0
0
04.00 - 04.59
0
2
3
5
4.5
3
05.00 - 05.59
0
1
3
4
16.5
06.00 - 06.59
1
5
12
18
07.00 - 07.59
0
6
15
21
16.5
44
08.00 - 08.59
1
19
25
45
58
09.00 - 09.59
1
25
35
61
10.00 - 10.59
0
43
40
83
84.5
59
11.00 - 11.59
1
27
31
59
51.5
12.00 - 12.59
1
19
40
60
13.00 - 13.59
0
17
30
47
40.5
24
14.00 - 14.59
0
7
27
34
36
15.00 - 15.59
1
16
18
35
16.00 - 16.59
0
19
23
42
40
34
17.00 - 17.59
2
15
11
28
36
18.00 - 18.59
0
13
33
46
19.00 - 19.59
0
48
65
113
104.5
32
20.00 - 20.59
0
17
13
30
11.5
21.00 - 21.59
0
7
2
9
22.00 - 22.59
2
0
4
6
8
0.5
23.00 - 23.59
0
0
1
1
Total Per Day
709
10
309
431
750
Page 156
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
4.5
GEOLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY
4.5.1
Introduction
The study area is located at the intersection of Northern Latitude 290 26 30 N and east
Longitude 750 37 56 E and can be located in the Survey of India Topo-sheet No. H43P10
and H43P11. The area falls under the seismic Zone-III in the Seismic Zoning Map of India
(IS:1893, 2002) The maximum Modified Mercalli (MM) intensity of seismic shaking
expected in the zone is VII, termed here as Moderate Damage Risk Zone.
The climate of the region can be classified into semi-arid and hot which is mainly dry
with very hot summer and cold winter except during monsoon season when moist air of
oceanic origin penetrates into the region. The hot weather season starts from mid
March to last week of the June followed by the southwest monsoon which lasts till
September. The transition period from September to November forms the postmonsoon season. The winter season starts in December and remains up to February.
Rainfall during as observed by IMD (Source: IMD website) during last five years from
2006 to 2011 in the districts falling in the study area is given in Table 4.10a.
The normal annual rainfall of Fatehabad district is 373 mm which falls over the area in
22 rainy days. The south west monsoon sets in from last week of June and withdraws
in end of September, contributes about 80% of annual rainfall. July and August are the
wettest months. Rest 20% rainfall is received during non-monsoon period in the wake
of western disturbances and thunder storms. Generally rainfall in the district increases
from southwest to northeast.
Normal Annual Rainfall
: 373 mm
Normal monsoon Rainfall
: 297 mm
Mean Maximum Temperature
: 41.6C(May June)
Mean Minimum Temperature
: 5.5 C(January)
Normal Rainy days
: 22
Annual Mean Wind Speed
: 1.25m/s
Maximum Wind Speed
: 1.95m/s
Table 4.10a: Rainfall (IMD data) During 2006-2011 in Districts Falling in the Study Area
Year
Jan
Feb
Mar
April
2006
0
2007
2008
0
2009
4.3
2010
0
Average 1.07
0
1.5
5
14
5.12
48.3
0.1
2.3
0
12.7
0
15.5
0
0
3.88
0
89.5
20.1
52.7
1.2
5.4
2006
2007
0.4
0
Rainfall in mm
May June July Aug
District : Fatehabad
45.8 54.5 75.3 21.7
76.6 50.3
26
25
168.8 32.7 169.7
0
3.9
60.2 11.3
0
0
133 68.7
17.7 60.76 70.3 59.48
District : Hisar
45.7 32.6 74.8 11.4
52.1
124
45.6 82.1
Sept Oct Nov Dec Total

77.3
0
0
27.7
0
0.8
58.3 0.5 2.7
55.3
0
106.7 0
0
65.06 0.1 0.88
53.4
39.4
0
0
0
0.7
8
3
322.9
185.4
474.8
142.3
330.4
291.16
7.3
4.3
246.9
495.8
0
4
0
Page 157
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Year
Jan
2008
3.5
2009
7.8
2010
8
Average 3.94
4.5.2
Feb
2.4
8
3
20.6
Mar
0
3.8
2.4
15.8
April
11.9
12.8
0.4
6.34
Rainfall in mm
May June July
50.4 103.7 83.7
20.1 20.4 51.3
0.6
35.9 147.4
33.8 63.32 80.56
Aug
115.6
11.5
86.6
61.44
Sept Oct Nov Dec Total

63.1 3.3 8.3 0.8 446.7
125.3 0
0
0.2 261.2
81.8
0
0 14.2 380.3
72.6 0.66 1.8 5.36 366.18
Physiography
The study area is located in the Indo-gangetic alluvial Plains. The area is an alluvial plain of
indo-gangetic basin. No perennial river flows through the district, however a seasonal river
i.e Ghaggar is flowing through Ratia and Jakhal. Bhakra and western Yamuna are two
main canals that irrigate most of the part of area.
The area is by and large flat and plain flat terrain is interrupted by the randomly located
sand dunes along the Ghaggar River, which are outside the study area. The regional
gradient of the area is from north to south west with an average gradient of 0.27m/km.
The area surrounding the proposed site is flat terrain with average elevation of about 211m.
The physio-graphy of the study area is shown in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/02. The soil
of the region is sandy loam to loamy sands
.
4.5.3 Drainage
About 80% of the study area falls in Fatehabad district and the rest in Hisar district. The
two districts are alluvial plain of Indo-Gangetic basin with almost flat terrain interrupted by
randomly located sand dunes along the Ghaggar River. There is only a seasonal river
(Ghaggar), and no perennial river, flowing through the two districts. Bhakra and Western
Yamuna are two main canals which irrigate most part of these districts.
The study area being a flat terrain is conspicuous by absence of any well defined natural
drainage system. As per Haryana Space Application Centre (HARSAC, Hisar), there are no
natural drainage channels passing through project and township areas. At the project site,
general slope is away from canal to south direction. The drainage is of inland type and
the excess rainwater, accumulates in natural /artificial depressions. However, out of
study area in the northern part of the district, the Ghaggar River drains the area. The
river course falling in the area is very narrow and often causes floods when heavy
rainfall occurs in the catchment area.
4.5.4
Geological Features
The site area lies on the western part of Indo-gangetic alluvial plain on the Punjab side,
adjoining the Rajasthan shelf, separated underneath the alluvium, by the NW-SE trending
Lahore-Saharsa Ridge. The geological formations met within the region are Indo-Gangetic
alluvium consisting of Newer and older alluvium with a thin blanket of aeolian deposits. The
age of these formations range from upper-Pleistocene to Recent. Though the formations
were laid down from upper-Pleistocene to Recent age, they are conformable with each
other. Exploratory drilling in the area indicates that these Quaternary unconsolidated
Page 158
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
sediments are underlain by hard rock formations of Achaean age comprising of Granites,
schists and gneisses. Bed rock is shallow in south western part of the district and thickness
of alluvium increases gradually towards northeast. The maximum thickness of alluvium so
far recorded in the boreholes drilled in Fatehabad district is 365.7m at Jhalnia (2903100
and 7503430), about 10km north of the project site.
The project site is located on alluvial soil made up of both older and newer alluvium with a
thickness estimated to be of the order of about 300m, below which hard rock formation of
the Lahore-Sahara Ridge is reported to occur.
Data from bore holes (up to 60 m depth) at the project site indicates that the substrata
consist of alternate layers of sandy silt/silty sand and silty clay/sandy clay (each layer being
of approx. 4m thickness) up to the entire depth of the bore holes. The strata at the depth of
the RB foundation level (17m) is silty clay in nature. N value at 17m depth is 40 and the N
value increases progressively to 609 at 58 m depth. While the sub-surface conditions at
this site are different from that at Narora, it may be possible to adopt at this site, foundation
of the type adopted at NAPP, with modifications as required by detailed studies, in view of
the reduced seismicity at the site.
4.5.5
Hydrogeology
As per bore hole data at site, the water table is 3 m below ground level in the month of July
(Source: site selection committee report). It is likely that the water table may rise to a higher
level during rainy seasons. Ground water movement is reported to be both West and WSW, nearly parallel to the canal flow. Hydraulic gradient is reported to be around 50-70
cms/km which is quite low, indicating poor transitivity of the sub-surface. This would be due
to the predominance of clay layers in the substrata. The ground water table as monitored in
the study area during summer season is given in Table 4.10b.
Table 4.10b: Ground Water Table of Well Investigated in the Study Area
Stn.
No.
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H 10
H 11
H 12
H 13
H14
H15
H16
Name
of
Village
Samani
Kirmara
Kirmara
Kanoh
Nehla
Nehla
Dahman
Baijalpur
Jandli kalan
Jandli Khurd
Jandli kalan
Badopal
Kumahria
Gorakhpur
Chaubara
Mochiwali
Distance (km) / Direction

w.r.t. Project Site
5.5, SE
9.0, SE
9.0, SE
14.5, ESE
9.5, E
9.5. E
9.0, E
8.5, NE
6.0 N
7.5 NNE
6.0 N
8.0 WSW
4.25, SSW
3.5, E
5.5, NE
6.5 NE
Water Table w.r.t

Ground Level (m)
4.3
12.7
9.6
10.8
7.6
6.5
3.8
7.6
7.3
7.4
5.5
4.6
3.2
3.0
3.4
3.7
Reduced
level (m)
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
211
Water
Table
w.r.t M.S.L (m)
206.7
198.3
201.4
200.2
203.4
204.5
207.2
203.4
203.7
203.6
205.5
206.4
207.8
208.0
207.6
207.3
Page 159
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Stn.
No.
H17
H18
H19
Name
of
Village
Chandrawal
Bhuthan kalan
Dhangar
Distance (km) / Direction

w.r.t. Project Site
9.5, NE
12, NNW
10.5, WNW
Water Table w.r.t

Ground Level (m)
8.1
21.3
13.1
Reduced
level (m)
211
211
211
Water
Table
w.r.t M.S.L (m)
202.9
189.7
197.9
The depth of ground water level in the study area in Fatehabad District as observed by
Central Ground Water Board (CGWB) during pre-monsoon and post monsoon season is
given in Figures 4.6a and 4.6b. The observed water level (Table 4.10b) during summer
season in the study area during the present study matches with the ground water table
values of CGWB. In general it can be observed that the ground water table with the study
area is between 3 to 20m.
Page 160
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
SI
Figure 4.6a: Depth of Ground Water Table Pre-Monsoon in the Study Area (CGWB, 2008)
Page 161
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Figure 4.6b: Depth of Ground Water Table Post-Monsoon in the Study Area (CGWB, 2008)
4.5.6
Seismo-tectonics
Page 162
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
The site area lies in Seismic Zone III in the Seismic Zoning Map of India (IS:1893, 2002).
The site is situated on the ridge between the Bouguer gravity anomaly contours of -30 and
-40 m Gal, on a contour interval of -10m Gal. The highest value in the site area is greater
than - 20 m Gal. The important tectonic features around this site within a radius of 300 km
are as follows:
The important tectonic features to the north of alluvial plains in the Himalayan region are,
(a) Frontal Himalayan Thrust (FHT), (b) Main Boundary Thrust (MBT), and (c) Main Central
Thrust (MCT) at distances of about 190, 215 and 295 km respectively to the north-east of
the site. MBF and MCT run all along the 2400 km length of the Himalayas and are related
to Himalayan orogeny.
A NW-SE striking Sargoda-Lahore-Delhi ridge underlies the alluvium. In the Seismotectonic Atlas (GSI, 2000) the boundary of this ridge is demarcated for the portion northwest of Ferozpur but not to its south-east falling in Punjab-Haryana-Delhi Area. Some of
the features in the region are detailed below:
i.
Some transverse faults or tear faults have been identified along the northern fringe of
Indo-gangetic plain. Important among them are the Ropar Fault about 180 km to the
NNE and Ghaggar Fault about 170 km to the NE. Yamuna tear fault/Paonta fault is
about 210 km, ENE of the site. These tear faults generally displaces the HFT, MBT and
the Recent Alluvium and hence are reported to be younger and active during postPleistocene time.
ii. In the Seismo-tectonic Atlas (GSI, 2000) a lineament is shown to extend from Ropar
fault into the alluvial plain in NE-SW direction for about 260 km and it lies 80 km NW of
the site. The lineament passes over the buried Sargoda-Lahore-Delhi Ridge.
iii. The most significant subsurface tectonic feature to the SE of the site is the NE-SW
treading Delhi-Hardwar Ridge bound by parallel faults on either side. The western fault
and the eastern fault are at distances of about 95 km and 140 km from the site
respectively. These are not shown on Seismotectonic Atlas (GSI, 2000). However, one
subsurface fault trending NE-SW named as Mahendragarh-Dehradun fault running over
295 km is shown in the Atlas. It lies at a distance of 120 km from the site and is
obliquely disposed between the above said parallel faults.
iv. To the east of the subsurface Hardwar Ridge, the Sohna-Delhi Fault is associated with
a hot spring at a distance of 190 km from the site. Further east at a distance of about
255 km lies the ENE-WSW to EW treading Moradabad Fault beneath the alluvium in
the plains of Uttar Pradesh.
v. A minor lineament with MNE-SSW trend and 220 km length passes close to the site at
a distance of 25 km.
vi. As per the Seismo-tectonic Atlas (GSI, 2000) no significant tectonic feature is seen to
the west of the site within 300 km radius except those in the southwestern side of which
Page 163
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Sardar Shahar fault that strikes NNE-WSW with a length of 270 km at a distance of 120
km is note worthy. Raisingh Nagar lineament, Tonk lineament, etc. are farther away
from site.
vii. No capable fault exists within 5 km .The site is engineer-able from this consideration.
4.6
LANDUSE PATTERN
Land-use pattern in the study area as shown in the satellite imagery (LISS III, March 2011)
is shown in Drg. No. MEC/11/S2/Q6SY/03 and given in Table 4.11a. The study area as
per the satellite imagery covers 17.76% built-up area, 75.11% agricultural land (including
horticultural plantations), 6.28 scrubs (non-forest area) covered area and 0.84% water
bodies.
Table 4.11a: Land Use Pattern of the Study Area
SN.
1
2
3
4
Type of Land-use
Built-up Land (settlements)
Agricultural Land
Crop Land
Plantations
Total
Scrubs
Water Bodies
Canal
Tanks
Total
Grand Total
Area in ha.
5591.51
Percent Landuse
17.76
9198.33
14453.48
29.21
45.90
75.11
6.28
1977.95
265
0.97
31487.24
0.84
0.00
0.00
100.00
In Haryana the classification of land have been done for assessment of land holding taxes,
by relying on classification of soil as an indirect indicator of measure of land productivity.
The land has been divided, under five classes I to V (based on broad soil classification(6)),
in to Abi, Chahi, Nehri, Barani, Banjar, Kallar, Thur, Sem, etc. Nehri is irrigated land is
placed under class I, while Banjar, Kallar, Thur and Sem come under Class V category.
Neri is the land where the irrigation source is canal, while Chahi, Tal, Barani are land where
canal is not the irrigation source. Tibba is undulated land with sand dunes and Gairmumkin is non-cultivable land belonging to Government allotted to the panchayat for
community activities. Based on the above land classification the village wise breakup of
land under acquisition for project and township are given in Table 4.11b.
The land use pattern of the project site is given in Table 4.11b. The power plant site is
predominantly double crop agriculture land. About 89% of the land being used for the
project and township is agricultural land and about 11% is waste land.
Table 4.11b: Land Use Pattern of the Project Site
Type of Land
Project Site (Ha)
Township (Ha)
Land-use
%
6 Dynamics of Agriculture Development, Vol. 3. : Policy Planning & Liberalisation. By K.S. Dhindsa & Anju
Sharma. Concept Publication Company. 2001.
Total
Page 164
Chapter 4

PROJECT HARYANA
Nehri (Agricultural land)

Chahi (Agricultural land)
Tal (Agricultural land)
Total Agricultural Land
Tibba (Waste land)
Gair Mumkin (Waste land)
Total Waste land
Built-up Land
Grand Total
4.7
Gorakhpur Kajalheri Total

506.85
1.08
507.93
7.31
0
7.31
0
0
0
514.16
1.08
515.24
0
0
0
17.48
0.72
18.2
17.48
0.72
18.2
0
0
0
531.64
1.81
533.45
Badopal
10.47
0
17.95
28.42
45.86
0.75
46.61
0
75.04
518.40
7.31
17.95
543.66
45.86
18.95
64.81
0
608.48
SOCIO-ECONOMIC FEATURES
The socio-economic feature of the study area is detailed in Chapter 8.
Page 165
Chapter 4
85
1
3
89
8
3
11
0
100

CHAPTER 5 : ANTICPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS &

MITIGATION MEASURES
5.0
ANTICPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES
5.1
INTRODUCTION
In this chapter, the anticipated environmental impacts and the proposed mitigation
measures for the proposed Haryana Atomic Power Project (HAPP) have been
described.
Impact prediction is a way of mapping the environmental consequences of the
significant aspects of the proposed plant. The impact assessment will broadly cover the
following information and components:
-
Assessment of physical effects for all phases including location, design,

construction, operation and possible accidents.
Estimation by type and quantity of expected contaminants and emissions (air, water,
noise, solid wastes) resulting from the operation of the proposed plant.
The anticipated environmental impacts of the proposed plant are discussed below under
the following categories:
Impacts and mitigation measures due to project siting (location).
Impacts and mitigation measures due to project design.
Impacts and mitigation measures during construction.
Impacts and mitigation measures during operation.
Impacts and mitigation measures because of possible accidents.
5.2
IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DUE TO PROJECT SITING (LOCATION)

Impacts and Mitigation Measures
The project site is located in Gorakhpur Village in Bhuna Block of Tehsil, Sub-division
and District Fatehabad of Haryana State as shown in Fig. 2.1 (Chapter 2). The
proposed project is planned in total 1503.6 acres or 608.5 ha of land for the atomic
power plant (including exclusion zone) and the township (for plant personnel and CISF
personnel). The village and land type wise breakup of land is given in Table 5.1. The
main project area is mostly agricultural land interspersed with scattered trees and small
patches of waste / barren land. Out of the total land required for the main plant area,
about 515 ha is agricultural land and about 18.0 ha is not cultivable waste / barren land.
There is no forest land involved in the power plant project site and also in the township
site.
For the proposed project the Project Affected Persons (PAPs) includes only land
Oustees and no displacement of homestead population is involved. There are about 99
Dhanis (house constructed in agricultural land) which are used temporarily for facilitating
agricultural activity. In the power plant site, about 1027 Eucalyptus trees and an
Page 166
Chapter 5

abandoned canal is present. In the plant site of the project area, which falls in the centre
of the project site about 575 eucalyptus trees are standing.
In Haryana the classification of land have been done for assessment of land holding
taxes, by relying on classification of soil as an indirect indicator of measure of land
productivity. The land has been divided, under five classes I to V (based on broad soil
classification(1)), in to Abi, Chahi, Nehri, Barani, Banjar, Kallar, Thur, Sem, etc. Nehri is
irrigated land is placed under class I, while Banjar, Kallar, Thur and Sem come under
Class V category. Nehri is the land where the irrigation source is canal, while Chahi, Tal,
Barani are land where canal is not the irrigation source. Tibba is undulated land with
sand dunes and Gair-mumkin is non-cultivable land belonging to Government allotted to
the panchayat for community activities. Based on the above land classification the
village wise breakup of land under acquisition for project and township are given in
Table 5.1a.
Table 5.1a: Total Land Requirement and Land-use at the Project Site
Type of Land
Gorakhpur
Acres
Ha
Nehri
(Agricultural
land)
Chahi
(Agricultural
land)
Tal
(Agricultural
land)
Total
Agricultural
Land
Tibba (Waste
land)
Gair Mumkin
(Waste land)
Total Waste
land
Grand Total
Project Site
Kajalheri
Total
Acres Ha Acres
Ha
Township
Badopal
Acres Ha
Total
Acres
Landuse %
Ha
1252.43 506.85 2.68 1.08 1255.1 507.93 25.87 10.47 1280.98 518.40
18.06
7.31
18.06
7.31
18.06
7.31
44.36 17.95 44.36
17.95
1270.49 514.16 2.68 1.08 1273.2 515.24 70.23 28.42 1343.4 543.66
89
43.19
17.48
1.79 0.72 44.98
18.2
43.19
17.48
1.79 0.72 44.98
18.2
85
113.33 45.86 113.33
45.86
46.84
18.95
115.19 46.61 160.17
64.81
11
1.86
0.75
1313.68 531.64 4.46 1.81 1318.2 533.45 185.42 75.04 1503.56 608.48 100
The existing approach road from NH10 to the project site is from Badopal village (on
NH10). This road will be re-strengthened for movement of Heavy and Over Dimensional
Consignment (ODC) vehicles. The existing village roads passing through the project
area will be suitably diverted externally along the plant boundary.
The impacts and mitigation measures of locating the plant at the land acquisition for the
proposed site is given in Table 5.1b.
1 Dynamics of Agriculture Development, Vol. 3. : Policy Planning & Liberalisation. By K.S. Dhindsa &
Anju Sharma. Concept Publication Company. 2001.
Page 167
Chapter 5

Table 5.1b: Impacts and Mitigation Measures of Locating HAPP at the Proposed Site
S
N.
1
a.
Issues in Locating
the Site
Main Plant Area
Agricultural Land
Area (ha) / Impacts

Numbers
Mitigation Measures
515.24
Only land Oustees and

no
homestead
population involved. For
project site (Gorakhpur
& Kajalheri village) total
of 854 Project Affected
People (PAPs) due to
land acquisition.
b.
Barren-land /
wasteland
18.2
c.
Dhanis in the Power

Plant Project Area
covering 1 ha land.
99
d.
Eucalyptus Trees in
the
Power
Plant
Project Area
Abandoned Canal (2
ha) present in the
Power Plant Project
Area.
Village roads passing
through
residential
complex area.
575
The land is noncultivable waste land /

barren land.
The 99 Dhanis will have
to be cleared (house
constructed
in
agricultural land) which
are used temporarily for
facilitating agricultural
activity.
The 575 trees will have
to be cut.
Land to be acquired through

Haryana Government taking in to
account the R&R issues of Haryana
R&R policy 2010 for details of R &
R Policy please see Annexure IB.
Compensation will be paid as per
Haryana R & R Policy 2010. The R
& R Plan for the PAPs is given
below.
No mitigation measure required
except for the R&R issues as
above.
Haryana R & R Policy 2010. The
displacement due to the project
involves only land Oustees and no
homestead population involved.
g.
h.
e.
f.
Canal
covering 2
ha
This will be demolished.
Will be blocked
Existing road from

Badopal Village on
NH10 to Power Plant
Project Site.
While
making
the
existing road as project
site approach road may
cause inconvenience to
local inhabitants.
Drainage Pattern of
the Area
There is no drainage
channel within the plant
and township area and
thus impact of changes
in local drainage pattern
Additional trees will be planted as

part of green belt development
within the project area.
The canal is abandoned and thus
no mitigation measure required.
The existing village road roads

passing through the project area
will be suitably diverted externally
along the residential complex
boundary so as to minimize the
inconvenience to local inhabitants.
The approach road from NH10 to
the project site (5 km) will be restrengthened / extended to the
project / township site for
movement of Heavy and Over
Dimensional (ODC) vehicles, and
will be available for use by public.
Alternate road connecting village
Kajalheri to NH10 at Badopal
already exists.
No major mitigation measures are
required except that a garland
drainage system will be provided
all along the plant site boundary as
well as residential
complex
Page 168
Chapter 5

S
N.
Issues in Locating
the Site
2
a.
Township
Barren-land /
Wasteland / non
agricultural / non
cultivable land
b.
Agricultural Land
Total Land
Area (ha) / Impacts

Numbers
due the project is not
envisaged.
46.61
The land is mostly noncultivable waste land /

barren land.
28.42
Only land Oustees and

no
homestead
population involved. For
township
(Badopal
village) total of 125
Project Affected People
(PAPs) due to land
acquisition.
Total PAPs = 979
608.48
Mitigation Measures
boundary.
The displacement due to the

project involves only land Oustees
and no homestead population
involved. No mitigation measures
required except for the R&R issues
for land acquisition as for 1.a.
above.
Land to be acquired through
Haryana Government taking in to
account the Haryana R&R policy
2010 for details of R & R Policy
please see Annexure IB.
Haryana R & R Policy 2010.
Implementation of R & R Plan

The Revenue and Disaster Management Department of Government of Haryana has
issued a Gazette Notification on 9th November, 2010 (attached as Annexure IB), which
specifies the revision in minimum floor rates and also the policies of Rehabilitation and
Resettlement of land owners / land oustees. The policy came into effect from
07.09.2010. The policy contain a unique feature i.e. Annuity Scheme, which ensures
sustainability of source of income for the land losers for a period of 33 years. The
annuity shall be given by the project proponent at the rate of Rs 21000/- per acre of land
with a provision of increase by Rs 750/- every year till the period of 33 years. This is in
addition to fixed land compensation for land acquisition, which is worked out on the basis
of floor rate fixed by the concerned Deputy Commissioner. In case of landless person,
artisans etc. dependent upon agricultural operations over the acquired land and the rural
artisans e.g. blacksmiths, carpenters, the potters, the masons etc. which contribute to
the village society together the policy envisages a special forum on the creation and upgradation of skills sets of these persons to improve their employability in the organized
sector.
With the help of District Administration, the essentials inputs containing land losers and
project affected persons (PAPs) are being prepared. NPCIL is committed to establish
requisite information for organizing vocational and formal training and education for all
such identified persons and extend full assistance to them to make them eligible for
seeking employment with the project proponent or any other organized sector working
for the project.
The Right of Way shall not be affected as there are no roads / pipelines (of public utility)
passing through the proposed project site / township area.
Page 169
Chapter 5

The main features of R & R Policy are given hereunder.

Main Features of Haryana Revised R&R Policy 2010
Government of Haryana vide Notification No. 3212-R-5-2010/12140 dated 9th November
2010 notified a comprehensive revised policy laying down the floor rates for acquisition
of Land under the Land Acquisition Act 1894 or any other compensation statute on the
subject.. The main features of the policy are as follows:
(a) Payment of market value as compensation of land to the landowners with the
revision and fine-tuning of minimum floor rates in respect of land situated in different
parts of the state;
(b) Introduction of a special incentive for reducing litigation: Introduction of a No
Litigation Incentive for such of the landowners who opt to accept the compensation
award with a view to containing litigation on this account;
(c) Revision of the rates of Annuity payable for a period of 33 years as a social security
benefit for the landowners; and
(d) Review and introduction of certain additional benefits over and above the one-time
compensation paid in accordance with the law so as to provide for alternate means
of sustenance for the landowners and other landless persons/artisans who are
dependent on the agricultural land being acquired for non-agricultural purposes.
5.3
IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DUE TO PROJECT DESIGN

The proposed Atomic Power Project is being envisaged based on techno-economic
feasibility of the state of art technology as presently available in the country and thus no
anticipated impacts are envisaged due to the project design.
A number of environmental friendly / safety features have been envisaged in the
proposed Plant design plan due to which the anticipated adverse environmental impacts
are either avoided or minimized. These features are detailed in Chapter 2 & 6 briefly
mentioned here under:
The concept of defense-in-depth is adopted in design of safety systems, various state of
the art safety systems mechanisms are engineered to ensure safe operation of the
reactor, viz
Barriers to radioactive releases:

Multiple series of fission product barriers are designed in the system to prevent
radioactivity release, viz.
i) Fuel matrix
ii) Fuel sheath
iii) Primary Heat Transport System
iv) Containment
Special safety zones :
The entire operating island is designed to be divided into 3 distinct zones based on
the contamination potential. These zones have been designated as Zone-1, Zone-2
Page 170
Chapter 5

5.4
and Zone-3 in the ascending order of contamination potential. These zones are
equipped with required safety features to limit the potential radiation within limits.
Reactor regulating system enables automatic control of reactor power and maintains
neutron flux profile.
Reactor protection system ensures shutdown requirements through two independent
fast acting shut down systems.
Reactor shut down systems etc
Emergency core cooling system,
Containment spray cooling system,
Double containment structures with steel liner on inner containment wall of Reactor
Building,
Exclusion zones
IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Construction phase impact may be on land use, ground water, water quality, air quality,
noise etc. There is no scope for radioactive pollution during siting and construction
phases of the project. These aspects during construction stage are discussed here
under.
5.4.1
Land Use
The construction of nuclear power project of proposed magnitude would require large
input from civil, mechanical aspects including transport, labour etc. During construction
excavation, soil erosion, loss of topsoil is expected at construction site, which is
unavoidable. Further such huge construction activity requires large scale migration /
influx of labours camping in the area leading to direct and indirect impacts associated
due to such large scale migration.
The project site is rural area and fairly rich in manpower resources. The manpower
resources available in the region will fulfill the demand of construction labour. Further,
for labours / skilled labour coming from far off places labour colony will be established as
per statutory conditions.
Such temporary labour colonies, if not properly planned, may create environmental
pollution, unsanitary conditions and health problems in the area. However, it has been
planned that temporary labour colonies with all basic facilities like, sanitation, garbage
disposal, safe drinking water supply, etc will be established within the project site and
township site to minimize pollution of soil, water and public health problems.
It is therefore most unexpected that influx of construction labour is going to change
present land use pattern by forming residential colonies in the region.
During construction of the project, substantial quantity of soil and rock will be removed
during excavation thus requiring large scale dumping of soil, overburden material. The
soil overburden generated will be used for back filling, leveling, as sub-grade material in
Page 171
Chapter 5

making internal plant road, foundation works, filling green belt development areas and
filling low-lying areas. However, the following aspects will be taken care of.
Proper stock piling and back filling of the excavated soil.
All the disturbed land will be stabilized.
During dry weather condition, it will be necessary to control the higher dust levels
created by the excavation, leveling and transportation activities.
The top soil containing rich humus, soil will be preserved in separate top soil dumps
(height not more than 1m and re-vegetating the same with grasses and utilizing the
same for development of greenbelt in and around the project area.
Solid wastes generated during construction phase will be collected and segregated
and will not be disposed off on land. Combustible waste will be burnt in controlled
manner, whereas bio-degradable waste will be sent for composting and non bio
degradable will be sent to secured land fill area as designated by the State
Government in the region.
About 10MW of power will be required for construction and commissioning of the
project, which will be sourced from State Grid, permission regarding the same has
already been accorded from State Government while according permission for the site.
All care will be taken to get the construction material from local sources, if available in
required quantity. However, if the same is not available from local sources the same will
be sourced from distance sources. Construction material will be sourced from local
sources like, Stones and Aggregates from Tosham Village and Sand / Soil from Karnal
or Ghaggar River.
The supply of construction materials (like sand, soil, stones etc) to the project may
cause large scale excavation which will require mitigation measures to bring back the
excavated site as required by statutory authorities. The source of construction material
like, stones, aggregates, etc and the proposed mitigation measures (if any) is given in
Table 5.1c.
Table 5.1c: Quantity and Source of Construction Material for the Project
SN.
Material(s)
1.
Cement
2.
Coarse Aggregate
(Stones)
9,50,000
3.
Sand
5,50,000
4.
Admixture (Super-
Approx.
Quantity
(M.T.)
2,20,000
5,500
Sources
Mitigation Measures
Reputed
manufacturers /
suppliers in the region
Tosham Village (if
sufficiently available) /
Local suppliers
Karnal or Ghaggar
River sand (if
sufficiently available)
and Manufactured
sand from near by
area.
Reputed
Local resources near project site

shall be explored for qualification as
construction material suppliers. The
contract
specification
for
the
suppliers will be framed in a manner
that the environmental obligations will
be
contractors/suppliers
responsibility, which will take care of
the following:
For any of the materials to be

supplied if permission / statutory
clearance (or obligations of meeting
Page 172
Chapter 5

SN.
Material(s)
Approx.
Quantity
(M.T.)
plasticiser)
5.
6.
Reinforcement
steel
Fly-ash
2,00,000
1,50,000
Sources
Mitigation Measures
manufacturers /
suppliers in the region
TISCO / SAIL
any specified compliance conditions)

from environmental angle is required
from
statutory
authorities
(for
manufacturing, exploring, excavating,
etc) will be suppliers responsibility.
Thermal Power Plant

at Village Khedar
(HPGCL)
Once the construction phase is over there will be positive impact on existing landscape
due to proper planning for landscaping, development of roads with avenue trees and
green belt development around the project building making the landscape beautiful with
lush green cover.
5.4.2
Topography, Site Elevation and Filling Material

The ground elevation at plant site varies from RL + 215 m to RL + 218 m. The detailed
analysis / studies have been carried out by National Institute of Hydrology, Roorkee, the
maximum flood elevation level due to severe most floods anywhere within the plant site
as derived through model simulation is 218.1m and has been considered as base flood
elevation and flood submersion line. A free board of 1.0 m has been assumed and the
safe grade elevation has been worked out to be 219.1 m. Detailed topographic analysis
and flood analysis report is given as Annexure II. The safe grade elevation of 219.1 m is
recommended for proposed HAPP site. To meet the safe grade level in line with Flood
Analysis Report of the project site, excavated soil during project construction will be
utilized for filing.
5.4.3
Air Quality
Impacts
The construction and other associated activities will lead to emission of different
pollutants. During the construction phase, dust and particulate matter will be the main
pollutant. As plant will be constructed in stages, construction activity covering a large
area is not expected. Therefore the particulate matter emission will not be much and will
be localized only. Gaseous pollutants like SO 2, NOx, CO will also be added to the
ambient air due to vehicular traffic movement associated with this construction phase.
Gaseous emissions from construction machineries and vehicles will be minimized by
enforcing strict emission monitoring system for the suggested mitigation measures. The
impact will be confined within the specific plant area where the construction is taking
place. Further, the impact of such activities will be temporary and will be restricted to the
construction phase only.
During the construction period the impacts that are associated with the air quality are:
Page 173
Chapter 5

Deterioration of air quality due to fugitive dust emissions from construction activities
(especially during dry season) like excavation, back filling and concreting, hauling
and dumping of earth materials and from construction spoils.
Generation of pollutants due to operation of heavy vehicles and movement of
machineries and equipment for material handling, earth moving, laying of sands,
metal, stones, asphalt, etc.
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures will be employed during construction period to reduce
the pollution level to acceptable limits.
Proper and prior planning, appropriate sequencing and scheduling of all major
construction activities will be done, and timely availability of infrastructure supports
needed for construction will be ensured to shorten the construction period vis--vis
to reduce pollution.
Construction materials will be stored in covered go-down or enclosed spaces to
prevent the wind blown fugitive emissions.
Stringent construction material handling / overhauling procedures will be followed.
Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust, and stone will be duly covered to avoid spilling
and fugitive emissions.
Adequate dust suppression measures such as regular water sprinkling at vulnerable
areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive dust during material
handling and hauling activities in dry seasons.
The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to reduce
spills.
Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be used.
It will be ensured that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good working
condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission within the permissible
limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce pollution.
Vehicles and machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions confirm
to standards of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) / State Pollution Control
Board (SPCB).
Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during construction
phase.
Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from inhaling dust.
5.4.4
Water Quality
5.4.4.1 Surface Water

Impacts
The impacts on water quality during construction phase mainly arise due to site
cleaning, leveling, excavation, storage of construction material etc. A leveling and
excavation activity normally increases the level of suspended solids in the surface water
runoff. However, for the proposed plant, no large scale leveling is required (the project /
township site terrain is plain). Excavation will also be limited.
Page 174
Chapter 5

Mitigation Measures
Quality of construction wastewater emanating from the construction site will be
controlled through the drainage system with sediment traps (silting basin as water
intercepting ditch) for arresting the silt / sediment load before its disposal.
All the washable construction material will be stored under sheds or enclosed space
by fencing it with brick or earth in order to prevent spillage into the drainage network,
so that the same does not find its way into the surface water runoff.
The sediment traps and storm water drainage network will be periodically cleaned
and especially before monsoon season.
Majority of the water generated will be utilized for dust suppression and plantation
within the plant premises.
The vehicle maintenance / washing area will be maintained with proper drainage
system having oil trap mechanism to avoid contamination of surface and ground
water by oil / lubricants.
5.4.4.2 Ground water
Impacts
The water requirement during the construction phase will be low. No ground water will
be used for construction work. The construction water will be drawn from Fatehabad
Branch of Bhakra Canal to the tune of 1000m3/day (Commitment letter from
Government of Harayan enclosed as Annexure III) Therefore, it is most unlikely that
construction phase will bring any significant modification in the ground water regime of
the area. Therefore, the construction phase of the proposed plant will have insignificant
impact on the ground water.
Mitigation Measures
No impact envisaged.
5.4.5
Noise
Impacts
Major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic, construction
equipment etc. The operation of the equipments will generate noise level ranging
between 75 to 90 dB (A). However this noise level will be near the source only and is not
expected to create any noise pollution problem at places away / outside the plant
premises. The noise generated during the construction phase from different equipments
may have some adverse impact on the operators.
Mitigation Measures
Protective gears such as earplugs, earmuffs etc. will be provided to construction
personnel exposed to high noise levels as preventive measures by contractors and
will be strictly adhered to minimize / eliminate any adverse impact.
It will be ensured that all the construction equipment and vehicles used are in good
working condition, properly lubricated and maintained to keep noise within the
permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce noise.
Page 175
Chapter 5

5.4.6
Site Security
The site will be secured by fencing and no unauthorized entry will be permitted in the
construction area.
5.4.7
Industrial Safety
During construction and operation phase of the project, all the project activities will be
carried out as per the regulations covered under Atomic Energy (Factories) Rules 1996,
Electricity Act and Rules, Explosives Act and Rules, Petroleum Act and Rules etc.
During Construction, the occupational Health aspects will be minimal as the work
location is open and is of dynamic nature. The main hazard potential will be fall of
person through a height, exposure to chemicals and noise, fall of material and electrical
shocks etc. which will be addressed by built in engineered safety provisions.
Accordingly, the construction workers will be provided compulsorily Personal Protective
Equipments (PPE) depending upon the risks and use of Safety Helmet and Shoes will
be must at the project construction sites. Separate safety clauses will be integrated in
the contract document for the project executing agencies to properly plan and to
appropriately provide the cost factor such that safety of the personnel at project
construction sites do not suffer for any reason. Safety coverage by professionals will be
mandatory for the construction works and posting of safety officers for particular works
will be must to enforce Industrial safety at the work sites. Such Safety officers and Safety
supervisors will be arranged to technically report to the departmental Industrial Safety
Head such that a direct guidance and monitoring of the contract works are made
possible effectively.
Other worker friendly measures adopted in the construction of Atomic Power Plant works
will be the compulsory induction and refresher training based on a syllabus monitored by
the corporate office for each worker. The worker will be issued a gate pass only after
undergoing the industrial safety training in which environmental management aspect will
also be touched upon properly. Facility of drinking water, urinals, toilets and construction
roads will be arranged in the beginning of the work itself. Similarly, provision of First aid
measures both departmental and that of contractors will be ensured in the beginning of
the work itself. Establishment of Fire fighting facility will be another area where priority
will be assured during the construction work.
During commissioning, operation and maintenance of the operating units, in addition to
the industrial hazards, the occupational hazard is the exposure to ionizing radiation
within prescribed limits which is governed by the Atomic energy Act and Radiation
Protection Act and Rules. In order to minimize possibility of radiation exposure to the
occupational workers, adequate safety measures are incorporated in the design,
construction, operation and work practices of the plant including the systems associated
with fuel handling and waste management. All the occupational workers undergo
periodical medical check ups, bioassay sampling and whole body counting as
applicable.
Only qualified engineers and technicians are recruited to carry out the design,
construction, operation and maintenance (O & M) of the plant. All O & M personnel
Page 176
Chapter 5

undergo mandatory training (at various levels) in the plant and related subsystems of the
plant through nuclear induction training. A committee consisting of a panel of experts
and a representative from the regulatory agency evaluates designated operating staff for
licensing. The qualification thus obtained will be renewed, periodically.
5.5
IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE
5.5.1
General
During the operation phase, depending upon operating conditions, environmental
releases may occur from raw material and product handling, processing, emergency DG
which are tested periodically etc. Environmental releases / emissions may be in the form
of:
a) Conventional Pollutants
i. Air emissions
ii. Waste water discharges
iii. Solid waste disposal
iv. Noise etc.
b) Radio-active emissions from source, liquid effluents and solid wastes
These emissions, discharges and disposal may release different pollutants, which may
affect air, water, land and ecological environment directly. However, all these are mainly
primary impact. In addition to these primary impacts, any industrial project has some
overall impact on its surrounding socio-economic environment through the existence of
social and economic linkages between the project and society, which are actually
secondary impact. Under this clause, all the primary impacts due to this proposed plant
are being discussed and wherever required, impacts have also been quantified.
Accordingly under subsequent clauses impacts on air environment, water environment,
soil and noise due to the operation of the proposed project are being elaborated. The
socio-economic impact due to the proposed project is separately discussed in Chapter
8.
There are two types of anticipated environmental impacts considered for nuclear power
plants, especially with respect to radio-activity releases. The first ones are those which
occur under normal operation of the plant and the second ones are those which can
occur under accident conditions.
The environmental factors that may be affected by the first type of environmental
impacts during operation phase due to radio-activity releases are discussed in
subsequent clauses. However, the second type of impacts and mitigation measures are
discussed in Chapter 9, under Section 9.4.2.
5.5.2
Radio-active Releases During Operation Phase

General
The operation of the proposed project involves use of natural uranium oxide as fuel and
heavy water (D2O) as coolant and moderator for the reactor. Refueling of the reactor will
Page 177
Chapter 5

be carried out "on-power". The uranium dioxide (UO2) used for fuel is a ceramic with
high melting point and chemically inert to water at operating conditions. So long as the
ceramic fuel does not melt, the fission products remain entrapped in its matrix. During
normal operation virtually all solid fission products are permanently retained in UO2
matrix and only a fraction of noble gases and volatile products diffuse into the inter
space between fuel and cladding.
Waste management operations (liquid and solid), involves handling of radioactive
wastes from all the facilities for their ultimate storage/disposal. All these operations are
carried out in leak tight enclosures, under negative pressure so that the probability of the
radioactive materials reaching the working environment is reduced to a minimum.
Further, there are also clean up mechanisms like filters and traps to confine any
radioactive materials in the exhaust streams of the ventilation systems.
From the above operations, a small fraction of these radio-nuclides are released into the
environment in the form of gaseous emissions and liquid effluents. Natural processes in
the atmosphere and hydrosphere help carry and disperse them in the surroundings.
These residual radio-nuclides in turn find their way into soil and sediments, pastures and
foliage, and eventually enter the food chain such as rice, vegetables, fish and milk. Fig.
5.1a and Fig. 5.1b shows the various pathways through which the general public
receives radiation exposure as a result the operation of nuclear facilities.
The radioactivity discharged through air or water route may result in a small but
measurable addition to the already existing background of radioactivity and radiation
shine. However, under normal operation the radioactivity discharges are such that the
nuclear radiation dose at exclusion zone boundary (also called fence post, 1.0 km radius
around the plant) is only a small fraction of the radiation dose permitted for general
population and thus under normal operation of the plant impacts due to radio-activity
releases does not have any adverse impact on the surrounding environment vis--vis to
public residing beyond exclusion zone.
Operation and planned maintenance of the Atomic Power Plant facility do not result in
direct radiation exposures to the general public residing beyond the exclusion zone. But
radiation exposures are likely to be received through indirect means as shown in Fig.
5.1a and 5.1b.
Page 178
Chapter 5

SOURCE
CONTAMINATION
PROCESS
CONTAMINATED
MEDIUM
Dispersion
MODE OF
EXPOSURE
Water
Bioaccumulation
HABIT
DATA
DOSE
Ingestion
Irrigation
Liquid
Consumption
releases
Foodstuffs
Occupancy
External beta,
gamma
irradiation
Sediment
Concentration
Sedimentation
Identification of Bio markers, Bio magnifiers in various media

essential input for monitoring and dose evaluation
Fig. 5.1a : Pathways of Exposure to Man Water Route
SOURCE
CONTAMINATION CONTAMINATED
PROCESS
MEDIUM
Air
Dispersion
MODE OF
EXPOSURE
DOSE
Inhalation
External beta,
gamma
irradiation
Soil
Atmospheric
releases
HABIT
DATA
Occupancy
Deposition
Vegetation
Animal
Ingestion
Consumption
Fig. 5.1b : Pathways of Exposure to Man Air Route
Page 179
Chapter 5

5.5.2.1 Radio-active Releases: Air Emissions

The probable impact from the proposed nuclear power project HAPP 4x700 MWe is
mainly of radiological type because of the release of radioactive materials during normal
operation as well as in off-normal conditions. The gaseous release takes place after
filtration from plant ventilation system through a 100 m tall stack.
Impacts
The gaseous radioactive effluents from reactor and service building ventilation exhaust
systems are passed through pre filters and absolute filters before discharge through the
stack. These gaseous effluents are continuously monitored for radioactivity content
before discharging through ventilation stack. There are three gross (Beta), (Gamma)
activity monitors on each of the reactor building (RB) ventilation exhaust ducts (located
in Service Building).
The radioactivity release can only be controlled either by reducing the inventory or by
providing larger dilution in the environment by having a stack of sufficient height. The
gaseous wastes are mixed with ventilation air and discharged through stacks. The
radiation dose limit specified by AERB for the general pubic at the fence post due to
operation of all facilities within the site through all pathways is 1 mSv/y.
When several nuclear facilities are located in a single site, the combined releases of
radio-nuclides by all the facilities should be such that the public exposure shall not
exceed the dose limit of 1 mSv in a year. Compliance with the regulatory requirement is
ensured by an apportionment of the dose limit among the different facilities. The
apportionment is done based on technical considerations. Table 5.2a and 5.2b shows
the dose apportionment scheme for adults and infants for HAPP for gaseous and liquid
effluent, respectively.
This practice of specifying the regulatory limits for radiation in terms of a single entity
(i.e. dose) is in contrast to the regulation of conventional pollutants where limits are
specified individually for each pollutant and environmental matrix. While the ultimate
regulatory criterion is the radiation dose, its practical implementation calls for
specification of discharge limits for each kind of anticipated radionuclide. This is done by
subdividing the apportioned dose limit among different nuclides and then converting into
corresponding discharge values by appropriate means. Unlike the dose limits (Table
5.2a), these discharge limits are specific to the plant and the site.
Table 5.2a: Apportioned Dose Limits for Gaseous Emissions for 4X700 MWe
Radionuclide
Tritium
C-14
FPNG
Ar-41
I-131
Release
4X700 MWe
unit, GBq/d
2.02E+04
1.08E+01
1.10E+04
7.66E+03
2.02E-01
Dose
(mSv/y)
1.61E-02
9.28E-03
3.04E-02
3.72E-02
4.70E-03
Adult
Percentage
contribution
11.58
6.68
21.9
26.81
3.38
Dose
(mSv/y)
1.61E-02
9.28E-03
4.56E-02
5.58E-02
5.74E-02
Infant
Percentage
contribution
6.08
3.51
17.26
21.13
21.73
Page 180
Chapter 5

Radionuclide
Particulates
Total
Release
4X700 MWe
unit, GBq/d
2.02E-01
Dose
(mSv/y)
4.12E-02
1.39E-01
Adult
Percentage
contribution
29.65
100
Dose
(mSv/y)
8.00E-02
2.64E-01
Infant
Percentage
contribution
30.29
100
Table 5.2b: Apportioned Dose Limits for Liquid Effluents for 4X700 MWe
Radionuclide
Tritium
C-14
Cs-137
Sr-90
Total
Release
4X700 MWe
unit, GBq/d
2.02E+03
1.08E-01
1.00E-01
1.00E-01
Dose
(mSv/y)
4.04E-02
6.96E-05
1.44E-03
3.10E-03
4.50E-02
Adult
Percentage
contribution
89.76
0.15
3.2
6.89
100
Dose
(mSv/y)
4.80E-02
5.60E-05
7.76E-04
8.50E-03
5.72E-02
Infant
Percentage
contribution
83.71
0.1
1.35
14.84
100
Table 5.2a and 5.2b shows the dose apportionment scheme for adults and infants for
HAPP for gaseous and liquid effluent, respectively.
A total adult dose of 0.184 mSv/y is computed, 0.139 mSv/y coming from the
atmospheric route and 0.045 mSv/y from the liquid route. The corresponding total dose
for an infant is calculated as 0.321 mSv/y, with 0.264 mSv/y being derived from the air
route and 0.057 mSv/y from the liquid route (Table 5.2c). Noble gases and particulates
are the major contributors for the air route, and tritium for the water route.
Since an infant turns out to be a critical member of the population, a dose of 0.40 mSv is
apportioned for the 4X700-MWe power station at Fatehabad.
Table 5.2c: Dose Apportionment for HAPP 4X700 MWe
Nuclear facility
Reference
HAPP 1 to 4
Adult
Infant
Dose limit
Estimated Dose (mSv/y)

Air
Water
Total
0.139
0.045
0.184
0.264
0.057
0.320
1.0
Atmospheric Dispersion
The well-known Gaussian plume model is used for calculating the atmospheric
dispersion. The site-specific meteorological data in the form of joint frequency
distribution of wind speed, wind direction and the stability category is an essential input
to the model. The micrometeorological measurement data have been presented in
Annexure IVA. The plume rise due to the efflux velocity will be very small and that due
to the thermal will be negligible. As the heights of buildings are not large, the wake
effects due to buildings (normally felt within five times the height of the tallest building)
are also not considered in this calculation. The radioactive decay of the plume during
travel is also not considered, as the time taken for the plume to reach the 1.0 km is too
short compared to the half-lives of the radio-nuclides released. Therefore, the
calculations are conservative. The detailed dose apportionment report for HAPP is given
as Annexure V.
Page 181
Chapter 5

Once the spatial distribution of radio-nuclides is obtained, the radiation fluxes at receptor
locations of interest are obtained by integrating over the volume source with appropriate
geometric attenuation factors. The flux to dose conversion is done using standard
conversion factors taken from BSS 115. Dose computations for the all the pathways of
exposure were made in accordance with procedures described in Manual on Dose
Evaluation from Atmospheric Releases, BARC-1412.
For estimation of dose limit at 1.0 km plant boundary, the above considerations and the
annual average rate of discharge of gaseous radioactive effluents from all the units of
700 MWe are considered and estimation has been done and the results are shown in
Table 5.2d.
The dose limit for the general public due to operation of all facilities within HAPP site is 1
mSv/y. These are further apportioned among the various radio-nuclides (Table 5.2d).
Radiological gaseous effluents when averaged over one day shall not exceed ten times
the annual average releases rates specified above.
Table 5.2d: Gaseous Radioactive Releases and Corresponding Dose to Members
of Public at 1.0 km Exclusion Boundary
Stack Release
Dose at Exclusion
Tritium
C-14

Ar-41
I-131
Particulates
4X700 MWe unit

GBq/d
2.02E+04
1.08E+01
1.10E+04
7.66E+03
2.02E-01
2.02E-01
Total
Boundary (mSv/y)
Adult
Infant
1.61E-02
1.61E-02
9.28E-03
9.28E-03
3.04E-02
4.56E-02
3.72E-02
5.58E-02
4.70E-03
5.74E-02
4.12E-02
8.00E-02
1.39E-01
2.64E-01
Mitigation Measures
Design of the plant is based on minimizing the leakages from the plant system in to
plant buildings so that generation of radioactive effluents is minimized.
The gaseous radioactive effluents from reactor and service building ventilation
exhaust systems are passed through pre filters and absolute filters before discharge
through the ventilation stack.
The gaseous effluents are continuously monitored for radioactivity content before
discharging through ventilation stack. Otherwise the ventilation stack is meant only
for handling the ventilation exhaust of different units. There are three gross (Beta),
(Gamma) activity monitors on each of the reactor building (RB) ventilation exhaust
ducts (located in Service Building)
5.5.2.2 Radio-active Releases: Liquid Effluent Discharges
General
In atomic power plant water is required for:
Making up the losses in the waste heat disposal systems
Input for domestic water requirements
Radioactive waste dilution
Page 182
Chapter 5

Waste heat from the non-safety related loads like condenser and auxiliaries is dissipated
using Natural Draught Cooling Towers (NDCTs) and heat from the safety related loads is
dissipated using Induced Draught Cooling Towers (IDCTs).
Radioactivity in liquid effluents from PHWRs is mainly due to tritium and other activation
products in moderator and coolants - at very low concentrations. Dilution is the only
treatment for tritium discharge to environment. Regulatory stipulation demands that the
radioactivity levels in the liquid effluents should be within limits such that the apportioned
dose for the general public utilizing the water at the discharge point is not exceeded. A
common liquid effluent discharge scheme has been envisaged for HAPP 1 to 4 (Fig.
2.10).
After using the water for the required purpose, both the treated active and inactive water
will be discharged into Fatehabad branch of Bhakra Canal. Total estimated plant drain
water quantity is about 5320 m3/hr. This includes the blow-own from NDCTs, IDCTs and
other miscellaneous plant drains.
The total water requirement of HAPP 1 to 4 units is 18000 m3/hr, out of which about
12680 m3/hr is for consumptive usage. About 5320 m3/hr is waste water discharge from
plant which is used as dilution water for HAPP 1 to 4. The same is available from
NDCT/IDCT blow-down and Plant Water Treatment Water (PTP) drains (Fig. 2.13).
Impacts
In an Atomic Power Plant waste water is generated from different waste streams as
given Table 5.2a.
The wastes from different streams may contain radioactivity levels as shown in Table
5.2a, which if discharged in to receiving water bodies may cause radiation exposure
to downstream users of the canal water and to the biotic environment of the canal
water.
Substantial heat is generated during the process and water is used as one of the
coolants. For HAPP closed loop cooling tower are used hence there will not be any
discharge of heated effluent to the receiving water body.
Sewage effluents from plant and township may contaminate the receiving water
bodies.
Table 5.2a: Waste Water Discharges
Waste stream
1.0
Quantity
m/day
Potentially Active Waste (PAW)

Showers
30
Washings
20
Laundry
25
Total low radioactive
75
Effluent Discharge to
be diluted
Activity Levels
(Bq/ml)
Gross Tritium
-
3.7E-3
3.7E-2
3.7E-1
250
250
100
Activity Inventory
Gross
- (KBq)
Tritium
(MBq)
111
740
10360
7500
5000
2500
Treatment

to Bhakra canal. Total
discharge 5320 m3/hr.
Page 183
Chapter 5

Waste stream
2.0
Active Non-Chemical
Waste (ANCW)
3.0

Moderator
room
sump
D2O upgrading plant
Active
Chemical
Waste (ACW)
Organic Waste
4.0
5.0
Total
Quantity
m/day
12
Activity Levels
(Bq/ml)
Gross Tritium
-
1.85
1850
Activity Inventory
Gross
- (KBq)
22200
Tritium
(MBq)
2220
3700
222000
1.85
11E4
6
1
0.371
1850
7.4E4
2220
18500 Occasional
13.7 litre
/ day
0.037
1850
96.01
Occasional
39331
Treatment
Filtration,
polishing
through
IX
column,
evaporation, dilution with
exhausts
air
and
discharged
through
stack.
- Do 444000
Occasional Neutralized & treated like
ANCW.
Occasional Filtration, dilution with
to Bhakra canal. Total
discharge 5320 m3/hr.
683220
Mitigation Measures
Design of the plant is based on minimizing the leakages from the plant system in to
plant buildings so that generation of radioactive effluents is minimized. In addition
waste management facilities will be set up to treat the different levels of radioactive
effluents to meet the authorized release limits stipulated by AERB. Further, the
effluents will be mixed with the blow-down water from cooling tower (NDCTs, IDCTs
and other miscellaneous plant drains) to provide the required dilution at the point of
discharge to meet the AERB limits.
As given in Table 5.2a only the Potentially Active Waste (PAW) to the tune of 75
m3/day, of low level radioactive waste will be diluted to well below prescribed AERB
norms will be the main effluent to be discharged into the Fatehabad Branch of
Bhakra Canal.
The total waste water to be discharged from HAPP in to Fatehabad Branch of
Bhakra Canal will be 5320 m3/hr.
The diluted low radioactive waste before discharged to Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra
Canal will be continuously monitored for radioactivity.
A Main Outfall (MOF) sampling system at the downstream of treated waste injecting
point in plant water discharge system will be provided - to further ensure that the
liquid waste discharges made from waste management plant (WMP) have been
adequately diluted with plant water discharge system and are within the permissible
discharge limits. This sampling will be done continuously over a period of 24 hours.
These samples will be analyzed in the laboratory for tritium and gross beta activity.
Rest of the liquid effluent (Table 5.2a) having relatively high tritium and Beta gamma
activity like Tritiated Waste (TTW) generated from Upgrading plant rejects,
Moderator room sump & Clean-up system and Active Non Chemical Waste (ANCW)
generated from Equipment decontamination system of WMP, chemical laboratory &
Page 184
Chapter 5

SFSB cask wash down area, of less volume (21.01 m3/day) will be treated and
evaporated [in Induced Draught Cooling Towers (IDCTs)] after dilution with exhaust
air and will be discharged through stack to air route. Liquid effluent to the tune of
21.01 m3/day having relativity higher activity are treated by filtration and ion
exchange process and disposed through air route using Evaporation system.
Streams like ANCW, ACW and TTW, after filtration, will be diverted to a synthetic ion
exchange column to remove the dissolved Beta-gamma activity and then stored in
evaporation system feed tank. These polished tritium bearing liquid waste streams
(free of gross beta activity) are sent to a steam heated evaporator with a controlled
flow rate of 1.4 m/hr. This vaporized stream is then injected into the ventilation
exhaust ducting leading to 100 m high stack. Evaporation of effluents having
relatively higher level of activity ensures the discharges through water route are kept
at minimum. The air route mode of disposal offers unique advantage of higher
release limits per unit of dose allocation as compared to liquid route. This mode of
disposal suits inland site where water body is scarce and extensively used by the
surrounding population.
5.5.2.3 Radio-active Releases: Solid Waste Disposal

General
Radioactive solid waste generated at HAPP will be segregated at source depending
upon its nature (compactable / non-compactable) and surface dose rate. Different types
of radioactive solid wastes generated during the operation are spent ion-exchange
discarded clothing and components, sludge etc. Solid wastes will be transported to
Waste Management Plant (WMP) in shielded containers / casks, if required, for
treatment / conditioning.
The Conditioning system for solid waste provided in WMP includes processes like:
Spent resin management for resins from Primary Heat Transport (PHT) System,
Moderator system,
End shield cooling system,
Calandria vault cooling system,
SFSB cooling and purification system,
Cementation of liquid filters / sludge and
Compaction of compressible wastes.
The waste after treatment / conditioning will be disposed off in engineered barriers at the
Near Surface Disposal Facility (NSDF), depending upon their surface dose rate:
Stone lined earth trenches,
RCC vaults / trenches and
Tile holes / high integrity containers (HIC).
As a matter of practice packages having higher radioactivity will be disposed off at the
bottom of trenches/ vaults and will be topped by low level assorted waste packages.
Page 185
Chapter 5

Impacts
Solid waste generated from different units may cause radio-active radiation in the
surroundings. The source of radioactive waste generation and the type of treatment and
disposal method is given in Table 5.3a. The type, quantity and surface dose rate of
radio-active waste generated from 4 x 700 MWe PHWR station is shown in Table 5.3b.
Table 5.3a: Type of Solid Waste Generated and Disposal Mode
SN.
Source of Waste
Treatment
Radioactive Spent Ion-Exchange resin from

Primary Heat Transport, Moderator, End shield
/ Calandria vault cooling & Spent Fuel Storage
& Inspection Bay (SFSB) clean-up systems in
PWHR type reactors
Spent Liquid Filters from various purification
systems, viz. Filter cartridges from systems
like SFSB purification, Fuel Handling System
(FHS) & WMP
Active sludge from tank bottoms & sump
Fixed in polymer / cement

matrix monolithic block so as
to prevent the release of
radio-nuclides to
environment.
Immobilized by cementation
before disposing in RCC
trenches.
Category-I Solid Waste (soft compactable

waste)
Removable & reusable small equipment,

components, pipes, heavy water drums etc.
having a maximum size of 600 mm dia. &
3500 mm length
Decontamination of clothing & rubber wears
such as lab coats, hand gloves, Shoe cover,
coveralls etc
Low Level Combustible Solid Waste
Volume Reduction using

Baling Press (Compactor)
with compaction force up to
70 Te.
Volume reduction factor of 5
Decontamination system
(DC) using ultrasonic
cleaning & steam
Fixed with cement matrix
Surface Dose
Rate
Surface dose rate
up to 0.01 Sv/hr
Surface dose rate

up to 0.01 Sv/hr
Surface dose rate

up to 0.01 Sv/hr
NA
Surface dose rate

up to 0.01 Sv/hr
Laundry System
Surface dose rate

up to 0.01 Sv/hr
Oil fired incinerator is

provided to incinerate
organic liquid waste & low
level (less than 2mR/hr)
combustible solid waste
(other than plastic waste).
NA
Table 5.3b: Type, Quantity and Surface Dose Rate of Radio-active Waste Generated from
4x700 MWe PHWR Station
SN. Type of Waste
1.
Avg. Qty.
(m3/year)
Compactable waste
(before compaction)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Assorted Waste
Pre-filters
HEPA filters
Charcoal filters
Surface Dose Rate
Remarks
Category-I
162
15
32.75
0.15
Page 186
Chapter 5

SN. Type of Waste
2.
3.
4.
Total i. to iv
Non-Compactable Waste
Spent liquid filters
Avg. Qty.
(m3/year)
210
20
2.0
Surface Dose Rate
Remarks
Category-I
Category-I,II, IIIA
Occasionally Cat-II
Radiation field (max.) in
PHT Gland filter 20R/hr
Generally Cat-IIIA
Occasionally Cat-II
Generally Cat-IIIA
Occasionally Cat-IIIB
Generally Cat-IIIA
Occasionally Cat-II
Generally Cat-II
Spent IX Resins columns

(200 litres capacity)
i)
Moderator - 48 nos.
9.6
Radiation field up to 40 R/hr
ii)
PHT - 18 nos
3.6
Radiation field 30 to 50 R/hr
2.4
iii) SFSB - 12 nos
iv) Calandria vault cooling

2.4
system -12nos.
v) End shield cooling
0.6
Radiation field up to 200m
Generally Cat-I
system - 3 nos.
R/hr
Total i. to v.
18.6
5. Sludges
6
Category-I,II
Total for Unit 1 & 2
257
Total for Unit 1 to 4
514
Note : Alpha-bearing waste is not generated at NPPs. Waste containing long lived radio-nuclides will
not be disposed at NSDF. It will be sent to Fuel Reprocessing facility.
Size & Life of Radioactive Solid waste Disposal Facility

Adequate Land required for Near Surface Disposal Facility (NSDF) will be allotted during
detailed plant layout stage. This requirement will include 50-60 years of operating life,
once in life time there are En-massse Coolant Channel Replacement (EMCCR)
requirement and decommissioning requirements. Initially the disposal modules of NSDF
such as Earth Trenches, RCC Trenches and Tile holes will be made to meet the
requirement of approximately 10 years of reactor operation and will be augmented as
and when required.
NSDF is designed for 50-60 years of operating life followed by 30 years of instructional
control period.
Size of Disposal Modules
1. Earth Trenches : 4m x 4 m x 2 m deep (10 trenches will be constructed initially).
2. RCC Trenches : 32 trenched in one modules. Two modules will be constructed
Initially Size of Trench : 5.885 m x 1.475 m x 3 m deep each.
Incinerator
The combustible Category I waste will be combusted in incinerators. The main objective of
the incinerator is to minimize the disposal volume in earthen trenches thereby reducing the
Page 187
Chapter 5

activity ingress into ground water. This is one of the most widely used method for volume
reduction of low level combustible waste by which reduction in disposal space and cost
reduction in engineered barriers can be achieved. This system will cater to very low level
active combustible solid waste like paper-waste, cotton waste, mops, discarded clothing,
packing materials etc.
Capacity of incinerator:
Fuel requirement is about 50 litre/hr. of fuel oil (furnace oil) and the solid waste which can
be incinerated at a time is 20 kg/hr.
Plastic waste will be fused (melt densification method) in a drum to achieve significant
volume reduction.
This system will operate only after collecting required volume of waste to optimize the fuel
requirement to start the incinerator. Generally 2 to 3 days of operation per month is
sufficient. Height of chimney will be 30 metre as per state pollution control board norms.
Temperature of flue gas emitted from chimney will be very low as it is passed through two
stage water scrubber. The ash and scrubbing water after solidification / embedment in
cement will be disposed in RCC trenches. Continuous monitoring system is provided to
monitor the gas emitted from the chimney.
Considering sulphur content in furnace oil as 4% the SO2 emission from burning of furnace
oil in the incinerator will be 1.1 g/sec and this emission will be passed through two stage
water scrubbing system and moreover, the incinerator will be run occasionally for 2 to 3
days a month thus the impact on surrounding AAQ will be negligible and thus no further
assessment on this aspect has been done.
Mitigation Measures
Treatment and disposal of radioactive solid waste at the plant is carried out as per
AERB / SG / D-13.
Solid wastes after conditioning will be disposed off in the Near Surface Disposal
Facility (NSDF) area in earth trenches / RCC trenches / vaults / tile holes / HIC
depending upon their surface dose rate.
A waste assaying will be carried out to assess and record the radioactive content in
each conditioned waste packages before disposing them. Name of the vault and
their identification will also be recorded.
Packages having higher activity will be disposed off at the bottom of trenches / vaults
and will be suitably sealed permanently as per established practices. These data will
be utilised to assess the safety aspects of the waste repository.
Necessary geo-hydrological & soil analysis studies for the NSDF site will be carried
out to assess the safety of NSDF containing solid waste generated from 50 years of
plant operation.
Proper surveillance of Solid Waste Management Facility will be carried out - through
bore holes provided all around the NSDF to check the integrity of the engineered
Page 188
Chapter 5

barriers through periodic water sampling. Additional array of boreholes will be

provided, whenever the capacity of the facility will be augmented.
The NSDF area will be fenced and necessary access control procedures will be
established.
The dose rate on the top of the sealed earth trenches and RCC trenches / vaults will
5.5.2.4 Land Environment

Background
During power plant operation, there is no effluent discharge on land surface that could
affect the physico-chemical, nutrient and microbial characteristics of the soil. Solid
wastes will be stored in engineered underground structures so as to prevent the ingress
of radioactivity in to ground or ground water. Therefore no adverse impact is anticipated
in the normal course. Impacts due to accidental ingress are dealt with in Chapter 9.
Impacts
The airborne radiation emissions are expected to fall on the soil / ground surface, which
may impact the soil processes and its property. But as mentioned earlier the air born
radiological emissions will be well within the prescribed limit. Thus deposition of the
same on soil will not have any impact on the soil in the surroundings. Overall impact on
soil would be insignificant.
Mitigation Measures
No solid wastes are discharged outside exclusion zone boundary to the environment and
spent fuel is stored in underwater, underground ponds and cooled continuously. It is
usually kept in this manner for several months to a few years and later taken up for
reprocessing on batch to batch basis.
The radiological emissions through the air, water and solid wastes will be well within the
prescribed norms and there will be limited discharge of conventional air and water
pollutants during the plant operations. Thus a change in aquatic and terrestrial ecological
features is not anticipated.
Decommissioning activity may also result in radioactive effluents. However, the same
will be done strictly as per the guidelines of AERB and thus no adverse impact is
anticipated.
5.5.3
Conventional Pollutants During Plant Operation
5.5.3.1 Air Environment

No direct use of fossil fuel in the plant process. The high speed diesel for testing /
operation of emergency diesel generator sets will be used. Nuclear power contributes
very little to atmospheric CO2 or sulphur or nitrogen oxide levels. On an average around
8 grams of CO2/KWh is released.
Page 189
Chapter 5

A separate Control Building, common for the 700 MWe units 1 and 2 is provided. Each
700 MWe unit has two Station Auxillary Buildings (SAB). SAB are provided to house
emergency power. SABs 1A and 2A are located on either side of the Control Building of
unit 1 & 2, while SABs 1B and 2B are located abutting the Nuclear Buildings for unit 1 &
2, respectively. The same set of arrangement of SAB is there for the 700MWe unit 3 and
4. Two D.G. sets are located in each Station Auxiliary Building (SAB), making the total
number of DG sets available for each 700 MWe unit four, i.e total eight DG sets will be
there for one twin unit 1 and 2 and total 16 for the HAPP 1 to 4.
For each unit of 700MWe there are 4 DG sets. Each DG is of capacity 4.2 MW with fuel
consumption of 233g/KWhr (233g/KW/hr) or 979kg/hr. One DG set is sufficient for
supplying power to one 700MWe reactor. However, provision of 3 standby DG sets has
been kept for emergency situation. The fuel provision for fuel storage is 200KL for one
DG operating for 7 days (other 3 DG sets as standby). The DGs are required during
power failure emergency situation only. One DG set is tested for to 1.0 hour in a
week. The other DG sets kept under standby are tested in subsequent weeks. Thus 4
DG set will run for maximum one hour during testing period for the four units of HAPP
and during emergency situation 4 DG sets will run for 24 hours during emergency power
failure situation.
A common stack of 30 m will be provided to vent out the flue gases from the DGs of
each SAB. The stack height is estimated as per MoEF Notification GSR 489 (E) July,
2002 for estimation of stack height of DG set depending upon the 4.2MW capacity. The
diesel consumption will be about 979kg/hr. The test run of DG will be carried out for one
hour for once a week.
In order to predict impacts on ambient air quality due to DG sets operation on regular
and emergency basis proposed at HAPP site, data on emission scenario and
micrometeorology data collected at site and along with stability class data collected from
India Meteorology Department (IMD) were used to predict Ground Level Concentrations
(GLCs) of SO2, NOx and PM.
Table 5.4a: Stack Details and Emissions from DG Sets
SN
1
2
3
4
Stack ID
SAB 1A - DG1
SAB 2A DG1
SAB 3A DG1
SAB 4A DG1
Capacity
Stack
(MW) Height Internal STP Flow Exit Vel.
(m)
Dia.
Rate
(m/s)
3
(m)
(Nm /hr)
4.2
30
1.2
39000.0
20
4.2
30
1.2
39000.0
20
4.2
30
1.2
39000.0
20
4.2
30
1.2
39000.0
20
Exit Gas
Temp. (k)
623
623
623
623
Emission Rate
SO2 NOx PM
(g/s) (g/s) (g/s)
0.685
0.685
0.685
0.685
0.695
0.695
0.695
0.695
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
Methodology: Impact Assessment on Air Environment

The proposed plant will have an impact on the air environment. While the impact of
fugitive emissions will be within the project area, the effect of emissions from the point
Page 190
Chapter 5

sources is a major concern as it will have an impact on the ambient air quality in the
surrounding area.
For prediction of impacts for any proposed project vis-a-vis to assess the impacts due to
increase in pollution load, in general, contributions from the proposed units is added to
the existing back ground AAQ concentrations and predictions is done accordingly.
Once the pollutants are emitted into the atmosphere, the dilution and dispersion of the
pollutants are controlled by various meteorological parameters like wind speed and
direction, ambient temperature, mixing height, etc. In most dispersion models the
relevant atmospheric layer is that nearest to the ground, varying in thickness from
several hundred to a few thousand meters. Variations in both thermal and mechanical
turbulence and in wind velocity are greatest in the layer in contact with the surface. The
atmospheric dispersion modeling and the prediction of ground level pollutant
concentrations has great relevance in the following activities:
-
Estimation of impact of setting up of new industry on surrounding environment.

Estimation of maximum ground level concentration and its location in the study area.
The prediction of Ground level concentrations (GLC) of pollutants emitted from the
stacks have been carried out using ISCST-3 Air Quality Simulation model released by
USEPA which is also accepted by Indian statutory bodies. This model is basically a
Gaussian dispersion model which considers multiple sources. The model accepts hourly
meteorological data records to define the conditions of plume rise for each source and
receptor combination for each hour of input meteorological data sequentially and
calculates short term averages up to 24 hours. The impact has been predicted over a 10
km X 10 km area with the proposed location of the stack as the centre. GLC have been
calculated at every 500 m grid point.
Accordingly, the emissions are estimated and the details of the proposed stacks and
emissions from them are given in Table 5.4a.
Stack details like height, top diameter, exit velocity etc of all the stacks are taken from
similar facilities. However, these stack details may be changed at the detailed
engineering stage and as per design of know-how supplier, prevailing emission factors
as available in literature for DG sets and different statutory regulations prevailing in the
country.
Meteorological data plays an important role in computation of Ground Level
Concentration using ISCST-3 model. Meteorological data of the project site is another
input required for computation of the contribution by the proposed plant. The parameters
required are:
Wind velocity and direction
Stability
Mixing height
Page 191
Chapter 5

Data related to wind velocity and direction were generated during the monitoring period.
Part of this site specific monitored data have been used as input data of the model
during computation.
The hourly occurrence of various stability classes at the project site is also an important
input parameter to the model. Further site specific mixing depth (mixing height or
convective stable boundary layer and inversion height or nocturnal stable boundary
layer) is also an important input parameter for computation and assessment of realistic
dispersion of pollutants. There are different methods for generating these parameters,
but in the present case data published by CPCB in Spatial distribution of hourly mixing
depth over Indian region have been used. The input meteorological data used in the
computation are presented in Table 5.4b and uniform Cartesian grid system was used to
locate/fix sources and receptors in the study area. The predicted GLC values are given
in Table 5.4c.
The above computation is considering the stack emissions only and does not take into
account any changes in the fugitive emission. However, since the fugitive emissions are
being released mainly from near ground sources, are not expected to travel / disperse to
a longer distance to reach beyond the plant boundary and thus are not expected to have
any impact on the ambient air.
As stated earlier that out of the total sixteen DG sets only four will be in use and rest 12
will on standby. Thus at a time of test run or during emergency situation only four DG
sets will run. As a conservative approach the worst scenario prediction were done for
the two scenarios, as follows:
Scenario 1: When 4 DG sets are running for 1 hour per week for test run.
Scenario 2: When in emergency situation in case there is a power failure 4 DG set
runs for 24hrs.
For the above two scenarios, ISCST3 model is used to predict the GLCs for operation of
four DG sets as per the above two scenarios.
Table 5.4b: Meteorological Data used as Input for Air Quality Modeling
Hour
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Wind Speed
(m/s)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
Ambient Air
Temp. (K)
294.5
294.5
293.4
292.9
291.7
290.5
290.4
290.4
291
295.4
300.9
304.4
Predominant Wind
Direction (N as 1800)
360
315
315
315
360
360
315
315
315
315
315
315
Hourly Stability
Class
6
6
6
6
5
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Mixing
Depth (m)
50
50
40
40
30
80
100
275
510
800
1300
1500
Page 192
Chapter 5

Wind Speed
Ambient Air
Predominant Wind
Hourly Stability
0
(m/s)
Direction
(N
as
180
)
Class
Temp. (K)
13
3
305.4
315
2
14
2
306.5
315
3
15
3
307.5
315
3
16
2
308.6
315
3
17
1
308.6
293
4
18
1
308.9
293
4
19
1
306.8
270
5
20
1
304
315
5
21
1
303.3
315
5
22
1
301.8
270
5
23
1
301
270
6
24
1
299.7
315
6
1= Extremely Unstable, 2= Moderately Unstable, 3= Slightly Unstable,
4 = Neutral, 5= Slightly Stable, 6= Moderately Stable
Hour
Mixing
Depth (m)
1600
1750
1850
1700
1500
1300
900
725
300
200
100
50
Results: Impact on Air Environment

The resultant ambient air concentrations after the setting up atomic power plant if the
DG sets are run for 24 hrs continuously has been presented in Table 5.4c for PM, SO2 &
NOx and that if run for one hour in a week is presented in Table 5.4d. The isopleths for
dispersion values for one hour running of DG sets are not shown as the change in AAQ
will be for very short duration during one hour testing of DG sets. However, the Isopleths
of 24hr continuous running of DG sets for SO2, NOx and SPM are presented in Fig. 5.2a,
5.2b & 5.2c, respectively. It can be seen that all the respective values of different
parameters are well within the National Ambient Air Quality norms. Under this scenario
also it may be noted that even running of DG sets for 24 hours is also not a regular
feature of the project and will only happen in worst scenario when electric supply is
disrupted for 24 hours continuously. Thus it is anticipated that there will not be any
adverse changes in AAQ in the study area due to the proposed project.
Table 5.4c Expected Ambient Air Quality after proposed plant
Pollutants
Monitored
C98 (g/m3)
Anticipated Maximum contribution of

AAQ after
pollutants in g/m3 due to proposed plant
proposed plant
(g/m3)
(maximum GLC occurrence co-ordinate)
Four DG sets of 4.2 MW capacity each during emergency running continuously for 24 hrs
RPM
87.0
1.5 (18, 2.5km)
88.5
SO2
19.0
1.29 (17, 2.5km)
20.3
NOx
40.0
1.3 (17, 2.5km)
41.3
*Concentrations are in g/m3 and of 24 hours averaging time. Values in the parenthesis indicate
the coordinates of the grid points in Km (10, 10 km) is the centre of the plant.
.
Table 5.4d: Expected Ambient Air Quality for One Hour when DG Sets Running for
One Hour / Week
Pollutants
SO2
NOx
SPM
During day time (ug/m )

4.2 (10.5,9.5)km
4.3 (10.5,9.5)km
4.95 (10.5,9.5)km
During Night time(ug/m )

4.79 (10, 1)km
4.86 (10, 1)km
5.6 (10, 1)km
Page 193
Chapter 5

Mitigation Measures
Nuclear power contributes very little to atmospheric CO2 or sulphur or nitrogen oxide or
particulate matter from process. During the design phase all efforts have been made to
adopt latest state of art technology and to install adequate pollution control measures
and for possible fugitive emission sources. The following mitigation measures will be
employed during operation period to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
To ensure that all the pollution control facilities envisaged at the design stage are
have been implemented and are functioning properly.
Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of different pollution control facilities
attached to major stacks.
Air monitoring in the Work-zone to ensure proper functioning of fugitive emission
control facilities.
Adequate plantation in and around different units.
Vehicles and machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions confirm
to the applicable standards.
Monitoring of ambient air quality through online AAQ monitoring system at three
locations and through manual means at three locations (once in a year).
Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect them from
inhaling dust.
The test running of all the four DG sets for one hour in a week will not be taken up
collectively at a time. Only one DG set will be tested at a time for one hour and
remaining three will be taken up in subsequent hour / day of the week.
Page 194
Chapter 5

Maximum GLC: 1.29 g/m3 at (18000m, 2500m)

Figure No. 5.2a: Isopleths (24 hrs average) for SO2 Concentration due to Proposed
Project, Plant Centre taken as Km (10, 10 km) and the Circle shown is 10km Radius
around Plant Centre.
Page 195
Chapter 5


Figure No. 5.2b: Isopleths (24 hrs average) for NOx Concentration Due to Proposed
Project, Plant Centre taken as Km (10, 10 km) and the Circle shown is 10km Radius
around Plant Centre.
Page 196
Chapter 5


Figure No. 5.2c: Isopleths (24 hrs average) for Particulate Matter Concentration Due to
Proposed Project, Plant Centre taken as Km (10, 10 km) and the Circle shown is
10km Radius around Plant Centre.
Page 197
Chapter 5

5.5.3.2 Water Environment

Water environment may be affected by the proposed project in different ways. The water
environment may be surface or ground water or both. Water environment may be
affected by the industry due to drawl of water, discharge of polluted water / waste water,
by contaminated leachate from land disposal / dumping of solid waste, and by change in
drainage pattern of the area. The present activities are scrutinized in light of the above
factors and its impact is predicted accordingly.
Effect of Water Drawl (Surface water and Ground water) on Water Regime
Impacts
During construction phase - for construction and other miscellaneous uses 1000m3/day
of water will be drawn during the construction phase of the proposed project from
Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra canal, which is having sufficient water for supply to the
proposed project and thus no impact is envisaged on the water supply and users of
Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra canal.
During operation phase - the proposed plant draws its raw water requirement from plant
makeup storage reservoir which in turn receives water from Fatehabad Branch of
Bhakra canal. Water is supplied to the plant for different activities from the reservoir
directly. In addition to this, water is also supplied to the plant from the reservoir after
treating it in a water treatment plant. Consent for allocation of 32652 m3/hr of water for
the proposed project from the Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra canal has been assured by
the State Government (Annexure III).
No ground water will be drawn for the project, thus the impact on ground water due to
drawl of ground water by the proposed project is not envisaged.
Mitigation Measures
No impact envisaged on water regime is envisaged.
Various water conservation schemes envisaged to reuse the wastewater generated
in the plant are :
- Blow down water from power plant from cooling tower (NDCTs, IDCTs and other
miscellaneous plant drains) will be mixed with low radioactive waste to provide
the required dilution at the point of discharge to meet the AERB limits.
In addition, rain water harvesting and monitoring of ground water levels in and
around the area of the proposed project will be done.
The sewage from township will be treated in sewage treatment plant and will be used
for gardening purposes and the excess will be discharged to out of the township. The
discharge sewage will meet the respective MOE&F norm. Total sewage generated
from township will be about 34 m3/hr or 816 KLD per day and from plant will be
3.5m3/hr or 100 KLD per day. The two will be used for green belt development in
the respective areas.
Page 198
Chapter 5

Flood Analysis:
The project site is within 10 km radius of Bhakra Canal. The Fatehabad Branch of
Bhakra Canal is fully lined and hence there is very low probability of canal breach. The
flood analysis report is attached as Annexure II. The flood analysis report is briefed
under Section 5.4.2.
Water Usage
Background
In an Atomic Power Plant wastewater may be generated from different units / shops. The
liquid waste streams generated from the plant are segregated at source and are
(LESS) area. The waste management design philosophy is based on the principle of
ALARA (As low As Reasonably Achievable). The impact and mitigation measures for
radioactive liquid waste are given under Section 5.5.2.2.
Impacts
Substantial heat is generated during the process and water is used as one of the
coolants. For HAPP closed loop cooling tower are used hence there will not be any
discharge of heated effluent to the receiving water body.
Sewage effluents from pant and township may contaminate the receiving water
bodies.
Mitigation Measures
Thermal pollution: The closed loop cooling towers will be used, which will reduce the
possibility of discharge of thermal pollution to the aquatic environment of receiving
water body. No thermal effluents are discharged into water bodies at any stage of the
project.
A sewage treatment plant with zero discharge is envisaged for both township as well
as project area.
Effluent from DM plant is led to the STP after adequate neutralisation and settling.
Treated sewage effluents are recycled to the extent possible for green belt, lawn and
horticulture and road dust suppression.
The excess remaining treated sewage is dispersed over land during non-rainy
season.
However, during rainy season the treated sewage will be discharged to nearby
surface drains in the area, which will be meeting the surface water discharge criteria
of CPCB.
In the light of the above no significant change in the physico-chemical properties and
ecological features of the receiving water bodies is expected.
Page 199
Chapter 5

Ground Water
Impacts
For construction and other miscellaneous uses 1000m3/day of water will be drawn
during the initial phase of the proposed project from Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra canal.
Hence no impact on ground water availability around the plant is anticipated.
The waste disposal area around any industry is one of the major factors deteriorating
ground water quality, if the water leached from the waste dumps contains toxic
substances. At the proposed plant, all wastes are dumped in secured land fill sites and
only inert wastes, like sludge from sewage treatment plant of township is used for
gardening purposes. All other solid wastes containing radio-activity elements are
handled and dumped as per the guidelines of AERB.
Mitigation Measures
Periodical monitoring of ground water quality at up-gradient and down gradient of the
plant area.
Disposal of waste generated from the proposed project will be done in a systematic /
scientific manner as per guidelines of AERB to prevent any ground water pollution.
5.5.3.3 Area Drainage and Surroundings
Impact
The project may disrupt the natural drainage of the area and surroundings.
The area is semiarid with low rainfall and flat terrain without any well defined natural
drainage system. There are no natural drainage channels passing through project
and township areas. The general slope of the project site is away from canal to south
direction. The drainage is of inland type and the excess rainwater, accumulates in
natural /artificial depressions.
Mitigation Measures
Impact on drainage of the area is not anticipated.
A detailed site topographic survey of the project site and surroundings will be
undertaken and the site features will be so designed that the area and surrounding
drainages are not obstructed.
The power project and the township will have their separate storm water drainage
systems, designed for the rainfall and drainage of the area. The storm water
drainage from the project and township will be led to the Bhakra canal to avoid
flooding of the surrounding.
No construction / dumping activities will be done for establishment and operation of
the proposed project so as to disrupt the drainage pattern of the area.
Any adverse impact on the drainage pattern of the area is not anticipated.
Page 200
Chapter 5

5.5.3.4 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The impact and mitigation measures due to radioactive solid wastes generated from the
project are given under Section 5.5.2.3. Apart from the radioactive solid waste no other
type of industrial solid waste is expected to be generated from the project.
5.5.3.5 Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal
As per MOE&F S.O. 2265 (E), 2008, Clause 2(C) Radioactive wastes are covered under
the Atomic Energy Act 1962 (33 of 1962) and hence the radioactive waste will not be
taken up under hazardous waste in the report.
Impacts
Hazardous wastes generation and its utilization for the proposed plant are given in Table
5.5.
Table 5.5: Expected for Hazardous Waste Generation and its Disposal
S
N
1
Hazardous waste Generated Quantity t, KL

from
or Nos. / Year
Spent / Wash / Lubricant (Category 13.7
Lit/
5.1 & 20.2 of Schedule I)
day
Lead Acid Battery (Category B4 &

E3 of Schedule II)
Total
535
Cells will be
used
in
different
part of the
plant.
Mode of Disposal
Active Organic Liquid waste like Oil,
lubricants, scintillation liquid etc are burnt
along with low level solid waste using the
incinerator. No active organic liquid waste
will be disposed.
Collected from garage / shops and kept in
the central stores area from where it will be
sold / auctioned to the registered re-cyclers
as per. - The Batteries (Management and
Handling) Rules, 2001 and its amendments.
.
Mitigation Measures
All hazardous wastes to be disposed in secured landfill as per statutory norms.
5.5.3.6 Noise Levels
Impacts
The main sources of noise in the nuclear power plant are 1) Turbines, 2) Air
Compressors, 3) Ventilation inlets, 4) Diesel Generators, 5) Pump House Equipments, 6)
Chillers, 7) Vents, 8) Exhaust Fans and 9) Heavy and medium automobiles moving
around the plant. The noise levels likely to be generated by these sources are presented
in Table 5.6a. It is likely that improved technology may further reduce the noise levels.
Most of the machines will be working continuously round the clock during operation of
the nuclear power plant. However, these machines would be housed in acoustic
enclosures / buildings such that they would not be contributing any additional noise
levels in the surrounding environment.
Page 201
Chapter 5

Table 5.6a: Main Sources of Noise from Different Equipments & their Noise Levels
SN.
Location of Source
Noise level in dB
Distance from
(A)
Noise Source (m)
1
Chillier and compressor Room
98 - 105
2
2
Boiler Feed Pump area unit I
95
2
3
Turbo Generator 1st Floor
95 105
2
4
Boiler Feed pump are unit -2
95
2
5
Turbo Generator 2nd floor
95- 105
2
6
Up grading Plant
90 -95
2
7
CWPH
90-95
2
8
PWPH
90-93
2
Source : NPCIL
Note:
1. All the above-mentioned equipments will be housed in properly designed and engineered
buildings, which will work as protective enclosures.
2. The occupancy of human beings like occupational workers on continuous basis is not
envisaged in the areas around these equipments
Prediction of Impacts on Community

During the operation phase noise will be generated from different sources. With
increasing distance from the source the noise level decreases due to wave divergence.
Additional decrease also occurs due to atmospheric effects and interaction with objects
in the transmission paths. For hemispherical sound wave propagation through
homogeneous medium, one can estimate the noise levels at various locations due to
different sources using a model based on the following principle :
Lp2 = Lp1 20 Log (r2/r1), where Lp1 and Lp2 are the sound levels at points located at
distance r1 and r2 from the source.
Combined effect of all the sources (A,B,C,. Etc) can be determined at various
locations by the following equation :
Lptotal = 10 Log (10lpa/10 + 10lpb/10 + 10lpc/10 ..), where Lpa, Lpb and
Lpc are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.
Based on the above principle a Noise Model has been developed in house, which has
been used to predict the noise. The noise level contours due to the noise sources in
units of the proposed Atomic Power Plant without considering noise barriers are shown
in Fig. 5.3. Without any barriers viz. buildings and green belt, it is predicted that the
noise levels in the surrounding environment due to above said equipments of the
proposed units at a distance of 500 m will be 52 dB(A) and at 1000 m will be 50 dB(A). It
is also predicted that the noise levels from these sources at 2000 m distance will be <50
dB(A). Therefore, background noise levels in the nearest village i.e. Gorakhpur located
at a distance of 2 km will remain below 50 dB(A).
The maximum noise levels will occur at receptors located near all the proposed units
which are predicted to be less than 60 dB(A) without any barriers viz. buildings. These
noise levels would be significantly reduced when the barrier of building is considered at
the time of operation of plant.
Page 202
Chapter 5

Considering the attenuation due to specially designed building within which noise
generating machineries will be housed, the increase in noise levels will be around 1-2
dB(A) just outside the building of power plant. Thus, there will not be any change in the
ambient noise levels due to operation of nuclear power plant in the nearest village
Gorakhpur at 2 km distance.
NOISE PRESSURE LVELS
2000
1700
1600
1500
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
Noise lvels in dB(A)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Receptor distance (m)
Fig 5.3: Predicted Noise Levels due to Noise Sources without Considering Attenuation
due to Barriers Like Building and Greenbelt.
As indicated above there will not be any increase in noise levels due to operation of the
proposed project in the nearest village Gorakhpur at 2 km distance. Therefore the
community will not be affected by the operation of the APP at Fatehabad.
Moreover, the predicted noises within the plant premises beyond work zone without
building will be as given in Table 5.6b.
Table 5.6b : Noise level with in existing plant premises beyond work zone
SN.
A
1
2
3
4
B
1
2
3
4
Location
Outside Building
Near Overhead Tank ( North)
Between TB-I & TB-2 (East)
Near Pipe Ramp (south)
Near CAS (West)
Boundary of Operating Island
North of operating island
East of Operating Island
South of Operating Island
West of Operating Island
Noise Level in dB (A)

67.7
69
69
62
71.3
66
66
61.5
Noise in the work place generated from operation of equipment is the only concern from
the point of view of occupational health.
Page 203
Chapter 5

Prediction of Impact on Occupational Health

Equivalent sound pressure level, 8 hrs average, (Leq 8 hrs), is used to describe exposure
to noise in workplaces. The damage risk criteria for hearing loss, enforced by
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA) USA and stipulated by other
organizations, is that noise levels up to 90 dB(A) are acceptable for eight hours
exposure per day. Ministry of Labour, Government of India has also recommended
similar criterion vide Factories Act, Schedule No. XXIV (Government Notification
FAC/1086/CR-9/Lab-4, dated 8/2/1988).
The noise levels in the building are predicted to be 90 dB(A). However, the workers in
the noise zone area will be provided with protective equipments like ear muffs and as a
result the occupational exposure of the workers is reduced considerably within stipulated
limits.
Mitigation Measures
The noise levels of high speed machinery like compressors, fans and blowers are in the
range of 90-110 dB(A). Various measures proposed to reduce noise level at source are,
acoustic enclosures, hoods, acoustic lagging for the equipment and suction side
silencers, vibration isolators, selection of low noise equipment, isolation of noisy
equipment from working personnel. ID and FD fans will be provided with silencers and
the fan casing will be properly insulated. So that the sound pressure level exposure in
working areas is restricted below 90 dB(A) for 8 hours duty. Noise proof and air
conditioned control room will be provided for operators wherever required.
All equipments would be designed / operated to have a noise level not exceeding 85
dBA (A) at a distance of 1m as per the requirement of Occupational Safety and Health
Administration Standard (OSHA). In addition, since most of the noise generating
equipments would be in closed structures, the noise transmitted outside would be still
lower. The presence of an exclusion zone (1km) will serve to insulate whatever little
noise is generated.
Noise in the work place generated from operation of equipment is the only concern from
the point of view of occupational health and the operating experience of other Atomic
Power Projects supports this view.
The following measures will be undertaken to reduce noise generation from source:
Technological Measures
Plugging leakages in high-pressure gas/air pipelines.

Reducing vibration of high speed rotating machines by regular monitoring of
vibration and taking necessary steps.
Design of absorber system for the shift office and pulpit operator's cabin.
Noise absorber systems in pump houses.
Noise level at 1m from equipment will be limited to 85 dB (A).
The fans and ductwork will be designed for minimum vibration.
Page 204
Chapter 5

All the equipment in different units will be designed/operated in such a way that
the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A).
Periodical monitoring of work zone noise and outside plant premises.
Management Measures
In Atomic Power Plant, with a variety of noise producing equipment, it may not be
practicable to take technological control measures at all the places. In such cases the
following administrative measures shall also be taken:
Un-manned high noise zone will be marked as High Noise Zone".
In shops where measures are not feasible, attempts shall be made to provide
operators with sound-proof enclosure to operate the system.
Workers exposed to noise level will be provided with protection devices like ear
muffs/ ear plugs and will be advised to use them regularly, while at work.
Workers exposed to noisy work place shall be provided with rotational duties.
The duration of exposure of the personnel will be limited as per the norms.
All workers will be regularly checked medically for any noise related health
problem and if detected, they will be provided with alternative duty.
Over and above all these adopted measures, trees and shrubs belts of substantial
depths within and surrounding plant premises will further attenuate the sound levels
within limits reaching the receptors out side the plant premises.
5.5.3.7 Ecological Features
Impacts
Erection and commissioning of the project may change the land-use pattern of the
area and may cause significant loss of habitat / agricultural land, which is
unavoidable.
During construction some existing vegetation / crops on the project site may be cut /
damaged.
The construction and operation of the project may cause direct impact to the fauna
present in the area.
Emissions from plant operation may affect the natural vegetation and agricultural
crops around the proposed plant.
The thresh-hold limit for continuous exposure of SO2 on plants is about 50 ug/m3
and that for NOx is 100 ug/m3 (Env. Engg., Chapter 7 by H. S. Pavy, D. R. Rowe,
G.T. Chobanoglous. Mc.Graw-Hill Book Co.1986). The level of air pollutants due to
DG set operation (only occasionally) will be much below the above said level. Thus it
is expected that the natural vegetation in the area will not be affected. So far as
agriculture crops are concerned, as they will remain in the field for three to six
months only, the impact on the same is also not anticipated.
Page 205
Chapter 5

There is no forest area within 10km radius of the project site. Thus it is expected that
the flora and fauna in the study area will not get affected due to the proposed
project.
Noise generated due to the proposed project may cause disturbance to the faunal
species.
Strong light in the project premises during night may cause some disturbance to the
fauna in the near by areas.
The waste water from plant operation and domestic use may cause surface water
pollution in the area.
Mitigation Measures
All care will be taken to avoid cutting of trees growing in the project site.
All technological measures to limit air emissions, waste water discharge and noise
generation are envisaged in the proposed plant design and hence no further
mitigation measures envisaged.
An elaborate green belt / cover already exists which will be further enhanced within
and around the plant as detailed in Chapter 6 to ameliorate the fugitive emissions
and noise from the project operation.
The domestic waste water will be treated and after treatment the same will be reused and recycled within the plant itself and only excess water will be discharged
which will meeting the statutory norm. Thus there will be no impact on the ecological
components of surface water bodies in the area.
Mitigation Measures for Reducing Impacts on Faunal Species
Direct Disturbance: Ten feet high RCC concrete wall fencing is erected all around
the project so that no animals come to the project site. Further a green belt erected
within the fencing (facing the proposed plant expansion) all around the proposed
plant area will further reduce the impact of direct disturbance.
Noise: The maximum noise level reaching out side the proposed plant project
boundary will be below the statutory norms for residential and other areas will be
below the statutory norm. Further the green belt all along the project boundary will
further reduce the noise level so as to cause any disturbance to the faunal species.
Thus the animals in the study area will not get impacted due to the noise from the
proposed project activity.
Strong Light during Night: The strong light in the project premises during night
may cause some disturbance to the fauna in the near by areas. It is proposed that
all the light posts erected along the boundary wall will face inwards and down wards
(with reflectors facing the plant and downwards), so that the light do not spreads out
side the plant boundary.
Page 206
Chapter 5

5.5.3.8 Transportation : Impacts and Mitigation Measures

It is anticipated that the possible impact due to transportation on the surrounding
infrastructure will be only during the construction and operation stage of the project.
Impact
Construction Phase
The anticipated average increase in vehicular movement per day during construction
phase will be as given in Table 5.7a.
Table 5.7a: Average vehicular movement during construction stage
SN
Type of Vehicle
Numbers Plying per

day
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
Trucks
Cars / Jeeps
Over Sized Consignment
Excavator
Wagon Drills
Dozer 80D
Grader
Air Compressors
Drifter
Dumper
(a) 6m3 Capacity
(b) 10m3 Capacity
Poclain
(a) 1.5 cum bucket
(b) 2.0 cum bucket
Front end loader JCB
Tractor mounted water tanker &
sprinkler for dust control
Magzine Van (10T)
Portable Magzine
DG set for batching plant area
Vibratory Road Roller 10 MT
Crushing plant for normal & heavy
aggregate 100 TPH
Remix / transit cars
6 cum capacity
3 cum capacity
125
30
1
2
8
2
1
500 CFM
3
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Type of Impact - Plying at

Construction site only
In the Region
In the Region
In the Region
In the Region
30
3
6
2
2
5000 liters capacity
2 numbers
2
3
As required
1
1
10
3

A total of maximum 125 trucks (HMV) per day will be running in the region for the
construction material requirement of the plant. For traffic volume estimation, considering
receipt of construction materials in two shifts (16hrs.) about 8 trucks per hour (incoming / returning trucks) will be additionally running on the road leading to the project
site. Similarly for Cars / Jeeps (LMV) about 2 vehicles will be running in the region for
the construction requirement of the plant. It is anticipated that oversized consignment
vehicle will be plying at the most one vehicle per day in the region. While other vehicles
Page 207
Chapter 5

as mentioned under serial number 4 to 9 (Table 5.7a), once moved to the project site
will be running at the site only and hence has not been considered further for estimation
of enhanced traffic load.
The increase in traffic load on NH10 due to the project is shown in Table 5.7b. It can be
seen that there will be only 3% increase in the traffic load over the existing traffic
volume. However, this increase will be temporary and will be there only during
construction stage. Thus it is anticipated that there will be not much impact of the project
on existing traffic load.
Moreover from air pollution point of view, increase in a maximum of 3% PCU per day will
be insignificant. Thus it can be said that impact of vehicular movement due to material
and manpower transport on the air environment will not be there.
Table 5.7b: Increase in Traffic Load on NH10 During Construction Phase
Time Hour
Existing#
PCU
Additional from Plant Operation

Heavy
Cars
Two
Additional
Motor
Wheelers PCU due
Vehicles
to the
Project
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
8
2
0
27
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
128
32
0
432
Total
Final
PCU after
Project
6.00 AM to 6.59 A.M

322.5
350
7.00 AM to 7.59 A.M
380.5
408
8.00 AM to 8.59 A.M
270
297
9.00 AM to 9.59 A.M
702.5
730
10.00 AM to 10.59 A.M
423.5
451
11.00 AM to 11.59 A.M
314
341
12.00 AM. to 12.59 PM
289.5
317
1.00 PM to 1.59 PM
592.5
620
2.00 PM to 2.59 PM
626.5
654
3.00 PM to3.59 PM
834.5
862
4.00 PM to 4.59 PM
760.5
788
5.00 PM to 5.59 PM
728.5
756
6.00 PM to 6.59 PM
727.5
755
7.00 PM to 7.59 PM
764.5
792
8.00 PM to 8.59 PM
806
833
9.00 PM to 9.59 PM
776.5
804
10.00 PM to 10.59 PM
837.5
838
11.00 PM to 11.59 PM
864.5
865
12.00 PM to12.59 PM
902
902
1.00 AM to 1.59 AM
831.5
832
2.00 AM to 2.59 AM
479.5
480
3.00 AM to 3.59 AM
388.5
389
4.00 AM to 4.59 AM
306.5
307
5.00 AM to 5.59 AM
279
279
Total Per Day
14208.5
14641
% Increase in PCU
3
# From Table 3.16a
Passenger Car Unit (PCU) : 3 for HMV, 1.5 for LMV; 0.5 for Two Wheelers as per IRC.
Page 208
Chapter 5

Operation and Maintenance Phase

As there is no bulk transportable finished / waste product from the APP, except for the
generated electricity, thus the anticipated increase in vehicular movement will only be
due to transportation of project personnel from township to the project site. However, as
per the usual practice in APP except for the very high officials, busses are provided and
that too this will be plying on the road between township and HAPP. The same will be of
very low volume to cause any concern to the traffic load on the regional transport
infrastructure.
There may be minor increase in vehicular movement in the region during maintenance
phase but will be of very low volume to cause any concern to the traffic load on the
regional transport infrastructure.
Transportation Arrangement for Project Personnel : Operation Phase
The mode of transportation of project personnel from township to the project site has
been worked out based on the township is given in Table 5.7c. The number of busses
required under each category is based on 40 seated busses. For estimation purpose
timing for different shifts considered are as follows:
Shift A
: 07.00 15.00 hrs.
Shift B
: 15.00 23.00 hrs.
Shift C
: 23.00 07.00 hrs.
General Shift
: 09.00 17.00 hrs.
Table 5.7c: NPCIL Manpower at Site (Based on Township Strength)
Project Personnel
Category
Top Officials
Security Personnel
Managerial &
Executives
Skilled & Nonmanagerial
Total
Vehicle
Type
Used
Staff Car
Staff Bus
Staff Bus
Numbers
10
500
890
General Shift
Shift A / B / C (Numbers)
(Numbers)
Project
Car/
Project
Car / Vehicles
Personnel
Bus Personnel Bus per shift
%
Total
%
Total
Total
100
10
10
0
0
0
0
20
100
3
80
400
10
3
60
534
13
40
356
9
3
Staff Bus
300
45
1700
135
779
55
165
921
1
8
The project personnel transportation arrangement between township and the project site
during operation phase will be as follows:
Security Personnel: There will be four fleet of busses, designated as Fleet 1 to 4.
There will be three busses in each fleet - for carrying security personnel between
township and project site. The fleets are designated as Fleet 1 to 4. The duty / plying
roster along with timing is given in Table 5.7d.
Managerial / Executives: There will be four fleet of busses, designated as Fleet 1 to
4. The Fleet 1, 3, and 4 will be having 3 busses and fleet 2 will be having 13 busses
(Table 5.7d), for carrying managerial / excusive staff between township and the
project site.
Page 209
Chapter 5

Non-managerial / Non-executive: There will be four fleet of busses designated as

Fleet 1 to 4. The Fleet 1, 3, and 4 will be having one 1 buss each and fleet 2 with 3
busses (Table 5.7d), for transporting non-managerial staff between township and the
project site.
The total staff busses plying between township and the project site during operation
phase is given in Table 5.7e. For parking these vehicles there will be designated parking
area at the project site and at the township.
Table 5.7d: Number of Busses with Timing for Transporting Project Personnel from
Township to the Project Site
SN.
Fleet No.
Security Staff
1
Fleet 1
Buses)
2
Fleet 2
Buses)
3
Fleet 1
Buses)
4
Fleet 3
Buses)
5
Fleet 2
Buses)
5
Fleet 4
Buses)
6
Fleet 3
Buses)
7
Fleet 4
Buses)
From
Transportation
Time
To
Time
Number of
Busses
Running
(3
Township
06.30
06.45
(3
Township
08.30
(3
Project
site
Township
15.15
Project
Site
Township
17.15
Project
site
Project
site
23.15
(3
(3
(3
(3
(3
Managerial / Executive
1
Fleet 1 (3 Township
Buses)
2
Fleet 2 (13 Township
Buses)
3
Fleet 1 (3 Project
Buses)
site
4
Fleet 3 (3 Township
Buses)
5
Fleet 2 (13 Project
Buses)
Site
5
Fleet 4 (3 Township
Buses)
6
Fleet 3 (3 Project
Buses)
site
7
Fleet 4 (3 Project
Buses)
site
14.30
22.30
07.15
Project site
Purpose
Carrying Shift A personnel

for duty
Project site 08.45
Carrying General Shift
personnel for duty
Township
15.30
back from duty
Project site 14.45
Carrying Shift B personnel
for duty
Township
17.30
personnel back from duty
Project site 22.45
for duty
Township
23.30
back from duty
Township
07.30
back from duty
Total Number of Busses (cumulative all fleets)
06.30
Project site
06.45
08.30
Project site
08.45
15.15
Township
15.30
14.30
Project site
14.45
17.15
Township
17.30
22.30
Project site
22.45
23.15
Township
23.30
07.15
Township
07.30

for duty
personnel for duty
back from duty
for duty
Carrying Shift C personnel
for duty
back from duty
back from duty
Page 210
Chapter 5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
12
3
13
3
3
13
3
3
3

SN.
Fleet No.
From
Transportation
Time
To
Purpose
Time

Skilled / Non-executives
1
Fleet 1 (3 Township
Buses)
2
Fleet 2 (13 Township
Buses)
3
Fleet 1 (3 Project
Buses)
site
4
Fleet 3 (3 Township
Buses)
5
Fleet 2 (13 Project
Buses)
Site
5
Fleet 4 (3 Township
Buses)
6
Fleet 3 (3 Project
Buses)
site
7
Fleet 4 (3 Project
Buses)
site
06.30
08.30
15.15
14.30
17.15
22.30
23.15
07.15
Project site
Number of
Busses
Running
22
06.45

for duty
Project site 08.45
personnel for duty
Township
15.30
back from duty
Project site 14.45
for duty
Township
17.30
Project site 22.45
for duty
Township
23.30
back from duty
Township
07.30
back from duty
1
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
6
Table 5.7e: Total Staff Busses Plying Between Township and Project Site
Time
From
To Security Personnel
06.30 06.45 3
07.15 07.30 3
08.30 08.45 3
14.30 14.45 3
15.15 15.30 3
17.15 17.30 3
22.30 22.45 3
23.15 23.30 3
Number of Busses Plying for

Managerial / Executive Skilled / Non-executives
3
1
3
1
13
3
3
1
3
1
13
3
3
1
3
1
Total
7
7
19
7
7
19
7
7
The increase in vehicular movement for manpower transportation of the Atomic Power
Plant operation is shown in Table 5.7f, wherein it can be seen that between 06.00 to
09.00 hrs about 33 busses will be plying additional and between 17.00 to 18.00 hrs
about 19 busses and between 22.00 to 24.00 hrs about 14 busses will be plying
additional on the road. However, as the township is about 4km from the project site, the
volume of traffic indicated will be only for short duration. The existing traffic on this road
is very low and that additional due to plant operation is also low (Table 5.7f). Thus it can
be said that there will be no congestion of traffic on the road leading to project site is
envisaged.
Page 211
Chapter 5

Table 5.7f: Increase in Traffic Density on Road Leading to Project Site from
Township
Time Hour
Existing#
PCU
Additional from Plant Operation

Heavy
Cars
Two
PCU due
Motor
Wheelers
to the
Project
Vehicles
7
0
125
84
7
0
0
21
19
10
0
72
0
0
153
77
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
125
84
7
0
0
21
0
0
0
0
19
10
153
149
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
125
84
7
0
0
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
20
681
610.5
Total
Final PCU
after
Project
90
26
74
77
3
16
14
18
137
85
82
198
51
37
23
44
121
55
35
106
31
12
7
5
1341
46%
6.00 AM to 6.59 A.M

6
7.00 AM to 7.59 A.M
4.5
8.00 AM to 8.59 A.M
2
9.00 AM to 9.59 A.M
0
10.00 AM to 10.59 A.M
3
11.00 AM to 11.59 A.M
15.5
12.00 AM. to 12.59 PM
13.5
1.00 PM to 1.59 PM
17.5
2.00 PM to 2.59 PM
53
3.00 PM to3.59 PM
63.5
4.00 PM to 4.59 PM
82
5.00 PM to 5.59 PM
49.5
6.00 PM to 6.59 PM
51
7.00 PM to 7.59 PM
36.5
8.00 PM to 8.59 PM
22.5
9.00 PM to 9.59 PM
44
10.00 PM to 10.59 PM
37.5
11.00 PM to 11.59 PM
34
12.00 PM to12.59 PM
34.5
1.00 AM to 1.59 AM
105.5
2.00 AM to 2.59 AM
30.5
3.00 AM to 3.59 AM
12
4.00 AM to 4.59 AM
7
5.00 AM to 5.59 AM
5
Total Per Day
730
% Increase in PCU
# From Table 3.16a
Passenger Car Unit (PCU) : 3 for HMV, 1.5 for LMV; 0.5 for Two Wheelers as per IRC.
Moreover from air pollution point of view, increase in a maximum of 80 HMV and 20
Cars per day will be insignificant. Thus it can be said that impact of vehicular movement
due to material and manpower transport on the air environment will be insignificant.
Mitigation Measures
No impact envisaged.
It will be ensured that material transport vehicles during construction phase will be
are in good working condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission
within the permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce
pollution.
It will be ensured that all staff busses during operation phase are in good working
condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission within the permissible
limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce pollution.
Page 212
Chapter 5

Vehicles would be regularly maintained so that emissions confirm to standards of

Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
5.5.3.9 Impacts and Mitigation Measures for Oversized Dimensional Consignment (ODC)
It can be seen from Table 5.7a, that there will be transportation of only one oversized
consignment per day in the region, which may disrupt the traffic at congestion area. The
oversized consignment vehicle will be directed to ply only during night between 10.00
PM to 05.00 AM, to avoid traffic congestion. Further, the existing road from NH-10 to the
project site will be widened to 9 m and strengthened for transporting the ODC to the
project site. The existing bridge at the canal crossing will be strengthened and any
culvulets or other water body will be provided with suitable bridge system. In this regard
the road from Kajalheri head works is also being evaluated for its suitability to bear the
load of ODC.
5.5.4
Water and Energy Conservation Measures

Rain water harvesting measures will be implemented for the proposed project to reuse
the rain water or to recharge the ground water as part of water conservation measures.
Proper functioning of the systems provided will be ensured by regular monitoring.
Energy conservation measures as per the design plan will be implemented so as to bring
energy savings. This will include providing VVVF drives for higher capacity motors, CFL
lamps etc.
5.5.5
Other Measures
The following activities will be carried out in a structured way for the benefit of the
surrounding people through close co-ordination with Personnel Department:
Improvement of social infrastructure through CSR activities like school buildings,
drinking water facilities, street lights, roads, sanitary facilities etc.
Community education & training.
Medical welfare.
Sports activities.
5.5.6
Facilities for Casual Workers / Truck Drivers

The project site is rural area and fairly rich in manpower resources. The manpower
resources available in the region will fulfill the demand of casual labour. Further, for
labours / skilled labour coming from far off places labour colony will be established as
per statutory conditions.
Such labour colonies, if not properly planned, may create environmental pollution,
unsanitary conditions and health problems in the area. However, it has been planned
that the labour colonies with all basic facilities like, sanitation, garbage disposal, safe
Page 213
Chapter 5

drinking water supply, etc will be established to minimize pollution of soil, water and
public health problems.
5.6
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

During operation phase of the project, all the project activities will be carried out as per
the regulations covered under Atomic Energy (Factories) Rules 1996, Electricity Act and
Rules, Explosives Act and Rules, Petroleum Act and Rules etc.
During commissioning, operation and maintenance of the operating units, in addition to
the industrial hazards, the occupational hazard is the exposure to ionizing radiation
within prescribed limits which is governed by the Atomic energy Act and Radiation
Protection Rules. In order to minimize possibility of radiation exposure to the
occupational workers, adequate safety measures are incorporated in the design,
construction, operation and work practices of the plant including the systems associated
with fuel handling and waste management. All the occupational workers undergo
periodical medical check ups, bioassay sampling and whole body counting as
applicable.
Only qualified engineers and technicians are recruited to carry out the design,
construction, operation and maintenance (O & M) of the plant. All O & M personnel
undergo mandatory training (at various levels) in the plant and related subsystems of the
plant through nuclear induction training. A committee consisting of a panel of experts
and a representative from the regulatory agency evaluates designated operating staff for
licensing. The qualification thus obtained will be renewed, periodically
Mitigation Measures
For ensuring better occupational health and safety the following measures will be
provided:
General Measures
Proper control of fugitive dust from sources inside plant to keep all de-dusting
systems in prefect conditions. The de-dusting systems provided in shops will be
regularly monitored and the level of dust in working zone will be reported to the
management for necessary control action.
Keeping ventilation systems of premises in perfect working order to avoid
accumulation of dust on equipment inside the pressurized room. Regular cleaning of
air filters.
Keeping air conditioning plants in perfect running condition for control /
instrumentation rooms.
Proper functioning of pollution / radiation control systems to minimise dust fall /
radiation level within plant and outside areas.
Based on the environmental monitoring for radiation level, dust, gases, toxic
chemical, noise & vibration, the workers exposed to these will be regularly checked
in medical unit and results will be intimated to management.
Page 214
Chapter 5

Workers exposed to noise prone areas will be medically checked and proper noise
protective equipment will be supplied to them and will be encouraged to use the
same.
Spot cooling facilities will be provided for workers exposed to high heat generating
areas and will be checked periodically. If necessary, rotation of duties is advised.
Proper attention is given to township water quality so that water borne disease may
not affect residents.
More doctors in hospital plant medical unit will be additionally trained in the field of
occupational health as policy matter.
House Keeping Measures

Proper house keeping is the key to proper environmental management. This creates
proper working environment for the work force and safe working conditions. However, for
the proposed project the following good house keeping measures will be adopted:
Regular cleaning and watering of plant roads to avoid accumulation of dust/garbage.
Regular cleaning of shop floors.
Avoiding accumulation and dumping of wastes and damaged equipment and items
anywhere inside the plant affecting aesthetics.
Developing a positive outlook in the employees for keeping the work place, both in
factory, office or laboratory, clean and well maintained.
Maintaining hygienic conditions in areas like canteens, near drinking water sources
and toilets.
Personal Protective Equipments
The working personnel will be given the following appropriate personal protective
equipments:
5.7
Industrial Safety Helmet;

Crash Helmets;
Welders equipment for eye and face protection;
Cylindrical type earplug;
Ear muffs;
Boiler suit;
Safety belt / line mans safety belt;
Leather hand gloves;
Acid / Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;
Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;
IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES BECAUSE OF ACCIDENTS

Impacts
It can be observed that there is no hazardous chemicals are stored / handled in the
project.
Page 215
Chapter 5

Mitigation Measures
A detailed risk assessment, on-site / off-site emergency plans & Disaster Management
Plan is given in Chapter 9. In addition, various fixed installations for Fire Detection,
Alarm and Fire fighting will be available to effectively tackle the situation before the fire
escalates into a conflagration. Regular mock drills will be conducted to check the
effectiveness of the system
5.8
IMPACTS DURING DECOMMISSIONING PHASE

At the end of the operating life of the operating units, which would be around 60 years
for PWHR type APPs, proposed to be established at Fatehabad site, a detail
decommissioning plan will be worked out. The process of decommissioning will start
after the final shutdown of the plant and ends with the release of the site for a
responsible organization as authorized by AERB or for unrestricted use by the public.
The decommissioning plan will be prepared by NPCIL & approved by AERB and will be
implemented as stated above. The plan will ensure that there will not be any radioactive
releases in the public domain / environment, thus impact in the public domain due to
decommissioning of the unit will be negligible. The main steps of decommissioning will
be as follows:
5.8.1
General
At the end of life of a nuclear power plant, a programme of decommissioning of the retire
plant is undertaken. This program which has been evolved well in advance will have
provision for the following:
1. Protect public, plant personals and the environment from possible adverse effect
arising during decommissioning
2. Provide measures for protective storage and/or safe disposal of all radioactive waste
arising out of decommissioning operation.
3. Decontaminate equipment and area to acceptable levels of residual activity.
4. Ensure continued protection to public from residual radioactivity and other potential
hazards in the retired Power plant
5. Methods and procedure, including radiological protection aspect for :
- Dismantling of equipment and structure.
- Collection, handling, processing, packaging, transporting and disposing
radioactive wastes.
6. Access control to radioactive areas to prevent spread of radioactive contamination
and to limit radiation doses to personnel.
7. Physical security of all contaminated and radioactive materials.
8. Surveillance and security of the retired nuclear power plant
9. Equipment, material, services and facilities including remote viewing , cutting and
handling tools and equipment required to implement the programme
10. Documentation and records.
Page 216
Chapter 5

5.8.2
Methods
The methods chosen for decommissioning may include any one or a combination of the
following:
1. Mothballing Putting the nuclear power plant in a state of protective storage after
removal of all fuel assemblies, radioactive fluids and wastes from site.
2. Entombment Removal of all fuel assemblies, radioactive fluids and waste from
site and sealing all the remaining radioactive and contaminated components within
a structure integral with the biological shield.
3. Dismantling of all radioactive and contaminated materials and removal from site
and decontamination of the plant area to acceptable levels for unrestricted use of
the site
5.8.3
Procedure
During decommissioning, work methods and procedures will be established to
demarcate areas which contain radioactive or contaminated material and regulate
access to such areas.
5.8.4
Surveillance
Till such time the retired nuclear power plant area is declared fit by AERB for
unrestricted use, the arrangement for surveillance and security of the plant area will
include:
1. Periodic radiation survey of the plant area to verify that no radioactive material is
getting dispersed around the area.
2. Periodic environmental survey to verify that no significant relapse of radioactive
material to the environment has taken place.
3. Round the clock security to enforce access control and prevent unauthorized entry
to the plant area.
4. Inspection of physical barrier for security.
5.8.5
Documentation
A decommissioning report which includes the below mentioned aspects, is issued after
all relevant operation are complete.
1. Details of decommissioning activities carried out.
2. Problems encountered and solution adopted to overcome them.
3. Final state of individual equipment and systems.
4. Type, Location, movement, quantity, and activity level of radioactive wastes.
5. Type, Quantity and activity of radioactive discharges to the environment.
6. Summary of the results of environmental survey and overall assessment of the
impact on the environment due to radioactive relapses.
7. Statistic of personnel exposures and man-ram consumption.
8. Background radiation level in the plant area after decommissioning.
9. Surveillance security arrangements for the plant area after decommissioning.
Page 217
Chapter 5

5.8.6
Decommissioning Cost
In arriving at the capital cost of nuclear power stations, it is normally not the practice to
include decommissioning cost. In recent year all over the world, operating nuclear power
station has started creating decommissioning fund. A Nominal charge is included in the
unit energy cost which will accumulate with interest over the operating life of the power
station for meeting the estimated cost of decommissioning of the station at the end of its
useful life time. In India, the provision of decommissioning charge was introduced since
1984.
Decommissioning experience so far is limited worldwide and no large scale commercial
nuclear power plant has yet been decommissioned. Based on the various studies
conducted abroad and the information available in India, a cost of 1.25 Paisa / Kwh has
been included as the decommissioning levy in Unit Energy Cost (UEC) for all types of
power station in India. This will be updated from time to time based on evolving
decommissioning experience. With effect from October 1991, the decommissioning levy
is revised to 2 paisa/kwh.
5.9
MEASURES FOR MINIMIZING AND / OR OFFSETTING ADVERSE IMPACT

The potential adverse environmental impacts possible verses the mitigation measures
incorporated to minimize the possible impacts, in the proposed plant have been
summarized in brief in Table 5.8.
Table 5.8: Potential Impacts Verses Mitigation Measures Adopted
SN
.
1
Impact
Topics
Physical
Resources
Impact On
Impact Due To
of
Adopted Measures
Air
environment
Release
pollutants
air
Water
environment
Drawl of water &

release of polluted
waste water
Soil
Release of polluted
waste
water,
Deposition of SPM
released, & Dumping
of solid waste
Biological
Resources
Vegetation
Release of polluted
wastewater,
Deposition
of
pollutants released.
Land
acquisition
Land
environment,
Conversion of existing
land use pattern
Incorporation & installation of air pollution

& radiological control systems and
ensuring their effective functioning.
Sufficiency of water availability assessed,
maximum
re-circulation
of
water
envisaged, and Incorporation & installation
of water pollution & radiological control
systems and ensuring their effective
functioning.
Incorporation & installation of air, water
and & radiological pollution control
systems, Handling & disposal of solid
waste including hazardous & radiological
waste in accordance with respective
statutory norms.
The concept of defense-in-depth is
adopted in design of safety systems,
various state of the art safety systems
mechanisms are engineered to ensure
safe operation of the Atomic Power Plant.
Land being acquired by giving adequate
compensation to land owners. Proper
Page 218
Chapter 5

SN
.
Impact
Topics
Impact On
Impact Due To
Aesthetics
4
Noise
Habitats
Hazardous
Substance
Habitat,
Surrounding
environment
Transportat
ion
Social
&
Economic
Habitat,
Surrounding
environment
Human,
livelihood,
Education etc
Cultural
resources
Human
Use of equipment
having
operating
sound level more than
the statutory level.
Release of hazardous
chemicals
Release of pollutant,
Improper
traffic
management.
Influx
of
people,
Settlement, Stress on
existing infrastructure
etc.
Influx
of
people,
Settlement
Adopted Measures
green belt will be erected in and around
the plant premises to maintain aesthetics.
Noise Control measures as required have
been envisaged. All noise levels will be
maintained within the permissible statutory
limits.
Incorporation of different process control
systems,
Safety
features,
Alarm
arrangements, and follow up of Disaster
management / Emergency response plan
Use of vehicles meeting the statutory
norms related to emission, proper traffic
management.
No negative impact envisaged. Moreover
additional social improvement activities
have also been planned by the project
management in the region.
No negative impact envisaged.
However, the detailed technological aspects of mitigation measures are given in

Chapter 6.
5.9.1
Irreversible and Irretrievable Commitments of Environmental Components

The project is not expected to create any irreversible and irretrievable impacts because
of the following:
The PAPs, whose houses (Dhanis in Haryana) are going to be acquired will be paid
due compensation as per the R&R Policy of the state.
All the impacts created by the project can be mitigated by adoption of suitable
mitigation measures.
5.10
ASSESSMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
5.10.1 General
The assessment of effects of a particular action judgment must be made as to whether
these effects are Significant. Significance is a relative concept, which reflects the
degree of importance placed on the impact in question. Having identified the events
associated with the proposed activity and their potential consequences, the next issue
required to be addressed is the extent to which these make the proposed activity
environmentally significant. In developing the criteria for determining this, the criteria
outlined in the different guidelines for determining the level of environmental impact were
considered.
These criteria entail an assessment of the level of certainty in the prediction of an
Page 219
Chapter 5

activitys potential environmental consequences (Predictability Criterion), combined

with an assessment of the degree to which these consequences can be managed
(Manageability Criterion).
The predictability criterion involves determining the level of certainty in the prediction of
different issues for each of the events and their potential environmental consequences
associated with the activity.
The manageability criterion focuses on the extent to which the potential environmental
consequences can be either avoided or minimised in terms of size, scope and duration.
It is based on the recognition that minimising the environmental impact of an activity
primarily entails managing the environmental consequence(s) of those activities by
either avoiding them in the first place or by mitigating them to as low as reasonably
practical. From the significance scores for the predictability and manageability criteria,
the level of environmental significance for each of the potential events associated with
the proposed activity can then be determined as High, Medium or Low on the basis of
environmental significance matrix.
The steps followed for assessing the significance are presented schematically in Fig. 5.4
below. The aspect of environment and their environmental consequences considered
are presented in Table 5.9.
Table 5.9: Events and their Environmental Consequences
Aspect of
Environment
Category of
Impact
Soil Impact
Air Impacts
Surface &
Ground
Water
Impacts
Natural
Environment
Social
Environment
Fauna
Impacts
Flora
Impacts
Sensitive
Area Impacts
Community
Resource
Type of Event
Likely Consequences
Soil earthworks
Emissions to air (eg. dust,
SO2, NOx gases etc)
Water extraction
Reduction in visual amenity of area.

Health risk to local community;
Greenhouse effect.
Water shortage to local community,
agriculture and ecosystem.
Inconsumable water to the local
community and ecosystem.
Reduced water capacity of natural water
bodies. Increased soil erosion.
Endangering species; Displacing species
Spills into water bodies

(eg. oil or chemical spills)
Altering drainage patterns
Disturbing terrestrial or
aquatic species
Disturbing native flora
Clearing native vegetation
Disturbance of National or
Conservation Parks
Disturbance of World
Heritage areas
Disturbance of areas
under national or
international registers
/conventions
Use of public resources
Threaten biological diversity Destroy

fauna habitats; Threaten biodiversity
Loss of conservation value
Loss of world heritage value of area
Loss of register/convention values
Degradation of public infrastructure (eg.

roads)
Page 220
Chapter 5

Aspect of
Environment
Category of
Impact
Impacts
Change in land use
Cultural
Impacts
Change visual attributes

of area
Change demographic
structure of an area
Heritage
Impacts
Community
Health
Impacts
Community
Welfare
Impacts
Economic
Environment
Natural
Resource
Impacts
Type of Event
Disturbance to natural or
man made features of an
area
Disturbance to aboriginal
sites
Air emissions
Noise and vibration
Water contamination
Potentially
hazardous
operations
(eg.
high
pressure
pipelines,
hazardous
substance
storage)
Altering economy of a
region
Altering employment rate
within a community
Disturbance of natural
resources
of
other
industries in the region
Altering existing land use.
Likely Consequences
Disadvantage
groups
within
the
community; Loss of recreational amenity
of a region
Reduction in aesthetic and recreational
value of area
Changes to community make up;
Changes in community cultural identity
and values
Changes to aesthetic value of area;
Changes to historical value of area
Loss of aboriginal affiliation with an area
Health problems in the community
Discomfort to local community;
Health risk to local community
Health and safety risk to local community
Changes to the standard of living in the

region;
Changes to the standard of living; Social
instability/stability
Changes in employment levels;
Changes in level of viability of other
industries, Changes to industry types
within Region
Changes to land value;
5.10.2 Criteria for Determining Significance

Issues considered under the predictability criterion are given in Table 5.10.
Table 5.10: Issues Considered under Predictability Criterion
a)
b)
c)
d)
Size of event(s) & consequence(s):

The accuracy of the predicted quantity of potential pollution discharge on a unit or total basis,
the amount of population, land, fauna and flora disturbed, and the size of the potential
consequences of such events.
Scope of consequence(s):
For example, the accuracy of the predicted extent to which the potential consequences extend
beyond the confines of the area or region of direct disturbance.
Duration of event(s) & consequence(s):
This includes the accuracy of the predicted timeframe (i.e. short or long term) over which the
event and their potential consequences are expected to last.
Likelihood of events
Page 221
Chapter 5

e)
The likelihood at which the events that can potentially result in the consequences are estimated
to occur.
Stakeholder Concerns of event(s) & consequence(s)
The extent to which the stakeholder perceptions, views and concerns of the events and their
consequences associated with the activity is known.
As a first step, the level of certainty in the prediction of these issues has been
determined and categorised as Low, Medium or High as defined in Table 5.11.
Table 5.11: Level of Certainty in the Prediction of Activity Events and their
Associated Consequences
Low
Medium
High
Extreme uncertainty in the prediction of the issue. Well-informed decision-making is very

difficult to make.
Some uncertainty in the prediction of the issue. Sufficient confidence in the accuracy of the
data to make informed decision-making possible.
Insignificant uncertainty in the prediction of the issue. Confidence in making an informed
decision is very high.
The level of certainty for the above issues for each event is then determined. For ease of
assessment, the results has been tabulated as shown below in Table 5.12
Page 222
Chapter 5

Identify events associated with the proposed activity and any potentially
environmentally adverse consequences associated with these events
Predictability Criterion
Assess the level of certainty in the prediction of the activity events and their
associated adverse environmental consequences in relation to their:
Size
Scope,
Duration,
Likelihood and
Stakeholder Concerns
Assess the level to which any adverse consequences for each event can be
managed in relation to :
Being avoided;
Likelihood of occurring;
Duration;
Size and scope;
Cumulative effects;
Stakeholder concerns
Determine the environmental significance scores for each event against the
predictability and manageability criterion (Table 5.11 and 5.15 respectively).
Ascertain the level of environmental significance (Low, Medium or High) for each
event (environmental significance matrix : Table 5.16).
Classify level of Environmental Impact of the overall proposed activity on the basis
of the level of environmental significance of each event.
Figure No. 5.4: Steps for Assessment of Significance of Environmental Impacts
Page 223
Chapter 5

5.10.3 Environmental Significance Against Predictability Criterion

Once the level of certainty of each of the issues is determined, it is then possible to
assess the environmental significance of each of the events associated with the activity
against the predictability criterion. The environmental significance is determined and
assessed on a scale of 1 to 5 as described in Table 5.12.
The significance score can then be tabled into the significance score column of the
predictability criterion Table 5.13.
Table 5.12: Predictability Criterion Significance Score
Significance
Score
1
2
3
4
5
All of the issues outlined in Table 5.9 have been fully addressed; all events and their
consequences associated with the activity have been accurately predicted to a high
level of confidence.
There is a mixture of high and medium certainty of the issues. No issue is of low
certainty.
All issues are of medium certainty.
There is low certainty in at least 1 of the issues for either the events or their potential
environmental consequence(s).
There is low certainty in all of the issues for either the events or consequences.
Scope
Duration
Frequency
Significance
score
Size
Stakeholder
Concerns
Table 5.13: Predictability Criterion Table

Step 1 Each of the events of the proposed activity
and their associated consequences are assessed
against certainty (Low, Medium or High as
described in Table 5.11) in the prediction of: the
size; scope; duration; likelihood; and stakeholder
concerns Step 2 Significance Score of 1 to 5 is
assigned for each event using Tables 5.11 & 5.12.
NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
Impact on Soil
Earthworks
Contamination (eg spills)
Air Impacts
Air emissions
Surface/Ground
Water contamination
Water Impacts
Water extraction
Fauna Impacts
Disturbance to species
Disturbance to habitats
Flora Impacts
Disturbing native flora species
Clearing extensive areas of native vegetation
Sensitive Area Impacts
Disturbance to National Parks
Disturbance to World Heritage Areas
National and/or worldwide register
SOCIAL IMPACTS
High
High
Medium
Medium
High
High
High
High
Med.
Med.
High
High
High
High
Med.
Med.
High
High
High
High
Med.
Med.
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
2
2
1
1
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
1
Page 224
Chapter 5
Scope
Duration
Frequency
Significance
score
Size
Step 1 Each of the events of the proposed activity

and their associated consequences are assessed
against certainty (Low, Medium or High as
described in Table 5.11) in the prediction of: the
size; scope; duration; likelihood; and stakeholder
concerns Step 2 Significance Score of 1 to 5 is
assigned for each event using Tables 5.11 & 5.12.
Community Resource Impacts
Public infrastructure
Land use
Changes to visual attributes of area
Cultural Impacts
Changes to demographic structure of area
Heritage Impacts
Disturbance to natural features
Disturbance to man made features
Disturbance to aboriginal sites
Community Health Impacts
Air quality changes
Noise and vibration
Changes to water quality
Hazardous operations introduced
ECONOMIC IMPACTS
Community Welfare Impacts
Wealth and employment
Natural Resource Impacts
Disturbance of natural resources of other industries
Altering existing land use
Stakeholder
Concerns

High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
1
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
1
Medium
High
High
Medium
Med.
High
High
Med.
Med.
High
High
Med.
Med.
High
High
Med.
High
High
High
High
2
1
1
2
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
1
1
5.10.4 Manageability Criterion

This criterion focuses on the extent to which the potential environmental consequences
can be either avoided or minimised in terms of size, scope and duration. It is based on
the recognition that minimising the environmental impact of an activity primarily entails
managing the environmental consequence(s) of those activities by either avoiding them
in the first place or by mitigating them to as low as reasonably practical. That is, any
event will have an impact of some sort on the natural, social or economic aspects of the
environment within which it occurs. However, the severity of the impact(s) depends on
the extent to which the consequences to the environment can be eliminated or
minimised. Therefore, the manageability criterion assesses the level to which the
environmental consequences of each event can be either avoided or mitigated.
5.10.5 Issues Under Manageability Criterion
In assessing the level to which the environmental consequences can be managed the
issues given in Table 5.14 may need to be addressed.
Page 225
Chapter 5

Table 5.14: Issues Considered under Manageability Criterion

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Avoidance of Consequences
The extent to which the associated consequences of the various activity events can be totally
avoided.
Likelihood of Event Occurring
The likelihood or probability of an event occurring must also be addressed. If the likelihood of
such an event or sequence of events occurring has been managed so as to be very low and
acceptable to other stakeholders, then it could be said that this is being managed appropriately
and therefore of low significance
If the likelihood of such an event or sequence of events occurring has been managed so as to be
very low and acceptable to other stakeholders, then it could be said that this is being managed
appropriately and therefore of low significance
Duration of Consequences
Whether the consequences can be managed to be short-term needs to be addressed shortterm needs to be defined in the context of the environment within which the potential
consequences are likely to occur. That is, concepts such as the resilience of the environment
would come into consideration.
Size and Scope
Consideration should be given to the extent to which the size and scope of the consequences
can be managed, for example area of land, amount of flora and fauna or number of people
affected by an activity. Consideration should be given to the size and intensity of the impacted
environment relative to the undisturbed surroundings. Also whether the consequences are
potentially catastrophic in terms of human and environmental well being, for example wide
scoping and irreversible consequences.
Cumulative Effects
This includes any cumulative effects of the consequences, for example, the number of individual
activities, which individually may not pose a significant environmental risk but collectively their
potential consequences may be very significant in a particular region.
The level of severity of the environmental consequences perceived by stakeholders (e.g. the
outrage effect).
Table 5.15 outlines some basic questions, which can be used to address the above
issues.
Table 5.15: Questions for Addressing Issues under Manageability Criterion
Issues
Avoidance
of
consequences
Likelihood
of
event
Duration
of
consequences
Size and scope
Cumulative
effects
Questions
Can the potential adverse environmental consequences be avoided; or are there is
no such consequence? (Yes or No)
What is the probability of an event occurring, which may result in the adverse
environmental consequence(s)? (Low, Medium or High on the basis of the results of
the risk assessment carried out in accord with relevant standards)
Are the consequences likely to be Short, Medium or Long term?
Can the consequences be managed so as to be small or confined to a designated
area? (Small or Confined?) If they are not small or confinable are the consequences
potentially catastrophic? (Wide Scoping and Irreversible).
Is it likely that the potential consequences of the proposal in conjunction with those
of other existing activities are likely to pose a higher and unacceptable risk to the
environment than if the individual activities where carried out on their own?
Page 226
Chapter 5

Issues
Stakeholder
concerns
Questions
Is there any major concern of other stakeholders on any of the consequences of the
proposed activity?
5.10.6 Environmental Significance Against Manageability Criterion

Once the potential environmental consequences have been addressed in relation to the
above issues, the level of environmental significance of each of the events associated
with the proposed activity can then be assessed against the manageability criterion. As
with the predictability criterion, the environmental significance for the manageability
criterion is assessed on a scale of 1 to 5 as described in Table 5.16.
Table 5.16: Manageability Criterion Significance score
Significance
Score
1
2
3
4
Adverse consequences of the various events associated with the proposed activity
can be totally avoided, or it is highly unlikely that the events will ever occur.
Adverse consequences can be managed to be short-term. Short-term needs to be
defined in the context of the environment within which the potential consequences are
likely to occur.
Adverse consequences are not or cannot be managed to be short-term, but they can
be confined so as to be insignificant in terms of size and scope relative to the
surroundings.
Adverse consequences in conjunction with those of existing activities pose significant
cumulative effects. Or Consequences are significant in terms of duration and/or size
and scope relative to surroundings.
Consequences are potentially catastrophic. Or There is high stakeholder concern on
the severity of the consequences. Catastrophic in this context means wide scope and
long term or irreversible consequences such as death or serious injury to many
individuals or permanent adverse change to the environment.
A step-by-step outline of the use of Tables 5.15 & 5.16 to assess the level of
environmental significance for each of the events associated with the proposed activity
against the manageability criterion is suggested as follows.
Step1: Where potential adverse consequences can be totally avoided; or where there
are no adverse consequences associated with the events of the activity; or where there
is a low likelihood of an event occurring which lead to adverse consequences being
realised, then the event would be considered as being of low significance. In this case a
significance score of 1 should be assigned.
Step 2: Where potentially adverse consequences cannot be totally avoided or where
their likelihood of being realised is not low, consideration needs to be given to the
duration of the consequences. If the consequences can be managed to occur only for
short term in the context of the environment within which they will occur. In such cases a
Step 3: If the consequences are not short term, then the question of whether or not they
Page 227
Chapter 5

can be confined within a designated area, which is relatively small, compared to the
surrounding environment needs to be addressed. If they can be confined to being small,
then a significance score of 3 is assigned. If they cannot be confined to being small and
are significant in terms of size and scope relative to surroundings and/or duration, then a
significance score of 4 is assigned.
Step 4: Before assigning a 2 or 3 significance score, the question as to whether the
consequences may pose a significant risk to the environment as a result of the
cumulative effects with the consequences of other existing activities needs to be
considered. If it is considered that the cumulative effects are a significant risk, a
Step 5: In the case where the consequences are potentially catastrophic in terms of
being wide scoping and irreversible, or where there are major concerns by other
stakeholders of the consequences, then a significance score of 5 should be assigned.
The significance score can then be entered into the significance score column of the
manageability criterion Table 5.17.
Avoidance
Likelihood
Duration
Size & Scope
Cumulative Effects
Significance Score
Table 5.17: Manageability Criterion Table

Step 1 The associated consequences of each of the
impacts are assessed against the following issues:
the extent to which they can be avoided; the
likelihood of events occurring which result in the
impacts being realised their duration; the size and
scope the consequences; the cumulative effects of
the consequences; and stakeholder concerns Step
2 Each of these issues are addressed using the
questions given in Table 5.15. Step 3 Significance
Score of 1 to 5 is assigned for each impact-using
Table 5.16.
Soil Impacts
Earthworks
Air Impacts
Air emissions
Surface/Ground Water Impacts
Water extraction
Water contamination
Fauna Impacts
Flora Impacts
Clearing extensive areas of native vegetation
No
Yes
Med
Low
Short
Short
Small
Small
No
No
No
Yes
2
2
Yes
Med
Short
Small
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Low
-
Short
-
Small
-
No
-
Yes
-
1
2
1
No
No
1
1
No
No
1
1
No
Page 228
Chapter 5
Duration
Size & Scope
Cumulative Effects
Significance Score
No
No
1
1
No
No
No
Med
-
Med
-
Small
-
No
-
Yes
-
2
1
1
No
No
No
No
1
1
1
No
No
Yes
No
Low
Low
Low
Med
Short
Med
Small
Small
Small
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
1
2
2
No
No
No
Low
Med
Small
No
No
1
1
Avoidance
Step 1 The associated consequences of each of the

impacts are assessed against the following issues:
the extent to which they can be avoided; the
likelihood of events occurring which result in the
impacts being realised their duration; the size and
scope the consequences; the cumulative effects of
the consequences; and stakeholder concerns Step
2 Each of these issues are addressed using the
questions given in Table 5.15. Step 3 Significance
Score of 1 to 5 is assigned for each impact-using
Table 5.16.
National and/or worldwide register or convention
areas
SOCIAL IMPACTS
Land use
Cultural Impacts
Changes to demographic structure of area
Heritage Impacts
Air quality changes
Noise and vibration
ECONOMIC IMPACTS
Disturbance of natural resources of other industries
Likelihood

5.10.7 Environmental Significance

From the significance scores for the predictability and manageability criteria, the level of
environmental significance for each of the potential events associated with the proposed
activity can then be determined as High, Medium or Low on the basis of environmental
significance matrix presented in Table 5.18.
Page 229
Chapter 5

Table 5.18: Matrix for Determining Level of Environmental Significance

Scores
1
2
3
4
5
1
L
L
L
L
L
2
3
4
L
L
M
L
L
M
M
M
H
M
M
H
M
M
H
5
H
H
H
H
H
H = High; M = Medium; L = Low

As observed in Table 5.18, it is proposed that where adverse environmental
consequences can be avoided or where it is very unlikely that an event will occur which
would result in such consequences (i.e a Score of 1 against the manageability criterion),
then the significance of the individual event associated with the proposed activity can be
considered to be low regardless of the predictability score.
The significance matrix provided in Table 5.19 can be developed so as to set the three
levels of significance at other positions within the matrix.
Table 5.19: Activity Environmental Significance (Environmental Damage Potential)
NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL
IMPACTS
Soil Impacts
Earthworks
Air Impacts
Air emissions
Surface/Ground Water Impacts
Water extraction
Water contamination
Fauna Impacts
Flora Impacts
Clearing extensive areas of native
vegetation
National and/or worldwide register or
Predictability
Criterion
Score 1-5
(Table 5.12)
Manageability
Criterion
Score 1-5
(Table 5.16)
Level of
Environmental
Significance H:
High M: Medium L:
Low (Table 5.18)
1
1
2
2
L
L
2
1
1
1
2
1
L
L
L
1
1
1
1
L
L
1
1
1
1
L
L
1
1
1
1
1
1
L
L
L
Page 230
Chapter 5

convention areas
SOCIAL IMPACTS
Land use
Cultural Impacts
Changes to demographic structure of
area
Heritage Impacts
Air quality changes
Noise and vibration
ECONOMIC IMPACTS
Disturbance of natural resources of
other industries
Predictability
Criterion
Score 1-5
(Table 5.12)
Manageability
Criterion
Score 1-5
(Table 5.16)
Level of
Environmental
Significance H:
High M: Medium L:
Low (Table 5.18)
1
1
1
2
1
1
L
L
L
1
1
1
1
1
1
L
L
L
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
L
L
L
L
Conclusion
The level of environmental significance as mentioned in Table 5.19 is the potential to damage
environment. As such all the impacts of the project on various elements of environment can be
predicted with significant certainty and are manageable therefore the chances of damage to
environment due to the plant activities are low as shown in Table 5.19.
Page 231
Chapter 5

CHAPTER 6 : TECHNOLOGICAL DETAILS OF

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES
6.0
TECHNOLOGICAL DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES
6.1
INTRODUCTION
All new or expansion projects may be accompanied by certain undesirable
consequences requiring mitigative measures. Since the objective of environmental
impact assessment is to ensure that development proceeds hand in hand with
environmental conservation so as to achieve sustained growth, it becomes imperative
that a proper mitigative vis--vis environmental control measures are adopted at the
planning and implementation stage itself. Environmental control measures are
necessary for any major projects to maintain environmental balance and to check
possible harmful effects. These control measures are of multidisciplinary dimensions and
varies with type of projects. Therefore, the measures described in this report are to be
regarded as good beginning and depending upon the situations, continuing advice is to
be updated. In this part of the report environmental management plan has been worked
out based on present baseline status, and environmental impact assessment as
presented in the environmental impact assessment part of the report. It has already
been indicated earlier in the EIA part that a number of environmental factors needs to be
considered covering ambient air quality, water pollution, solid waste management, social
factors, etc. The technological environmental control measures envisaged for the
proposed project are described in following text.
Anticipated releases of hazardous substances like radioactive materials and fissile
materials to the environment and its impact have been discussed in previous chapters.
Reducing/ regulating releases to the stipulated levels and/or mitigation of consequences
of releases that occur call for incorporation of several engineered features and for the
adoption of appropriate work practices, too. This chapter deals with these aspects.
Conventional waste management is also dealt with in this chapter.
As in the previous chapter, the measures are discussed separately for each phase of
project activity.
6.2
CONSTRUCTION PHASE
The site is at Gorakhpur Village, Fatehabad, Haryana, which is a green-field site. During
construction phase, the environmental pollution is not expected to be significant and
would be of short duration. The project site is agricultural land and due compensation
will be paid to the land owners for the same. The site is at Gorakhpur Village,
Fatehabad, Haryana, which is a green-field site.
During site clearing, site-stripping activity will be carried out during non-monsoon season
to avoid any discharge of soil or silt to nearby surface water bodies. Topsoil excavated
will be stored separately for later use.
Page 232
Chapter 6

During excavation steps would be taken to prevent cave-in, landslide, water

accumulation, runoff due to rain, loose excavated material falling or rolling. Further,
refilling, disposal and transport of soil, dust suppression by water spraying will be
practiced to avoid generation of fugitive dust.
A system of work permit procedure will be followed for excavation, concrete handling
activities and all erection activities especially involving heights. These will be inspected
regularly. Rigging operations, platforms, scaffoldings staircases, ladders and ramps,
working at heights, welding and cutting, hand tools and power tools would be inspected
periodically. Lifting machineries, tools and tackles would be certified before use.
During site clearing as well as construction, movement of earth moving machineries,
concrete mixing and pouring systems and lifting machineries would be regulated.
Every effort would be taken to minimize disturbance to the existing trees.
6.3
OPERATIONAL PHASE
The basic design of the Atomic Power Plant allows for planned / controlled release of
radioactive or chemical pollutants to the environment within statutory limits. There could
be accidents and off normal situations that may have a potential for large uncontrolled
releases. APP employs a twofold approach in design to deal with such situations.
The first approach aims to avert such situations to the best extent possible. This is done
by monitoring and rigorously controlling the plant operating conditions. Moreover, design
features such as process and equipment selection also play a role in this context.
The second approach aims at designing the facility in such a way that even if the event
were to occur, the resulting unplanned releases are contained as far as practical.
Provisions are made for directing the releases along planned flow paths, thereby
permitting their collection and treatment before discharge to the environment. This is
facilitated by handling / processing radioactive material in confined space, the
confinement being assured by providing multiple barriers between the environment and
the radiation sources. The multiple barrier approach is applied not only in processing,
but also in storage of hazardous materials / wastes. The sections that follow discuss the
use of multiple barriers as mitigative measures under normal plant operation.
Apart from the steps taken to avert / contain unplanned releases, the design provides for
the reduction of pollution burden by minimizing the quantum of wastes generated in
normal operation. These are also illustrated in the sequel.
6.3.1
Mitigation by Facility Design Containment and Contamination Control

The Reactor Building (RB) is of double containment where the inner one is known as
Primary Containment (PC steel lined) and the outer one are Secondary Containment
(SC). The PC is further classified into two volumes namely high enthalpy areas and low
enthalpy areas. High enthalpy areas comprise of areas which contain high enthalpy
fluids and are potential source of heavy water (D2O) leakage. These areas are normally
Page 233
Chapter 6

not accessible. The SG room, Pump Room (PR) and Fuelling Machine (FM) vaults areas
fall under this category. Rest of the areas fall under the category of low enthalpy areas
and are normally accessible except moderator room, Fuel Transfer (FT) rooms, Delayed
Neutron Monitoring (DNM) and FM service areas (FMSA) during communication with FM
vault.
Double containment philosophy has been followed in RB. The containment system
consists of an inner (primary) containment enveloped by an outer (secondary)
containment. The Primary Containment is provided with Carbon Steel (CS) liner to
reduce leak rate. The annulus between the inner and outer containments is kept at a
slightly negative pressure with respect to the atmosphere so as to minimize ground level
activity releases to the environment during an accident condition.
The purpose of containment building during normal operation is to:
Provide an envelope around the structure housing / supporting Calandria, end
shields, reactivity mechanisms, PHT and moderator systems, fuelling systems and
various associated systems.
To keep the release of radioactivity during normal operation within prescribed limits.
To control the spread of radioactive contamination, the plant is divided into three distinct
radiation zones, classified according to their potential for radioactive contamination and /
or radiation exposure.
The Zoning Philosophy is Implemented as Follows :
A single point entry is provided. This is in the Zone-1 area of the nuclear building.
Personnel and material movement from higher to lower zone and vice-versa
permitted in sequence only.
Barriers and radiation monitors are provided at inter-zonal boundaries for effective
control of spread of contamination.
Decontamination Facilities :
For personnel decontamination, showers have been provided in Zone 2.
A special decontamination room near the main airlock of each unit is provided for
highly contaminated personnel.
Equipment decontamination facility is provided at 100m elevation in Waste
Management Plant (Zone-3).
6.3.2
Mitigation by Facility Design Ventilation System

Ventilation system acts as a dynamic barrier to keep the air borne activity in the
operating areas of the plant under control and to keep the discharges to the atmosphere
within permissible limits.
Page 234
Chapter 6

The areas in the plant are divided into three zones1 based on the based on increasing
contamination potential. Ventilation system is designed to maintain pressure differential
between various confinement zones and also between the confinement zone and the
outside atmosphere so that the direction of the flow of air or gases is from the areas with
lower contamination potential to the areas with higher contamination potential.
For ventilation to be an effective barrier, the confinement of air borne radioactive
particulates, noxious fumes and vapors need to take place as close to the point of origin
as practicable. This is achieved by isolating the ventilation of operating areas, access
galleries etc from that of off gas streams from RB, auxiliary airlock, spent fuel
storage/inspection bay and decontamination centre & resin fixation area in waste
management building, etc.
Other salient features of the ventilation system that go to make it effective are outlined
below.
6.3.2.1 Primary Containment Ventilation System
The Reactor Building (RB) is of double containment [(Primary Containment (PC steel
lined)] and the outer one are Secondary Containment (SC)] as given under Section
6.3.2.2. The PC is further classified into two volumes namely high enthalpy areas (high
radioactivity contamination) and low enthalpy areas (low radioactivity contamination). For
the purpose of contamination control and ventilation requirements, separate high
enthalpy and low enthalpy areas are maintained.
The Primary Containment ventilation system is designed for the following requirements.
To supply cooled, filtered and dehumidified fresh air and exhaust stale air to meet
the fresh air requirement of O&M personnel during normal and Shutdown period.
Ensure flow of air from low active zones to high active zones thus preventing the
spread of activity inside RB.
Zone 1: No radioactive equipments are there in this zone and is kept free of contamination at all
times. All floors of Control Building, Station Auxiliary Buildings, Safety Related and Fire Water
Pump Houses, Turbine Building, EMWP, DOSA, IDCTs and buildings under safety class
NINS are in Zone-1.
Zone 2: This zone includes the service area for active equipment and material that have
potential for contamination and is likely to be contaminated at times. Instrument and control
maintenance shop, chemical control lab., FM testing area, FM maintenance area, shipping flask
loading area, shipping flask wash down area, bay equipment, electrical workshop, Reactor
Auxiliary System, bio-assay, counting room, source room, shift health physics room, emergency
showers & toilets in Nuclear Building, heavy water up-grading plant, exhaust ventilation area,
new fuel storage and waste management plant facilities excluding decontamination and resin
fixation areas and FM and mechanical workshop are in Zone 2.
Zone 3: This zone contains source of contamination. Contamination in this area is kept
localised and under control by routine cleanup operation, however, some parts are likely to
remain contaminated. The area/room which are grouped in this zone are RB, auxiliary airlock,
spent fuel storage/inspection bay and decontamination centre & resin fixation area in waste
management building.
Page 235
Chapter 6

Maintaining the PC under negative pressure with respect to SC and ambient to

prevent leakage of air from PC during normal operation.
The desired area temperatures inside PC are maintained by the APW fed air-cooling
units (ACUs) in high enthalpy areas and chilled water-cooled air handling units
(AHUs) in low enthalpy areas.
Ventilation flow has been decided in such a way as to meet the ventilation requirements,
while limiting heavy water vapor loss & tritium release (through exhaust) at a minimum.
Provision is made to monitor the activity release through stack. In order to ensure
negative pressure in PC with respect to SC and outside atmosphere, only exhaust fans
are provided in the ventilation system.
Provision is made to isolate moderator room and FM service areas from PC ventilation
system and connect them to Heavy Water Vapour Recovery (HWVR) system by
providing air operated dampers in supply and exhaust ventilation lines and also in
branch lines connecting these areas to dryer. The exhaust from FT room is passed
through a Combined HEPA and Charcoal filter to take care of lodine release, if any. To
reduce the dust ingress into the PC, filers with minimum 90% efficiency down to 10
microns are provided at the intake. The exhaust to the stack is through pre filters
(designed for 99% efficiency down to 5 microns) and HEPA (designed for minimum
99.97% efficiency down to 0.3 microns) filters.
6.3.2.2

SC surrounds PC from raft to dome with a gap of about two meters. The objective of the
SC ventilation is to prevent the SC atmosphere from becoming stale and to provide fresh
air for occasional occupancy. SC ventilation system is designed on the following basis :
SC does not have any continuous occupancy as it does not house any equipment and
also there is no major heat load other than that from lighting. Consequently continuous
ventilation for SC is not required. However to prevent the atmosphere from becoming
stale, ventilation system with exhaust air flow is provided. Under normal operating
condition of the reactor, PC is negative with respect to SC and hence leakage flow can
take place from SC to PC and not vice versa. Hence activity will not spread from PC to
SC. Provision is made to isolate SC under RB isolation logic, with provision of two
isolation dampers on both supply and exhaust line.
6.3.2.3
Reactor Building Heavy Water Vapour Recovery System

The system is provided to recover heavy water vapor arising out of chronic leakages /
spills from primary heat transport, moderator and fuelling machine circuit in the Reactor
Building (RB) Primary Containment (PC) atmosphere. Recovery is made by adsorption
of the vapor on molecular sieves and then regeneration of the bed and condensing the
water. Condensate from the dryer equipment is collected by condensate collection
system.
Heavy water vapor recovery system maintains the fuelling machine vaults and pump
room (high enthalpy) areas under negative pressure with respect to low enthalpy
accessible areas thus preventing activity spread from these areas to accessible areas.
Page 236
Chapter 6

Heavy water vapor recovery system also helps in reducing the tritium activity levels in
pump room, fuelling machine vaults, fuelling machine service areas, moderator room,
delayed neutron monitoring room, fuel transfer room, fuelling machine valve station, etc.
High enthalpy area contains all high enthalpy heavy systems and includes pump room
(PR), fuelling machine vaults (FMVs) and fuelling machine service areas (FMSAs) when
connected with FMV. These areas are generally accessible only during shutdown period
of the reactor.
Low enthalpy areas like PHT equipment room, feed pump equipment room, moderator
room, delayed neutron monitoring room, fuel transfer rooms, north and south galleries,
staircase, FMSAs (when the area is not connected with FMV) are normally accessible
during reactor operation with a few exceptions. Some areas like moderator room,
delayed neutron (DN) monitoring rooms, fuel transfer (FT) rooms are not accessible
during normal operation.
Different areas in PC are connected to heavy water vapor recovery system, in which
heavy water vapors are recovered as downgraded heavy water condensate. Typically
each dryer consists of adsorption & regeneration circuits, ducting and condensate
collection system piping. Purge dryer is provided to maintain slight negative pressure in
FMV & Pump room with respect to accessible areas.
6.3.2.4

Air Conditioning (A/C) & Ventilation system provided for Reactor Auxiliary Building (RAB)
is designed with an objective to ensure adequate supply of fresh & filtered air for the
operating personnel, remove heat load generated in the operating areas due to
equipment and / or human occupancy and maintaining air flow from lower contaminated
areas to higher contaminated areas to minimize spread of contamination.
RAB consists of the portion of Nuclear Building (NB).excluding Reactor Building (RB).
This building houses Spent Fuel Storage Bay (SFSB), equipment of moderator and PHT
purification systems, workshops & maintenance areas, change rooms, Backup Control
Room (BCR), Heavy water vapor recovery systems, supply unit of RAB ventilation
system including air washer, cable passage area, etc.
Nuclear building is divided into zone 3 or 2 or 1 based on contamination levels and
potential for activity release. Ventilation design for these buildings is based on activity
considerations, zoning and desired area temperature requirements. For the purpose of
design, the various areas may be categorized as follows :
1. Areas where occasional fission product activity release, particularly of I-131 is likely
spent fuel storage bay (SFSB) and Tray Loading Bay (TLB) areas, spent fuel flask
decontamination area.
2. Areas where high tritium release is likely PHT purification area, evaporation clean
up, de-deuteration facility etc.
3. Areas where occasional beta-gamma and tritium release are likely chemical
laboratories, mechanical maintenance shops, and decontamination areas.
Page 237
Chapter 6

4. Other areas where radiation levels are low.

Exhaust from areas under category (1) requires to be filtered for iodine removal. The
number of air changes in all these areas is based both on activity considerations, heat
load and the local air coolers provided for the area.
Fresh air supply system caters to the fresh air requirements of the above areas and
Secondary Containment (SC) of Reactor Building (RB. Exhaust system is common for
RAB-1 and RAB-2, Waste Management Plant (WMP), Mechanical and FM workshops.
6.3.2.5

The Main Control Room at 111 M Elevation of control building is provided with fresh air
during emergency condition when outside air becomes contaminated due to accidental
release of radioactivity during postulated LOCA involving fuel failure. The system
consists of louvers, pre-filters, combined HEPA & charcoal filters, centrifugal fans,
dampers, ducting, grills, etc. During normal condition Emergency Fresh Air Ventilation
system remains boxed up and non-operational, and fresh air requirements for AHUs of
Control Room is met by the normal make up route. In case of radioactivity in the outside
air, normal fresh air make up route is closed and makeup supply to the aforesaid room is
provided by Emergency Fresh Air Ventilation route.
Outside air is sucked by a centrifugal fan through louvers, pre-filters and combined
HEPA & Charcoal filters and is supplied to the MCR. The pre-filter removes dust
particles and combined HEPA & charcoal filters reduces the radioactivity from the air
before it is supplied to MCR.
6.3.2.6

The gaseous radioactive effluents from reactor and service building ventilation exhaust
systems are passed through pre filters and absolute filters before discharge through the
stack. These gaseous effluents are continuously monitored for radioactivity content
before discharging through stack. There are three gross (Beta), (Gamma) activity
monitors on each of the reactor building (RB) ventilation exhaust ducts (located in
Service Building). These are connected to the Reactor Building containment isolation
system logics for isolation (boxing up) of Reactor Building containment, in the event of
two out of three , activity monitors detect the activity level, on the Reactor Building
exhaust duct, more than the pre-set values. Simultaneously, the sample of active air
discharged is collected in the sample bottle of the air sample collection system for later
analysis in the laboratory.
The radioactivity in the gaseous effluents, routinely released through stack, are
monitored by the following monitoring/ sampling systems
Inert gas (gross-gamma) monitors: These monitors consist of scintillation detector
assembly mounted inside aluminum chambers with inlet/outlet connections.
Iodine-in-air monitors: These monitors consist of NaI Scintillation detector
assembly and electronics processing unit.
Particulate activity monitors: These monitors consist of plastic scintillator
assembly facing particulate filter paper and associated electronics.
Page 238
Chapter 6

Tritium-in-air monitors: Bubbler sample collection system / Gamma compensated

ionization chambers.
All these stack-monitoring instruments are located in a room known as the Stack
Monitoring Room, which is located, near the stack. This location provides low radiation
background. Iso-kinetic probe draws the air sample, which successively passes through
the filter detector assemblies of the air particulate and iodine activity monitors.
Subsequently, it is led to the inert gas monitor chamber and then routed back to the
stack. The data from the above monitors are analyzed by a signal-processing unit, which
gives release rate and integral releases over a set period. These are also compared with
set levels and alarms are generated if the activity exceeds the set levels.
Permissible Gaseous Discharge Limits
The radiation dose limit for the general pubic at the fence post due to operation of all
facilities within the site through all pathways is 1 mSv/y (100 mrem/y).
The annual average rate of discharge of gaseous radioactive effluents from all the units
of 700 MW(e) shall not exceed the following limits. Corresponding dose to the public at
1.0 Km boundary is also given.
Tritium
C-14

Ar-41
I-131
Particulates
Stack Release
4X700 MWe unit
GBq/d
2.02E+04
1.08E+01
1.10E+04
7.66E+03
2.02E-01
2.02E-01
Total
Dose at Exclusion
Boundary (mSv/y)
Adult
Infant
1.61E-02
1.61E-02
9.28E-03
9.28E-03
3.04E-02
4.56E-02
3.72E-02
5.58E-02
4.70E-03
5.74E-02
4.12E-02
8.00E-02
1.39E-01
2.64E-01
Radioactive gaseous effluents when averaged over one day, shall not exceed ten times
the annual average release rates specified above.
6.3.2.7
Ventilation System Availability

Continued availability of the ventilation system is essential. This is accomplished by
providing adequate standby equipment. Standby fans and filters of 100 % capacity are
available under all process operating conditions. Emergency power is supplied
automatically to fans in the event of failure of the normal power supply. The ventilation
system is designed robustly so that it is available continuously even if one of its
components (equipment or control device) fails. For instance, when any fan is
inoperative, standby fans automatically start to maintain system airflow. Back flow
through the inoperative fan is prevented by automatically isolating it by the dampers
provided.
The continued availability of the ventilation system is further assured by periodic
surveillance to test its operability and required functional performance. The tests include
(i) measurement of air flow in main systems, area pressures in the different zones,
Page 239
Chapter 6

differential pressure in Cells and Glove boxes, face velocity in front of fume hoods,
pressure drop across filter banks, (ii) checking the working of the normal operating
sequence that would bring ventilation systems into action and (iii) checking the transfer
to alternative power sources when regular power is interrupted.
The materials of construction for the ventilation systems are carefully selected to
withstand corrosion particularly when associated with chemical processes, offer fire
resistance, ensure long operating life to avoid frequent replacement of contaminated
equipment and enable smooth surface finish to aid in decontamination.
6.3.3
Mitigation by Facility Design : Radioactive Waste Storage / Disposal
6.3.3.1 General
The waste management design philosophy is based on the principle of ALARA (As low
As Reasonably Achievable). The underlying philosophy for radioactive waste
management is based on three major approaches, namely,
a. Dilute and Disperse: This approach is employed for the discharge of potentially
active liquid wastes (dilution is by water addition) and treated gaseous wastes
(dilution is by ventilation air). In this case, harm that can be caused by radio-nuclides
is brought down to an acceptable or insignificant level.
b. Delay, Decay and Disperse: All short-lived radio-nuclides are rendered harmless by
storing them for some time and allowing them to decay. The cooling of spent fuel
inside the reactor for 8 months may be cited as examples of this.
c. Concentrate and Contain: Nearly 99.9% of radio-nuclides with medium and long
half-lives are concentrated to reduce the waste volume, immobilized, sealed in
containers and then stored away inside engineered structures. The storage period is
sufficiently long for the radio-nuclides to decay.
Since bulk of the waste is going to be concentrated and contained, the third approach
needs to be looked at a little more closely. So long as the integrity of the isolation of
radio-nuclides is preserved, no harm to the environment or living organisms is expected.
Therefore, engineered measures aim to make the chance of failure of isolation very, very
low. This is done by making use of multiple barriers each of which has low failure
probability. Even if a failure of multiple barriers were to occur, the geological setting
selected for eventual disposal ensures that migration of radio-nuclides are retarded so
much that sufficient delay and decay would occur.
Though complete prevention of radioactive waste generation is a difficult task, keeping
the waste generation to the minimum practicable is an essential objective of radioactive
waste management. In doing so, it is essential to minimize waste generation in all the
stages of a nuclear power plant. Waste minimization refers to waste generation by
operational and maintenance activities of plant and secondary waste resulting from
predisposal management of radioactive waste. Nuclear effluents are being given the
Page 240
Chapter 6

prime attention right from generation, handling, treatment, conditioning, transportation,

storage and final disposal, in a manner that it meets the requirements of the Safety
Guide AERB/SG/D 13 Liquid and Solid Radioactive Waste Management in PHWRs
and the discharge limits specified by them.
A Waste Management Plant (WMP) is provided for segregation, collection, treatment,
conditioning, storage, monitoring and safe disposal of liquid and solid radioactive wastes
generated in the plant. Following systems are provided at waste management plant :
a. Liquid effluent segregation system (LESS)
b. Storage, treatment and disposal system for low level activity and high volume liquid
waste.
c. Evaporation system (after ion-exchange process) for evaporating the relatively high
active and low volume tritium bearing liquid waste followed by dispersal through air
route / stack.
d. Spent Ion Exchange (IX) resin management system
e. Volume reduction facility
f. Decontamination system
g. Laundry system.
6.3.3.2 Radioactive Liquid Waste Management System
The liquid waste streams generated from the plant are segregated at source and are
(LESS) area.
Liquid Effluent Segregation System (LESS)
LESS design philosophy is to ensure segregation and collection at source of all the liquid
wastes generated in the station based on level of activity and chemical nature, so as to
i. Minimize cross contamination and
ii. Facilitate judicious decision for management of each category of waste.
The classifications and the category they belong to and the origin of the wastes are
Table 6.1a: Classification of Liquid Wastes
SN.
1.
Classification
Potentially
Active
Waste (PAW)
Active
Non-chemical
Waste (ANCW)
Category
I, II
I, II, III
4.
Active Chemical Waste

(ACW)
5.
Organic Waste (OW)
2.
3.
I, II
I, II
I
Sources
Showers from Nuclear building and upgrading plant, wash
room and laundry waste
Equipment and floor drains from Nuclear building, drains
from decontamination centre and other areas of WMP and
vent exhaust room. Laboratory rinses and washes.
Laboratory solutions from nuclear building and
decontamination centre drains.
D 2O upgrading reject, moderator room sump in RB, drains
from heavy water handling areas in Nuclear building.
Liquid scintillation counters, contaminated oil, grease, etc.
Page 241
Chapter 6

Waste Categorization
Categorization of liquid waste streams based on radioactivity concentration (as approved
by AERB) is as follows :
Category I :
Gross beta gamma activity less than 1 x 10-6 Ci/ml (0.037

MBq/m). This category waste does not normally require
treatment. However filtration followed by dilution and monitoring is
provided for the category.
Category II:
Gross beta gamma activity between 1 x 10-6 to 1 x 10-3 Ci/ml

(0.037 to 37 MBq/m). This category of waste may require
treatment. Filtration or filtration and ion exchange treatment
followed by dilution is provided for this category. However tritium
bearing liquid effluent will normally be evaporated, diluted with
large volume of exhaust air and discharged through 100 meter
high stack.
Category III:
Gross beta activity between 1 x 10-3 to 1 x 10-1 Ci/ml (37 to 3700

MBq/m). This category waste requires treatment. Equipment
shielding may be necessary. Generation of this category is
occasional.
Category IV:
Gross beta activity between 1 x 10-1 to 1 x 104 Ci/ml (3700 to 3.7

x 108 MBq/m). This category of waste requires treatment.
Equipment shielding is also necessary. Waste of this category is
also not encountered in PHWRs.
Category V:
Gross beta activity more than 1 x 104 Ci/ml (3.7 x 108 (MBq/m).
This category waste is heat generating waste. Shielding,
treatment and cooling is required for such wastes. However waste
of this category is not encountered in PHWRs.
The quantity of liquid waste in each classification and the treatment methods are given in
Table 6.1b.
Table 6.1b: Estimated Volumes of Liquid Waste Generation at HAPP 1 & 2
Waste stream
Quantity
m/day
Activity levels
(Bq/ml)
Gross Tritium
-
1.0 Potentially Active Waste (PAW)
Showers
30
3.7E-3
250
Washings
20
3.7E-2
250
Laundry
25
3.7E-1
100
2.0 Active NonChemical
Waste
(ANCW)
12
1.85
1850
Activity inventory
Gross
- (KBq)
Tritium
(MBq)
111
740
10360
7500
5000
2500
22200
2220
Treatment

to Bhakra canal.
Filtration,
polishing
through IX column,
evaporation,
dilution
with exhausts air and
Page 242
Chapter 6

Waste stream
Quantity
m/day
Activity levels
(Bq/ml)
Gross Tritium
-
Activity inventory
Gross
- (KBq)
Treatment
Tritium
(MBq)
discharged
stack.
3.0 Tritiated Waste (TTW)

Moderator
2
room sump
D2O
6
upgrading
plant
4.0 Active
1
Chemical
Waste
(ACW)
5.0 Organic
13.7 litre
waste
/ day
Total
96.01
through
1.85
11E4
3700
222000
0.371
7.4E4
2220
444000
- Do -
1850
18500
Occasional
Occasional
Neutralized & treated

like ANCW.
0.037
1850
Occasional
Occasional
39331
683220
Storage Treatment and Disposal System

Storage
Adequate capacity for liquid waste storage is provided through 12 nos. of large diameter
hold up tanks at RCC dyke area of Waste Management Plant (WMP). Total storage
capacity in the dyke provided is 3200 m to take care of unusual conditions when
discharge of liquid waste is not possible due to canal closure and also the storage
required for off-normal waste like Steam Generator (SG) tube leak, contaminated APW
etc. and in line with the requirements of AERB guide AERB/SG/D-13. Liquid waste of all
categories can be stored for about one month period.
Treatment and Disposal through Water Route
All the twelve number steel tanks are located in a RCC containment (top open) called
dyke area. This is water tight structure and seismically qualified to SSE level of
earthquake.
Two nos. of receipt tanks for each stream have been provided at RCC dyke area in
which one will be receiving the liquid waste and the liquid from other tanks will be under
processing. Two nos. of micron filters (1 working and 1 standby) are provided for each
stream. The segregated liquid effluents, to decide the mode of discharge, are divided
into two categories viz. i) low level high volume waste (PAW and LW) and ii) tritium
bearing waste (ANCW, TTW and neutralized ACW). After filtration, the low level high
volume liquid wastes (waste water from shower, washroom and laundry area) are stored
in the post treatment tank.
Low level treated liquid waste from post treatment tank is sampled, analyzed in the
laboratory and monitored after preparing a batch of treated waste. This treated waste is
then injected into the plant water discharge (Blow down) piping. Inline mixers are
Page 243
Chapter 6

provided in the pipe line to ensure thorough mixing of treated waste with plant water
discharge system, before it gets discharged.
Liquid waste discharges are made in batches normally on single shift basis. Availability
of blow down flow is ensured through control logics and administrative control before
commencing of discharge of treated waste. The activity concentration of liquid waste
being discharged is monitored by an online activity monitor located on treated waste line
in WMP (before injecting it in plant water discharge system) in addition to sampling and
analysis carried out in laboratory. On attaining set level of activity the activity monitor
fitted in the discharge line will trip the discharge pump.
Liquid wastes having relatively high tritium and Beta gamma activity like Tritiated Waste
(TTW) generated from Upgrading plant rejects, Moderator room sump & Clean-up
system and Active Non Chemical Waste (ANCW) generated from Equipment
decontamination system of WMP, chemical laboratory & SFSB cask wash down area, of
less volume will be evaporated, diluted with exhaust air and discharged through stack to
air route. This quantum of liquid waste activity constitutes a major portion of the total
activity in the liquid waste. Therefore only less than 10% of total activity contained in
major volume of liquid effluent activity from HAPP 1&2 will be added to the liquid route
discharge point.
Treatment and Disposal Liquid Waste through Air Route (Evaporation System)
Liquid effluent having relativity higher activity are treated by filtration and ion exchange
process and disposed through air route using Evaporation system. Streams like ANCW,
ACW and TTW, after filtration, will be diverted to a synthetic ion exchange column to
remove the dissolved Beta-gamma activity and then stored in evaporation system feed
tank. These polished tritium bearing liquid waste streams (free of gross beta activity) are
sent to a steam heated evaporator with a controlled flow rate of 1.4 m/hr. This vaporized
stream is then injected into the ventilation exhaust ducting leading to 100 m high stack.
Evaporation of effluents having relatively higher level of activity ensures the discharges
through water route are kept at minimum. The air route mode of disposal offers unique
advantage of higher release limits per unit of dose allocation as compared to liquid route.
This mode of disposal suits inland site where water body is scarce and extensively used
by the surrounding population. The liquid waste disposal scheme is shown in Fig. 6.1.
Liquid Discharge Limits
For the plant, at the common discharge point the following discharge limits are
considered.
Radionuclide
Tritium
C-14
Cs-137
Sr-90
Total
Stack Release 4X700

MWe unit GBq/d
2.02E+03
1.08E-01
1.00E-01
1.00E-01
Dose at Exclusion Boundary (mSv/y)

Adult
Infant
4.04E-02
4.80E-02
6.96E-05
5.60E-05
1.44E-03
7.76E-04
3.10E-03
8.50E-03
4.50E-02
5.72E-02
Page 244
Chapter 6

Main Out Fall (MOF) Sampling System

A Main Outfall (MOF) sampling system at the downstream of low level treated waste
injecting point in plant water discharge (blow down) system is provided to further ensure
that the liquid waste discharges made from WMP have been adequately diluted with
plant water discharge system and are within the permissible discharge limits. This
sampling is done on continuous basis over a period of 24 hours. This sample is analyzed
in the laboratory for tritium and gross beta activity.
Fig 6.1: Sources and Treatment of Liquid Wastes

6.3.3.3 Radioactive Solid Waste Management System
Treatment and disposal of radioactive solid waste at the Waste Management Plant
(WMP) is carried out as per AERB / SG / D-13. The solid waste disposal scheme is
shown in Fig. 2.11 (Chapter 2.0, Section 2.15.6).
Radioactive solid waste generated at the plant is segregated at source depending upon
its nature (Combustible / compactable / non-compactable) and surface dose rate.
Different types of radioactive solid wastes that get generated are spent ion-exchange
discarded clothing and components, sludge etc. Solid wastes are transported to WMP in
shielded containers / casks, if required, for treatment / conditioning. Conditioning system
Page 245
Chapter 6

for solid waste provided in WMP include processes like spent resin management for
resins from Primary Heat Transport (PHT) System, Moderator system, end shield
cooling system, calandria vault cooling system, SFSB cooling and purification system,
cementation of liquid filters / sludge and compaction of compressible wastes.
The waste after treatment / conditioning is disposed off in engineered barriers. There are
different types of structures depending on the radiation level encountered, like stone
lined earth trenches, RCC vaults / trenches and tile holes / high integrity containers
(HIC) located at the Near Surface Disposal Facility (NSDF), depending upon their
surface dose rate. The structures serve as engineered barriers preventing migration of
radioactivity into ground water, and together with the surrounding soil provide the
required radiation shielding. Some of the wastes may have to be stored temporarily in
specially designed facilities.
Solid Waste Categorisation
Solid waste is categorised on the basis of its surface radiation dose-rate and its physical
characteristics which call for specific treatment and handling processes. These are :
Cat. I : Waste with surface dose rate up to 2 mSv/h. For the purpose of segregation of
source, Cat. I waste is further divided into two groups viz.
a. Dose rate less than 0.02 mSv/hr Disposed off in stone lined earthen trenches.
b. Dose rate more than 0.02 mSv/hr and less than 2 mSv/h Disposed off in RCC
trenches / Vaults.
Depending upon the physical nature, these wastes are also classified as :
a. Compactable waste and
b. Non compactable waste.
c. Combustible waste
Cat. II : Waste with surface dose rate more than 2 mSv/h but less than 0.02 Sv/h.
Cat. III : Waste with surface dose rate more than 0.02 Sv/h. The category of waste is
further sub-divided into two groups viz.
a. Cat. III A : Waste packages with surface dose rate up to 0.5 Sv/h, and
b. Cat. III B : Waste packages having surface dose-rate more than 0.5 Sv/h.
Resin Transfer and Fixation System
Radioactive Spent Ion-Exchange resin is generated from Primary Heat Transport,
Moderator, End shield / calandria vault cooling and Spent Fuel Storage and Inspection
Bay (SFSB) clean-up systems in PWHR type reactors. These resins vary widely in dose
rate, radio nuclide content and their concentrations.
Disposal of Resins with Short Lived Radioactivity
Spent resins are transferred from the Ion Exchange vessel (Stainless Steel Hopper) of
moderator, End Shield / Calandria vault cooling system, into a Carbon Steel Hopper,
dewatered by compressed air and these CS Hoppers are disposed (after closure of all
Page 246
Chapter 6

nozzle openings) in engineered barriers provided at Near Surface Disposal Facility

(NSDF).
Disposal of Resins with Long Lived Radioactivity
PHT / SFSB spent resins contain fission product radio-nuclides having long half life of
about 30 years. These resins are required to be fixed in a monolithic block so as to
prevent the release of radio-nuclides to environment. Conditioning of spent ion exchange
resin in polymer / cement matrix is aimed at immobilising the resin in monolithic blocks
and arresting release of radioactive nuclides to the environment. The resins are in the
form of beads which are easily dispersed if not contained in a suitable matrix.
At WMP, Resin Transfer system and resin fixation system is provided at Ground floor
(EL 100.000 M) and is provided with all around shielding wall. All the equipment and
piping, handing active resins, are provided with adequate shielding to have ease of
operation and maintenance and also to reduce the back ground radiation level. The
system material is of stainless steel for ease of decontamination.
Decontamination system (DC)
An equipment Decontamination Centre is provided at WMP building for decontamination
of removable and reusable small equipment, components, pipes, heavy water drums etc.
having a maximum size of 600 mm dia. and 3500 mm length. This system provides
surface decontamination of various parts using ultrasonic cleaning and steam.
Decontamination Centre (DC) is designed to decontaminate items having surface dose
rate up to 0.01 Sv/hr. However, components having surface dose rate more than 0.01
Sv/hr and up to 0.1 Sv/hr, can be decontaminated using this system in Ultrasonic tank
I (UT-I) which is provided with a hematite shielded enclosure. In addition, special
operating procedure will be made for handling such components having higher surface
dose rate. Such components having surface dose rate more than 0.01 Sv/hr may come
once in a while and not on a regular basis.
Laundry System
An active laundry is provided to decontaminate clothing and rubber wears such as lab
coats, hand gloves, Shoe cover, coveralls etc received from the station. The laundry
equipment are provided to take care of the entire washing load of contaminated
protective wears from HAPP 1&2 on a single shift operation basis. However, increased
load requirements, if any, during shutdown and other contingencies can be met by
increasing the number of shifts. This system is located in reactor auxiliary building at EI
100.000 M very close to change room (point of generation) and new cloth issue room
(point of utilization) thereby avoiding movement of contaminated clothing from change
room to laundry system. The drain lines from these laundry machines are led to laundry
waste collection sump from where it is filtered and pumped to laundry waste collection
tank of dyke area.
Incineration of Low Level Combustible Solid Waste
An oil fired incinerator is provided to incinerate organic liquid waste and low level (less
than 2mR/hr) combustible solid waste (other than plastic waste). The off-gas is cleaned
Page 247
Chapter 6

by two stage water scrubbers before discharging it through 30m tall chimney.
Continuous monitoring system is provided to monitor the gas emitted from the chimney.
Solid Waste Disposal
Solid wastes after conditioning will be disposed off in the Near Surface Disposal Facility
(NSDF) area in earth trenches / RCC trenches / vaults / tile holes / HIC depending upon
their surface dose rate. As a matter of practice packages having higher activity are
disposed off at the bottom of trenches / vaults will be suitably sealed permanently as per
established practices. These data will be utilised to assess the safety aspects of the
waste repository. Necessary geo-hydrological & soil analysis studies for the NSDF site
will be carried out to assess the safety of NSDF containing solid waste generated from
50 years of plant operation. Proper surveillance of Solid Waste Management Facility is
carried out through bore holes provided all around the NSDF to check the integrity of the
engineered barriers through periodic water sampling. Additional array of boreholes will
be provided, whenever the facility is augmented. The NSDF area is fenced and
necessary access control procedures are established. A waste assaying is carried out to
assess and record the radioactive content in each conditioned waste packages before
disposing them. Name of the vault and their identification also recorded.
The dose rate on the top of the sealed earth trenches and RCC trenches / vaults would
Near Surface Disposal Facility (NSDF)
The engineered measures for solid waste disposal are graded in accordance with the
level of radioactivity activity encountered. An overview of these is presented below.
Stone Lined Earthen Trenches: The Suspected or low level solid wastes (surface dose
less than 0.02 mSv/h, Cat-I) after being immobilized in cement matrix are buried in stone
lined earthen trenches. These are shallow excavation in soil of size 5 m x 2.5 m x 2 m
deep. Filled trenches are covered by brick and overlain by soil.
Reinforced cement concrete (RCC) trenches: are used for disposal of part of Cat-I
and Cat-II waste (up to 0.5 Sv/h). These trenches have water-proof tiles at the bottom
and on lateral surfaces, and the top is closed with RCC covers. Typically, these are
constructed in a battery with four rows of sizes 1.2 m (depth) x 1.8 m (width) x 20 m
(length). The trenches are usually built zone by zone, each of which would be sufficient
for 3 5 years of operation. Fig. 6.3 shows a schematic of the RCC trench.
The site selected for NSDF is such that the ground water table is below the planned
storage depth, the soil has high enough cation exchange capability (CEC) to retain or
slow down the migration of radio-nuclides in the event of their leakage, and surface
water sources are at least 100 m away. Moreover, back fill materials with large CEC
could also be used all around the RCC trench / tile hole zones to enhance retention.
Bore holes are provided around NSDF to monitor activity leaking into ground water.
The net volume of solid waste generated (after due processing) per year that would be
disposed off in NSDF is around 514m3/yr.
Page 248
Chapter 6

Size & Life of Radioactive Solid waste Disposal Facility

Adequate Land required for Near Surface Disposal Facility (NSDF) will be allotted during
detailed plant layout stage. This requirement will include 50-60 years of operating life,
once in life time En-massse Coolant Channel Replacement (EMCCR) requirement and
decommissioning requirements. Initially the disposal modules of NSDF such as Earth
Trenches, RCC Trenches and Tile holes will be made to meet the requirement of
approximately 10 years of reactor operation and will be augmented as and when
required.
NSDF is designed for 50-60 years of operating life followed by 30 years of instructional
control period.
Size of Disposal Modules
1. Earth Trenches : 4m x 4 m x 2 m deep (10 trenches will be constructed initially).
2. RCC Trenches : 32 trenched in one modules. Two modules will be constructed
Initially Size of Trench : 5.885 m x 1.475 m x 3 m deep each.
Fig. 6.2 Schematic Section Diagram of RCC Trench
Page 249
Chapter 6

Fig. 6.3: Schematic Section Diagram of the Tile Hole

Incinerator
The main objective of the incinerator is to minimize the activity disposal in earthen
trenches thereby reducing the activity ingress into ground water. This is one of the most
widely used method for volume reduction of low level combustible waste by which
reduction in disposal space and cost reduction in engineered barriers can be achieved.
This system will cater to very low level active combustible solid waste like paper-waste,
cotton waste, mops, discarded clothing, packing materials etc. The incinerator will only
after collecting required volume of waste to optimize the fuel requirement to start the
incinerator. Generally 2 to 3 days of operation per month is sufficient. Chimney height
will be 30m and the exit gas will pass through two stage water scrubber.
Plastic waste will be fused (melt densification method) in a drum to achieve significant
volume reduction.
About 114kg/yr of combustible waste will be generated. This will be disposed of by
means of a package Incinerator of 50 kg per hour capacity.
The incinerator proposed is of rotary kiln type. It comprises of a cylindrical mild steel
chamber (Primary chamber), stationary secondary chamber and flue gas treatment
systems. The heating is provided with primary and secondary burners. Hopper and ram
loaders that operate automatically are provided to feed the waste into the incinerator.
Page 250
Chapter 6

The primary chamber is designed to withstand extremely high temperature and is

refractory lined and insulated accordingly. It is provided with a variable speed drive to
achieve the desired speed of rotation depending upon the waste being incinerated. It
has slight inclination to allow the refuse to move continuously. As the primary chamber
keeps rotating, there is no need of raking of waste. The incinerator design is such that
the flue gas and the waste travel in opposite direction, ensuring maximum efficiency of
combustion.
The ash in the primary chamber falls to the bottom and automatically gets collected into
ash container. The flue gases are transferred from the rotary drum in to the secondary
chamber where there is sufficient residence time for flue gases. Thereafter the flue
gases pass through the gas cleaning system to the stack.
The process flow diagram is shown in the Fig. 6.4.
.
Sterile ash
Feed to
incinerator
Main
combustion
chamber
(primary
rotating
chamber)
Post
combustion
chamber
(secondary
stationery
chamber)
Heat
recovery
system
(heat
exchanger
/spray dryer)
Gas cleaning
system
(bag filter,
Scrubber)
Stack
Fig. 6.4: Process Flow Diagram for Package Rotary Kiln Incinerator
6.3.3.4 Spent Fuel Storage and Management
Spent Fuel
Spent fuel is removed from the reactor core and transferred to spent fuel inspection bay
(SFIB) where it is inspected for leaks / pin holes / damage. It is then stored in spent fuel
storage bay (SFSB) which is under continuous radiological surveillance. The spent fuel
is stored in SFSB till it cools down to dry storage level (about 5 years). Subsequent
action on the spent fuel is dictated by the policy of the Department of Atomic Energy /
Government of India.
Page 251
Chapter 6

Size of Spent Fuel Storage Bay

The size of one SFSB can accommodate 10 years of spent fuel discharge and one core
load.
Design / Technology
The spent fuel storage and management systems design will be such that the radiation
dose to the members of public from all the routes is restricted to 1000 Sv/y.
At present no reprocessing facility is envisaged for HAPP Site. The establishment and
management of reprocessing facility of spent fuel falls within the purview of DAE and the
same will be addressed suitably. Moreover, the requirement of reprocessing of the spent
fuel will arise only after 12 years from now, as the reactor will be under construction for 5
- 6 years followed by another 5 -10 years for the cooling of spent fuel. The technology to
be adopted at that time is difficult to propose at the movement, as technology undergoes
continuous improvements and up-gradation. However, the latest and safest technology
available at that time will be applied.
6.3.4
Conventional Waste Management
6.3.4.1 Sewage Treatment Plant at HAPP

A conventional sewage treatment plant is planned as a common facility for HAPP. This
would be located in the northwest corner of the site adjacent to the Fatehabad branch of
Bhakra canal. The rated capacity of the plant is 0.5 Million Liters Per day (MLD).
The treated effluent will meet the following characteristics. pH 6.5 to 8.5, TSS < 30
mg/l, BOD <20 mg/l.
6.3.4.2 Sewage Treatment Plant at Township
Refer Section 2.28.1, Chapter 2.
6.3.4.3 Solid Waste Disposal at HAPP
HAPP would generate non-radioactive solid waste from zone 1 which is exclusively
office waste, comprising mostly of waste papers and biodegradable waste from canteen.
The canteen biodegradable waste after being segregated at source will be sent for
composting by vermin-culture within the plant premises. The paper waste coming out will
be sold to local vendors for recycling.
6.3.4.4 Solid Waste Disposal at Township
Refer Section 2.28.2, Chapter 2.
6.4
GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT: MITIGATION MEASURES
6.4.1
General
Green belt, is an important sink for air pollutants, it also absorbs noise. Enhancing green
cover not only mitigates pollutants but also improves the ecological conditions /
aesthetics and reduces the adversities of extreme weather conditions. Trees also have
Page 252
Chapter 6

major long-term impacts on soil quality and the ground water table. By using suitable
plant species, green belts can be developed in strategic zones to provide protection from
emitted pollutants and noise.
Plant species suitable for green belts should not only be able to flourish in the area but
must also have rapid growth rate, evergreen habit, large crown volume and small /
pendulous leaves with smooth surfaces. All these traits are difficult to get in a single
species. Therefore a combination of these is sought while selecting trees for green belt.
The green belt should be planted close to the source or to the area to be protected to
optimize the attenuation within physical limitations.
The green belt / cover will serve the following purposes:
Compensate the damage to vegetation due to setting up and operation of the
proposed plant.
Prevent the spread of fugitive dust generated due to project and allied activities.
Attenuate noise generated by the project.
Reduce soil erosion
Help stabilise the slope of project site.
Increases green cover and improve aesthetics.
Attract animals to re-colonise the area.
6.4.2
Selection of Species
The species for plantation have been selected on the basis of soil quality, place of
plantation, chances of survival, commercial value (timber value, ornamental value, etc.),
etc. It is to be noted that only indigenous species will be planted. Exotic species like
Eucalyptus and Australian acacia will not be planted. The species for green belt /
vegetation cover development will be selected in consultation with State Forest
Department and State Soil Conservation Department. Mixed plantations will be done
keeping optimum spacing between the saplings. However, the species suitable for
planting in the area as recommended by Central Pollution Control Board in their
publication Guidelines for Developing Greenbelts (PROBES/75/1999-2000) are
given under various heads here under.
6.4.3
Plantation Scheme
Plant saplings will be planted in pits at about 2.0 m to 3.0 intervals so that the tree
density is about 1500 trees per ha. The pits will be filled with a mixture of good quality
soil and organic manure (cow dung, agricultural waste, kitchen waste) and insecticide.
The saplings / trees will be watered using the effluent from the sewage treatment plant
and treated discharges from project. They will be manured using sludge from the
sewage treatment plant. In addition kitchen waste from plant canteen can be used as
manure either after composting or by directly burying the manure at the base of the
plants. Since, tests have shown that availability of phosphorus, a limiting nutrient, is low,
phosphoric fertilisers will also be added. The saplings will be planted just after the
Page 253
Chapter 6

commencement of the monsoons to ensure maximum survival. The species selected for
plantation will be locally growing varieties with fast growth rate and ability to flourish
even in poor quality soils.
A total of more than 33% of total project area will be developed as green belt or green
areas in project area and other areas including the residential complex. The widths of
the belt will be >20m along the project boundary, depending on the availability of space.
The proposed Green belt / cover development is shown in Drg. No. HAPP-1 to
4/70000/2002/GA (DR.LWS).Rev.01
A very elaborate green belt development plan has been drawn for the proposed plant.
The areas, which need special attention regarding green belt development in the project
area, are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Around plant units

Plant Boundary
Vacant Areas in Plant
Around Office Buildings, Garage, Stores etc.
Along Road Sides (Avenue Plantation)
Plantation in Township
Annual winds in the study area are mainly from W, NW, SW and N. Inside the HAPP
works area, the region with high fugitive pollution load are areas around road, parking
areas and go-downs where loading and unloading of different materials takes place.
To arrest the fugitive emissions emitted from above areas tree plantation will be
undertaken in general all around the HAPP but the more in strategic places especially on
E, SE, NE and S of the above areas along with that in other directions. To arrest the
fugitive emissions emitted from such areas, the approach adopted shall be - as
described below and as shown in Fig. 6.5:
Plantation all around close to the units / areas (fugitive emission source) in available
spaces to arrest fugitive emissions at the source.
Considering the HAPP as centre and planting trees in a V in SW-SE; SE-NE; NENW direction [i.e down wind (D/W) of predominant winds, E, SE, NE and S] at
staggered distances in available spaces to arrest fugitive emissions which have not
been arrested by the green belt at the source.
Plantation along the plant boundary - >20m depending on space availability.
Page 254
Chapter 6

Fig. 6.5: Schematic Diagram of Greenbelt Development

1. Around Plant Units
As there will be limited space (in height) due to various over head pipelines, thus small
and medium sized species are suggested and they should be planted depending on the
vertical height and lateral space available for the plant growth. The above-mentioned
areas / direction should be covered with pollution tolerant species (in the space available
around) as mentioned below:
Scientific Name
Acacia jacquemontii
Acacia nilotica
Acacia senegal
Bougainvillea spp.
Carissa spinarum
Duranta sp.
Murraya exotica
Nerium sp
Prosopis cineraria
Thevieta peruviana
Common Name
Babool
Kikar
Khairi
Bougainvellea
Hins
Duranta
Kamayani
Pink Kaner
Jand
Yellow Kaneer
2. Along Plant Boundary

Green belt is to be developed along the project boundary of the atomic power complex
and the residential complex plant boundary. The proposed plantation should be in three
concentric orbits:
Page 255
Chapter 6

(i) Curtain belt on the outermost boundary comprising tall trees with conical canopy.
(ii) Middle belt of large size trees with globose and spreading canopy and
(iii) Inner belt with medium size trees with spreading or trailing canopy. The desired
minimum thickness of these belts should be as follows:
Location
Outer belt (pollution attenuation)
Middle belt (pollution attenuation)
Inner belt (pollution attenuation and training of winds to middle & outer belt)
Width (m)
30
50
20
However, the above-mentioned thickness of each belt may be proportionately reduced

or increased in view of the total space available for plantation work. The list of plants to
be used in each belt is given in the following paragraphs.
In the curtain belt the following species of trees be planted keeping a space of 2.5m from
plant to plant as well as from row to row:
Scientific Name
Common Name
Acacia nilotica
Acacia senegal
Albizia lebbeck
Azadirachta indica
Dalbergia sissoo
Melia azedarach
Kikar
Khairi
Siris
Neem
Shisham
Bakain
Ashok
In the middle belt the following species of trees to be planted 3 m apart, from tree to tree
as well as from row to row:
Scientific Name
Common Name
Albizia lebbeck
Azadirachta indica
Bauhinia racemosa
Cassia fistula
Cordia dichotoma
Dalbergia sissoo
Delonix regia
Ficus benghalensis
Ficus religiosa
Melia azedarach
Siris
Neem
Kachnar
Amaltas
Lasura
Shisham
Gulmohar
Barh
Peepal
Bakain
In the inner belt the following species of trees and shrubs to be planted 2.0 m apart from
tree to tree as well as from row to row:
Scientific Name
Common Name
Acacia jacquemontii
Acacia leucophloea
Babool
Reru
Page 256
Chapter 6

Scientific Name
Common Name
Acacia nilotica
Acacia senegal
Capparis decidua
Carissa spinarum
Prosopis cineraria
Kikar
Khairi
Karir
Hins
Jand
3. Vacant Areas in Atomic Power Plant and Residential Complex

Plantation in vacant areas will be selected from among the following species. Plantation
will be done in staggered trench manner 3.0 apart.
Scientific Name
Common Name
Albizia lebbeck
Azadirachta indica
Bauhinia racemosa
Cassia fistula
Cordia dichotoma
Dalbergia sissoo
Delonix regia
Ficus benghalensis
Ficus religiosa
Melia azedarach
Siris
Neem
Kachnar
Amaltas
Lasura
Shisham
Gulmohar
Barh
Peepal
Bakain
4. Plantation around Office Buildings, Stores, Garage etc of the Atomic Power
Complex and the Residential Complex
The species recommended for plantation around various buildings will include:
Scientific Name
Common Name
Albizia lebbeck
Azadirachta indica
Bauhinia racemosa
Cassia fistula
Cordia dichotoma
Dalbergia sissoo
Delonix regia
Ficus benghalensis
Melia azedarach
Siris
Neem
Kachnar
Amaltas
Lasura
Shisham
Gulmohar
Barh
Bakain
Ashok
5. Avenue Plantation of the Atomic Power Complex and the Residential Complex
Double rows of avenue trees on the outer side of the footpaths are recommended; an
outer row of shade trees and an inner row of ornamental flowering trees will be planted.
(a) Foliage Trees for Outer Avenue:
Scientific Name
Common Name
Acacia leucophloea
Albizia lebbeck
Reru
Siris
Page 257
Chapter 6

Scientific Name
Common Name
Azadirachta indica
Cordia dichotoma
Dalbergia sissoo
Ficus benghalensis
Ficus religiosa
Melia azedarach
Neem
Lasura
Shisham
Barh
Peepal
Bakain
(b) Flowering / Ornamental Trees for Inner Avenue:

Scientific Name
Bauhinia racemosa
Bougainvillea spp.
Cassia fistula
Cassia javanica
Delonix regia
Lagerstroemia parviflora
Nerium sp
Thevieta peruviana
Common Name
Kachnar
Bougainvellea
Amaltas
Java-ki-rani
Gulmohar
Lagerstroemia
Pink Kaner
Ashok
Yellow Kaneer
6. Plantation in Township
In the 75 ha township there will be about 1700 dwelling units. The areas along the roads
and in vacant spaces will be available for plantation. The species for avenue plantation
will be same as given under Clause 5 above. The design of green belt and the species
all along the township boundary will be from among that given under Clause 2 above.
The species for vacant spaces and office buildings like, clubs, guest house, etc in the
township will be from among the species as mentioned respectively under Clauses 3 &
4 under Section 6.4.3.
6.4.4
Post Plantation Care
6.4.5
Immediately after planting the seedlings, watering will be done. The wastewater
discharges from different sewage treatment plant / out falls will be used for watering the
plants during non-monsoon period. Further watering will depend on the rainfall. In the
dry seasons watering will be regularly done especially during February to June. Watering
of younger saplings will be more frequent. Manuring will be done using organic manure
(animal dung, agricultural waste, kitchen waste etc.). Younger saplings will be
surrounded with tree guards. Diseased and dead plants will be uprooted and destroyed
and replaced by fresh saplings. Growth / health and survival rate of saplings will be
regularly monitored and remedial actions will be undertaken as required.
.
Phase Wise Green Belt / Cover Development Plan
Green belt will be developed in a phase wise manner right from the construction phase
of the proposed project. In the first phase along with the start of the construction activity
the plant boundary, around the proposed waste dumps, and the major roads will be
Page 258
Chapter 6

planted. In the second phase the office building area will be planted. In the third phase
when all the construction activity is complete plantation will be taken up in the plant area,
around different units, in stretch of open land and along other roads.
6.5
CONCLUSION
From the foregoing description it is evident that mitigative measures form integral part of
the design of the Atomic Power Plant. The present plans to mitigate the environmental
impact from radiation and conventional pollutants seem to be adequate and no
additional measurers are likely to contribute effectively.
References
[1] "Manual on Security of Nuclear Power Plants". AERB
[2] "The Physical Protection of Nuclear Material", INFCIRC /225/Rev.1, IAEA Circular
Page 259
Chapter 6

CHAPTER 7 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

(EMP)
7.0
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP)
7.1
INTRODUCTION
The monitoring and evaluation of the mitigation measures envisaged are critical activities
in implementation of the Project. Monitoring involves periodic checking to ascertain
whether activities are going according to the plans. It provides the necessary feedback
for project management to keep the program on schedule. The purpose of the
environmental monitoring plan is to ensure that the envisaged purpose of the project is
achieved and results in desired benefits.
To ensure the effective implementation of the proposed mitigation measures, the broad
objectives of monitoring plan are:
To evaluate the performance of mitigation measures proposed in the EMP.
To evaluate the adequacy of Environmental Impact Assessment
To suggest improvements in management plan, if required
To enhance environmental quality.
To implement and manage the mitigative measures defined in EMP.
To undertake compliance monitoring of the proposed project operation and
evaluation of mitigative measure.
7.2
IMPLEMENTATION ARRANGEMENT
The various components of the environment needs to be monitored on regular basis
during construction and operation phase of the project, as per the requirements of
regulating agencies as well as for trend monitoring of the pollutants levels in various
environmental matrices.
7.2.1

During construction stage different issues / components involved in environmental
monitoring programme will be looked upon by Planning Section and Environmental
Survey Laboratory (ESL) and the two will report to Project Director (PD) for review. The
monitoring of conventional pollutant will be taken up by hiring local agencies /
consultants. Whereas, the radiological parameters will be monitored by ESL.
7.2.2
During Operation Stage

At the project, an Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC) will
be formed, which will review the effectiveness of environmental management plan of the
project during construction phase and Environmental Management System of the station
in line with ISO-14001 & OHSAS 18000 during operation phase.
Page 260
Chapter 7

At plant level Technical Services Unit (TSU) will look after the environmental matters
and environmental monitoring programme. TSU will work out a schedule for monitoring
and will meet regularly to review the effectiveness of the EMP implementation. The data
collected on various EMP measures would be reviewed by this committee and if needed
corrective action will be formulated for implementation.
TSU will form short term & long term plans for environmental issues, which require
monitoring and effective implementation. The environmental quality-monitoring program
will be carried out in the impact zone with suitable sampling stations and frequency for
non radiological parameters as identified under Section 7.3.
Radiological parameters outside exclusion zone will be monitored by Environmental
Survey Laboratory (ESL) of Health Physics Division (HPD), Bhabha Atomic Research
Centre (BARC). The ESL will be set up at the site, at least 18 months before operation
of the plant units. Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL) will report to Health Physics
Division (HPD), BARC. The two will periodically report the progress of the environmental
monitoring programme to the Station Director / NPCIL management and AERB for
review and necessary action (if required).
Radiological parameters within exclusion zone will be monitored by Health Physics Unit
(HPU), Chemical Laboratory and Waste Management Unit (WMU) formed at project
level by NPCIL. The radiological monitoring will be reported to Technical Services Unit
(TSU), which in turn reports to Chief Superintend (CS) and CS reports to Station
Director (SD) of the project.
Non-radiological pollutants will be monitored by HPU, Chemical Laboratory and Waste
Management Unit and these will report the results to TSU, which in turn reports to Chief
Superintend (CS) and CS reports to Station Director (SD) of the project.
Monitoring of radiation exposures to occupational workers and the releases to the
environment are controlled by the station and monitored by Health Physics Unit and ESL
within exclusion zone and beyond any exclusion zone, respectively.
During operation stage different issues / components involved in environmental
monitoring programme will be looked upon by Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL),
Health Physics Unit, Chemical laboratory, Waste management Unit (WMU), Medical
Unit, Civil Maintenance, Maintenance Unit, Horticulture Unit / Service Maintenance,
Central Material & Management, Industrial Safety and Corporate Social Responsibility
(CSR) Unit / Human Resources Group. All the above mentioned units responsible for
different aspects of monitoring will periodically report the progress of the environmental
monitoring programme to TSU for review and necessary action (if required). The
reporting arrangement of different units responsible for environmental monitoring
programme during construction and operation phase is given under Section 7.6.2.
The TSU will monitor and make periodical review of the environmental monitoring
program and in case higher level interface is required will report the matter to EMARC
for higher management intervention.
Page 261
Chapter 7

7.3
ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS TO BE MONITORED

Several measures have been proposed in the environmental mitigation measures for
mitigation of adverse environmental impacts. These shall be implemented as per
proposal and monitored regularly to ensure compliance to environmental regulation and
also to maintain a healthy environmental conditions around the steel works.
A major part of the sampling and measurement activity shall be concerned with long
term monitoring aimed at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or
trends in the natural environment that could be associated with the plant activity. This is
essential to determine whether the changes are in response to a cycle of climatic
conditions or are due to impact of the plant activities. In particular, a monitoring strategy
shall be ensured that all environmental resources, which may be subject to
contamination, are kept under review and hence monitoring of the individual elements of
the environment shall be done.
The environmental quality monitoring program will be carried out in the impact zone with
suitable sampling stations and frequency for radiological and non radiological
parameters. Radiological parameters will be monitored by Environmental Survey
Laboratory (ESL) and Health Physics Unit (HPU), which will be set up at the site, at least
18 months before operation of the plant units. During the operation phase Environmental
Survey Laboratory (ESL) shall undertake all the radiological monitoring work outside
exclusion zone and the HPU will undertake the radiological monitoring work within
exclusion zone to ensure the effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures. The
conventional pollutants will be monitored by Chemical Laboratory, HPU and Waste
Management Unit. The suggestions given in the Environmental Monitoring Programme
(EMP) shall be implemented by the ESL by following an implementation schedule.
In case of any alarming variation in, radiation levels in air, water, food items, soil (within
HAPP and in surroundings as applicable), ambient air, stack emission, work zone air
and noise monitoring results, performance of effluent treatment facilities, wastewater
discharge from outfalls, etc. shall be discussed and any variance from norms shall be
reported to the Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC) for
immediate rectification action at the higher management level.
In addition to the monitoring programme the following shall also be done to further
ensure the effectiveness of mitigation measures:
Quarterly environmental audits shall be carried out for the project to check for
compliance with standards / applicable norms by in-house experts. The Atomic
Power Plant will be brought under ISO-14001 & OHSAS 18000, shall be audited as
per the pre-plan audit.
The environmental aspects to be monitored to ensure proper implementation and
effectiveness of various mitigative measures envisaged / adopted during the design and
commissioning stage of the HAPP are described here under.
The frequency of monitoring schedule for different parameters as mentioned below may
Page 262
Chapter 7

increase depending on the requirement.

7.4
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME: CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Chapter 5, Section 5.4, describes the impacts and mitigation measures envisaged
during construction stage vis--vis the environmental components which are likely to get
impacted in case mitigation measures are not adequately followed. In view of the same
the environmental components / indicators which are to be monitored during
construction phase are air, water, noise levels and soil.
The air quality (at the project site and ambient air quality in the surrounding nearby
villages) will indicate to which extent the mitigation measures are being followed.
Similarly the up-stream and downstream surface water quality (w.r.t project site) of
Fatehabd branch of Bhakra Canal, will indicate the quality and extent of waste water
from the project site is being discharged in to the canal (vis--vis the extent of
environmental mitigation measures being followed during construction stage). Like wise
the monitoring of ground water, up-gradient and down-gradient of project site will
indicate seepage of pollutants in to ground water from the construction site.
The noise levels at the project site and surrounding villages has been planned to assess
the noise level to which the construction workers and surrounding population are
exposed during construction phase. This will indicate the level of noise mitigation
measures being followed during the construction stage.
The soil quality in the surrounding area and at the project site will indicate the pollutant
fall out from the construction site in the surrounding areas.
The environmental monitoring programme during construction phase is presented in
Table 7.1. The implementation of monitoring will be contractors responsibility and the
supervision will be done by NPCIL Planning Section. During construction stage the total
environmental monitoring cost is about Rs. 8.0 lakhs per year and for five years the
same will be Rs. 40.0 lakhs. The cost will be built up in the project cost, while subletting
the construction activity to the contactor.
Table 7.1: Environmental Monitoring Programme Construction Stage (5 Years)
Compon
ent
Air
Parameters
SO2, NOx, PM10 &

PM2.5
Location
Monitoring
Frequency
of
For Atomic Power Plant Site

At four locations, one at project site
and three at 120 degrees in
nearest adjacent villages. Once in
a season (except monsoon) per
year for 5 years
No. of Samples /
year (Locations X
Monitoring
Frequency)
4x3
Monitoring
Cost / Year
(Rs.)
12x20000
= 240000/-
Page 263
Chapter 7

Compon
ent
Parameters
Location
Monitoring
Frequency
of
For Residential Complex Site

year for 5 years
Two surface water (Fatehabad
branch Bhakra Canal), up-stream
and downstream of project site.
Water
Surface Water:
CPCB surface
water criteria;
Ground Water:
IS:10500
Two Ground Water: Up-gradient

and Down-gradient of project site.
Two surface water (Fatehabad
branch Bhakra Canal), up-stream
and downstream of project site.
No. of Samples /
year (Locations X
Monitoring
Frequency)
4x3
12x20000
= 240000/-
4x3
12x8000
= 96000/-
4x3
12x8000
= 96000/-
Two Ground Water: Up-gradient

and Down-gradient of project site.
4x3
Noise Levels Leq
year for 5 years
Noise
(A)
4x3
year for 5 years
4x1
a year during winter season for 5
As per standard
years.
Soil
practice
4x1
a year during winter season for 5
years.
Total monitoring cost per year (to be built up in project cost, while sub-letting
construction activity to contractor)
Note :
Monitoring
Cost / Year
(Rs.)
12x2000
= 24000/-
12x2000
= 24000/-
4x6000
= 24000/-
4x6000
= 24000/-
7,68,000/Say
8.0
Lakhs
Construction period is 5 years
Page 264
Chapter 7

7.5
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME: OPERATION PHASE

The environmental monitoring programme for different environmental components /
indicators which are to be monitored during the operation phase will be as given under
different heads.
7.5.1
7.5.1.1 General
The radiation exposures to occupational workers and the releases to the environment
will be controlled by the facility / HAPP and monitored by NPCIL (Health Physics Unit).
The radioactivity levels in the public domain will be monitored by the Environmental
Survey Laboratory (ESL), Health Physics Division (HPD), BARC to ensure compliance
with the regulatory requirements. The ESL at atomic power project site should be set up
18 months before the start of the actual operation of the unit to generate pre-operational
base line data for comparison as per AERB Safety Guide No. AERB/SG/O-9.
The radiological monitoring program to be followed at HAPP is described under three
separate categories.
Monitoring at the work place
Monitoring on site
Monitoring program in public domain
7.5.1.2
Monitoring Program at the Work Place

Standard radiation protection practices for Atomic Power facilities stipulate the kind of
radiological monitoring required. The Project Design Safety Committee (PDSC) and
Safety Review Committee for operating plant (SARCOP) constituted by AERB for APP
would review the proposals included in the design for such monitoring and stipulate the
requirements after the review. Most of these instruments are intended for planning and
conducting the day-to-day operations of the plant. Those that are relevant to
occupational safety of personnel or to environmental discharges are discussed below.
i) Ambient Radiation / Contamination Monitoring within Plant Area
All the accessible areas of the plant will be constantly monitored for ambient radiation
levels and concentration of radioactive materials in air. These monitors have built in
preset levels in order to initiate audio/visual alarms.
At the exit of the operating areas of the plant, personnel will be monitored for radioactive
contamination through installation of portal monitors. In addition, the plant will also carry
out continuous monitoring of the radiation levels around the periphery of the plant.
Criticality alarm system will be an essential component, for alerting staff in case of
untoward criticality events. These will be installed at a number of strategic locations
where the operation involves handling of large quantities of fissile materials. Radiation
level data from these systems would also serve in post accident recovery operations.
Page 265
Chapter 7

ii) Effluent Monitoring

The gaseous radioactive effluents discharged through the stack will be monitored on a
continuous basis through online monitors with alarm in the control room, as stipulated by
AERB.
Liquid wastes generated from different units of HAPP are sent to the waste management
plant (WMP). On such occasions, the concentration of radio-nuclides will be measured,
the quantum of waste dispatched will be noted and all such data will be logged in a
register. A similar procedure will be followed while dispatching the solid wastes also.
These steps will be implemented to insure that waste disposal is within the discharge
limits authorised by AERB for PHWRs-APP.
Before discharging the low radioactive liquid waste in to the receiving water bodies, the
liquid waste will be monitored online for radioactivity levels and based on the results
obtained the discharge will be regulated. Sampling and monitoring will also be done at
the discharge location where the effluent meets the receiving water body.
iii) Monitoring Waste Storage Integrity
In order to check for potential leak of radioactive substances from waste storage facilities
into the ground water, a ring of bore wells will be provided in the immediate periphery for
monitoring. Bore well water samples collected around the plant will be checked and
analysed for radioactive pollutants. The frequency of monitoring would be quarterly or as
prescribed by AERB from time to time.
iv) Personnel Monitoring
As the regulatory authority has fixed the annual limit of radiation exposure to the
occupational worker, it is mandatory on the part of the plant management to ensure and
demonstrate that no worker has exceeded the limit. Accordingly, all the radiation workers
will be provided with personal monitoring devices to quantitatively estimate the external
exposures received by them during the course of their work. Such monitoring devices wil
be processed once a month and the accumulated radiation dose will be measured. This
will be done at the TLD laboratory services at HAPP, which will be accredited for such
services.
To assess internal exposure, all the occupational workers will be subjected to whole
body counting for detection and measurement of radioactive materials inside their body,
which might have entered during the routine course of work. In case of suspected intake,
persons will be subjected to bioassay. Persons suspected to be overexposed will be
monitored using bio-dosimetry. All these facilities will be available, in-house, in the
laboratory manned by experts.
The measured doses will be added to the personal dose record of the individual,
maintained in a national registry kept by BARC. The copy of extracted dose records will
be kept in the plant and will be scrutinised by AERB during periodic inspections.
Page 266
Chapter 7

7.5.1.3
7.5.1.4
Radiological Monitoring on Site

The radiation exposures to occupational workers and the releases to the environment
are controlled by the station and monitored by Health Physics Unit. On site monitoring
program will include the following:
A weekly vehicular survey of the site will be carried out to monitor radiation levels
(using a scintilla-meter) at different selected locations. The purpose of the survey will
be to look for deviation from normal values that could signify any untoward release or
possible contamination episode. The observation points will be chosen as per the
requirements of AERB.
A network of Continuous Environmental Radiation Monitoring stations will be set up

at 10 locations distributed around the site. Field mounted environmental gamma
dose logger will be used to monitor (log) gamma radiation levels, continuously. The
data from these stations will be downloaded once in two weeks and analysed to look
for any abnormal increase. Tele-metering of all the data to a central console will be
planned in order to sound alarms in case of high values.
Watchdog monitors at all entry / exit points to the complex will be installed to detect
movement of radioactive substances. The movement may be a planned one or may
be unintentional as in the case of contaminated persons or goods leaving the area
unknowingly. The signals from the systems would be brought to a health physics
control panel for initiating early action, if needed.
Radiological Monitoring in the Public Domain

An environmental survey laboratory (ESL) will be set up as the requirements / directions
of AERB at the HAPP. The monitoring program pursued by ESL would address the
requirements of environmental monitoring in the public domain.
i)
Internal Radiation Levels
Environmental Matrices Sampled

The critical pathways by which radiation exposure may arise to the public will be
identified, taking into account the cropping patterns prevalent in the area, the nature of
occupation and the food habits of the population groups living nearby, and so on. Based
on this, an environmental sampling program will be formulated specifying (i) the matrices
such as rice, vegetables, milk, fish meat, etc. that need to be considered for monitoring,
(ii) the desired frequency or periodicity of sampling and (iii) the number of samples to be
collected in a year.
Areas Surveyed
Radiological survey will be done up to a radial distance of 30 km around the plant. The
survey area will be divided into four zones. The project site is about 1.0 Km radius circle,
the survey area will be divided into four zones 1, 2, 3 and 4 (1.0 - 5 km, 5 - 10 km, 10 15 km, and 15 - 30 km, respectively).
Generally, samples will be collected covering all the four zones. The indicator organism
like goat thyroid will be collected from selected zone (as per the requirements of AERB).
Page 267
Chapter 7

Different types of samples will be collected from the terrestrial and aquatic environs of
the 30km study area covering, canal water, soil, cereals, pulses and vegetation samples.
Typically around 1000 samples will be collected and analysed every year. List of
sampling locations, frequency of sampling and different types of samples to be
monitored during post project period in different zones will be worked out as per the
requirements of AERB. The same for baseline levels in the area as worked out is given
under Section 3.3 of chapter 3.
ii) External Radiation Levels
The external gamma radiation levels will be monitored using integrating type dosimeters,
namely the thermo-luminescence dosimeter (TLD). The list of locations in the
surrounding areas where TLDs will be placed will be as per AERB. The measurement of
accumulated exposure will be done for quarterly periods. The same for baseline levels in
the area as worked out is given under Section 3.3 of chapter 3.
Measurement Techniques and Practices
Radioactivity levels in the environment are very low. Measurement of such low levels of
activity calls for special techniques. These have been developed and standardised over
the years in DAE. Relevant details about the methods of sample collection, quantity to
be collected, sample storage conditions, analytical procedures to be followed etc. are
well documented and are available in the form of a manual.
The environmental survey laboratory (ESL) will have a full-fledged laboratory for
analysing radiological parameters. The conventional pollutants will be monitored by
Chemical laboratory. The list of equipments required for sampling / analysis / monitoring
of conventional pollutants is given under Section 7.6.3. In addition, the list of
equipment/instruments specialty for radiation/radioactivity measurements is given under
Section 7.6.3. Regular inter-comparison exercises between the ESL / Chemical
Laboratory of different APPs in the country will be carried out as a measure of reliability
testing and quality assurance.
iii) Reporting of Results
Dose Assessment: The external, internal and total doses to the members of the public
will be monitored and estimated at various distances from the project as per AERBs
requirements.
Results of the survey carried out by the ESL will be brought out in the form of annual
reports and will be submitted to AERB for inspection and verification of compliance with
regulatory limits on radiation exposure.
7.5.2
Other Monitoring Requirements : Occupational Health and Safety

As per AERB norms and in accordance with the revised Radiation Protection Rules2004, all the plant personnel would be subjected to periodic medical examination.
Accordingly,
Page 268
Chapter 7

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
7.5.3
Every employer shall provide the services of a physician with appropriate

qualifications to undertake occupational health surveillance of classified workers.
Every worker, initially on employment, and classified worker, thereafter at least
once in three years as long as the individual is employed, shall be subjected to (a)
general medical examination as specified by order by the competent authority and
(b) health surveillance to decide on the fitness of each worker for the intended task.
The health surveillance shall include (a) special tests or medical examinations as
specified by order by the competent authority, for workers who have received dose
in excess of regulatory constraints and (b) counseling of pregnant workers.
Monitoring for Conventional Pollutants

As stated under Chapter 5, impacts and mitigation measures, the environmental
stresses from conventional pollutants are marginal. Often the range of impact is limited
to the plant and in its immediate vicinity. The monitoring schedule is evolved
accordingly.
7.5.3.1
Work Zone Noise Levels

The Industrial Safety group of HAPP will monitor the noise levels inside and around the
plant on a quarterly basis. Extensive survey wil be done in occupied areas near the
sources of noise. Monitoring will be done in twelve places on site (Table 7.2a). The
Industrial Safety group will keep a record of noise levels and take necessary
organisational actions like rotation of workmen, availability and use of personal
protective devices, damage to enclosures or insulation layers over enclosures and
piping. The results of noise levels and action taken (if required) will be reported to AERB.
Table 7.2a : Noise Level to be Monitored
Description
Nos. of Locations
Monitoring Frequency
Work zone At all shops eight hours per shift continuous
12 X 3 (shifts) per
Noise
to cover all shift of operation once in a
quarter = 36 x 4 samples
quarter for all the twelve selected locations.
per year
*Noise Level in Leq (A)
7.5.3.2
Stack Monitoring for Diesel Generator

The diesel generator will be tested periodically for checking its state of readiness for its
availability in case of emergency. While such testing will be in progress the stack
effluents will be sampled and monitored for AAQ parameters. The monitoring frequency
would be once a quarter. There are 16 DG sets and two DG sets are connected to one
common stack. The total number of stacks to be monitored will be eight per quarter, i.e.
32 per year. The parameters to be monitored will be SO2, NOx, CO and PM
7.5.3.3
Flue Gas Monitoring

The flue gas coming out of incinerator will be sampled from the stack and monitored for
SO2, NOx, CO and PM. The operation of the incinerator is intermittent and monitoring of
the flue gases will be done once a month or as per the guidelines provided by the State
Pollution Control Board. There will be one stack attached to the incinerator thus number
of sampling / analysis per year will be 12.
Page 269
Chapter 7

7.5.3.4
Effluent Monitoring for STP

Raw sewage and effluent from STP at the site and township would be monitored. The
parameters to be examined are pH, conductivity, Total suspended solids, BOD and coliform count. The monitoring frequency will be minimum once per month or as prescribed
by the State Pollution Control Board.
The effluent quality will be monitored at the inlet and outlet of the sewage treatment
plant (STP) as given in Table 7.2b to assess the performance of STP.
Table 7.2b: Monitoring of Effluent Inlet & Outlet of ETP

Description
Nos. of Locations
Inlet and out let of STP HAPP
1X2 = 2
Once a month
Inlet and out let of STP township
1X2 = 2
Once a month
* Parameters = pH, TSS & BOD
Results of monitoring under Section 7.5.3.1 to 7.5.3.4 would be reported to State
Pollution Control Board.
7.5.4
Meteorology
The meteorological parameters will be regularly monitored for assessment and
interpretation of air quality data. The continuous monitoring will also help in emergency
planning and disaster management. The project will have a designated automatic
weather monitoring station. The following data will be recorded and archived:
-
7.5.5
Wind speed and direction

Rainfall
Temperature and humidity
Solar Radiation
Ambient Air Quality

It is necessary to monitor the air quality at the boundary of the HAPP works specifically
with respect to particulate matter, SO2 and NOx. It is proposed that continuous
monitoring stations be established at three locations Eastern, South Eastern and NorthEastern Boundaries (down wind of the predominant annual) of the HAPP. The
equipment at the continuous monitoring stations will have facilities to monitor PM10,
PM2.5, SO2 and NOx. In addition Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) will be manually monitored in
three villages, one each on the Eastern, South Western and North-Western side of the
project. The AAQ in villages will be monitored once in each month during the entire year
except monsoon season.
After the implementation of the proposed project the ambient air shall be regularly
monitored as given in Table 7.2c or as per the directives given by CPCB / SPCB from
time to time.
Page 270
Chapter 7

Table 7.2c: Ambient Air to be Monitored

Description
Number of
S
AAQ Stations
N
1. For Atomic Power Plant Site
3
Once in each month - 24 hr
Ambient Air Quality (manual). Out side
continuous (except monsoon)
plant boundary in surrounding villages in
for PM 2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx
Eastern, South Western and NorthContinuous
Western side of the project taken as centre
2
-doAmbient Air Quality (manual). Out side
township boundary in surrounding villages
in Eastern and Western side of the
township.
2. For Atomic Power Plant Site
3
PM 2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx
Continuous AAQ Monitoring Station at
Continuous
Plant Boundary
* Parameters = PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOX
7.5.6
Maintenance of Drainage System

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of all drainage
pipes/channels. Regular checking will be done to see that none of the drains are clogged
due to accumulation of sludge/sediments. The catch-pits linked to the storm water
drainage system from the different HAPP areas and in the residential complex will be
regularly checked and cleaned to ensure their effectiveness. This checking and cleaning
will be rigorous during the monsoon season, especially if heavy rains are forecast.
7.5.7
Waste Water Discharge from Project Site

All the waste water generated within the HAPP (i.e. from process and STP) and from the
STP of residential complex shall be treated up to the applicable standard. Majority of the
treated wastewater from STP will be utilized with in the plant area for dust suppression
and afforestation. Only a small quantity of treated STP wastewater will be discharged
from the treatment plant (after treatment) in to storm water drainage network of the plant
and finally out of the plant through outfalls. The number of outfalls considered for the
proposed project is 2, one from storm water drain and STP in the township and one for
low radioactive waste discharge from the atomic power plant.
Waste water discharge from all the outfalls (two outfalls) will be tested for conventional
pollutants, once in each month or as per State Pollution Control Board (SPCB)
guidelines / directives. If required the frequency of monitoring may be increased in
accordance with the stipulations of SPCB or other statutory authorities.
Page 271
Chapter 7

7.5.8
Ambient Noise
Ambient noise shall be monitored at six locations in villages surrounding the proposed
project, once in each month. The villages selected for monitoring will cover the atomic
power plant site and the residential complex.
7.5.9
Ground Water Monitoring

Ground water shall be sampled from wells / hand-pumps / tube-wells, up gradient and
down gradient of the plant area and the residential area to check for possible
contamination and to ascertain the trend of variation in the water quality, if any. In case
any adverse trend is noticed, immediate remedial measures shall be taken. A total of
five samples shall be monitored (covering the power plant site and the residential
complex site) once in each month for the critical parameters.
7.5.10 Soil Quality Monitoring

Soil samples from three locations two in villages towards E, SE and NE of the project
site shall be analysed once per year.
7.5.11 Solid / Hazardous Waste Disposal
Low-radioactivity level combustible waste generated at the project will be incinerated in
incineration plant stationed at site. the non-radioactive solid waste from zone, comprising
mostly of waste papers and biodegradable waste from canteen. The segregated
biodegradable waste will be sent for composting. Hazardous waste generated from the
HAPP will be disposed as per applicable stipulations of statutory authorities. Periodic
surveillance monitoring will be conducted to ensure that the wastes are disposed in the
manner as specified.
7.5.12 Municipal Solid Waste Disposal at Township
Municipal solid waste generated in the township will be disposed as per the provisions
made under Chapter 2 under Section 2.28.2. Periodic surveillance monitoring will be
conducted to ensure that the wastes are disposed in the manner as specified.
7.5.13 Green Belt Development
The following plan has been made for implementation of green belt at the atomic power
plant site and the residential complex site:
Annual plans for tree plantation with specific number of trees to be planted shall be
made. The fulfillment of the plan shall be monitored by the horticulture department
every six months.
A plan for post plantation care will be reviewed in every monthly meeting. Any
abnormal death rate of planted trees shall be investigated.
Regular periodic watering of the plants, manuring, weeding, hoeing will be carried
out for minimum 3 years after the plantation work.
Page 272
Chapter 7

7.5.14 House Keeping

The Industrial Safety group will be keeping a very close monitoring of house keeping
activities and organising regular meetings of joint forum at the shop level (monthly),
zonal level (once in two months) and apex level (quarterly). The individual shop
concern will be taking care for the house keeping of shops.
7.5.15 Socio-Economic Development
The setting up of the HAPP will improve the infra-structure & socio-economic conditions
thus will enhance the over all development of the region. The communities, which are
benefited by the plant, are thus one of the key stakeholders. It is suggested that the
plant management under Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) plan should have
structured interactions with the community to disseminate the measures planned / taken
by the HAPP and also to elicit suggestions from stake-holders for overall improvement
for the development of the area.
7.6
MONITORING PLAN
7.6.1

The Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMP) during construction and operation stages
envisaged for the proposed project (including the township, as applicable), for each of
the environmental condition indicator is summarized in Table 7.3 Part A & 7.3 Part B.
The monitoring plan specifies:
Parameters to be monitored
Location of the monitoring sites
Frequency and duration of monitoring
Special guidance
Applicable standards
Institutional responsibilities for implementation and supervision
Page 273
Chapter 7

Table 7.3: Part A - Environmental Monitoring Plan

Environmental
Issue/ Impacts
Construction Stage
1. Dust Generation
2. Solid
disposal
Waste
3. Air
Quality
at
construction site &
surrounding
4. Surface
water
quality
5. Ground
Quality
Water
6. Noise levels at
construction site &
surrounding
7. Soil Quality
8. Environmental
Protection
Measures
Mitigation Measure
Reference to
Contract
Documents
Approximate
Location
All possible measures to

minimize dust generation
during
construction,
like
water spraying, etc.
Reutilisation/proper disposal
of solid waste generated
during construction in preidentified dumping area.
Monitoring of air quality with
respect to various pollutants
Project
Requirement
Construction
site within the
plant
-Do-
Construction
site within the
plant
and
dumping area.
At construction
site
and
surrounding
Bhakra
canal
up & down
stream
of
project site
Up & down
gradient
of
project site
At construction
site
and
surrounding
At construction
site
and
surrounding
All plant units
-Do-
Monitoring
quality
surface
water
-Do-
Monitoring
quality
ground
water
-Do-
Monitoring noise levels
-Do-
Soil quality monitoring
-Do-
Implementation/Installation of
all Environmental Protection
Measures as envisaged in
Chapter
5
&
7
for
controlling/abating pollution.
-Do-
Time
Frame
Mitigation Cost
Institutional Responsibility
Implementat
Superion
vision
During
construction
stage
Project
Cost
(Environmental
Component)
Contractor
Planning
Section
-Do-
-Do-
Contactor
Civil
Maintenance /
CCE PD
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Planning
Section / CCE
PD
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Contractor
Industrial
Safety
Contactor
-Do-
-Do-
Contractor
Opration Stage
Page 274
Chapter 7
Planning
Section / CCE
PD
CCE / PD
Civil
Maintenance /
CCE
Planning
Section / CCE

Environmental
Issue/ Impacts
Mitigation Measure
1. Environmental
Protection
Measures
(Radiation levels /
exposure
within
exclusion zone)
2. Ambient radiation /
contamination
monitoring
within
plant area.
Proper functioning of all

Environmental
Protection
Measures as envisaged in
Chapter
5
&
6
for
controlling/abating
radiological pollution.
Continuous monitoring of all
accessible areas of plant for
ambient radiation levels &
concentration of radioactive
materials in air
Gaseous effluent monitoring
to check for potential leak of
radioactivity through stack
3. Effluent Monitoring:
Gaseous
4. Effluent Monitoring:
Liquid Waste
5. Monitoring Waste
Storage Integrity
6. Personnel
Monitoring
Monitoring of low level

radioactive
liquid
waste
before being pumped into the
receiving water body and at
the discharge location
checking for potential leak of
radioactivity to receiving
water body.
Monitoring of potential leak of
radioactivity
from
waste
storage facility into the
ground water.
Monitoring of annual limit of
radiation exposure to the
occupational worker
Implementat
Superion
vision
Health
TSU / EMARC
Physics Unit /
Station
/ Chemical Director (SD)
lab / Waste
management
Unit (WMU)
-Do-Do-
Reference to
Contract
Documents
Project
/
Statutory
requirement
Approximate
Location
Time
Frame
Mitigation Cost
Different units
of the operating
plant
Continuously
Project
Cost
(Environmental
Component)
-Do-
Total plant area
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Ventilation
stacks
Continuously
-Do-
-Do-
Waste
management
plant
&
discharge
location
of
receiving water
body.
Continuously
-Do-
-Do-
Bore-wells
around waste
storage facility
Quarterly
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
All workers in
side the plant
Continuously
-Do-
Health
Physics
Unit/Medical
TSU / EMARC
/ SD
Page 275
Chapter 7
Health
Physics Unit
/
Online
System
Control
Room
Waste
Management
Unit (WMU)
TSU
/
Operation
Superintende
nt / EMARC /
SD
TSU / EMARC
/ SD

Environmental
Issue/ Impacts
7. Radiation
Monitoring on Site
8. Radiological
Monitoring in the
Public
Domain:
Internal Radiation
Levels & External
Radiation Levels
9. Other
Monitoring
Requirements
:
Occupational
Health and Safety
10. Work Zone Noise
levels
11. Stack
Monitoring
for
Diesel
Generator Sets.
12. Stack
Monitoring
for
Waste
Incineration
Facility.
13. Performance
of
Mitigation Measure
Monitoring
of
gamma
radiation
levels,
continuously through field
mounted
environmental
gamma dose logger
Watchdog monitoring at all
entry / exit points to the
complex
to
detect
movement of radioactive
substances.
Monitoring
of
external,
internal and total radiation
doses to the members of the
public at various distances
from the project.
Reference to
Contract
Documents
-Do-
Approximate
Location
Time
Frame
Mitigation Cost
Specified 10
selected
locations.
Continuously
-Do-
Implementat
Superion
vision
Unit
Health
-DoPhysics Unit
All entry exit

points
-Do-
In
different
identified zones
within 30 km
radius of the
project.
Continuously
-Do-
ESL
HPD, BARC /
AERB / SD
Periodic medical examination

of all the plant personnel
-Do-
All the plant

personnel
Periodic
-Do-
Industrial
Safety / HPU
TSU / EMARC
/ SD
At all units of the plant
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
DG Sets
-Do-
Waste
Incinerator
location.
Through out
operation
stage
Through out
operation
stage
Industrial
Safety group
Pollution
Monitoring
Agency.
Waste
Management
Unit
SD
Monitoring of SO2, NOx, CO

and PM at the out-let of all
DG sets.
Monitoring of SO2, NOx, CO
and PM at the out-let of
Waste Incinerator
Environmental
Cost
-Do-
Monitoring of sewage quality
-Do-
Project
Civil
Maintenance
site
-Do-
Page 276
Chapter 7
-Do-
-Do-
Maintenance
Group / SD
TSU / EMARC
/ SD

Environmental
Issue/ Impacts
Mitigation Measure
Reference to
Contract
Documents
Sewage Treatment
Facilities
14. Meteorology
at inlet and out let of STP.

Monitoring of Meteorological
parameters
through
continuous
monitoring
system.
15. AAQ Monitoring at

Plant Boundary.
-Do-
16. AAQ Monitoring in

vicinity of the plant
Online AAQ Monitoring at

plant boundary at three
locations.
AAQ Monitoring in the vicinity
at three locations.
17. Maintenance
of
Storm
Water
Drainage System
Periodical cleaning of drains

to maintain storm water flow
within the Plant.
-Do-
18. Water quality at the

plant outfalls
conventional
pollutants
Monitoring of water quality at

all the outfalls as per the
wastewater discharge (in
surface water) criteria of
CPCB.
Monitoring of noise levels in
plant vicinity
-Do-
Changes in ground water

quality will be monitored in
the up-gradient and down
gradient of HAPP
-Do-
19. Ambient Noise
20. Ground
Water
Quality
conventional
pollutants
-Do-
-Do-
Approximate
Location
Time
Frame
Mitigation Cost
STP/Township
STP
Suitable
location within
plant premises
Implementat
Superion
vision
Maintenance Group / SD
Continuously
Project
Cost
(Environmental
Component)
/
Environmental
Cost
-Do-
ESL
Continuously
Environmental
Cost
-Do-
-Do-
Beginning
and end of
each
monsoon.
Continuously
Project
Cost
(Environmental
Component)
Contractor /
Service
Maintenance
Maintenance
Unit / SD
Environmental
Cost
Pollution
Monitoring
Agency
/
Chemical lab
TSU / EMARC
/ SD
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Pollution
Monitoring
Agency
/
Industrial
Safety
Pollution
Monitoring
Agency
/
TSU
At E, SE & NE
on
plant
boundary.
At E, SE & NE
of the plant in
three villages in
vicinity.
Entire
plant
drainage
network.
As per specified
waste
water
discharge
monitoring
programme
As per noise
level monitoring
programm
As per ground
water
monitoring
programme
Continuously
Page 277
Chapter 7
Contractor
TSU
HPD, BARC /
AREB
/
EMARC / SD
TSU / EMARC
/ SD
-Do-

Environmental
Issue/ Impacts
21. Soil
quality
conventional
pollutants
Mitigation Measure
Reference to
Contract
Documents
Monitoring of soil quality in

plant vicinity.
22. Solid
waste/Hazardous
Waste generation
and utililisation
Incineration
of
nonradioactive solid waste and
disposal of Hazardous waste
as per EMP.
-Do-
23. Municipal
Solid
Waste Disposal at
Township
24. Green Belt
Disposal of municipal solid

waste from township
Corporate
responsibility
Proper implementation of
green belt development and
maintenance.
Cleanliness of work place
Project
/
Statutory
requirement
-Do-
25. House Keeping
Approximate
Location
As
per
soil
quality
monitoring
programme
All the units of
the
proposed
plant
generating solid
wastes/HW
Entire
Township
green
belt
development
area
All units of the
plant.
Time
Frame
Mitigation Cost
Implementat
Superion
vision
-Do-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Project
Cost
(Environmental
Component)
Central
Material
&
Management
/ TSU
Chief
Superintende
nt / SD
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Maintenance
Department /
SD
-Do-
-Do-
-Do-
Contractor /
Civil
Maintenance
Horticulture
Unit / Service
Maintenance
All
responsible
units/
Service
Maintenance
CSR Unit /
Human
Resource
26. Socio-economic
Development
-Do-
Structured interactions with -DoStake Holders

-Do-DoSD
the
community
to
disseminate the measures
taken and also to elicit
suggestions
for
overall
improvement
for
the
development of the area
Note: EMP = environmental management plan, ESL = Environmental Survey Laboratory of the project, EMARC = Environmental Management Apex
Review Committee formed at Plant level, CCE : Chief Construction Engineer; CSR Unit: Unit formed at the project to implement Corporate Social
Responsibility goals; PM10 & PM2.5 = Particulate Matter of 10 & 2.5u size, SO 2 = sulphur-di-oxide, NOx = Nitrogen Oxides, CO = Carbon Mono-oxide.
Page 278
Chapter 7

Table 7.3: Part B: Yearly Environmental Monitoring Plan for Performance Indicators at Final Stage
Environmental
component
Work zone Noise
levels
Project
Stage
Operation
stage
Parameters
Location
Frequency
Standards
As per OSHA work-zone noise

norms.
All units of the plant
Manual Stack
Monitoring for DG
Sets Stacks
Manual Stack
Monitoring for Waste
Incinerator
Effluent Quality
Operation
stage
All the parameters as specified

by statutory authorities
All locations of DG Sets
8 hr per shift continuous (to cover all

shifts of operation at 12 shops unit)
once in each quarter during operation.
All 8 stacks in each quarter, i.e. 32
stacks per year
Applicable
statutory
standards
-Do-
Operation
stage

Waste Incinerator location
1 stacks per months, i.e. 12 stacks per

year
-Do-
(1x12)X2000
=Rs. 24000
Operation
stage
Operation
stage

PM2.5, PM10, SO 2, NOX, CO, O3
At inlet and outlet of different

effluent treatment plants
At three locations
Once in each month for two STP
-Do-Do-
Operation
stage
All the parameters for waste

water discharge in surface water
as specified by CPCB
As per National Ambient Noise
Standard as per Environmental
Protection Act, 1986 amended
2002
As per IS 10500
All plant outfalls (three)
Once in each month (except in

monsoon), continuous for 24 hr, during
operation.
Once in each month during operation
at three outfall points.
2X2X12x8000
=Rs. 384000
3X9X20000
=Rs. 900000
-Do-
2X12x8000 =Rs.
288000
Once / month during operation period

at six locations.
-Do-
6X12X2,000
=Rs. 144000
Once in each month at five locations

during operation.
Once in a year (during winters) during
operation.
-Do-
5X12X8,000 =
Rs. 480000
3X6,000 = Rs.
18000
22,24,000
Manual AAQ
Monitoring
Waste Water
Discharge Quality at
Plant Outfalls
Ambient Noise levels
Ground Water Quality

Soil quality
Operation
stage
Operation
stage
Operation
stage
Monitoring of Pb, Cr, Cd and

other heavy metals.
Six locations around the plant

covering sensitive, residential
and commercial areas (as
applicable).
Five locations around the
Plant.
Three locations around the
plant.
Total
Approximate
cost (Rs)
12x3shiftx4quart
ersX2000 =Rs.
288000
(8X4)X2000
=Rs. 64000
Total Estimated Monitoring Costs = Rs 22,24,000 (say 22.5 Lakhs) per year during the operation years of the HAPP. The cost, automatic weather
monitoring station and continuous AAQ monitoring is not included in the cost estimated above. The same will be under Project Operation
Cost (Environmental Component).
Note: Cd -Cadmium; CO - Carbon Monoxide; Cr - Chromium; O3-Ozone; NOx - Nitrogen Oxide; Pb - Plumbum, (lead); PM10-Particulate Matter up to 10u
size; PM2.5-Particulate Matter up to 2.5u size; SO2 - Sulfur Dioxide; PM - Particulate Matter; ESL = Environmental Survey Laboratory, EMARC =
Environmental Management Apex Review Committee; IS - India Standard; OSHA = . Occupational Safety and Health Administration, USA; CPCB =
Central Pollution Control Board.
Page 279
Chapter 7

7.6.2
Progress Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements

The rational for a reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the
measures proposed as part of the Environmental Monitoring Plan get implemented in
the project. The monitoring and evaluation of the management measures are critical
activities in implementation of the project. Monitoring involves periodic checking to
ascertain whether activities are going according to the plans. It provides the necessary
feedback for the project management to keep the programme on schedule. The
responsibility matrix for environmental monitoring programme is given in Table 7.4.
Table 7.4: Reporting System for Environmental Monitoring Plan
SN
Details
A.
1.
Pre-Construction Stage: Environmental Management Indicators and Monitoring Plan

Location for dumping of wastes Dumping locations
Prehave
to
be
identified
and
construction
parameters
indicative
of
environment in the area has to be
reported.
Suitable location for construction Construction camps
Preworker camps have to be identified
construction
and parameters indicative of
reported.
Location of borrow areas have to be Borrow areas
Prefinalized from identified lists and
construction
parameters
indicative
of
reported.
Construction Stage: Environmental Condition Indicators
The parameters to be monitored as Air quality
Construction
per frequency, duration & locations
of monitoring specified in the
Environmental
Monitoring
Programme prepared
Surface Water quality
Construction
Ground Water quality
Construction
Soil quality
Construction
Noise level
Construction
Contractor
shall
report Top soil
Construction
implementation of the measures
suggested for topsoil preservation
to
environmental
expert
/
infrastructure team.
Operation Stage: Management & Operational Performance Indicators
Ambient
radiation
/ Operation
contamination monitoring
Effluent Monitoring: Gaseous
Operation
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
C.
1.
Indicators
Effluent
Monitoring:
Liquid
Waste
Monitoring
Waste
Storage
Integrity
Personnel Monitoring
Stage
Responsibility
Supervision
Reporting
Contractor /
Planning Section /
PD
Contractor / Civil
Maintenance / HR
(Human Resource)
Contractor / Civil
Maintenance
/
Planning Section
Contractor through
approved
monitoring agency /
Planning Unit / PD
-do-do-do-doContractor / Civil
Maintenance /
Planning Unit / PD
Operation
Health Physics Unit

/ ESL / TSU
Health Physics Unit
/ TSU
WMU
/
Health
Physics Unit / TSU
WMU / TSU
Operation
Health Physics Unit
Operation
Page 280
Chapter 7
/
/

SN
Details
Indicators
Stage
Radiation Monitoring on Site

Radiological Monitoring in the
Public
Domain:
Internal
Radiation Levels & External
Radiation Levels
Other Monitoring Requirements
: Occupational Health and
Safety
Operation
Operation
Operation
2.
Work-zone noise levels
As per statutory norms
Operation
3.
Stack Emissions DG sets & Waste

Incineration Plant
Operation
4.
Performance of Sewage Treatment

Facilities
5.
Meteorology, Ambient air quality,

Waste water discharge through
plant outfalls, Noise levels, Ground
water and soil.
Maintenance of Storm Water
Drainage System
Hazardous waste re-disposal as
specified by statutory authorities.
All parameters as specified for

stacks for DG sets / Incinerator
by Statutory Authorities
Inlet and Outlet characteristics
of STP associated with plant &
township
All parameters as specified by
Statutory Authorities
6.
Pant
Medical
Unit/Competent
Authority
/
Industrial Safety
Industrial
Safety
group / TSU
Approved Agency /
TSU
Civil Maintenance /
Maintenance Group
Operation
ESL
Operation
Contractor / Civil
Maintenance
CMM
/
Civil
Maintenance
8.
Municipal Solid Waste Disposal at

Township
9.
Survival rates of trees
Operation
10. House Keeping
General Cleanliness of the plant

and different units
Operation
11. Socio-economic Development
As per CSR Plan
7.6.3
Operation
Operation
Preconstruction
Construction
Operation
/
/
Service
Maintenance
/
Maintenance Group
Horticulture Unit /
Civil Maintenance
All
responsible
units
/
Service
Maintenance
Plant CSR Unit /
Human Resources
Budgetary Provisions for Environmental Monitoring Plan

The list of equipment required in Chemical Laboratory / Waste Management Unit and
Health Physics Unit / Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL) for conventional
pollutants is given in Table 7.5a. Whereas the list of equipment required for
radiation/radioactivity measurements is given in Table 7.5b. Around 10% of Capital
cost of the project is allocated to meet the requirements of reactor safety and
environmental safety.
The budgetary cost estimate for implementation of the environmental monitoring
measures is elaborated in Table 7.3 (Part B). The summary of the cost of
Page 281
Chapter 7
/
/
Operation
Blockage of drainage system /

overflowing of drains
As per the notifications /
guidelines specified by statutory
authorities.
Proper implementation of the
scheme
7.
Responsibility
Supervision
Reporting
/ Medical Unit
HPU / TSU
ESL

environmental budgetary provisions for environmental monitoring programme is given

in Table 7.6.
Table 7.5a: List of Equipments as Required for Monitoring of Conventional Pollutants
SN. Monitoring Equipments
Numbers Required
1
PM2.5 & PM10 sampler along with gaseous sampling assembly
3
2
Stack Monitoring Kit (manual)
2
3
Portable Flue Gas Analyser for stack monitoring
2
4
Continuous AAQ Monitoring Station SO2, NOx, CO & PM2.5 &
3
PM10
5
Sound Level Meter
2
6
Automatic Weather Monitoring Station
1
7
Ion Analyser with Autotitrator
1
8
Hot Air Oven
1
9
Hot Plate
2
10
Muffle Furnace
1
11
BOD Incubator
1
12
BOD Apparatus, Oxitop (1 set of 6)
1
13
DO Meter
1
14
Spectrophotometer
1
15
COD Digestion Assembly
1
16
pH meter
2
17
Conductivity Meter
1
18
AAS with Graphite furnace, Hydride Generator & Cold Vapour
1
Technique
19
Digital Micro-Balance
2
20
Digital Top Load Balance (Range 1 to 500g)
1
21
Filtration Apparatus
2
22
Heating mental
3
23
Refrigerator
2
24
Fuming Chamber
1
25
Water Bath
2
26
Vacuum pump
2
27
Turbidity Meter
1
28
Filter Papers, Glassware, Plastic wares, Chemicals
In Lot
Table 7.5b: List of Equipments as Required for Monitoring of Radiation / Radioactivity
SN. Monitoring Equipments
Numbers Required
2
1. High Volume Air samplers
Ashing
equipment
1
2.
4
3. Portable survey meter
2
4. Contamination Monitors (betagamma & alpha)
2
5. Scintillometer
1
6. Alpha counting system
Beta
counting
system
1
7.
Page 282
Chapter 7

SN.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Monitoring Equipments
Numbers Required
Low beta counting system

Gas proportional counting system
Liquid scintillation counting system
Gamma Ray Spectrometer - NaI (Tl)
Gamma Ray Spectrometer - HpGe
Whole body counter
Instrumented Meteorological tower
Portable Diesel Generator set
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Filter Papers, Glassware, Plastic wares, Chemicals
In Lot
Table 7.6 : Summary Cost of Environmental Monitoring Programme

Cost in Rs.
SN. Item
A Capital Cost
1. Cost of Environmental Monitoring Equipment for Conventional Pollutants 30.0 Crores
B
1
a.
b.
c.
7.6.4
and Radioactivity Monitoring

Operational Phase
Environmental Monitoring Plan
Conventional Pollutant Monitoring during operation @ Rs. 23.5 Lakhs
/year
Radiation Level Monitoring
Contingency @ 5% of Total Monitoring Cost
Total Recurring Cost
22.5 Lakhs
92.0 Lakhs
5.5 Lakhs
120.0 Lakhs
Budgetary Provisions for Environmental Protection Measures

Total capital cost of the proposed 4x700MWe PHWR HAPP will be around Rs. 23502
Crores. The environmental protection and enhancement measures atomic power
project and the residential complex (as mentioned in Chapters 5.0 & 6.0) included in
the project cost in Table 7.3 (Part A), as estimated is Rs. 2399.5 Crores and the
breakup of the same is given in Table 7.7.
Table 7.7: Cost of Environmental Protection Measures for 4 X 700 MWe
SN Environmental Protection Measures

1.
2.
3.
Pollution Control Radiological Aspects

Nuclear Safety Systems
Engineered Safety Features
Consequence Mitigation measures
Waste Treatment, Management & Storage
Spent Fuel Storage
Radiation Emergency Preparedness
etc
Pollution Control - Conventional Aspects
Environmental Pollution Monitoring
Establishment of Chemical & Radio-chemical
Sampling & Analysis
Capital Cost (Rs.

Crores)
Recurring Cost per

Annum (Crores)
2350
40.0
15.0
30
0.3
1.2
Page 283
Chapter 7

SN Environmental Protection Measures
Capital Cost (Rs.

Crores)
Health Physics & Bio-assay Sampling & Monitoring

Facilities etc.
Enhancement of Environmental Survey, Sampling
& Monitoring (Radiological & Non-radiological)
Green Belt in 33% for 200 ha. 1.5 lakhs / ha.
Social Welfare Measures
Health & Water Supply Facilities
Education Matters
Area Development / up-gradation
Sanitation, etc
Total
Recurring Cost per

Annum (Crores)
4.
5.
3.0
0.3
1.5
2399.5
0.3
42.1
*Note: estimates are on the basis of 2011 cost

7.6.5
Procurement Schedule
Construction of the project will be taken up in two stages of 2X700 MWe each. Planned
schedule for the proposed two units of 1st stage will take about 60 months. Subsequent
two units are expected to be four years later. The 1st stage project will be
commissioned in 60 months from the Zero-Date which is reckoned as start of
construction activities at site.
Thus the procurement of different equipments for laboratory (Table 7.5a and 7.5b)
shall be planned to be procured in yearly phase wise manner by the end of 48 months
i.e. before the 1st stage of the plant gets under operation, so that the environmental
enhancement measures are implemented with the start of the project.
7.7
UPDATING OF EMP
The directives from MOEF and the regulations in force at any time shall govern the
periodicity of monitoring. However it is suggested that the implementation of various
measures recommended in the EMP be taken as EMPs in the ISO 14001 system to
effectively implement the measures for continual improvement in environmental
performance. OHSAS 18000 shall also be implemented for the total plant.
Page 284
Chapter 7

CHAPTER 8 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES: PUBLIC

CONSULTATION & SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
8.0
ADDITIONAL STUDIES:
ASSESSMENT
8.1
PUBLIC CONSULTATION
PUBLIC
CONSULTATION
&
SOCIAL
IMPACT
Based on the directive from Environmental Appraisal Committee (EAC), Ministry of

Environment & Forest (MoEF) in their 9th EAC meeting held on September 2010 and
vide their minutes for the said meeting dated 13th October 2010 issued the Terms of
Reference for preparation of EIA / EMP study for the Atomic Power Project at
Fatehabad Haryana. On the basis of the TOR the draft EIA report is prepared and
submitted an application to Sub-Regional Officer, Haryana Pollution Control Board
(HPCB), Hisar for organizing Public Hearing for HAPP. The HPCB Office notified on -------------, 2012, the date of Public Hearing as ---------------- at HAPP site, Village
Gorakhpur, District Fatehabad. Public hearing process was carried out by Haryana
Pollution Control Board on ------------as per the guidelines given in Environmental Impact
Notification, 2006 issued vide no. S.O. 1533(E), dated the 14th September, 2006 and its
amendment vide S.O. 3067 (E) dated 1st December, 2009.
During the process of public hearing Sub Regional Office Haryana Pollution Control
Board (HPCB) received submissions / queries / observations from Project Affected
Persons (PAPs), members of public and NGOs regarding various aspects of the project,
process of public hearing and EIA report. The minutes of the meeting (MoM) of public
hearing and submissions (in English and Hindi language) received are numbered and
complied as Vol-III. The English translation of the Hindi submissions is given on the rear
side of the respective Hindi pages in Vol-III. The minutes of meeting of Public hearing
and submissions by public members and responses thereof by NPCIL has been
compiled and being submitted as per below:
Annexure VI: Proceedings of Public Hearing and Commitments from NPCIL

English.
Annexure VII: Proceedings of Public Hearing and Commitments from NPCIL
Hindi.
Public Hearing Observations

To be Included after Public Hearing
8.2
SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
8.2.1
Introduction
Place of Inclusion in Report
All industrial projects have social and economic linkages. Therefore, putting up a new
project and/or modernization/ expansion of existing projects has impact on the socio
economic environment of the locality around it. This impact may be marginal or non
Page 285
Chapter 8

marginal. The intensity of impact may depend upon the various social and environmental
factors associated with it and the extent of change caused by the project to alter the
existing equilibrium of the socio-economic system. Influx of people from outside during
various stages of the project may also alter the existing cultural identity of the local
people. Further, there is a cash flow associated with the project which may affects the
existing socioeconomic activities and introduces many more new activities associated
with the project to which the local people have strong adherence. M/s NPCIL has
proposed an atomic power plant near Gorakhpur village of Fatehabad district, Haryana..
The various activities of the proposed projects are likely to stimulate the existing socio
economic environment in the surrounding area. The influx of money and various
construction activities may not only change the economic status of the area but also
influence the existing cultural scenario. This impact is expected to be more in the area
closer to the site, which decreases with increase of distance from the site.
8.2.2
Objectives
The proposed project will have a widespread impact on the social and economic
conditions of the people of the region in terms of direct and indirect employment, skill
diversification, infrastructure development, business development etc. On this backdrop,
the present study is directed towards the following objectives:
i)
ii)
To assess the present appraisal of the demographic profile of the study area
To assess the agricultural situation and to assess the impact of the project on
agricultural situation;
iii) To assess the impact of the project on pattern of demand;
iv) To examine the impact of the project on consumption pattern;
v)
To examine the employment and income effects of the project;
vi) Assessment of the educational status of the people and to explore the impact of
the project on education;
vii) To ascertain the impact of the project on industrialization in the study area;
viii) To examine the impact of the project on community development activities;
ix) To analyze peoples' perception regarding impact of the project
8.2.3
Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study is based on the following:
Review of Secondary Data
Review of secondary data, such as District Census Statistical Handbooks 2001 for the
parameters of demography, occupational structure of people within the general study
area of 10km radius around the proposed plant site. The secondary data supplemented
the primary data collected through direct field survey.
Field Survey
Baseline data on socio-economic parameters were generated using information
available with Govt. agencies, census data etc.
Page 286
Chapter 8

Socio-economic survey was carried out covering all the villages / towns of the study area
to record awareness, opinion, apprehensions, quality of life and expectations of the local
people about the proposed plant. The opinion of local people about the proposed
expansion plan was obtained through socio-economy survey of the villages / towns in
the study area.
A brief about the sampling design adopted for the field survey is described below. The
survey has been conducted through specially designed questionnaire covering every
aspect of the present study. In addition to the field data, secondary data / information
collected, compiled and published by different Governmental agencies / departments
were also collected and utilized appropriately.
Sampling
For selection of respondents from the study area, Two Stage Random Sampling has
been adopted. In the first stage, villages are selected and in the second stage,
households/ respondents are selected. From each selected village, the respondents are
selected randomly to account intra-village variability among the respondents for the
character under study. As the variability of the characters under in each strata study
does not vary widely among the households, a smaller sample size is expected to
represent the population. Samples of 24 respondents were drawn from the study area.
The sample covers an estimated 65 persons (Socio-economic survey on questionnaire
to be conducted).
Composition of the Questionnaire
Households/respondents were interviewed with the structured questionnaire specifically
designed for this study keeping in view the objectives of the study. The questionnaire
consists of following major sections:
a)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Demographic profile of the households

Educational status
Information on agricultural situation
Employment (sources of employment)
Income (income from various sources)
Information on family budget
Consumption and saving
Respondents' perception about the project
Analytical Framework / Methodology for Compilation & Analysis

The major methods used as tools of analysis in this study are given below :
1. Regression:
Simple linear regression of the following type is considered
Yi = a + b Xi + Ui
Where, Y is dependent variable, X is explanatory variable and U is the stochastic
error term having its usual properties.
Page 287
Chapter 8

The model is fitted to data applying Least Square (LS) technique to obtain estimated
demand and consumption functions.
2. Fitted regression models are used to work out
i) Elasticity of demand with respect to disposable income (e) in case of demand
functions:
e = (dy / dx) . (x/y)
ii) Marginal propensity to consume (MPC) from consumption function:
MPC = dC / dY
3. Frequency distribution of demographic parameters, peoples' perception, educational
status, agricultural status etc.
8.2.4
Existing Socio-Economic Scenario

The Study Area
Demographic pattern of the area is given in Table 8.2a.There are about 83044 persons
in the 10km study area. There are about 875 females per 1000 males. Literacy rate is
45%. The information on socio-economic aspects of the study area has been compiled
from secondary sources, which include various public offices as indicated in the above
section. The sociological aspects of this study include human settlements, demography,
social such as Scheduled castes and Scheduled Tribes and literacy levels besides
infrastructure facilities available in the study area. The economic aspects include
occupational structure of workers. The salient features of the demographic and socioeconomic details are presented in the following sections.
Distribution of Population
As per estimates based on 2001 census, in 2011, the study area consists of 83044
persons. The distribution of population and different demographic features in the study
area of 10 km radius and up to 25 km radius is shown in Table 8.2a.
The Table 8.2a indicates the following demographic features about the study area and
up to 25 km of the project site.
The population density up to 5 km is minimum followed by that in 10 km radius and
25 km radius.
The study area of 10 km radius consists of mostly rural population.
Literacy rate is less up to 10 km radius than that up to 25 km radius.
Table 8.2a: Demographic Profile of Population in the Area
SN.
1
2
3
Population Data
Number of House Hold

Total Population
Total Males
Estimated Population in 2011 at Radial Distance from

Project Site
0-5
5 - 10
Total up 10 - 15 15 - 25 Total up
km
km
to 10 km km
km
to 25km
2060
12196
14256
20904
83328
118488
11880
71164
83044
118358 476003 677404
6388
37893
44280
63091
254321 361693
Page 288
Chapter 8

SN.
Population Data
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Total Females
Female per 1000 Males
Rural Population
Urban Population
Percent Rural Population (%)
Population Density (Nos/sq. km)
Schedule Cast Total Population
Schedule Cast Male Population
Schedule Cast female Population
Schedule Tribe Total
Total Literates
Literates Males
Literate Females
Total Literacy Percent (%)
Total Illiterates
Male Illiterates
Female Illiterates

Project Site
0-5
5 - 10
Total up 10 - 15 15 - 25 Total up
km
km
to 10 km km
km
to 25km
5493
33271
38764
55266
221681 315711
860
878
875
876
872
873
11880
71164
83044
118358 462304 663705
0
0
0
13699
13699
100
100
100
100
97
98
151
302
264
301
379
345
2250
18124
20374
27503
104055 151931
1228
9586
10814
14699
55465
80978
1023
8538
9560
12804
48590
70954
0
0
0
0
0
0
5433
31991
37424
57600
246259 341283
3633
21120
24753
37028
156233 218013
1800
10871
12671
20573
90026
123270
46
45
45
49
52
50
6448
39173
45620
60758
229744 336121
2755
16773
19528
26064
98089
143680
3693
22400
26093
34694
131655 192441
Derived from Population Census 2001 and decadal growth rate from 1991 to 2001
Occupational Structure
The occupational structure of residents in the study area is studies with reference to
main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 10
categories of workers defined by the Census Department consisting of cultivators,
agricultural laborers, those engaged in live-stock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying;
manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industry; and other than household
industry, construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and other
services.
The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of less than
six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The non-workers
include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired persons,
dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other non-workers who
do not fall under the above categories.
As per estimates based on 2001 census, in 2011 altogether the main workers work out
to be 37% and 33% of the total population, within 10km and 25km radius respectively.
The marginal workers constitute to 16% and 13% of the total population, within 10km
and 25km radius respectively. The non-workers constitute to 47% and 54% of the total
population, within 10km and 25km radius respectively. The distribution of workers by
occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant population. The
occupational structure of the study area is shown in Table 8.2b.
Page 289
Chapter 8

The marginal workers constitute 17%, 16% and 13% of population within 5 km, 10 km
and 25 km radius of the project site. The marginal workers can possibly be the pool
for unskilled labour in the area during the construction stage of the plant.
Table 8.2b: Occupational Structure in the Area
SN.
Population Data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Total Population
Total Worker Population
Total Worker male
Total Worker Female
Total Working Population % to
Total Population
Total Working Male % to Male
Population
Total Working Female % to
Female Population
Main Workers Total
Main Workers Male
Main Workers female
Total Main Workers (%)
Total Main Workers Male (%)
Total Main Workers Female (%)
Total Cultivators
Total Cultivators Male
Total Cultivators female
Main Agricultural Labour
Main Agriculture Labour Male
Main Agriculture Labour Female
Main Household Industry Labour
Total
Main Household Industry laboure
Male
Main House Hold Industry Labour
Female
Main Other Workers Total
Main Other Workers Male
Main Other Workers Female
Marginal Worker Total
Marginal Worker Male
Marginal Worker Female
Total Marginal Workers % to
Total Population
Male Marginal Workers % to
Male Population
Female Marginal Workers % to
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.

Project Site
0-5
5 - 10 Total Up
10 - 15 15 - 20 Total Up
km
km
to 10 km
km
km
to 25 km
11880 71164 83044
118358 476003 677404
7129
37081 44210
55243
211959 311411
3960
21064 25024
33745
134920 193689
3169
16018 19186
21498
77039
117723
60
52
53
47
45
46
62
56
57
53
53
54
58
48
49
39
35
37
5114
3154
1960
43
49
36
4079
2443
1636
406
248
159
75
25429
17309
8120
36
46
24
16978
10853
6125
3328
2454
874
554
30543
20463
10080
37
46
26
21056
13295
7761
3734
2701
1033
629
36463
28413
8050
31
45
15
19878
14640
5238
4144
3005
1139
823
157261
117006
40255
33
46
18
75851
52019
23833
21281
14136
7145
3788
224266
165881
58385
33
46
18
116785
79954
36831
29159
19843
9316
5239
70
381
451
638
2874
3963
173
178
185
914
1276
554
394
160
2015
806
1209
17
4570
3621
949
11653
3755
7898
16
5124
4015
1109
13668
4561
9106
16
11619
10130
1489
18780
5333
13448
16
56341
47978
8364
54698
17914
36784
11
73084
62123
10961
87145
27808
59338
13
13
10
10
22
24
23
24
17
19
Page 290
Chapter 8

SN.
Population Data

Project Site
0-5
5 - 10 Total Up
10 - 15 15 - 20 Total Up
km
km
to 10 km
km
km
to 25 km
Female Population
Non Working Population Total
4751
34083 38834
63115
264044
Non Working Population Male
2428
16829 19256
29346
119401
Non Working Population Female
2324
17254 19578
33769
144643
Total Non-workers % to Total
40
48
47
53
55
Population
36. Male Non-workers % to Male
38
44
43
47
47
Population
37. Female Non-workers % to
42
52
51
61
65
Female Population
Source: District Census Hand Book 20011, National Informatic Center, New Delhi
32.
33.
34.
35.
365993
168004
197989
54
46
63
Infrastructure Facilities
About 4/5th of the 10 km study area falls in Fatehabad district and about 1/5th falls in
Hisar district. The infrastructure and amenities available in the district denotes the
economic well being of the region. The area as a whole possesses moderate level of
infrastructural facilities.
A review of infrastructure facilities available in the area has been done based on the
information given in Fatehabad District Statistical Abstract 2008 09 and the data of
District Socio-economic Re-evaluation, Fatehabad 2008 09.
Similar type of
information is not available for Hisar District. It is presumed that the infrastructure
facilities available in 4/5th part of the study area will also be present in remaining area of
the study area. Moreover, Fatehabad district has been carved out of Hisar district in
1997. Therefore the Infrastructure facilities available in the Fatehabad district are
described in the subsequent sections as those available in the study area. The
geographical area of Fatehabad district is about 2538 km2.
Educational Facilities
The available educational facilities in the blocks falling in study area are given in Table
8.2c. As per the District Education Officers of Fatehabad and Hisar districts the
education facilities in the two district in general and in particular in the blocks falling in
study area is adequate and as per Government of India norms, i.e. availability of primary
school within one kilometer of habitation, middle school within 3 kilometer of habitation
and high school and secondary education within 5 kilometer of habitation. The above
requirements are almost met in the area considering the fact that a middle school, high
school and secondary school also have the lower level classes, i.e. from standard one to
onwards standards.
Page 291
Chapter 8

SN.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Table 8.2c: Educational Facilities in Blocks in the Study Area

Institution Type
Number of Institution
Fatehabad District Blocks
Hisar District Block
Bhatu Bhuna Fatehabad
Agroha
Kalan
Primary schools
39
52
107
36
Middle schools
10
4
17
5
High School
10
15
25
16
Senior Secondary School
9
10
14
6
Source : District Education Officers of Fatehabad and & Hisar Districts
Health Facilities
Different types of health facilities including hospital and dispensaries are available in the
district. The level of health facilities is found to be moderate. The available health
facilities as per Fatehabad District Statistical Abstract are given in Table 8.2d. As per
Civil Surgeon Fatehabad and Hisar District there is one sub-centre on 5000 population,
one Primary Health Centre (PHC) on 30,000 population, one Community Health Centre
(CHC) on 1,20,000 population and a General Hospital at District level. In general the
sub-centres are at Panchyat level, CHC is at Block level and Sub-divisional Hospital
(SDH) is at sub-division level and General Hospital (GH) is at district level. At subcentres Multipurpose Health workers are there (one male and one female), at PHCs two
medical officers are posted, at CHCs four medical officers and one incharge is posted
and at GH specialists of major discipline like, general surgery, orthopedics, general
physician, pediatrics, gynecology, anesthesia, etc are posted. As per the civil surgeon
the medical facilities are adequate in the area and as per government of India norms.
Table 8.2d: Health Facilities in Fatehabad District
District
Fatehabad
Hisar
1.
Sub-centers
103
198
2.
Primary Health Center
16
35
3.
Community Health Centre
4
8
4.
Sub Divisional Hospital
1
2
5.
General Hospital
1
1
Source : Civil Surgeon Fatehabad & Hisar District 2012
SN.
Type of Health Institution
The number of patients treated vis--vis falling ill in the Fatehabad and Hisar district is
given in Table 8.2e. Out of the total population overall about 10% in Fatehabad and 5%
of the population per year falls sick to the extent to be admitted in hospital. The percent
population getting treatment in out-door is 110% for Fatehabad and 63% for Hisar. The
figures are low in Hisar may be due to more private medical fascilities in the district the
population seek their medical requirement from private sources. The figure may overall
indicate the availability of Government Hospitals and access of masses to the same in
the two districts.
Page 292
Chapter 8

Table 8.2e: Number of Patients Treated in Health Institution in Fatehabad and Hisar
District (2011 data)
SN. Particulars
District
Fatehabad Hisar
1 Population 2001
423438
1537117
2 Projected Population 2011
529298
1921396
3 New Indoor Patient
33396
47771
4 New Out Door Patient
488131
900396
5 New & Old Indoor Patient
54462
88456
6 New & Old Outdoor Patient
584411
1211704
7 Total Patients Treated
638873
1300160
8 Percent Population Getting Treatment in Indoor
10
5
9 Percent Population Getting Treatment in Outdoor
110
63
10 Percent Population Getting Treatment in Indoor & Out Door 121
68
Health Status in the Study Area
The health status in the district was assessed by the information provided by the Civil
Surgeon Fatehabad and Hisar. The common diseases are viral fever, cough and colds,
diarrhea and enteric fever are the prominent diseases in the region. During monsoon
viral fever, diarrhea and cough are very common diseases and could be attributed to the
rains, which generally contaminate water in the region and also the moist climate.
Tuberculosis is also disease observed in the region, however in a very less proportion.
The major communicable diseases prevalent in the study area are presented in Table
8.2f.
Table 8.2f: Principal Communicable Disease Occurrence Pattern in Fatehabad and Hisar
District (Data 2011)
Total
Disease
Type of Diseases
Fatehabad Hisar
Occurrence (%)
0
0.00
Cholera (Lab Confirmed)
0
0
15199
9.18
Acute Dairrhoeal Diseases
6478
8721
0
0.00
Diptheria
0
0
0
0.00
Tetanus other than Neonatal
0
0
0
0.00
Neonatal Tetanus
0
0
0
0.00
Whooping Cough
0
0
2
0.00
Measles
1
1
143669
86.81
Acute Respiratory Infection (Including
86397
57272
Influenza and Excluding Pneumonia)
366
0.22
Pneumonia
235
131
1752
1.06
Enteric fever
1255
497
408
0.25
Hepatitis A
286
122
39
0.02
Hepatitis B
34
5
0
0.00
Hepatitis C, D, E
0
0
0
0.00
Meningococcal Meningitis
0
0
108
0.07
Rabies
108
0
496
0.30
AIDS (As Reported to NACO)
496
132*
Page 293
Chapter 8

Type of Diseases
Fatehabad
Hisar
Total
Disease
Occurrence (%)
Syphilis
Gonococcal Infection
Other STD Diseases
Swine Flue (H1N1)
Pulmonary Tuberculosis
Malaria
JSW
Total
NA : Information not available
* Figures are from Hisar General Hospital
1
1
1298
0
714
1044
NA
98348
83
157
NA
NA
NA
NA
23
67144
84
158
1298
0
714
1044
23
165492
0.05
0.10
0.78
0.00
0.43
0.63
0.01
100
Transport Facilities
The area is served by rail and road transport facilities. There are four railway stations of
Northern Railways in the area. The nearest railway station to the project site is Uklana
Mandi 23 km NE of the project site on Jalandhar Doab rail extension. Adampur railway
station is 32 km SW of the site on Rewari-Bhatinda rail section. New Delhi Firojpur and
Jaipur to Amritsar rail track passes through railway station at Hisar situated about 33 km
SSE of the project site. The Narwana or Jakhal Rail Junction is located on the DelhiBhatinda rail sections, 33 km NE of the project site. The above Railway Stations caters
to the commuter needs and transportation of goods in the region.
The area has a good level of road network almost all the villages are connected by
public works department (PWD) road. Above all the area is connected to NH10 by the
Kharakheri-Gorakhpur road. In Fatehabad district the total length of the PWD road in
district is about 1589 km. In 2008 09 there was one main bus depot and a sub depot of
Haryana State Bus Transport Corporation and about 146 buses were plying within and
outside the district, carrying about 35197 passengers per day.
Post and Telegraphs
Fatehabad district has moderate level of Post and Telegraphic services. Altogether there
are 146 post offices, 44 telegraph offices and 653 public telephone booths in the district
as shown below.
Facilities
Post office
Telegraph Offices
Public Telephone Booth
Number
146
44
653
Number / 10 km2
0.6
0.17
2.6
Source : Fatehabad District Statistical Abstract 2008 09
Electrification
All villages in the district are electrified and the electricity is supplied for domestic,
agricultural and public lighting purposes.
Page 294
Chapter 8

Drinking Water Facility

All the villages in Fatehabad District have been provided drinking water facilities under
drinking water project.
Police Station
The number of Police station and Chowki in Fatehabad and Hisar district is as follows:
Facilities
Police Station
Chowki
Fatehabad
9
12
Hisar
11
20
Source : State Statistical Abstract
8.2.5
Prediction of Socio-Economic Impact

Agriculture
The 10 km study area comprises of about 4/5th and 1/5th of Fatehabad district and Hisar
district, respectively. Block wise, Bhuna, Bhatukalan and Fatehabad blocks (Fatehabad
district) comprises 3/5th, 1/10th and 1/10th, respectively. Agroha block (Hisar district)
comprises 1/5th of the study area. To have an overall idea of land holding pattern of the
study area, the distribution of number of holdings in different holding size of the blocks
from Fatehabad district only have been reviewed and presented in Table 8.3a. From
Table 8.3a it can be seen that the land holding pattern of all the three blocks of
Fatehabad district is similar, however, similar data for Agroha block of Hisar district is not
available. Since Agroha block comprises only 1/5th of the study area it may be presumed
that the land holding pattern in the 10km study area will be almost similar as depicted in
the three blocks.
Marginal farmers are about 35% (of total farming population), holding about 7% of the
land in the study area. Small farmers constitute 22%, holding about 12% of land area
and semi-medium and medium farmers are 40%, holding about 63% of land area. These
three categories together constitute 97% of farmers, holding 82% of land area. It is
interesting to note that there are 3% large farmers holding about 18% of land area.
Pictorial view of the distribution of land holding is shown in Fig. 8.1. The land holding
pattern of the above blocks have been reviewed and presented in Table 8.3a.
Table 8.3a: Distribution of Landholding in the Study Area
Bhuna
Number Area
1 Marginal (< Absolute 4743
2466
1 Ha.)
%
35
7
2 Small (1 2 Absolute 2981
4228
Ha.)
%
22
12
3
Semi
Absolute 3117
8809
Medium (2
%
23
25
4 ha.)
SN
Blocks
Bhatu-kalan
Number Area
4515
2344
35
7
2838
4018
22
12
2967
8370
23
25
Fatehabad
Total
Number Area Number Area
8400
4355
17658
9165
35
7
35
7
5280
7467
11099 15713
22
12
22
12
5520
15556 11604 32735
23
25
23
25
Page 295
Chapter 8

SN
Blocks
Bhuna
Bhatu-kalan
Fatehabad
Total
Number Area Number Area Number Area Number Area
4 Medium (4- Absolute 2304
13390
2193
12722
4080
23645
8577
49757
10 ha.)
%
17
38
17
38
17
38
17
38
5 Large (>10 Absolute
407
6343
387
5926
720
11202
1514
23471
ha.)
%
3
18
3
18
3
18
3
18
Total
Absolute 13552 35236 12901 33480 24000 62225 50453 130941
%
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Source : Comprehensive District Agriculture Plan (C-DAP) District Fatehabad Haryana, XIth
Five Year Plan
Large (>10 ha.)

3%
Medium (4-10 ha.)
17%
Marginal (< 1 Ha.)
35%
Semi Medium (2
4 ha.)
23%
Small (1 2 Ha.)
22%
Fig. 8.1: Land Holding Pattern in the Study Area
Table 8.3b depicts the cropping pattern and production in the Fatehabad District.
Matching data for Hisar are not available and since Agroha block of Hisar District covers
only 1/5th of the study area thus it is presumed that the agricultural pattern as present for
Fatehabd district will also be there for the entire study area (including the 1/5th of Agroha
block of Hisar). The crops are grown during Rabi, Kharif and summer seasons. The
cropping pattern in the general study area reveals that wheat, cotton and paddy are the
most predominant crop followed by Guar, Bajra and Sarson, etc.
Table 8.3b: Cropping Pattern of the Study Area
SN.
1.
2.
3.
Cropping Pattern
Paddy
Wheat
Sarson
Area under Crop

Absolute (ha)
70243
177591
13320
Yield kg/ha
% Area
17
43
3
3952
5081
2126
Page 296
Chapter 8

SN.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Cropping Pattern
Bajra
Cotton
Guar
Other Crops & Horticulture
Gross Cropped Area
Net Cultivated Area
Irrigation by Canal
Irrigation by Tube well
Area under Crop

Absolute (ha)
12000
91137
29000
15379
408670
219201
100001
98397
Yield kg/ha
% Area
3
22
7
4
100
46.23%
45.49%
2407
625
-
Cropping intensity in the area is high (207%). Average investment in agriculture is Rs

12005 per acre (Table 8.3c). Cropping intensity indicates multi-crop culture. Even then
agriculture is profitable as net return is Rs 27239 per acre.
Table 8.3c: Cropping intensity, net return & investment
Item
Cropping intensity (%)
Net return (Rs/acre)
Average investment (Rs/acre)
Value
207
27239
12005
Agricultural situation of the study area indicates that agriculture in this area is good using
latest development in the country. The project is not going to cause any damage to
agricultural situation of the study area. Instead, it is likely to help agriculture by way of
providing income from non-farm sources
Pattern of Demand
The survey reveals that the respondents spend major portion of their disposable income
on food items. However, there has been a growing tendency among the respondents of
allocating higher expenditure on non-food items although their basket of consumption
have only few items other than food. To go to the details of their pattern of demand,
income elasticity of demand is calculated by fitting demand functions. Table 8.3d
presents the results of the regression analysis conducted for fitting the demand
functions. It is observed that all the demand functions give uniformly good fits to the data
because R2 in all the cases are found to be quite high. Moreover, as indicated by t-test,
the relevant parameter of the demand functions is found to be statistically highly
significant at 1% level. The income elasticity of demand as measured from the fitted
functions is 0.998 and 0.996 for food and non-food items respectively.
The inelastic nature of demand for food items indicates their necessity for these items to
the households. The non-food items are found to be elastic to the income of households.
This implies that for any additional income, households will spend for non-food items
including luxurious goods.
Page 297
Chapter 8

Table 8.3d: Demand Functions for Food and Non-food Items

Demand Function
Item
Regression parameters
log a
b
R2
b
Dij = a * Y j * U
Food
Where,
0.312
0.993
0.998
(116.4)*
Dij = Demand for the ith item by jth
respondent.
Non-Food
Yj= Disposable income of the jth
-0.084
0.942
0.996
respondent
(71.9)*
Figures in ( ) indicate t - values
* Significant at 1% level.
With the implementation of the project and development of the locality, new type of
demand pattern may emerge which is likely to place more importance on consumer
goods and quality products. This is not a bad impact provided considerable income is
generated due to the project and sufficient income is earned by them; otherwise, if the
shift is a substitution of necessary food requirements then it is not desirable in true
socio-economic sense.
Employment and Income Effect
Occupational pattern of the study area reveals that about 68% of the income is
generated from agriculture and 24% from services. 8% of the income is generated from
business (Fig. 8.2).
0%
Business
8%
0%
Service
24%
Cultivation
68%
Fig. 8.2: Occupational Structure of the Study Area
Page 298
Chapter 8

Direct Employment
Agriculture, business, and service are major sources of income in the study area.
However, unemployment is quite common in the study area. The project has
employment generation potential by way of recruiting local people directly for different
activities of the project, specifically at the construction phase. It is expected that
substantial portion of the investment in this project will trickle down to the local people in
the form of employment and income.
Indirect Employment
Indirect employment and income effects of Atomic Power Plant (APP) are non-marginal
and usually remain widespread across a long region. The proposed project will cause
generation of income and employment opportunities in the ancillaries and service units
which came in the vicinity of the APP, specifically, in ancillary, transport and
manufacturing sectors. The growth of employment in services activities is likely to be
much stronger due to its multiplier effect.
As the proposed project is implemented indirect employment is likely to grow very fast.
The project is expected to generate substantial indirect employment in other sectors
such as ancilliary, transport and related manufacturing sectors, service units etc.
Further, increase of population in the study area as a result of the project will lead to
higher demand for food. As consequence, price of food is expected to increase. It is
expected that the project may bring infrastructure development in the study area which
may multiply in employment generation many fold. Hence, the project is expected to
generate substantial indirect employment in other sectors.
Overall assessment of the employment and income effects indicates that the project has
strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and income generation.
Consumption Behaviour
Table 8.3e presents the source-wise distribution of average family consumption. It is
observed that the major portion of total consumption expenditure goes to meet the need
for food (56%). The consumption expenditure on clothing is second highest (22.4%).
Average expenditure on medical purposes is 10.9%. About 3.9% of total consumption
expenditure goes to meet the other social requirements. Expenditure on education in the
study area is observed to be low.
Table 8.3e: Source-wise distribution of family consumption
Item
Consumption (Rs/yr)
Distribution of average
family consumption (%)
Food
Education
Clothing
Medical
Others
TOTAL
163030
20015
65283
31660
11313
291301
56.0
6.9
22.4
10.9
3.9
100.0
To investigate the consumption behaviour of the respondents in detail, Marginal

Propensity to Consume (MPC) is calculated by fitting the consumption function. The
results of the regression analysis performed for fitting the consumption function are
presented in Table 8.3f. It is observed that the function gave uniformly good fit to data
Page 299
Chapter 8

because R2 is high and parameters are also found to be statistically significant at 1%

level. The MPC worked out on the basis of the fitted consumption function is 0.999.
Table 8.3f: Fitted Consumption Function
Demand Function
Regression parameters
A
b
R2
Cj = a + b Yj + Uj
0.523
0.999
27834.1 (147.4)*
Where,
Cj = Consumption of the jth respondent
Yj = Gross income of the jth respondent
Figures in ( ) indicate t - values
* Significant at 1% level.
The multiplier effect of investment on the people of the study area has been worked out
by using the following model:
Consider the consumption behaviour of the respondents closely follow the following type
of consumption function:
C = a + bY
(1)
We know that, in equilibrium
Y=C+I
Where, Y = Gross income, C = Consumption &
(2)
I = Investment
Putting (1) in (2) one gets,

Y = a + bY + I
=> Y = (1 / (1-b) * [a +I]
(3)
Where, 1 / (1-b) is the multiplier.

Assuming that consumption behaviour of the people in the study area closely follows this
fitted consumption function. One can easily see that existing size of the multiplier is 2.1.
Hence, investment on this project and the consequent generation of additional income
will have multiplier effect in raising average consumption.
The proposed project is going to have positive income effect and consequently, the
multiplier effect is expected to lead to an overall increase in average consumption of the
people of the study area. Therefore, one can conclude that the impact of the project on
consumption behaviour of the local people is likely to be satisfactory and positive.
Industrialisation Around the Project
The Atomic Power Plant (APP) may serve as the nuclei for development of small-scale
industries in the areas around them. These small-scale units usually have input-output
linkages with the APP. The demand for spares, assemblies and sub-assemblies are
generally met through the supply (of these items) from small-scale units located nearly.
The advantages to APP as well as small-scale units are listed below:
Page 300
Chapter 8

Advantages to the Proposed Plant

Assurance of a reliable source of supply of spares and consumables;
Supply on short-delivery schedules enabling maintenance of lower inventory;
Saving foreign exchange through import substitution;
Lower freight element in comparison to materials supplied by firm located far away;
Better service facilities etc.
Advantages to Small Scale Units
Availability of ready market;
Getting price preference over distant suppliers;
Availability of facilities from government;
Availability of infrastructure support from the APP etc.
Proper utilisation of these mutual advantages is likely to play a catalytic role in the
development of the region around the plant.
The small scale industries that are likely to come in the vicinity of the plant can be grouped
into major two categories -- spares and chemical based, besides the service units. These
are complemented by the service units. The present project is likely to accelerate such
industrialization through Bubble Effects in the study area. It is important to note that the
small scale units are usually labour-intensive and high-priority industries from social point
of view.
The proposed project is expected to serve as centre of significant small-scale industrial
economy around it complemented by the services sector. This is expected to play a major
role in the future economic and social development of this area.
Educational Status
The project is expected to increase peoples thrust towards education by bringing
opportunities of some direct & indirect employment for the local people. The general
awareness towards the importance of education is expected to increase as a result of
the new project and hence, it can be said that the project will have positive impact on the
level of education of the people of the study area.
8.2.6
Peoples Perception
The results of the opinion poll are analysed and furnished in Table 8.4. The major
advantages and disadvantages shown by the people is given in Table 8.4. It is observed
that 83% of them have identified creation of employment opportunity as the main
advantage. People are hopeful of getting employment in the small-scale units likely to
come up in the vicinity of the plant. About 33% of the respondents are expecting
improvement in business. Around 58% of the respondents feel improvement in peripheral
development activities. The major disadvantages shown by the people are radioactivity
related threat to life in case of accidents as in other part of the world seems to be the
cause of worry of the people. About 100% of the respondents are fearful about this aspect.
Among other disadvantages, loss of land and house, about 83% are fearful about this
Page 301
Chapter 8

aspect. About 75% of the respondents are showing concern to health due to
environmental pollution.
Table 8.4: Peoples Perception on the Project
Perception
ADVANTAGES
Employment opportunity
Development of the area
Business development
DIS-ADVANTAGES
Radioactive Damage in Case of Accidents
Pollution
Loss of land and house
Damage to health
Total Respondents
No. of Respondents
Distribution (%)
20
14
8
83
58
33
24
18
20
10
24
100
75
83
42
Major Advantage:
i.
Present project may generate more employment, directly and indirectly, and
major portion of it may be provided to the local people.
ii. Development of business opportunity in the area.
iii. Development of infrastructure facilities including roads may take place due to the
project which may help in improving the whole area.
iv. Improvement in living standard.
Major Disadvantage:
i.
Accidents in the plant may cause radioactive releases which may be detrimental
to life in the area as in some part of the world.
ii. Pollution in the study area is expected to rise due to the project. People perceive
that the increase in pollution may cause damage to agriculture and damage to
health of people due to pollution.
iii. Loss of agricultural land.
Needs of the Villagers and their Expectations
It appears that the expectations and needs of the villagers are quite moderate. The
people in the study require basic minimum amenities wherever they are not available
and improving these facilities wherever these are inadequate. They appealed to the
government through this survey, for provision and improving of the following facilities:
Proper compensation to the Project Affected Persons (PAP) of the Project
Affected Villages
More Higher secondary schools
Adult education centers
Dispensaries / Health Centres and availability of doctors and other para-medical
staff
Protected drinking water supply schemes
Page 302
Chapter 8

8.2.7
Loan facility for self employment to open petty shops, purchase of cycle
rickshaws, agricultural tools and implements, bullock carts, fertilizers, improved
seeds and digging of well for irrigation.
Conclusions
On the basis of the overall results of the present impact assessment the following
conclusions are drawn:
The project is not going to cause any damage to the existing agricultural situation.
Instead, it is likely to provide the farmers with supplementary income.
The project has positive impact on pattern of demand
The project has very strong positive employment and income effects.
There is a possibility increase in industrialisation in the vicinity of the plant. This is
likely to bring more skill diversification among local people.
The project has strong positive impact on raising average consumption and also
income through multiplier effect.
The CSR activities of the project will have very strong positive impact on the social
and economic condition of the people of the study area
The project has positive impact on health situation of the local people through
development of the area.
The project has significant positive impact on community development activities of
the project which are likely to bring handful of benefits to the people of the study
area.
Overall peoples perception on the project is not very encouraging However, they
want implementation of a comprehensive Resettlement and Rehabilitation Action
Plan (RAP)
8.2.8
Corporate Social Responsibility

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is a form of corporate self-regulation integrated
into a business model. CSR refers to strategies of corporations or firms to conduct their
business in a way that is ethical, society friendly and beneficial to community in terms of
development. CSR is the deliberate inclusion of public interest into corporate decisionmaking, and the honoring of a triple bottom line: People, Planet, Profit.
Community Development (CD) refers to initiatives undertaken by community with
partnership with external organizations or corporation to empower individuals and
groups of people by providing these groups with the skills they need to effect change in
their own communities. These skills are often concentrated around making use of local
resources and building political power through the formation of large social groups
working for a common agenda.
The role of CSR in CD is any direct and indirect benefits received by the community as
results of social commitment of corporations to the overall community and social system.
The common roles of CSR in CD are as follows:
Page 303
Chapter 8

To share the negative consequences as a result of industrialization.

Closer ties between corporations and community.
Helping to get local talents as an attractive employer for potential candidates.
Community development activities (including that for its employees) are very important
aspects for any organization / project, because people of the villages surrounding the
plant and its employees are the stakeholders. The project proponents have always
treated its periphery as a key stakeholder. The main objective of the Community
Development Programme has been to create synergy and synthesis with the
environment. Guided and inspired by the objective of enhancing the living standards of
the people.
The policy of NPCIL towards social welfare & community development aims at
strengthening the bond between the project / station authorities and the local population
in the vicinity of nuclear power plants. In line with this policy, NPCIL at the existing
nuclear power stations and projects has been carrying out number of community welfare
activities in the following areas:
Education Gyan Gangothri Yojana

Health Arogya Sudha Yojana
Infrastructure
Community Welfare & Miscellaneous
Accordingly NPCIL plans to implement above social and community welfare measures in
area around the Gorakhpur Project with the following action plan.
NPCIL would contribute in implementing social welfare activities in collaboration with

local Gram Panchayat, Block Development Office etc. for better development of area
around the Project.
To minimize strain on existing infrastructure, adequate provision of basic amenities,
viz. education, health, transport etc. would be made considering the needs of
workforce and migrating population.
Sanitation facilities in construction labour colonies would be provided to ensure
better hygiene and health.
Regular environmental awareness programs would be organized by NPCIL to
impress upon the surrounding population about the beneficial impacts of the project
and also about the measures being undertaken for environmental safety.
Welfare measures proposed to be implemented around HAPP, Gorakhpur Project

Assistance in Educational Welfare Measures
Assistance for Up-gradation of Schools facilities like classrooms, laboratories and
other associated requirements.
Providing computers, sports item, laboratory equipment etc.
Page 304
Chapter 8

Introduction of the talent nurture schemes for students from nearby villages by
providing admission to AECS schools of NPCIL for free education or by providing
suitable scholarships.
Assistance in Health-Care Welfare Measures

Organization of the regular medical camps for chronic ailments prevailing amongst
the peoples of villages in and around JNPP.
Proving consultancy and medicines as a part of preventive and promotive health
care.
Hepatitis B vaccination to school & village children.
Assistance in Community Welfare Measures
Assistance in providing drinking water, street lighting, widening of roads,
strengthening of bridges etc.
Assistance in construction of general community infrastructure facilities like
Panchayat Bhavan etc..
Assistance in Development of Farmers Welfare Measures
Distribution of high quality seeds
Assistance in upgrading farming facilities like cold storage etc. In the area around
Gorakhpur Project.
Proposed Employees Development Efforts
After commencement of the proposed project, a communication process will be initiated
- orchestrated by the Station Director of the proposed plant. The Plant Management will
interact with the employees periodically to identify the need of development and
redressal of grievances of the employees (if any). Performance improvement workshops
and Managements Communication Meetings will be the other interventions where the
Project management will discuss with a cross section of employees the ways and means
of bringing about improvements.
The objective will be to inculcate a healthy work culture, which will aim at creating and
sustaining a peaceful work environment where every employee can contribute to the
plant in the assigned area of work, with full freedom and dignity and without fear.
These human resource interventions will be based on a highly interactive style and will
therefore facilitate a free flow of communication, increased awareness regarding the
priorities of Atomic Power Plant and enhanced commitment among the employees by
creating an ambience of trust and togetherness.
Page 305
Chapter 8

CHAPTER 9 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES: RISK ASSESSMENT

ON/OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLAN AND OCCUPATIONAL
HEALTH & SAFETY
9.00
ADDITIONAL STUDIES: RISK ASSESSMENT ON/OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY
9.1
INTRODUCTION
Risk to the Atomic Power Plan (APP) and its surrounding may arise due the following
factors:
i. External natural events that are likely to affect plant safety and operation like
earthquakes, floods, extreme winds, land slides, soil liquefaction etc.
ii. External man made events that are likely to affect plant safety and operation
iii. Events within the plant due to hazardous chemicals used in the plant operation that
may affect the public and the environment.
iv. Events within the plant due to radiological emissions that may affect the public and
the environment.
9.2
NATURAL EVENTS
As discussed earlier in Chapter 2 under Section 2.4, a site evaluation study is a
prerequisite before a site is approved for the construction of an atomic power facility like
HAPP. The purpose of the study is by AERB to assess the engineer-ability of the plant at
the selected site, in view of the effects of external natural events - like earthquakes,
floods, extreme winds, land slides, soil liquefaction etc.
9.2.1
Earthquake Hazard
The earthquake hazard map of part of northern India showing the project location is
given in Fig. 9.1a. It can be seen that the project site falls under moderate damage risk
zone. All precautionary measures have been considered while designing the engineering
of the facility to meet any such events. The seismo-tectonic study conducted for the site
as given under Section 4.5.6 (Chapter 4), revealed that the site is engineer-able from
this consideration.
9.2.2
Flood Hazard
The flood hazard map of part of northern India showing the project location is given in
Fig. 9.1b. It can be seen that the project site is not falling under area liable to floods.
However, the project site is within 10 km radius of Fatehabad Branch of Bhakra Canal.
The canal is fully lined and hence there is very low probability of canal breach. Further
all engineering precautionary measures have been considered while designing the
facility to meet any such incidents.
Page 306
Chapter 9

9.2.3
Cyclone Hazard
The cyclone hazard map of part of northern India showing the project location is given in
Fig. 9.1c. It can be seen that the project site falls under high damage risk zone, with
wind velocity reaching up to 47m/s. All engineering precautionary measures have been
considered while designing the facility to meet any such events.
9.2.4
Landslide Hazard
The landslide hazard map of part of northern India showing the project location is given
in Fig. 9.1d. It can be seen that the project site falls under zone which is unlikely to get
any landslide events. However, all precautionary measures have been considered while
designing the engineering of the facility to meet any such events.
Fig. 9.1a: Earthquake Hazard Map1 Showing Project Site
1 Seismic Zones of India Map IS:1893; 2002, Beuro of Indian Standards, Government of India.
Page 307
Chapter 9

Fig. 9.1b : Flood Hazard Map2 Showing Project Site
2 Flood Atlas Task Force Report, Central Water Commission, Government of India
Page 308
Chapter 9

Fig. 9.1c : Cyclone Hazard Map3 Showing Project Site.

9.2.5
Evaluation of HAPP Design Post Fukushima Event

700 MWe Indian PHWRs are designed for external events like flood, fire and earthquake
and the grade level of all units are decided considering the maximum flood level with
respect to possibility of upstream dam failure. Core cooling is achieved by natural
circulation, a complete passive system in the event of total unavailability of off-site / onsite power supply. A passive decay heat removal system is provided to preserve
inventory in Steam General (SG) for continued natural circulation. Various systems
backing one another are provided to maintain natural circulation. The inventory in SFSB
ensures fuel will not get uncovered for about 25 days. 700 MWe Indian PHWRs are
capable of handling any postulated external natural events.
3 Basic Wind Map IS 875(3) 1987, Cyclone Data, 1877-2005, IMD, Government of India
Page 309
Chapter 9

Fig. 9.1d : Landslide Hazard Zone Map4 of India Showing Project Site
9.3
MAN MADE EVENTS

The risk of the external man induced events on the APP vis--vis the surroundings like
chemical explosions occurring in the nearest public domain has been considered
appropriate for analysis. A brief description of the postulated events and their impacts on
the plant and surroundings are as follows.
9.3.1
Aircraft Crash Including Consequences of Impact, Fire and Explosion

AERB Safety Code specifies Screening Distance Values (SDV), for locating APP away
from airports, landing and take-off zones, and air corridors, in order to limit the
probability of such an event to less than 10-6 per year. An Air Port (small air port - not
used for commercial flights) is located at Hisar, 33 km. SSE of the site. The Indira
Gandhi International Air Port, Delhi is situated at about 208 km from the project site.
Considering the current air traffic density and the projected growth in air traffic and the
location of the site, a SDV of 8 km is required for an APP, and HAPP meets this
requirement.
9.3.2
Effect of Accidents Taking Place Outside the Project Site

There are no major industrial facilities in the vicinity of proposed site. The only major
industry Thermal Power Plant at village Khedar (HPGCL) is 20 km E of the project site.
The nearest highway, NH10 is about 6.0 km away from the proposed site. The man
made external events could result mainly from vehicles transporting hazardous
4 Disaster Management in India, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India 2011.

Page 310
Chapter 9

chemicals like LPG, chlorine or ammonia, plying on the road. Traffic or other accidents
may lead to large release of toxic chemicals or to chemical explosion. Three postulated
events are considered below.
Leakage of Chlorine: Consequence Analysis
Chlorine is usually transported in horizontal tanks (usually referred to as tonner)
constructed of mild steel with a capacity to store about 1000 kg. The typical dimensions
of the tank are 0.785 m diameter and 2.1 m length. The storage is done at a pressure of
about 10 kg/cm2 and at ambient temperature. The failure of the 9.5 mm spindle of the
valve in the liquid phase and release of liquid chlorine into the atmosphere is taken as
the maximum credible accident. A portion of the continuously releasing liquid chlorine
would flash. The flashed chlorine would initially expand as a dense gas resulting in fatal
concentrations. Subsequently it would disperse in the environment, greatly influenced by
the prevailing atmospheric stability condition.
Two types of parameters are estimated to provide a measure of the impact. One is the
Effect Distance, which corresponds to the distance up to which lethal concentration
(LC50) of vapor would be felt. Analysis indicated that the effect distance is approximately
480 m from the source under stable weather condition. For distances beyond 500 m,
concentration profile was obtained using GPM, considering stability class F and wind
speed as 2 m/s. The concentration of chlorine at a distance of about 2 km from the
source is found to be about 20 ppm (60 mg/m3). Hence, event of this kind has no effect
on safe operation of HAPP, which is about 6.0 km from the NH10.
Leakage of Ammonia: Consequence Analysis
A failure of the cylinder valve in the ammonia storage tank is postulated, leading to
release of ammonia, initial flash and subsequent dispersion in the atmosphere. A
continuous release and worst-case weather stability class (F, 2 m/s) have been
considered for the dispersion. It has been observed that LC50 value of ammonia (6164
mg/m3) would be felt up to a distance of about 160 metres. This does not affect the safe
operation of HAPP.
LPG Tanker Explosion
The postulated incident considered is a catastrophic failure of an LPG tanker, taking
place on the NH10. The effect of vapour build-up due to LPG tanker explosion is limited
to a maximum of ~ 153 m, heat radiation effect on equipment is limited to ~ 114 m,
overpressure effects are limited to ~ 175 m, and the structural damage is limited to ~ 146
m. The maximum damage distances are far less compared to the distance between
HAPP and the highway.
9.3.3
Enemy Attack / Security Breach / Terrorist Activity

The nearest distance of site from the international border (Pakistan) is about 180km.
There is little chance of enemy getting access to the facility.
As regards security breach / terrorist activity in to the facility, sufficient security system
has been adopted in the plant that there is no chance of the same.
Page 311
Chapter 9

9.4
EVENTS WITHIN PLANT

For the purpose of risk assessment and onsite and offsite emergency plan related with
the events within the plant, the risk due to non-radioactive substances and that due to
radioactive materials are dealt separately. Accordingly next sections are elaborated.
9.4.1
Hazardous Chemicals
Industrial activities, which produce, treat, store and handle hazardous substances, have
a high hazard potential endangering the safety of man and environment at work place
and outside. Recognizing the need to control and minimize the risks posed by such
activities, the Ministry of Environment & Forests have notified the Manufacture Storage
& Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules in the year 1989 and subsequently modified,
inserted and added different clauses in the said rule to make it more stringent. For
effective implementation of the rule, Ministry of Environment & Forests has provided a
set of guidelines. The guidelines, in addition to other aspects, set out the duties required
to be performed by the occupier along with the procedure. The rule also lists out the
industrial activities and chemicals, which are required to be considered as hazardous.
In the proposed project the power generation from atomic power (pressurized heavy
water reactor (PHWRs)), is being planned.
The major chemicals which will be stored by the project includes High Speed Diesel Oil
(HSD). In view of the proposed activities are being scrutinized in line of the above
referred Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical (Amendment)
Rules, 1989 and its Amendment Rules 2000 and observations / findings are
presented in this section. This plan covers mainly the HSD, which is going to be stored
and subsequently handled during the plant operation.
As per the Schedule I Schedule 1, paragraph (b) (iv) of Manufacture, Storage and
Import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989, MOE&F High Speed Diesel (HSD) falls
under category flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point lower than or
equal to 600C but higher than 230C.
The assessment has been made in a systematic manner covering the requirements of
the above-mentioned rules.
Process Description
The operation of the proposed project involves use of natural uranium oxide as fuel and
heavy water (D2O) as coolant and moderator for the reactor. Refueling of the reactor will
be carried out "on-power". The uranium dioxide (UO2) used for fuel is a ceramic with
high melting point and chemically inert to water at operating conditions. So long as the
ceramic fuel does not melt, the fission products remain entrapped in its matrix. During
normal operation virtually all solid fission products are permanently retained in UO2
matrix and only a fraction of noble gases and volatile products diffuse into the inter
space between fuel and cladding (for details see Chapter 2).
Page 312
Chapter 9

For each unit of 700MWe there are 4 DG sets. Each DG is of capacity 4.2 MW with fuel
consumption of 233g/KWhr (233g/KW/hr) or 979kg/hr. Each DG set will be provided with
114KL of capacity diesel Tank and with day tank of 8 hr duration of capacity 12 m3. Thus
at a time maximum (114 m3 X 8 + 12 m3 X 16 = 2016 m3 or say) = 2100 m3 of HSD will
be stored. One DG set is sufficient for supplying power to one 700MWe reactor.
However, provision of 3 standby DG sets has been kept for emergency situation. One
DG set is tested for to 1.0 hour in a week. The other DG sets kept under standby are
tested in subsequent weeks. Thus 4 DG set will run for maximum one hour during
testing period for the four units of HAPP and during emergency situation 4 DG sets will
run for 24 hours during emergency power failure situation.
Applicability of the Rule
From the above description of the process, it is observed that the chemicals stores /
handled and involved are:
(i) Bulk Storage of High Speed Diesel (HSD):
To decide whether the above mentioned industrial activities are likely to come within the
scope of the above mentioned Manufacture Storage and Import of Hazardous
Chemicals Rules, flow chart i.e. Fig. 9.2, pertaining to occupiers guide to the hazardous
chemical regulation -1989 and the threshold quantities mentioned in the rules are used
as given in Table 9.1a.
Table 9.1a: Threshold Quantity and the Chemicals to be Stored and Handled
SN
Chemical Stored /
Handled
1. High Speed Diesel
Qty.
Stored
/
Handled
(In
Tonne)
And
Storage / Handling
Conditions
2100 m3 or 1890 t
Whether
Included
in
The List of
Hazardous &
Toxic
Chemicals
Yes
Threshold Quantities (Tonnes)

For application For
of Rules 4,5,7
application
to 9 and 13 to
of Rules 10
15
to 12
10.000
10,000
After comparison of the stored / handled and threshold quantities, it can be noticed that
none of the stored / handled hazardous chemicals are more than the lower threshold
quantity. However, for the other chemicals, the threshold quantities are not listed.
Accordingly only rule 17 i.e. preparation and maintenance of material safety data
sheets for these chemicals are required.
The proposed project is going to utilise the HSD oil storage facility. The storage
installation will conform to the requirement for such storages. All equipment will conform
to the provision of statutory and other regulations of Government of India, including
Indian Boiler Regulation and Tariff Advisory Committee and also provisions of National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of USA.
Page 313
Chapter 9

YES
IS IT AN ACTIVITY WITHIN
THE MEANING OF REG 2
YES
NO
NO ACTION
YES
DOES THE QTY EXCEED
THE THRESHOLD QTY IN
SCH - 3 COL 4
IS THE CHEMICAL LISTED

IN SCHEDULE 3
YES
NO
YES
DOES THE HAZARDOUS

CHEMICAL COME WITHIN NO
THE CRITERIA OF PART-I
AND/OR LISTED IN PART-II
OF SCH-1
YES
ACTION PREP ON SITE
EMERGENCY PLAN (REG - 13);
PROVIDE INFORMATION TO
LOCAL AUTHORITY FOR
DRAWING OFF SITE
EMERGENCY PLAN (REG-14)
INFORM PUBLIC ABOUT MAZOR
ACCIDENT HAZARD (REG-15)
IS THE HAZARDOUS
CHEMICAL LISTED IN
SCHEDULE - 2
HAVE A HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL WITHIN

THE MEANING OF REG 2
NO
NO
DOES THE QTY EXCEED
THE THRESHOLD QTY IN
COL - 3 OF SCH - 3
NO
NO
IS THE QTY LARGE

ENOUGH TO RENDER THE
OPERATION CAPABLE OF
PRESENTING MAZOR
ACCIDENT HAZARD
NOTIFY SITE OF ACTIVITY
UPDATE SITE NOTIFICATION
(REG-7,8 & 9)
NO ACTION
NO
DEMONSTRATE SAFE
OPERATION AT ANY
TIME REG -4
YES
YES
INFORMATION REGARDING
IMPORTS OF CONCERNED
AUTHORITY PREPARE &
MAINTAIN MSDS & LABEL
(REG - 17 & 19)
ACTION PREPARE & SUBMIT

SAFETY REPORT PROVIDE
INFORMATION ON
NOTIFICATION PROVIDE
FURTHER INFORMATION TO
CONCERNED AUTHORITY
(REG - 10,11 & 12)
YES
IS THE ACTIVITY EITHER

A USE SPECIFIED IN SCH-4
OR ISOLATED STORAGE
DOES THE QTY
EXCEED THE
THRESHOLD QTY
IN SCH-2 COL-4
NO
ACTION IN THE EVENT OF A MAJOR

ACCIDENT REG-5 NOTIFY MAJOR
ACCIDENT PREPARE & SUBMIT A ON
THE ACCIDENT TO CONCERNED
AUTHORITY SCHEDULE-5
YES
YES
NO
DOES THE QTY

EXCEED
THRESHOLD
QTY IN SCH - 2
COLUMN - 3
Fig. No. 9.2: Occupiers Guide

Description of Hazardous Chemicals
The chemicals, which will be stored and handled, are presented in Table 9.1a. The
Material Safety data sheets of all the above chemicals are presented below.
Material Safety Data Sheet : High Speed Diesel
1. Chemical Identity
Chemical name: Diesel Oil
Chemical classification: Flammable liquid
Synonyms: Automotive Diesel Oil
Trade name: HSD
Formula Range: C13 - C18 C.A.S. NO.68476-30-2.
U.N.NO. 1202
Regulated identification:
Shipping name: HSD
Codes/Label:
Hazchem code class 3
Hazardous waste :
N.A.
Hazardous ingredients
C.A.S.NO.
Hazardous ingredients
C.A.S.NO.
Diesel
68476-30-2
Benzene Trace
71-43-2
Naphthalene Trace
91-20-3
Sulphur Trace
7704-34-9
Diesel is complex mixture of hydrocarbons .Its exact composition depends on the source of
crude oil from which it is produced and the refining methods used
Page 314
Chapter 9

2. Physical and Chemical Data

Boiling point/Range (deg.C) : 215 - 376. Physical state: Liquid. Appearance: yellowish brown
Melting/freezing point (deg.C) : N. A.
Vapour pressure: 2.12 to 26mm Hg at 21 deg C.
Odour: Perceptible odour
Vapour density: N.A.
Solubility in water @ 30 deg.C:
Insoluble Specific gravity: 0.86 - 0.90 at 20 deg C
Others: Pour Point: 6 - 18 deg. C.
3. Fire and Explosion Hazard Data
Flammability: Yes
LEL: 0.6%
Flash point(deg C) : 32 (OC)
TDG Flammability: class 3 . UEL: 6%
Flash point(deg C) : N.A. (CC)
Auto Ignition Temp : 225 deg. C
Explosion sensitivity to impact: not sensitive to Mechanical Impact.
Explosion sensitivity to static electricity: For vapors sensitivity exist
Hazardous Combustion Products: carbon monoxide, Nitrogen oxide. and other aromatic
hydrocarbons Hazardous
Polymerization: N.A
.
Combustible Liquid : Yes
Flammable material : Yes
Pyrophoric Material : N. A.
Explosive Material : Yes

Oxidiser : N. A.
Organic Peroxide : N. A.
Corrosive material : No
4. Reactivity Data
Chemical stability: Stable
Incompatibility with other material: oxidizers such Peroxides ,Nitric acid and Perchorates
Hazardous reaction products: on fire it will liberate some amount of carbon monoxide, sulphur
dioxide Nitrogen oxide and other aromatic hydrocarbons.
5. Health Hazard Data
Routes of entry: : Inhalation, Skin absorption ,ingestion
Effects of Exposure / symptoms: excessive inhalation Vapors cause rapid breathing, excitability,
staggering, headache, fatigue, nausea and vomiting, dizziness, drowsiness, narcosis
convulsions, coma.
Skin Contact: Skin-dryness, cracking, irritation eyes watering, stinging and inflammation.
Emergency treatment: In case of eye or Skin contact, flush with plenty of water. Remove
soaked clothing. in case of excessive inhalation move the victim to fresh air, obtain medical
assistance.
L.D50 (Oral-Rat) :
> 5g/kg
L.C 50: (rat 4hrs) 5g/m3
Permissible Exposure limit: N.A.
Odour threshold: N.A.
TLV (ACGIH) :
800 ppm
STEL: N.A.
NFPA Hazard signals
Health Flammability Reactivity/Stability
Special
1
2
0
-
Page 315
Chapter 9

6. Preventive Measures
Personal Protective equipment: Canister type gas mask. PVC or Rubber. Goggles giving
complete protection to eyes. Eye wash fountain with safety shower.
Handling and storage precautions: Do not expose to heat and naked lights, keep containers and
valves closed when not in use.
7. Emergency and First Aid Measures
Fire:
Fire Extinguishing Media: Foam, Carbon Di-oxide, Dry Chemical Powder. Water may be used to
cool fire-exposed containers.
Special Procedures: Shut off leak, if safe to do so, Keep non-involved people away from spill
site. Eliminate all sources of ignition.
Unusual Hazards: It will spread along ground and collect in sewers
Exposure:
Skin Contact: In case of contact with skin flush with fresh water, remove containment clothing.
Inhalation: In case of excessive inhalation move the victim to fresh air, if problem in breathing
give artificial respiration; give oxygen. Obtain medical assistance.
Ingestion: Give water to conscious victim to drink. Do not induce vomiting
Antidotes / Dosage : N.A.
Spills:
Steps to be taken to shutoff leak, if safe to do so, keep non-involved people away from spill site.
Eliminate all sources of ignition. Prevent spill entering in to sewers, for Major spillage contact
emergency services.
Waste Disposal Method : N. A.
(i) Small Storage of Toxic Chemicals in Analysis Laboratory
Apart from HSD no other hazardous chemical are stored in bulk quantity. However, there
may be some toxic chemicals used in different laboratories of the plant, which will be
used in analysis in the laboratory. But the quantity of the same will be very small.
Preparation and maintenance of material safety data sheets for all such chemicals will
be maintained at each laboratory as per the OSHAS 18000 requirements. The list of
such chemicals is given in Table 9.1b.
Table 9.1b: List of Toxic Chemicals Stored in Very Small Quantity in Laboratory
SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Item Description
Acetic Acid Glacial
Acetone
Acetonitrile
Conc. Sulphuric Acid
Ammonia Solution
Ammonium Nitrate
Benzoyl Peroxide
Chromium Chloride Hexahydrate
Copper Chloride Crystal
Page 316
Chapter 9

SN.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
9.4.2
Item Description
Copper Nitrate Trihydrate
Copper Sulphate Pentahydrate
Cyclo Hexamine
Dioxan
Hydrochloric Acid
Hydrogen Peroxide
Iodine Resublimed
Magnesium Metal Power
Morpholine
Nitric Acid
O- Tolodine reagent
Perchloric Acid
Pyridine 2,6-Dicarbocyclic Acid
Radiological Risk Assessment and Emergency Response System

There are two types of anticipated environmental impacts considered for nuclear power
plants, especially with respect to radio-activity releases. The first ones are those which
occur under normal operation of the plant and the second ones are those which can
occur under accident conditions.
The environmental factors that may be affected by the first type of environmental
impacts during operation phase due to radio-activity releases are discussed in Chapter
5, under Section 5.5.2. The second type of impacts and mitigation measures are
discussed here under.
9.4.2.1 Introduction & Design Philosophy

The Pressurized Heavy Water Reactors (PHWRs) proposed to be set up at Fatehabad
have all the features of the modern technology, similar to western designs in respect of
philosophy, features and construction. The design of plant is consistent with the
standard international practices for safety systems. The basic concept of defense in
depth in this plant includes the use of redundancy, diversity, independence and fails safe
design. In fact, design features of the PHWR have been proposed to be set up as per
International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA).
According to International Nuclear Safety Advisory Group, INSAG 10 IAEA 1996 for
pressurized heavy water cooled reactors at power operation, the barriers confining the
fission products are typically the fuel matrix, the fuel cladding, the boundary of the
reactor coolant system and the containment system. Accordingly, there are five levels of
defense in depth with objectives as explained in Sections 2.11.1 to 2.11.4, Chapter 2.
9.4.2.2 Safety Objectives
The safety objective is to verify that the reactor and safety systems are properly
designed and operated so that the occupational doses and dose to the members of
Page 317
Chapter 9

public as a result of discharge of radioactive substances from the plant remain within the
limits specified by AERB.
Safety Aspects
All the radioactive sources in the plant which may lead to radioactive releases are
identified and assessed for their hazard magnitude. However, the worst case scenario
for any nuclear power plant is considered to be the damage of core where the fuel is
loaded and a sustained chain reaction takes place in normal course of plant operation.
Accordingly, safety aspects are identified and evaluated by deterministic as well as by
probabilistic assessment. Probabilistic safety assessment is seen as an extension of or
complement to deterministic analyses. It systematically considers conceivable accident
causes (Postulated Initiating Events (PIEs)) and for each initiating events, which can
lead to core damage of different categories Core Damage Frequency (CDF) is
calculated based on individual initiating events (IE) frequency. Through individual event
sequence analysis for different IEs, it is estimated that the plant is provided adequate
safety features and measures to mitigate or minimize any unsafe consequences.
As per AERB Safety Guide (SG-D-5), DBE (Design Basis Events) are categorized into
four categories on the basis of their expected frequency of occurrence. Each of the DBE
considered should be assigned to one of the following groups.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Category-1 Events-Normal Operation, Operation transient and AOO

Category-2 Events-Events of moderate frequency
Category-3 Events-Events of low frequency
Category-4 Events-Multiple failures and rare events.
Events not falling in any of the above categories are called BDBE (Beyond Design Basis
Events).
The concept of defense-in-depth is conveyed at all phases or activities related to
ensuring the APP safety. Here, the strategy for preventing unfavorable plant damage
state initiating events, especially for the 1st and 2nd level is of primary importance
(details are provided in Section 2.11.1 to 2.11.4, Chapter 2).
In normal operating conditions, all of the physical barriers must be capable of
functioning, whereas the measures on protecting them must be available. On detecting
any problems in any of the barriers envisaged by the design or unavailability of
measures for protecting it, the reactor plant must be shut down and measures for
bringing the atomic power unit in a safe state must be taken.
The engineering measures and managerial, decisions meant for ensuring safety of APP
must be proven by the previous experience or tests, studies or operating experience with
prototypes. Such an approach should be applied not only when developing the
equipment and designing the APP, but when manufacturing the equipment, constructing
and operating the APP and upgrading its systems (components) as well.
Page 318
Chapter 9

The values of overall Core Damage Frequency (CDF) will be within the design target of
1.0 E-6 /reactor-year for the reactor proposed to be set up at Fatehabad, which is below
acceptable limit of 1.0 E-5 /reactor-year, as per International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA) Safety Series No. 75 INSAG-3, 1988.
Multi Barriers of Safety
The safety of the NPP is ensured by incorporating many barriers between the source
and the receptor. Protection implies a system of physical barriers on the way by which
the ionizing radiation and radioactive substances can release into the environment. This
system is used together with a complex of engineering and managerial measures for
protecting these barriers and maintaining their effectiveness and measures for protecting
the personnel, population and the environment.
The system of physical barriers of the NPP power unit incorporates: a fuel element, fuel
element cladding, the pressure boundary of the reactor coolant and the containment. An
exclusion zone also provides a dilution of radioactivity before it is reaches to the public
domain.
9.4.2.3 Radiological Objectives
The general principle applied is that, for the transients, incidents and accidents
considered in the design (Table 9.2), the more frequent the event, the lower the
radiological consequences.
The normal operating and transient conditions must not result in normal operating limits
being exceeded. These operating conditions and transients are covered by the overall
dose limit of 1.0 mSv /yr to the members of public at 1.0 km from the reactor i.e. the
fence post of the exclusion zone.
The radiological objectives associated with other conditions viz. accidents (Table 9.2) to
meet the appropriate reference dose limits under these conditions. For the above
referred conditions, the maximum thyroid and whole body doses from APP at a distance
of 1.0 km would be kept well within the reference doses of 500 mSv to child thyroid and
100 mSv to an adult whole body as stipulated by AERB.
Radiological Aspects
The radiological consequences to the public can be broadly divided into two categories
i.e. during normal operation and during accident condition. During normal operations, the
controlled release of radioactive materials is governed by the Effective Dose Limits
(EDL), applicable to the members of public. EDL as stipulated by AERB is 1 mSv/year.
There are mainly two routes of exposures i.e. air route and aquatic route. In accident
conditions, the consequence depends on the accident scenario.
While siting atomic power plants, three areas are defined as exclusion zone, sterilized
zone and monitoring zone. Exclusion zone extends up to 1.0 kms, which will be under
the exclusive control of the power station where no public habitation is allowed. The
sterilized zone is the annulus between 1.0 kms and 5 kms radius from the reactors
where natural growth is permitted but new expansion of activities which lead to enhance
Page 319
Chapter 9

population growth are regulated. The area from project to site 30 kms zone is the
monitoring zone. The areas under plant zone, exclusion zone and sterilized zone for the
HAPP Project are shown in Fig. 9.4.
For, Fatehabad Site, the methodology for calculation of doses during off normal
situations will be as per AERB safety guide (AERB/SG/S-5D-21). The doses will be
worked out by using the two types of dose conversion factors. For initial two hrs into the
accident, the site-specific worst meteorological parameters are assumed to maximize
the dose. For subsequent releases, time averaged dispersion parameters are used. The
worst affected sector will be taken with no change in wind direction.
The maximum thyroid and whole body doses from APP under abnormal situations at a
distance of 1.0 km will be kept well within the reference doses of 500 mSv and 100 mSv
as stipulated by AERB for child thyroid and whole body respectively.
Radiation Protection Considerations
ALARA Policy
The radiation protection policy taken into account for design is to ensure that the
individual dose of site personnel and members of the public does not exceed the dose
limits set by the regulatory agency and is kept at a level As Low As Reasonably
Achievable (ALARA) and as per the requirements of AERB. The details are presented as
in Section 2.15.4, Chapter 2.
This policy is embodied in the design, construction, operation, maintenance, in-service
inspection, refueling, and non-routine activities.
General Design Considerations
General design considerations and methods employed to maintain in Plant occupational
radiation exposures, in line with ALARA have two objectives:
to minimize the amount of personnel time spent in radiation areas,
to minimize radiation levels in routinely occupied Plant areas and in the vicinity of
Plant equipment expected to require personnel attention.
Equipment and facility design are considered in maintaining occupational radiation
exposures ALARA during plant operations including: normal operation, maintenance and
repairs, refueling operations and fuel storage, in-service inspection and calibrations,
radioactive waste handling and disposal, and other anticipated operational occurrences.
General equipment design considerations to minimize the amount of personnel time
spent in a radiation area include:
Reliability, durability, construction, and design features of equipment, components,
and materials to reduce or eliminate the need for repair or preventive maintenance.
Service convenience for anticipated maintenance or potential repair, including ease
of disassembly and modularization of components for replacement or removal to a
lower radiation area for repair.
Page 320
Chapter 9

Redundancy of equipment or components to reduce the need for immediate repair

when radiation levels may be high, and when no feasible method is available to
reduce radiation levels,
Provisions, where practicable, to remotely or mechanically operate, repair, service,
monitor, or inspect equipment.
General facility layout design considerations to minimize the amount of personnel time
spent in a radiation area include:
locating equipment, instruments, and sampling stations which will require routine
maintenance, calibration, operation, or inspection, for ease of access and minimum
required occupancy time in radiation areas,
laying out Plant areas to allow remote or mechanical operation, service, monitoring,
or inspection of highly radioactive equipment,
providing, where practicable, for transportation of equipment or components
requiring service to a lower radiation area.
General facility layout design considerations directed towards minimizing radiation levels
in Plant access areas and in the vicinity of equipment requiring personnel attention,
include:
separating radiation sources and occupied areas, where practicable (e.g., pipes or
ducts containing potentially highly radioactive fluids, do not pass through occupied
areas),
providing adequate shielding between radiation sources, and access and service
areas,
where appropriate, separating equipment or components in service areas with
permanent shielding,
locating equipment, instruments and sampling sites in the lowest practicable
radiation zone,
providing means and adequate space for utilizing movable shielding for sources
within the service area, when required,
providing means for decontamination of service areas,
providing means to control radioactive contamination and to facilitate
decontamination of potentially contaminated areas.
Average Environmental Radiation Dose to the Members of Public Out Side of
Exclusion Zone for Operating APPs in India
As per the reports from Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL), BARC, the average
environmental radiation dose (micro Sievert per year) at 1.6 Km radius due to operation
of Nuclear Power Plants in India 2006-2010 is given in the Fig. 9.3. The present AERB
public domain dose limit is 1000 micro Sievert/year. It may be seen that the public
domain dose values in case of TAPS, RAPS and MAPS have been reported to be
mostly below 50 micro Sievert / year (20 times lesser than stipulated standard). In the
case of NAPS, KAPS and Kaiga, these value are in the range of 1.7 to 2.8 micro Sievert
/ year. This is also to mention that these values are excluding background natural
radiation average dose of 2400 micro Sievert / year and medical exposures. This
indicates that the exposure of public to the radiation is far below the stipulated limit in all
the nuclear power plants in India.
Page 321
Chapter 9

9.4.2.4 Monitoring of Environment Around HAPP Site

At each nuclear power plant, Environmental Survey Laboratories are set up long before
the plant goes into operation. These laboratories carry out analysis of background
radioactivity in the area. The purpose is to establish the baseline radiation levels.
Thereafter, when the power plant is commissioned and operated, the radiation levels in
the environment are monitored regularly up to 30 km distance from the reactors. Within
the exclusion boundary, continuous monitoring of radiation situation is done by
automated environmental radiation monitoring system. This is being done at all the
nuclear power plants in India on continuous basis.
It has been reassuring to note that there has been no adverse impact on the
environment due to operation of the Nuclear Power Plants in India.
Fig. 9.3: Public Dose at 1.6 Km distance from NPPs (2006-2010) (AERB Prescribed
Annual Limit is 1000 micro-Sievert)
Page 322
Chapter 9

Environmental Survey Laboratory

An Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL) will be set up for regular monitoring of
environmental parameters throughout the operation of the plant.
The primary aim of the environment monitoring program is to assess the radiation
exposure of public residing around Fatehabad site and to demonstrate that radiation
exposure received by the member of the public is within the limit prescribed by the
regulatory agency based on international guidelines
Objectives of Environmental Monitoring
To generate environmental radiological database.
To assess the possible dose commitments to the population due to operation of the
nuclear power station.
To determine control action during site / off site emergencies.
This requires detailed measurements on a number of environmental matrices for
radioactivity content that may result from the release of radioactivity effluents during the
normal operation of the nuclear facilities.
Pre-operational survey
Operational Survey
External Radiation
Radioactivity concentration in air & water.
Strontium, Cesium and Iodine activity in environmental matrices.
Type of Sample Number of Typical Samples Analyzed in a Year
Environmental Survey Laboratories (ESL) are located at each of the nuclear power
project sites in the country. These ESLs are operated by an independent organization
viz. Health Physics Division of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre. At the existing NPPs,
ESLs have been collecting samples in the radius of 30 km from the plant site and their
reports conclude that the dose to population at the fence resulting from the existing
NPPs in the country is about 1.5% of the authorized dose limit, which is a small fraction
of the natural background radiation. The doses at further distances are still lower.
SN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9.5
Type of samples
Surface water
Drinking water
Well water
Air Samples for tritium
Air samples for particulates
Goat Thyroid
Vegetables, milk, pulses, cereals, meat, eggs, fish, etc.
Weed, silt, soil, sediments, grass, leaves, etc.
Number
of
Typical
Analysed per Year
500
200
400
500
50
50
70
40
Samples
ON/OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLAN / EMERGENCY RESPONSE SYSTEM

The purpose of planning for on-site/off-site radiation emergency response is to ensure
adequate preparedness for protection of the plant personnel and members of the public
Page 323
Chapter 9

from significant radiation exposures in the unlikely event of a severe accident. The
probability of a major accident resulting in the releases of large quantities of radioactivity
is extremely small. The probability, however, can never be reduced to absolute zero and
therefore this residual risk is sought to be mitigated by appropriate siting criteria and
implementing suitable arrangements for emergency planning and preparedness.
As stipulated in AERB Safety Guide No. SG/HS-1, to limit the radiological consequences
in public domain, the whole area around NPPs is divided into three domains based on
severity of prevailing radiation fields subsequent to the accidental release of
radioactivity. Appropriate intervention levels and derived intervention levels are assigned
in advance for each domain so that off-site emergency countermeasures could be
implemented in a pre-planned manner. Following countermeasures have been found
suitable to deal with radiological emergency in the public domain.
Iodine Prophylaxis administration

Sheltering
Evacuation
Decontamination
Control of food and water supplies
Use of stored animal feed
Decontamination of area
The selection of one or more of the above protective measures is based on the nature of
the accident and its associated risk and in particular, time factor associated with these
two factors.
The intervention levels as stipulated in AERB Safety Guide No. SG/HS-1 for protective
measures are implemented at very low radiation levels, compared to radiation levels
which cause serious injurious to persons receiving acute whole-body radiation exposure.
The requirements of emergency counter-measures in case of various DBE are
assessed. Emergency counter-measures like distribution of iodine prophylaxis and
sheltering would be needed based on intervention level.
The agencies responsible for carrying out remedial measures during the different
categories of emergencies mentioned above are as follows:
Type of Emergency
Emergency Standby
Personnel Emergency
Plant Emergency
Site Emergency
Off-site Emergency
Responsible Agency
Plant / Site Management

District authorities of the State Government having jurisdiction over
the public domain affected by the accident, normally the District
Collector.
Page 324
Chapter 9

9.5.1
Emergency Standby
Emergency standby is defined as abnormal plant conditions with potential to develop
into accident situations, if timely preventive actions are not taken. During this situation
pre-identified plant personnel are placed in a state of alert for implementing the
emergency response procedure.
9.5.2
Personnel Emergency
When the radiological consequences of an abnormal situation are confined to some
personnel working in a plant, without affecting the plant, it is described as a personnel
emergency. For example, some of the plant personnel may be working at a location
within the reactor building where the radiation field is significantly above prescribed limits
for extended period resulting in their excessive radiation exposure. Some other
examples of personnel emergency are given below:
o splashing of radioactive material on personnel while carrying out
o operation/maintenance in such a manner that excessive contamination,
o internal and/or external, has occurred or is suspected;
o high uptake of radioactive material has inadvertently occurred or is suspected;
o personnel contamination at levels exceeding prescribed limits;
o high external exposures has occurred or is indicated;
o the person is physically ill or incapacitated;
o exposed to a heavy chlorine dose in a chlorine plant.
9.5.3
Plant Emergency
When the radiological consequences of an abnormal situation are expected to remain
confined to the plant, it is described as a plant emergency. This situation may arise
during operation or shutdown maintenance of the reactor.
9.5.4
Site Emergency
An accidental release of radioactivity extending beyond the plant but confined to the site
boundary (exclusion zone) constitutes a site emergency. An assessment of such a
situation would imply that protective measures are limited to the exclusion zone. Site
Emergency is declared and terminated by Site Emergency Director (SED). The
protective measures in a Site emergency include evacuation from the affected parts of
the site and also radiological monitoring of the environment in the Emergency Planning
Zone (EPZ). The emergency reference level for on-site emergency is given below.
9.5.5
Off Site Emergency

An off-site emergency occurs when the radiological consequences of an emergency
situation originating from APP are likely to extend beyond the site boundary (exclusion
zone) and into the public domain. For the purpose of planning off-site emergency, an
emergency-planning zone (EPZ) up to 16km radius is specified. There should be fixed
criteria to determine an off-site emergency in terms of the release of radioactivity as
indicated by the radiation monitoring system.
Page 325
Chapter 9

The protective measures in public domain shall be implemented by the District Officials
under the supervision of the district collector or the divisional Commissioner, who shall
be designated as the Off-site Emergency Director (OED).
The manual on Off-site Emergency Response Plans would be issued by the State Level
Emergency Response Committee. The manual shall specify the need of radiation impact
assessment based on immediate, intermediate and long-term consequences according
to space-time domain concept and the necessary intervention measures such as
evaluation, sheltering and food control. Off-site emergency shall be declared and
terminated by OED on the basis of technical assessment made by SED.
The Station Director HAPP is identified as the Plant Emergency Director (PED) and all
the Superintendent and Health Physicist are the members of the plant Emergency
Committees.
Consequent to the declaration of the site emergency the Station Director of HAPP
handover the charge of Plant emergency director (PED) to Chief Superintendent and
assumes the charge of Site Emergency Director (SED). The PED provides all plant
related information to the SED and works as per the advice of the SED to mitigate the
situation in the plant.
The SED is the Chairman of the Site Emergency Committee (SEC) and is responsible
for convening the SEC, when the 1st report of the initiation of an emergency is received
by SED. SED shall obtain technical inputs, such as particulars of the accident, from the
members of the SEC. The decisions for declaration/termination of an emergency shall
be based on inputs so obtained. The Site Emergency Organisation structure & the
recommended plant emergency response action flow diagram are chalked out.
Consequent to the declaration of the Off-site emergency For HAPP, the District
Collector, Fatehabad will be the Off-site Emergency Director (OED). Its membership
includes the chiefs of all public services relevant to the emergency management in the
district and the Station Director of HAPP. The OED shall be the Chairman of the Off-site
Emergency Committee (OEC) and is responsible for convening OEC when the report of
the initiation of an emergency is received by OED. The Action Flow Diagram for the
site/off-site emergencies and Information Flow Diagram for site/off-site emergencies
have been chalked out.
The Shift Charge Engineer (SCE) on duty is among the first to learn about the
occurrence of an off-normal situation. He shall evaluate the condition and the data on
the basis of which an emergency may be declared / terminated. He shall notify SED
about any condition which may warrant the declaration of an emergency.
9.5.6
Exercises
Emergency scenarios shall be developed to test emergency plans and operational
response at all levels. Exercises and drills shall be conducted once in a quarter for Plant
Emergency to see that the staffs are adequately trained and all the emergency
Page 326
Chapter 9

equipment are kept in good conditions. At the end of each exercise/drill an evaluation of
the response call shall be carried out to take care of any deficiency noticed. Site
emergency exercise is carried out once in a year. Off-site Emergency exercise is carried
out once in two years.
Emergency plan shall be reviewed at least once in five years, the improvements and
updating procedures shall be implemented based on feed back and critiques from
exercises.
Periodic exercises are conducted as per stipulation of AERB with the active participation
of relevant state and public authorities. These exercises are witnessed by observers
from Crisis Management Group (CMG), DAE, AERB, BARC and NPCIL-HQ.
Feed back is a very valuable aspect of the exercise of offsite emergency and authorities
will resolve the deficiencies surfaced out and action plan will be chalked out depending
upon the requirements.
The approved plan for HAPP will be ready before criticality of HAPP.
The nature and magnitude of response measures would depend on the specific category
or extent of emergency. Though safety evaluation of an APP relates to design basis, the
HAPP emergency response plan shall be based not only on design basis events but also
on accident conditions due to more severe events, even if they have a very low
probability of occurrence. An analysis of such events and the projected radiological
consequences specific to the APP shall form the basis of response plan, so that the
nature and magnitude of response actions could be established.
9.5.7
Emergency Preparedness System for HAPP

The documented emergency planning and preparedness program to be established and
practiced for HAPP will be approved by AERB. This documented manual on emergency
preparedness and response for HAPP will be in two volumes as follows:
Volume-I : Plant/Site Emergency Procedure.
Volume-II : Procedure for Off-Site Emergency.
The salient features of the emergency preparedness system for HAPP are elaborated in
the following sections.
9.5.8
Volume I : Plant / Site Emergency Procedure

Emergency Organization and Responsibility
To effectively manage the emergency situation at HAPP, Fatehabad site Emergency
Committee (JEC) consisting of Advisory Group, Service Group, Damage Control Group
and Rescue Team will be established. The details of Fatehabad Emergency action flow
diagram for site / off site emergencies is presented in Fig. 9.4.
Page 327
Chapter 9

Communication
The responsibility of communication during emergency lies with Communication Group.
This group ensures that all communication equipment is kept functional at all time. It
consists of Engineer-in -charge of the Plant, communication system, Telephone
operators and wireless operator.
Resources and Facilities
Main Control Room conference room will be made into Plant Emergency Control Centre
(PECC) and Station Directors Office will be converted in to Site Emergency Control
Centre. These centers will be provided with communication facility within the HAPP site
and outside agency.
The plant emergency equipment centre will be located at Administrative building or any
suitable location and it will be augmented with ready to use equipment for the plant /site
emergency. Normally Zone-II and Zone III area shower and wash room are to be used
for emergency personnel decontamination purpose. However there will be a separate
facility for casualty at Residential complex hospital when it is commissioned. A special
emergency service vehicle fitted with two way radio equipment and necessary
monitoring & survey equipment will be available at all time under control of on duty Shift
Charge-Engineer (SCE). Different assembly areas for different working groups will be
identified inside the operating area or plant fencing and maintained for assembly in the
event of an emergency. Emergency shelter locations will be identified for sheltering
/evacuation due to emergency condition and the plant personnel shall proceed to the
shelter areas in the event of an emergency.
Action plan for responding to Emergency
After hearing the emergency siren and announcement about emergency situation and or
getting information of the same through telephone, all responsible members of the JEC
shall proceed to Main control room/ PECC. Details of handling plant /on-site emergency
situations will be documented and made available at PECC. The action flow diagram for
on site and off site emergencies is given in Fig. 9.4.
9.5.9
Volume II : Procedure for Off-Site Emergency

This volume will provide guidelines for handling off-site emergency at HAPP and deals
with emergency management organization, emergency equipment and facilities for
handling the situation up to 16 km radius.
Emergency Planning Zones and Sectors
The area around the plant site is divided into various zones and sectors as described
below for effective handling of the emergency situations:
In normal operation of the proposed PHWR category atomic power plant, the impact
zone would not be beyond 1.0 km, which would also hold good for off normal situations
due to advanced technological features in built in the design of the reactor. However, on
a conservative side, an area of 16 km around the plant is considered as emergency
planning zone as per the requirements of AERB as described below:
Page 328
Chapter 9

As per AERB requirements, the exclusion zone covers a distance of about 1.0 km
around the plant site within which no habitation is permitted and is protected by security
personal from state /central government agency/Central Industrial Security Force (CISF).
The sterilized zone covers a distance from exclusion boundary at 1.0 km to 5 km radius
around the plant site within which natural growth of population is permitted and
unrestricted growth of population and development are controlled by state administration
through administrative measures. The zone of 0 -16 km is termed as emergency
planning zone (EPZ) and is divided in to 16 sectors marked as A to P in clockwise
direction .
9.5.10 Frequency /Periodicity of Emergency Exercises
Plant emergency Exercise Quarterly

Site emergency Exercise Yearly
Off-Site emergency Exercise Two Yearly
9.5.11 Habitability of Control Rooms under Accident Conditions

The habitability of control rooms under accident conditions is ensured as indicated
below:
The habitability systems of the main control room (MCR) and supplementary control
room (SCR) incorporate systems and equipment, protecting the operators from
radioactive, toxic and harmful gases, aerosols and smoke, for creating safe normal
habitability conditions permitting the operators to control the power unit and also to
maintain it in a safe state even under emergency modes, including accidents involving
the primary circuit loss of coolant.
Mode I Normal Operating Conditions
In the normal mode, supply of outdoor air cleaned from dust is provided. Duration of
mode I is not restricted. The air entering from outside is mixed with recirculation air, is
cleaned on coarse and fine filters, cooled in the air cooler and by the fan along air ducts
network is supplied to the room via fire-retarding ducts. The air from the rooms is
withdrawn by exhaust fans and is supplied to the suction of the air conditioning systems
and to plenum vent center. The difference between the amount of the plenum and
recirculation air creates the required air head in the MCR rooms.
Mode II Filtering/Ventilation Mode
The operation mode II is introduced automatically by indications of the radiation
monitoring transducers on rise of radioactivity in the intake air more than 3.10-7 Gy/h,
corresponding value of volume activity of iodine radio-nuclides 3.10 +2 Bq/m3. Mode II
duration is not less than 10 hr -period required for bringing the unit to cool down state.
The outdoor air flow rate is determined by the necessity to create a head in the MCR airtight area, as well as providing of the personnel with the outdoor air meeting the sanitary
(public health) standards (60 m3 per human being).
Page 329
Chapter 9

Outdoor air, now passes via filters, is cleaned, and supplied to suction of the air
conditioning system. The air conditioning system continues functioning as in mode I.
Mode III Mode of Total Isolation of the MCR Rooms
This mode is introduced during emergencies for a period permitting the external services
of radiometric and chemical control to determine the content and concentration of toxic
substances in the atmospheric air in the MCR conditioners air intake area.
Besides, mode III shall be introduced in case of the outdoor air contamination by toxic
substances, carbon monoxide (in case of fire) and other harmful substances not retained
by the absorbing filters. In mode III air-tight valves in the outdoor line close, the operator
opens manually a valve on compressed air pipeline. On loss of power supply to the
system the operator manually opens a valve on compressed air pipeline. The
conditioning system continues operating for full recirculation.
To maintain the required pressure in the MCR rooms, compressed air from cylinders is
used. The mode duration is assumed to be 4h, without replenishment. With
replenishment, the occupancy for indefinite period is possible. Storage location on the
cylinders is decided considering this aspect.
By signals of external surveillance services the operator takes decision about the
necessary mode of ventilation (I, II, III).
Page 330
Chapter 9

Fig. 9.4 : Action Flow Diagram for Site / Off Site Emergencies
Page 331
Chapter 9

Table 9.2: Radiological Emergency and Risk to Public

SN.
Risk Categories
Affected Zone
1
2
Normal operation
Operational
deviations
Natural or any man
made incidents/
accidents without
release of
radioactivity
Nil
Nil
9.6
Natural or any man

made incidents/
accidents which
are DBA causing
release of
radioactivity
Natural or any man

made incidents/
accidents, which are
beyond DBA causing
release of
radioactivity to
environment.
Localized area inside

the plant
Hypothetical Incidents
or accidents that
causes impact within
operating area or plant
boundary
or accidents that
causes impact with in
Plant boundary and
within 1.6 km radius
(Exclusion Zone)
or accidents that
causes impact beyond
1.6 km radius
(Exclusion Zone)
Classification of
Emergency/ agency
for handling it
Nil
Nil
Risk to Public
Nil
Nil
Plant Emergency/
Plant management as
per existing
preparedness
procedure
Plant Emergency/
Plant management as
per existing
preparedness
procedure
Nil
On-Site Emergency/
Site/Plant
management as per
existing emergency
preparedness
procedure for on-site
Off-Site Emergency/
off-Site emergency
preparedness
procedure/manual
Nil
Nil
Countermeasures
are implemented to
mitigate the
consequences.
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

In the proposed APP multifarious activities will be involved during construction, erection,
testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance, the men, materials and machines
are the basic input. Industrialization generally brings several problems like occupational
health and safety.
The industrial planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take the steps to minimize the
impacts of industrialization and to ensure appropriate occupational health, safety
including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under construction and
erection and operation and maintenance. The proposed plan is given hereunder.
Page 332
Chapter 9

9.6.1
Corporate Environment OHS Policy

Occupational Health and Safety of employees will be the prime concern of the project
proponent. The project proponents will be dedicated to implement Safety, Health and
Environment policy and will strive to make OHS as a part of the industrial life. A copy of
Corporate Environment Policy of NPCIL is presented as Annexure IVE.
9.6.2
Occupational Health
Occupational health needs attention both during construction and erection and operation
and maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude and variety in
the above phases.
Full fledge hospital facilities will be made available round the clock for attending
emergency arising out of accidents, if any.
Construction and Erection Phase
The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to
constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to
arrangements to reduce it within the threshold limit value (TLVs), personal protective
equipments will be supplied to workers.
The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is due to
noise hearing losses. Suitable personnel protective equipment will be given to
employees.
9.6.3
Occupational Health Surveillance (OHS)

Under OHS plan, a separate doctor will be earmarked to look into the problems faced by
the workers with respect to occupational health. All the potential occupational hazardous
work places would be monitored regularly, especially with respect to parameters related
to causing occupational health problems, viz. noise, heat, ventilation, exposure to
radiation, hazardous chemicals, etc.
The health of employees working in these areas would be periodically monitored with
special reference to lung function test and Noise induced Hearing Loss (NIHL), etc for
early detection of any ailment due to exposure to high noise / hazardous chemicals /
radiation exposure / nature of work.
The Occupational Health Surveillance to be followed in the proposed plant will be as
follows:
Pre-Employment Medical Examination of Employees
Employees recruited for employment will undergo necessary pre employment medical
examination for fitness for the job, so that right persons are selected for appropriate job
and a base line health status of employee is recorded.
Page 333
Chapter 9

Periodical Medical Examination of Employees

Periodic medical examination of employees will be conducted as per AERB Norm and
necessary feed back will be provided to individuals and to the management for
necessary management interventions / measures.
The periodic medical check-up report will be recorded employee wise and maintained as
per the Factories Act applicable to APP. The medical check-up report of each employee
will be compared with the previous records and evaluated with special reference to
Occupational Health and Safety, by a Doctor earmarked for the purpose. Based the
advice of the doctor the required management measures, if any will be taken.
First Aid Training / Treatment
First aid training & treatment and maintenance of first aid boxes will be taken care under
the Occupational Health Services.
Occupational Health Centre (OHC)
During plant operation a separate unit in the main plant hospital (at the township) will be
earmarked as OHC, specifically dedicated for the purpose. The OHCs will be provided
with computerized facilities to maintain all the medical examination reports.
During construction phase, requisite First aid facilities and certain life saving equipment
will be provided at the make-shift OHC at the plant site. Ambulance van will be provided
at the plant, which to move injured persons for treatment to the Hospital facilities at
District Headquarters.
Industrial Hygiene Monitoring
Industrial hygiene monitoring will be regularly conducted to assess the nature and level
of hazards inside the plant and for necessary planning & action to reduce the hazard
levels, if any.
However, adoption of excellent engineering control measures and hearing conservation
programme like periodic audiometry examination, motivating employees to use personal
protective equipments like ear muff & ear plugs will be followed to avoid such problems.
9.6.4
Safety Plan
Safety of both men and material during construction and operation phases is of concern.
The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is known an
emergency plan. The disaster in the project is possible due to leakage of hazardous
chemicals / radiation, collapse of structure and fire / explosion etc.
Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and maintenance
phases of the proposed plant, a safety policy will be formulated with the following
regulations:
To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work;
Page 334
Chapter 9

9.6.5
To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in the
design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and
equipment;
To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees;
To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and clothing,
and to ensure their proper use;
To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their work
which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;
To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making
necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and up
to date knowledge;
To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to employees
in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is given to these
matters;
To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate fire
fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this service;
To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness and
incident involving personal injury or injury to health with a view to taking corrective,
remedial and preventive action;
To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and safety
matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;
To publish / notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language of
employees;
To prepare separate safety rules for each types of occupation / processes involved in
a project; and
To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all
buildings, equipments, work places and operations.
Safety Organization
Construction and Erection Phase
A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of the
safety officer will include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of
workers, giving advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training
programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to
occupational safety and health. He will also be responsible to ensure compliance of
Safety Rules / Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of safety officer by the
project, every contractor, who employs more than 200 workers, will also employ one
safety officer to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions of
contract.
When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers would be in accordance
with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and responsibilities would be as
defined there of.
Page 335
Chapter 9

9.6.6
Safety and Quality Circle

In order to fully develop the capabilities to the employees in identification of hazardous
processes and improving safety and health, safety and quality circles would be
constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from that
area. The circle normally will meet for about an hour every week.
9.6.7
Safety Training
A full fledged training center will be set up at the plant. Safety training would be provided
by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members called from Corporate
office, Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular employees,
limited contractor labors would also be provided safety training. To create safety
awareness safety films would be shown to workers and leaflets would be distributed.
In general some of the precautions and remedial measures which would be stressed to
the workers to prevent fires would be:
Compartmentalization of cable galleries: use of proper sealing techniques of cable
passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and identifying the
area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and manual fire
fighting operations;
Spread of fire in horizontal direction: Checked by providing fire steps for cable shafts;
Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and
interlocks and alarms - for conveyor galleries as an effective protection method.
High standard house keeping to eliminate the causes of fire and regular fire watching
system to strengthen fire prevention and fire fighting; and
Proper fire watching by all concerned.
9.6.8
Occupation Health and Safety - Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures to be followed with respect to occupational health and safety
are detailed in Chapter 5, under Section 5.6.
Page 336
Chapter 9

CHAPTER 10 : PROJECT BENEFITS

10.0 PROJECT BENEFITS
10.1 ECONOMICAL BENEFITS OF NUCLEAR POWER
The development of power sector projects plays a key role in the economic growth of
any country. The important factors affecting the operating economics of power
generating technologies are capital cost, debt equity pattern, and interest during
construction, discount rate and fuel choice. The analysis of economics of the
technologies as on date reveals that nuclear power, in the long term, is an economical
option particularly at locations away from coal-mines. Considering that the component of
fuel cost relative to coal is lower in case of nuclear power, accordingly, the escalation
impact on tariff is also lower. Nuclear power in India has been established to be safe,
reliable, clean & environmental friendly and economically compatible with other sources
of power generation.
Comprehensive capabilities in the area of design, manufacture of equipment,
construction, operation and maintenance have been established indigenously in nuclear
power. Atomic power in India has been established to be safe, reliable and is now
producing electricity at comparable and economic rate. The current average tariff of
NPCIL is Rs. 2.28 per kWh for all the operating plants. In fact, tariff of TAPS-1&2
(operating since the year 1969) is lower than Re 1.00 per kWh.
10.2
LEVELISED LIFETIME COST OF GENERATION

Levelised lifetime costs have been evaluated at 2005-06 price level. The break-even
discount rate for Atomic and coal-fired power, at which levelised costs are equal, works
out to be 7.12% and the corresponding levelised cost Rs.1.78 per kWh. (Internal Report
of Corporate Planning (CP), NPCIL-2005)
It is observed that levelised cost is very sensitive to discount rate. At 5% discount rate
nuclear is cheaper than coal-fired and gas-fired power generation. However, at 10%
discount rate coal-fired power becomes cheaper. The reason for nuclear power
becoming costlier at higher discount rate is its high capital investment compared to that
of coal-fired power plants and gas-fired power plants. However, the contribution of fuel
cost is least in case of nuclear compared to others. This gives advantages to nuclear
generation cost at current prices i.e. when effect of escalation is taken into account.
10.3
EFFECT OF DISTANCE FROM PIT-HEAD ON COST OF GENERATION

The coal price becomes almost double at distance of about 1200 km from pit-head. Here
it may be mentioned that the nearest Coal-field to the APP, Fatehabad site is 1185km
from the nearest coal fields at Patha, Khera in MP. Thus the cost of power generation is
very sensitive to distance from pithead in case of coal-fired power plants. In case of
nuclear, fuel transportation cost is insignificant when compared to that of coal. The
Page 337
Chapter 10

annual fuel requirement for each unit of 4x700 MWe (PHWR) power station is:
Atomic 4x700MWe
125 tonnes/year/Unit thus total for four units 500t/yr. (50

Trucks per annum of 10 tonnes capacity each)
Coal Fired Thermal Power

Plant 2x(2x660) MW:
Sub-critical
Super Critical
69,00,000 Tonnes (5.9 Rakes of Box-n Wagons with

58 wagons with one wagon capacity of 55t)
68,00,000 Tonnes (5.8 Rakes of Box-n Wagons with
58 wagons with one wagon capacity of 55t)
The break-even discount rate for nuclear vs coal-fired power generation has been
worked out at various distances from coal pit-head. The result shows that the nuclear
power is favorable for regions located away from pit-head. About 90% coal reserves in
India are located in Bihar, Jharkhand, Orissa, Madhya Pradesh and West Bengal. Thus
the parts of the country, much away from coal mines, are economically better location for
nuclear.
Further, for illustrative purpose, the costs of electricity generation from nuclear and coalfired power at various locations from coal pit-head for the first eight years of operation
are indicated in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1: Nuclear and Coal-Fired Power - Per Unit Cost in Paisa
Year of
Nuclear*
Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant (km distance from pithead)
Operation
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Cost per unit (Paisa/kwh)
1
260
234
243
251
260
268
276
2
266
241
250
259
268
277
286
3
273
249
258
268
277
286
295
4
281
257
267
276
286
296
305
5
288
265
275
286
296
306
316
6
270
254
264
275
286
297
307
7
279
263
274
285
297
308
319
8
288
272
284
296
308
320
332
* Not affected by distance
It is observed that cost of coal-fired power generation is very sensitive to its location
form pit-head. At very near to pit-head e.g. at about 500 km. Cost of nuclear generation
is only marginally higher than the cost of coal-fired generation (about 1-25 paisa/kwh for
about half the lifetime period). At a distance of about 700-800 km from pithead, nuclear
is cheaper. Therefore, Fatehabad site, which is far away from the coal pit head (1185km)
and on the NW part of the country is ideal site on economical considerations for locating
Atomic Power Plant.
Page 338
Chapter 10

The contribution of fuel cost is least in case of nuclear and this gives long term economic
advantages to Atomic over others. It is to mention that the distance of the coal pit form
Fatehabad site is around 1185 km, which makes the Fatehabad site cost competitive for
establishing Atomic Power Plant.
10.4
ENERGY SECURITY: ADVANTAGE

Energy security for the country is very important issue. After the oil price increase,
France went in a big way for Nuclear Power. Energy security is one of the main reasons
that Japan has also launched a large scale Nuclear Power Program. India has achieved
maturity in design, manufacture, construction and safe operation of nuclear power plants
as well as self sufficiency in the whole nuclear fuel cycle. The required fuel for HAPP will
be fulfilled by indigenous fuel.
10.5
REDUCTION IN GREEN HOUSE GASES (GHGS) EMISSIONS : ADVANTAGE

The comparison of atomic power plant with that of coal based thermal power plant with
respect to fuel use and emissions of conventional pollutants indicate that the nuclear
power plants do not generate conventional pollutants as can be seen from the Fig 10.1.
The radio-nuclides generated from atomic power plants are handled, processed and
disposed off carefully within the limits, which are specified by Atomic Energy Regulatory
Board (AERB) of India.
Various control measures are foreseen to be brought to reduce the emissions of
greenhouse gases, which are an unavoidable product of combustion of all fossil fuels.
Nuclear power and renewable sources contribute very little to atmospheric carbon
dioxide (one of the GHG) or sulfur and nitrogen oxide levels, as shown presented in the
Table 10.2 and comparative emissions and fuel requirements for a 1000 MWe plant are
presented in Fig. 10.1.
Many of the Thermal Power Stations in developed as well as in developing countries are
not meeting the current international control measures for emissions of green house
gases, oxides of Nitrogen and Sulphur. Any measures for implementing these standards
would increase the capital costs of the Thermal Power Plants, making Atomic Power a
clear favorite. Atomic Plants have already adopted the prevailing international standards
on radioactive emissions. The atomic power can play an important role in reducing
global emissions of greenhouse gases. Atomic Power in the world is today avoiding
some 8% additional CO2 emissions that would occur if the electricity produced by
nuclear power were to be produced by fossil fuels.
Table 10.2: Comparative CO2 (GHG) Emissions from Various Energy Sources
Energy Sources
Gram CO2/KWh Ratio (over Atomic Power)
Small Hydro (Earth-filled dam)
6
0.75
Nuclear
8
1
Geo-Thermal
11
1.38
Wind
20
2.50
Tidal
35
4.38
Solar
55
6.88
Page 339
Chapter 10

Energy Sources
Gram CO2/KWh Ratio (over Atomic Power)
Gas
181
22.63
Oil
205
25.5
Coal
295
36.88
Source: Working Material for RCA Workshop on Economic and Financial Aspect of
NPPs-MANILA (August 1997)
Fig. 10.1: Comparison of Waste Production from Nuclear and Thermal Power
Stations
10.6
SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT OF THE REGION

The establishment of Atomic Power Project at Fatehabad, Haryana for Power generation
would provide electricity at a fairly competitive price and result in electrification of
villages, development of irrigation facilities / drinking water supply, development of
industries, overall development of area and consequent indirect and direct job
opportunities which would finally result in improvement in the quality of life of people in
the region and especially in the area around the HAPPs site.
Page 340
Chapter 10

The policy of NPCIL towards social welfare & community development aims at
strengthening the bond between the project / station authorities and the local population
in the vicinity of nuclear power plants. In line with this policy, NPCIL at the existing
stations and projects will carryout a number of community welfare activities in the
following areas:
Education Gyan Gangothri Yojana
Health Arogya Sudha Yojana
Community Welfare
The following action plan will be followed for implementing social and community welfare
measures in area around the HAPP:
NPCIL would contribute in implementing social welfare activities in collaboration with
local Gram Panchayat, Block Development Office etc. for better development of
area.
To minimize strain on existing infrastructure, adequate provision of basic amenities,
viz. education, health, transport etc. would be made considering the needs of
workforce and migrating population.
Sanitation facilities in residential complex and labour colonies would be provided to
ensure better hygiene and health
Regular environmental awareness programs would be organised by NPCIL to
impress upon the surrounding population about the beneficial impacts of the project
and also about the measures being undertaken for environmental safety.
10.7
SOCIO ECONOMIC BENEFITS

Critically analyzing the baseline status of the socioeconomic profile and visualizing the
scenario with the project, the impacts of the project would be varied nature. The
qualitative impacts on socioeconomic environment due to the project is shown in Table
10.3. Due to the project there would be an overall development of the area and job
opportunities, which may improve the quality of life in the region.
SN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Table 10.3: Qualitative Impacts on Socio-economic Environnent

Parameter
Direct
Indirect Reversible Irreversible
Employment
+
+
+
Income
+
+
+
Transport
+
Education
+
Medical facilities
+
Communication
+
Availability of power supply +
+
Sanitation
+
+
Housing
+
Health
+
+
Agriculture
+
+
Cost of living
Page 341
Chapter 10

SN
Parameter
13. Business
14. Per Capita Income
+ Positive Impact
10.8
10.8.1
Direct
Indirect
+
+
+
-Negative Impact
Reversible Irreversible
+
Insignificant
EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL
Skilled and Semi-skilled
Skilled and Semi-skilled employment potential in terms of indirect employment of the
proposed project will be non-marginal and will usually remain widespread across a long
region. The proposed project will cause generation of income and employment
opportunities the ancillaries and service units which will came in the vicinity of the plant,
specifically, in transport and manufacturing sectors. The project is expected to generate
substantial indirect employment in other sectors. Overall assessment of the employment
and income effects indicates that the project has strong positive direct as well as indirect
impact on employment and income generation of the area.
10.8.2
Un-skilled
Unemployment for un-skilled workers is quite common in the study area. The present
project has employment generation potential by way of recruiting local people directly for
different activities of the project, specifically at the construction phase. It is expected that
substantial portion of the investment in this project will trickle down to the local people in
the form of employment and income.
10.8.3
Direct Employment Opportunities with NPCIL

Preference will be given by NPCIL to one person per nuclear family of PAFs in providing
employment in the project in categories as per details given below, subject to the
availability of vacancies and the suitability of person for the employment.
Employment Opportunities with Contractors
A large Number of Contract labours would be required during, construction. This
includes skilled, semi skilled and unskilled workers. Suitable provisions are proposed to
be made in all contracts to the effect that the PAFs shall be given, preference in jobs as
per their suitability and skill under the respective contract. Opportunities available may
be as under.
Assistance in Training and Skill Development
NPCIL proposes to provide assistance, sponsoring, training for skill development to the
wards of PAFs as well as to other meritorious students in the area around the site for
availing various job opportunities. In brief, the following are proposed:
Opportunities for Self Employment
NPCIL, as a policy, provides opportunities to PAFs for self employment during
Page 342
Chapter 10

construction, operation and maintenance phase of the Plant. This also meets the
provisions of National and State R&R Policy. The brief details are given below:
Award of Small Value Contracts to Registered Local Societies
NPCIL promotes formulation of Registered Societies consisting of members from local
including Project affected families. These Societies are proposed to be given small value
contracts for auxiliary services such as Housekeeping, Gardening, Transport service etc.
with the provisions to deploy as much Project affected persons in the project as possible.
These societies will be awarded various contracts like (i) contract for Housekeeping to
maintain the Liaison Office-cum-transit Guest House of HAPP at Fatehabad, (ii) contract
to meet transport service requirement of the Liaison Office at Hisar and (iii) contract for
providing fabricated wooden boxes for storage of borehole logs at the site.
Allotment of Shops in Residential Complex
NPCIL also propose to provide allotment of shops in Shopping Centre of Residential
Complex at HAPP like Milk Vending, Barbershop, Washer man shop, Vegetable
shops, Communication centre, Chemist shop etc. through Registered Societies.
10.9
OTHER INDIRECT BUSINESS OPPORTUNITIES

During the construction phase of APP, various contractors will be executing works at the
site. They will be required to deploy contract labour in different categories depending on
the requirement of skill etc. The strength of the percentage of contract labours will
gradually increase from the beginning and at peak the number may increase to 5000 to
8000. All these labourers will be staying in the labour camp to be established inside the
property boundary of HAPP site. Each of such family will be spending a minimum of
Rs.1500 to 2000 per month to meet their day to day needs on grocery, milk, vegetable
and other such items. In many cases, these needs have to be met locally and as such,
the average expenditure per month on such account will be approximately Rs.1 Crore.
Therefore, this will provide ample business opportunities to the local people around the
site.
10.10 IMPROVEMENTS IN PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The proposed project will bring about improvement in physical infrastructure in the area.
The basic features like, roads, electricity availability, drinking water availability, etc are
also expected to improve. It is expected that a similar trend will follow with the proposed
project at Fatehabad, Haryana.
Page 343
Chapter 10

10.11 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

10.11.1 Education
The local peoples interest towards education will increase due to the expectation of
getting jobs, especially from non-agricultural sources such as the industries (which
are expected to grow in the vicinity of the proposed project.
The project is expected to increase such aspirations by bringing opportunities of
some direct & indirect employment for the local people.
The general awareness towards the importance of education is expected to increase
as a result of the new project.
The project will have positive impact on the level of education of the people of the
study area.
10.11.2 Other Benefits
The electricity generated in plant will result in electrification of villages, development

of irrigation facilities, drinking water supply, development of industries etc
Development in housing, education, medical, health, sanitation, power supply,
electrification and transport in the study area
10.11.3 Industrialisation Around the Proposed Project

The atomic power plant will serve as the nuclei for development of small-scale industries
in the area. These small-scale units usually have input-output linkages with the plant and
township. The demand for spares, assemblies and sub-assemblies by the plant and
township generally met through the supply (of these items) from small-scale units located
nearby.
The present project is likely to accelerate such industrialization through Bubble Effects in
the study area. It is important to note that the small-scale units are usually labour-intensive
and high-priority industries from social point of view.
The proposed project is expected to serve as centre of significant small-scale industrial
economy around it complemented by the services sector. This is expected to play a major
role in the future economic and social development of this area.
10.11.4 Pattern of Demand
The socio-economic questionnaire survey reveals that the respondents spend major
portion of their disposable income on food items. However, the respondents are heavily
influenced by the changing demand pattern of fast growing Indian consumer society.
There has been a tendency among the respondents of allocating higher expenditure on
non-food items although their basket of consumption has only few items other than food.
Page 344
Chapter 10

With the implementation of the project and development of the locality, existing demand
pattern is likely to continue which indicates more importance on consumer goods and
quality products. This will affect the local consumer goods market will grow, thus creating
more income opportunities to the local people
10.11.5 Consumption Behaviour
Presently in the area the major portion of total consumption expenditure goes to meet
the need for food followed by expenditure on clothing, expenditure of social
requirements and expenditure on medical services. The expenditure on education in the
study area is observed to be medium. The proposed project is going to have positive
income effect and consequently, the multiplier effect is expected to lead to an overall
increase in average consumption of the people of the study area.
After the implementation of the proposed project, average family income of the study
area is likely to grow. As income increases, Marginal Propensity to Consume (MPC) will
rise in first three years and then will taper down.
Page 345
Chapter 10

CHAPTER 11 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

11.0
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
11.1
GENERAL
Environmental Management Plan is the formulation, implementation and monitoring of
environmental protection measures during and after commissioning of the project.
Objectives of EMP
Ensure the mitigation measures are implemented
Establish systems and procedures for this purpose
Monitor the effectiveness of mitigation measures and
Take any necessary action when unforeseen impact occur
Components of EMP
1. Careful consideration of the site for its suitability to the proposed activity - described
in Chapter 2, Section 2.4.
2. Potential impact (based on baseline environmental study) & proposed mitigation
measures for different stages of the project - Chapter 5, Impacts and Mitigation
Measures.
3. Installation of state of art pollution / radiation level control equipment and devices as
described in Chapter 6 Technological Mitigation Measures.
4. Various measures proposed to be taken including cost components (Section 7.6.4,
Chapter 7).
5. Adopting a very strong monitoring / analysis programme - Chapter 7,
Environmental Monitoring Programme.
6. Administrative and technical setup for management of environment for:
- Monitoring facilities setup
- For regular and periodic monitoring of indicator parameters.
- Regular analysis of the results of the Environmental Monitoring to ensure that
the indicator parameters are within the stipulated norms vis--vis the adopted
mitigation measures are working efficiently.
- Periodic review by the higher management to see that the monitored indicator
parameters are within the expected range and if not to draw the intervention
of higher management.
- Institutional arrangements proposed with other organizations / Govt. authorities
for effective implementation of environmental measures proposed in the EIA, .
Point number 1 to 5 of the EMP have been covered as referred above, the
organizational setup for environmental monitoring is being presented hereunder under
Section 11.3.
Page 346
Chapter 11

11.2
ORGANIZATION POLICY
The importance of environmental control has been recognised by project proponent at
the organizational level. Environment Management has been declared as one of its
thrust areas of operation in the proposed project and other units. Accordingly NPCIL has
a Corporate Environmental Policy approved by CMD, NPCIL.
The above objective has been intended to be achieved through the following:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Using automation & Computer control to have state of the art technology.
Pollution Monitoring and Control,
Occupational health set up including regular medical monitoring of employees,
A well developed safety management organisation,
Preparation of Emergency / Disaster Control plan and a properly trained group to
meet the emergency situations,
vi) Green belt development inside the plant and surroundings.
vii) Development of awareness in employees and public including student population
towards environmental preservation,
viii) R & D activities in regard to specific pollution problems.
The proposed project has given maximum importance for adopting latest technologies
for keeping the pollution to minimum levels. A separate Environment Survey Laboratory
will be set up with an Environmental Laboratory with latest monitoring instruments.
11.3
ORGANISATIONAL SET UP
11.3.1 Administrative Set Up

At the project, an Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC) will
be formed, which will review the effectiveness of environmental management system of
the project / station in line with ISO-14001 & BS OHSAS 18001 (Occupational Health
and Safety) monitor the effectiveness of Environmental Management Programs (EMP)
implementation at the project.
During operation stage different issues / components involved in environmental
monitoring programme will be looked upon by Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL),
Health Physics Unit, Chemical laboratory, Waste management Unit (WMU), Medical
Unit, Civil Maintenance, Maintenance Unit, Horticulture Unit / Service Maintenance,
Central Material & Management, Industrial Safety and Corporate Social Responsibility
(CSR) Unit / Human Resources Group. All the above mentioned units responsible for
different aspects of monitoring will periodically report the progress of the environmental
monitoring programme to TSU for review and necessary action (if required). The
reporting arrangement of different units responsible for environmental monitoring
programme during construction and operation phase is given under Section 7.6.2,
Chapter 7.
Page 347
Chapter 11

The person responsible for taking care of all environmental issues at Technical services
Unit (TSU) will be of the rank of General Manager (GM). In his day-to-day work, DGM
(Environment) will be assisted by three Managers namely, Manager (Environment) of
Wate Management Unit (WMU) and Station Chemist from Chemical laboratory and
Station Health Physist from Health Physics Unit (HPU). These three Laboratories on
requirement may further include Technicians / Laboratory Assistants. The organizational
chart at the project and the proposed manpower required to undertake the
environmental aspects of the proposed APP is given in Fig. 11.1.
During operation stage, for monitoring of radiation outside exclusion zone is done by
Environmental Survey Laboratory under Health Physics Division, BARC, which reports
to BARC with intimation to Station Director (SD)..
The organizational composition for other departments like Infrastructure Unit
(Department), Health Physics Unit, Medical Unit, Horticulture Unit, Industrial Safety
group and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Unit, responsible for different aspects
of environmental monitoring programme, will be framed before the start of construction /
operation phase of the project. Here only orgainsational set-up looking after
environmental monitoring is being presented, which is responsible for major portion of
environmental monitoring programme (Table 7.3 Part A and Table 7.4).
INCHARGE WASTE
MANAGEMENT UNIT
Group of Scientific
Officers / Scientific
Assistants &
Technician(s)
STATION
CHEMIST
CHEMICAL LAB
Group of Scientific
Assistants &
Technician(s)
STATION
HEALTH
PHYSISTS HPU
Group of Scientific
Assistants &
Technician(s)
Figure No. 11.1: Organisation Chart Proposed for Environmental Monitoring

11.3.2 Environmental Laboratory Set Up and Space
A well-equipped environmental setup has been proposed for Chemical laboratory,
Waste Management Unit and Health Physics Unit laboratory. These laboratories will be
well-equipped environmental setup laboratory inside the plant premises covering an
area of 600m2, with 24 hour water availability to the tune of 3.0 m3/d and electricity
power requirement up to 20 KW. These laboratories will have skilled and trained
personnel for conducting monitoring and analysis.
Page 348
Chapter 11

The personnel deployed in the laboratory will be given training to carry out necessary
environmental monitoring including radiation monitoring as well as analysis. The
recruited officers shall be adequately trained to undertake the environmental
requirements of the proposed plant. The requirement of equipments for carrying out
environmental monitoring and frequency of the use of different equipments for the
proposed plant is given in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1: Monitoring / Analytical Equipments Required
Equipments
Numbers
Required
Air / Stack / Noise Monitoring
1.
PM2.5 & PM10 sampler
3
along with gaseous
sampling assembly
2.
Stack Monitoring Kit
2
(manual)
3.
Portable Flue Gas
2
Analyser for stack
monitoring
SN.
4.
5.
Continuous AAQ
Monitoring Station SO2,
NOx, CO & PM2.5 & PM10
Sound Level Meter
Parameter / Function
Frequency
PM2.5 & PM10; SO2, NOX, O3 NH3,

As, Ni & Benzo-a-pyrine (BaP) sampling
SPM
24 hr continuous;
Once per month
CO%
3
SO2 mg/m
NOX mg/m 3
NO mg/m 3
CXHY PM
Temperature
PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx & CO
Noise Level
As
and
required
Meteorological parameters
Continuous
NH3, CN, F
Regularly
Regularly
Meteorological Monitoring
6.
Automatic
Weather
1
Monitoring Station
Water Monitoring & Chemical Analysis
7.
Ion Analyser with Auto1
titrator
8.
Hot Air Oven
1
9.
Hot Plate
10.
Muffle Furnace
11.
12.
1
1
13.
BOD Incubator
BOD Apparatus, Oxitop
(1 set of 6)
DO Meter
Moisture content & drying of

samples glassware
O&G Iron & various purpose like
boiling & digestion of sample
Digestion at higher temp, up to
1000C
BOD
BOD
BOD
14.
Spectrophotometer
15.
COD
COD,
NO3 N
PO4 - P
COD
Digestion
Once per month
Once per month
Continuous
Regularly
As
and
when
required
Twice in a week
Twice in a week
As
and
required
Regularly
Regularly
Page 349
Chapter 11
when
when

SN.
Frequency
pH
TDS
Heavy metals in water & As & Ni
analysis
Regularly
Regularly
As
and
required
Weighing
Weighing
Regularly
Regularly
Regularly
Regularly
Regularly
21.
22.
23.
Equipments
Numbers
Required
Assembly
pH meter
2
Conductivity Meter
1
AAS along with Graphite
1
furnace,
Hydride
Generator and Cold
Vapour Technique
Digital Micro-Balance
2
Digital
Top
Load
1
Balance (Range 1 to
500g)
Filtration Apparatus
2
Heating mental
3
Refrigerator
2
24.
Fuming Chamber
SS / MLSS
Distillation
Preservation of chemicals and
samples
For exhaust
25.
26.
Water Bath
Vacuum pump
2
2
Evaporation of sample
Hardness alkalinity etc.
27.
Turbidity Meter
Turbidity
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
28.
Filter
Papers,
Glassware,
Plastic
wares, Chemicals
29. High
Volume
Air
samplers
30. Ashing equipment
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
Portable survey meter

Contamination Monitors
(betagamma & alpha)
Scintillometer
Alpha counting system
Beta counting system
Low
beta counting
system
Gas
proportional
counting system
Liquid
scintillation
counting system
Gamma
Ray
Spectrometer - NaI (Tl)
Gamma
Ray
Spectrometer - HpGe
Whole body counter
As
and
when
required
As when required
As
and
when
required
As
and
when
required
In Lot
4
2
Sample collection for radiation

monitoring
Sample processing for radiation
monitoring / analysis
Radiation monitoring
-do-
Regularly
Regularly
2
1
1
1
-do-do-do-do-
Regularly
Regularly
Regularly
Regularly
-do-
Regularly
-do-
Regularly
-do-
Regularly
-do-
Regularly
-do-
Regularly
Regularly
Regularly
Page 350
Chapter 11
when

SN.
42.
43.
44.
Equipments
Numbers
Required
Instrumented
1
Meteorological tower
Portable
Diesel
1
Generator set
Frequency
-do-
Regularly
-do-
Regularly
Filter
Papers,
Glassware,
Plastic
wares, Chemicals
-do-
Regularly
In Lot
11.3.3 Functioning
Environmental monitoring programme and its reporting has been designed to provide a
close watch on the surrounding environment and provide early warnings of any adverse
changes that may be related to some dimension of the plants operations.
The Environmental Survey Laboratory (ESL) of BARC and Waste Management Unit
(WMU), Chemical Laboratory and Health Physics Unit (HPU) will look after the major
portion of the environmental aspects, carry out day to day environmental monitoring /
inspection requirements and maintain records. These laboratories will look after the
radiation monitoring, complete air monitoring, noise level monitoring, special monitoring
on water and air, effluent, special surveys and impact assessment and solid waste
management. The over all responsibility matrix of monitoring different aspects of
environmental monitoring plan are given in Table 7.3A and 7.4, Chapter 7.0. Part or
total of the environmental monitoring programme will be carried out through external
agencies on a contract basis. However, casual labourers etc. will be employed for
plantation, drain cleaning etc as and when required.
The TSU shall frequently analyse the data and periodically assess the progress of the
EMP.
11.4
IMPLEMENTATION ARRANGEMENT
11.4.1 Institutional Implementation Arrangements

The project proponent is responsible for implementation of all the mitigation and
management measures suggested in Environmental Monitoring Programme. The
Technical Services Unit will look after all environmental related matters of the plant. In
addition an Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC) at the
higher Management Level will be set up for the smooth implementation of Environment
Management Plan. EMARC will review the effectiveness of environmental management
system of the project / station in line with ISO-14001 & BS OHSAS 18000 (Occupational
Health and Safety) monitor the effectiveness of Environmental Management Programs
(EMP) implementation at the project.
Page 351
Chapter 11

The EMARC will consist of heads of different sections of the project. The Project Director
/ Station Director will be overall In-charge of the Project / Station. The role of the EMARC
would be to review the implementation of all environment related matters. TSU and other
units of the plant looking after different aspects of environmental monitoring programme,
will report all the environmental matters to PD / SD as per the reporting schedule on
prescribed formats. The EMARC will review the reported activity from time to time for
smooth implementation of Environmental Mitigation and Management measures and will
suggest necessary actions if required.
For successful implementation of the environmental management plan other agencies of
the State may also be involved, if required (for regulatory requirement or technical
support). The coordinating agencies, which may be involved for specific environmental
related activities, are given in Table 11.2.
Table 11.2: List of Coordinating Agencies, which may be involved for specific
Environmental Activities
State Level Agency
SFD
District Level
Project Area: Plantation Programme
Study Area: Air, noise, water quality, soil,
waste water discharge quality monitoring.
Study Area: CSR Activities
Project Area: Stack monitoring, work-zone
noise, effluents from outlet of STP.
Project Area: Solid / Hazardous Waste
Disposal
Project Area: Radiation Monitoring &
Human Health
Study Area / Project Area Interface: Road
safety measures
DFO
SPCB
Chairman
RO
DOH
Chief Engineer
Ex. Engineer
DDA
Chief Engineer
Ex. Engineer
Index:
SFD
SPCB
DOH
DDA
DFO
RO
State Forest Department

State Pollution Control Board
Department of Health
District Development Authority
Divisional Forest Officer
Regional Officer State Pollution Control Board
Local NGOs will also be identified at the district and block level to provide help and
advice for implementation of EMP especially on matters related to community
development programmes.
11.4.2 Co-ordination with Other Departments
The Technical services Unit (TSU) will also co-ordinate with other departments of HAPP
like Occupational Health, Safety Management, Project Engineering, Horticulture and
Page 352
Chapter 11

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Unit, Water Supply Department etc. and also do
the liaison work with external agencies like State Pollution Control Board..
11.4.3 Interaction with State Pollution Control Board
TSU shall be in regular touch with SPCB and shall send them quarterly progress report
on EMP in the prescribed format, as per the prevailing practice of the Board. Any new
regulations considered by State Pollution Control Board / Central Pollution Control Board
for the Industry shall be taken care of by responsible units.
11.4.4 Training
The different laboratories and departments who would be responsible for the
implementation of the EMP, needs to be trained on the effective implementation of the
environmental issues. To ensure the success of the implementation set up proposed,
there is a high requirement of training and skill up-gradation. For the proposed project,
additional training facilities will be developed for environmental control. For proper
implementation of the EMP, the officials responsible for EMP implementation will be
trained accordingly.
To achieve the overall objective of pollution control it is essential not only to provide
latest pollution control and monitoring systems but also to provide trained man power
resources to operate and maintain the same. So far, the practice with many plants is to
utilize the plant operations and maintenance crew for operation of systems. This has
shown adverse results due to lack of specialized knowledge in addition to priority
selection. Therefore apart from the different laboratories involved, specific training will be
provided to personnel handling the operation and maintenance of different pollution /
radiation control equipments. In-plant training facilities will be developed for
environmental control. Specialised courses at various Research / Educational institutes
will be organised.
The training will be given to employees to cover the following fields:
Awareness of pollution control and environmental protection to all.
Operation and maintenance of specialised pollution / radiation control equipment.
Field monitoring, maintenance and calibration of pollution / radiation monitoring
instruments.
Laboratory testing of pollutants / radiation.
Repair of pollution monitoring instruments.
Occupational health/safety.
Disaster management.
Environmental management.
Afforestation / plantation and post care of plants.
Knowledge of norms, regulations and procedures.
Risk assessment and Disaster Management.
Page 353
Chapter 11

CHAPTER 12 : SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

12.0
SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

Executive summary of the entire EIA study is being submitted as a separate report.
However in this chapter the brief summary and conclusion of the study is being
highlighted.
In the design phase of the Project Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) was done
to assess the possible impacts of the proposed APP. In the plant design itself latest
state of art technology has been envisaged so as to achieve the desired air emissions
and noise levels from plant operation levels and the effluent quality at the outlet below
statutory norms. Further, maximum re-use and re-utilisation of generated solid waste
has been envisaged.
Primary and secondary data were used to assess the environmental impacts of the
proposed project. The potential environmental impacts were assessed in a
comprehensive manner. All the potential environmental impacts associated with
different phases (i.e, during design or pre-construction, construction and operation) of
the Project were assessed.
The EIA report has thoroughly assessed all the potential environmental impacts
associated with the project. The environmental impacts identified by the study are
manageable. The implementation of environmental mitigation measurers
recommended in the report will bring the anticipated impacts to minimum.
Site specific and practically suitable mitigation measures are recommended to mitigate
the impacts. Further, a suitable monitoring plan has been designed to monitor the
effectiveness of envisaged mitigation measures during the operation phase.
The introduction of state of art technology (including the technological mitigation
measures) during the design has limited the environmental impacts related with the
Project. The implementation and monitoring of effectiveness of the environmental
mitigation measures during the operation phase will be assigned to the Technical
Services Unit (TSU) of the project. An Environmental Management Apex Review
Committee (EMARC), comprising of senior management level officers will periodically
assess and monitor the implementation of mitigation measures, and will tackle the
management bottle necks of implementation of mitigation measures and
environmental monitoring programme.
It is concluded that with the implementation of EMP, project will not have any adverse
impact on the environment. Moreover the project will provide green house gases free
electricity to the state of Harayana in particular and to the country in general and also
will provide direct and indirect employment opportunities to the people of the
area/region and uplift their socio-ecomonic status.
Page 354
Chapter 12

CHAPTER 13 : DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT

13.0
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT
The EIA report has been prepared by MECON Limited, a Public Sector undertaking
under the Ministry of Steel Government of India, is a premier multi disciplinary planning,
design, engineering and consultancy organisation in the country in the field of ferrous,
non-ferrous, thermal, petrochemical, defense and other related projects and in the field
of environment. MECON's Head Office is at Ranchi and site offices in Bangalore, New
Delhi, Bhubenashwar, Pune, Vyzak, Bhailai, Durgapur, Raurkela, Bokaro, and many
other places in the country. The Environmental Engineering Division of MECON has
provided services for more than 200 numbers of Environmental projects.
MECONs Environmental Engineering Division is a multi-disciplinary group of engineers,
specialists and scientists whose services are backed up by a sophisticated
Environmental Engineering Laboratory recognized by Ministry of Environment & Forest
and several State Pollution Control Boards. There are specialists in the field of
hydrogeology, geology, ecology, forestry, microbiology, biotechnology, audit & socio
economics and engineers from different disciplines. MECON has been preparing
regularly EIA / EMP reports for different projects. MECON also renders its services for
rehabilitation action plan for affected people, inspection and audit including
environmental audit, etc.
National Accreditation Board for Education and Training (NABET) - under the
Accreditation Scheme for EIA Consultant Organisations has accredited MECON Limited
as EIA consultant for 16 EIA Sectors, vide NABET notification dated 24.03.11. The list of
sectors for which the accreditation has been accorded by NABET is given in Table 13.1.
The same can be referred from the NABET website www.qcin.org/nabet/about.php ,
by following the link - EIA Accreditation Scheme Accreditation Register Accredited
Consultant - List of Accredited Consultants with Scope (Rev. 02) dated 18th
August 2011.. The present EIA study pertains to an Atomic Power Project (APP),
which falls under the category Nuclear power projects and processing of nuclear
fuel.
Table 13.1: List of Sectors for which NABET has given Accreditation
Accreditation for
SN. Sector Details
Category
of
Project
1. Mining of minerals including Opencast / Underground mining
A
2. Only Offshore oil and gas exploration, development & production
A
3. River Valley, Hydel, Drainage and Irrigation projects
A
4. Thermal Power Plants
A
5. Coal washeries
A
6. Mineral beneficiation including pelletisation
A
7. Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non ferrous) both primary and A
secondary
Page 355
Chapter 13

SN. Sector Details
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Accreditation for
Category
of
Project
Cement plants
A
Coke oven plants
A
Induction/arc
furnaces/cupola
furnaces/submerged
arc A
furnace/crucible furnace/re-heating furnace of capacity more than
5Tonne per heat.
Oil & gas transportation pipeline (crude and refinery/ petrochemical
A
products), passing through national parks/ sanctuaries/coral reefs /
ecologically sensitive areas including LNG terminal
All ship breaking yards including ship breaking units
A
Industrial estates/ parks/ complexes/areas, export processing Zones A
(EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech Parks, Leather
Complexes
Ports, harbours, jetties, marine terminals, break waters and dredging A
Highways, railways, transport terminus mass rapid transport
systems.
Common Municipal Solid Waste Management Facility (CMSWMF)
A
For Nuclear power projects and processing of nuclear fuel sector MECONs application
along with other consultants are still pending at NABET. However, till date NABET has
not cleared any application related to nuclear sector.
Page 356
Chapter 13

EIA - PHWR Atomic Power Project

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

EIA - PHWR Atomic Power Project

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

VOLUME I : MAIN REPORT

Signature of the applicant* with

Given under the seal of organization on

Declaration by Experts Contributing to the EIA for Haryana Atomic Power

Dr. Shailendra K. Singh

Signature & Date:

November 2010 till date.

Ph: 9431767527; e-mail: envenggranchi@meconlimited.co.in

Functional Area Experts

March 2011 Sept 2011

Dr. S.C. Jain

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

Dr. S.K. Singh

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

Dr. Vikas Kumar

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

March 2011 Sept 2011

Declaration by the Accredited Consultant Organization

Name: Dr. Vikas Kumar

NABET/EIA/1013/031 dated, Oct., 01, 2010

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

Aquatic Sampling Locations

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT

Yearly Environmental Monitoring Plan for Performance Indicators at

2012 MECON Limited. All rights reserved

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4 X 700 MW PHWR HARYANA ATOMIC POWER PROJECT